Factory Workshop Manual
Make
Ford
Model
Escape 2wd
Engine and year
V6-3.0L (2009)
Please navigate through the PDF using the options
provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar.
This manual was submitted by
Anonymous
Date
1st January 2018
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 22
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 23
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 28
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 29
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To
'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 39
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 40
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 45
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 46
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 47
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 50
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 51
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM)
C240A Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 52
C240A Part 2
C240B
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 53
C240C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Communications Control Module: Procedures
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Programming
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information
System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually
entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level.
- The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor
(CIP) software levels.
8. The scan tool displays the following information:
- Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM
- Installed date: date the APIM was installed
- Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle
- HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number
- Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled
- S/N: APIM serial number
- Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 56
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected
- Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision
- VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection
- CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software
level, if desired.
10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB
port, or exit the OASIS screen.
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Systems Without Navigation
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after step
3 by turning the ACM off.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 57
5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off.
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval
- Vehicles Without Navigation
1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode.
2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously.
- The Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
displays on the screen.
3. Record the SDARS module ESN.
4. Turn the audio system off.
Navigation Audio System
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this
step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to
complete on its own.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 58
5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu:
6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL
DIAGNOSTICS" menu.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 59
Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Audio Control Module (ACM)
All Except Navigation
Navigation
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 60
Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool.
2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel.
3. Remove the 4 ACM screws.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation).
- To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation).
Navigation
4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors.
All except navigation
5. If equipped, remove the 4 screws and the ACM side support brackets.
6. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM.
Remove the 2 ACM brackets.
All vehicles
7. Remove the ACM.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the ACM.
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software and hardware level when a new APIM is being
installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being
replaced.
Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer
to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory
Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 61
2. Remove the floor console.
3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical
connector.
4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM.
- Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Floor Console Trim Panels
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port and Cable
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 62
NOTE: The original equipment Universal Serial Bus (USB) port and cable is part of the wiring
harness. It can only be serviced by overlaying a new USB port and cable.
1. Remove the transmission selector level bezel by pulling straight up.
2. NOTE: Open the floor console storage bin door.
Remove the floor console finish panel by pulling straight up.
- Disconnect the electrical connector, if necessary.
3. Remove the center instrument panel lower panel by pulling straight back.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Remove the USB cable and port.
- Disconnect the cable from the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM).
- Cut the USB port and cable ends and secure them to prevent NVH concerns.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Secure the new USB port and cable, as necessary, to prevent NVH concerns.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's
Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 71
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 72
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 77
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 78
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 79
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 80
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 81
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 82
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 83
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 84
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 85
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 86
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 87
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 93
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 94
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 99
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 100
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 101
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 102
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 103
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 104
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 105
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 106
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 107
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 108
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 109
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade
TSB 09-11-8
06/15/09
SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE
SOFTWARE
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911
assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a
warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS)
website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates:
^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009
^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009
^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008
^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008
^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ
Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health
Report features and do not require updating.
To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC
911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by
pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box
indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded.
The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface
module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM).
The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles
operated within the US and Canada.
Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as
bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure
the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the
device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure
proper functionality before continuing.
Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer
must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the
latest software version.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 114
For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states
related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional
Technician Society (PTS) website.
1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator
vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and
reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before
updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete.
2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
4. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session.
6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher.
7. Close the IDS tool.
8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the go button.
9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab.
10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM.
NOTE
TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM
THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING
TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON
THE SYNC MENU.
12. Set ignition to off.
13. Open and close driver side door.
14. Set ignition to on.
15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu.
16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows.
17. Clear all DTC's on all modules.
18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac,
Expedition, or Navigator vehicles.
Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu.
2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display.
3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display.
4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display.
5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display.
Non Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on steering wheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 115
2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed.
Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if
that application is desired.
NOTE
IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911
ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE
V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact
Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade
TSB 09-11-8
06/15/09
SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE
SOFTWARE
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911
assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a
warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS)
website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates:
^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009
^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009
^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008
^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008
^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ
Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health
Report features and do not require updating.
To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC
911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by
pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box
indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded.
The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface
module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM).
The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles
operated within the US and Canada.
Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as
bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure
the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the
device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure
proper functionality before continuing.
Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer
must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the
latest software version.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact
Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 121
For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states
related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional
Technician Society (PTS) website.
1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator
vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and
reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before
updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete.
2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
4. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session.
6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher.
7. Close the IDS tool.
8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the go button.
9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab.
10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM.
NOTE
TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM
THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING
TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON
THE SYNC MENU.
12. Set ignition to off.
13. Open and close driver side door.
14. Set ignition to on.
15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu.
16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows.
17. Clear all DTC's on all modules.
18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac,
Expedition, or Navigator vehicles.
Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu.
2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display.
3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display.
4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display.
5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display.
Non Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on steering wheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact
Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 122
2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed.
Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if
that application is desired.
NOTE
IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911
ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE
V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice
In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD
Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time
Displays Twice In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global
Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global
Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 144
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global
Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 145
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 151
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 152
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Navigation Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 161
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 162
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: >
09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: >
09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 168
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: >
09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 169
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 173
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 174
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being
installed.
Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Disengage the clips.
- Remove the parking aid speaker.
4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Remove the 2 screws.
- Remove the PAM.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the PAM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 179
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 180
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Relay, Passenger > Page 185
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 188
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 191
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 192
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 193
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 197
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration
Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal
Vibration
TSB 09-20-3
10/19/09
ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12
MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in
the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test
at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time
self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now
available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change
the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h).
ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher.
This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained
at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2C219 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates
Pedal Vibration
TSB 09-20-3
10/19/09
ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12
MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in
the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test
at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time
self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now
available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change
the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h).
ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher.
This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained
at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2C219 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 212
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 213
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 214
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 215
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicles shown, hybrid vehicles similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the Hydraulic Control
Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly.
All vehicles
1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes
/ Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair.
Non-hybrid vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 216
2. Remove the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic
Control Unit (HCU) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
All vehicles
5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
7. Configure the ABS module.
8. Calibrate the ABS module.
- For non-hybrid vehicles, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence following the scan tool
directions.
- For hybrid vehicles, carry out the Multi-Calibration routine following the scan tool directions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 222
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 223
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 226
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 227
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 228
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 229
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 230
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 235
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 236
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 240
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Relay (A/CCR)
Note: The PCM parameter identifiers (PIDs) wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff (WAC) and
wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WAC_F) are used to monitor the A/CCR output.
The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch
or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives
a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the
communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that
are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C
operation and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position),
the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/CCR.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 241
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 242
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC > Page 247
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-DATC
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 250
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 251
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-EMTC
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 252
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: >
08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From
Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles
From Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 271
Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 272
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 276
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 277
Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the center console finish panel.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 282
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 283
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 286
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 287
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 288
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 289
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 290
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 295
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE
devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful
configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a
successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 299
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of
these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step will clear DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This will make sure that all displays are visible
under all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 303
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 308
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 309
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 310
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 311
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 312
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 315
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 316
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 317
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 318
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 319
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 320
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 321
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 322
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 323
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 326
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 327
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 328
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
Torque-Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Overview
The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the
powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle
opening and engine torque.
Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft
timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions.
Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of torque-based ETC are:
- eliminate cruise control actuators
- eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve
- better airflow range
- packaging (no cable)
- more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster
when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and
may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics:
- The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires).
- There are two designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore
parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design
has a separate motor housing.
- An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The
default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This
hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal
return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also two throttle
position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased
monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing
voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage).
The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle
angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional
information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control
Components.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 334
allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules
while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management:
a - ETC illuminates or displays a message on the message center immediately; MIL illuminates
after 2 driving cycles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 335
ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management:
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation:
a - Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to
register a concern.
APP and TP Sensor Inputs
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 336
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check:
Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to
register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional
DTC information.
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check:
a - Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM, TP inconsistent with requested throttle plate position. Monitor execution is continuous.
Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional DTC information.
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check:
a - Note: For all DTCs, in addition to the MIL, the powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) is on for
the concern that caused the FMEM action. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection
duration is less than 5 seconds to register a concern.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's
Set
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 09-19-5
10/05/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL
LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built
between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772,
P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E
(SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh
engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The
Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is:
a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14.
b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps.
2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the
transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With
12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts > Page 353
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
12A650 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 09-19-5
10/05/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL
LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built
between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772,
P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E
(SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh
engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The
Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is:
a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14.
b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps.
2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the
transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With
12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts > Page 371
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
12A650 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh
Upshifts/Downshifts
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh
Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
376
Engine Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
377
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
378
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
379
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
380
Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
381
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
382
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
383
Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
384
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
385
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
Description
The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM).
The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle,
and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or
P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware
or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure
properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle
ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID
Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items
used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification
number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block is displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to
reset the VID block.
On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction
should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be
accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool.
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan
tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details.
Neutral Profile Correction
In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in
non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is
reset.
Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should
also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been
completed.
To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter
identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has
been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any
misfire DTCs.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two
procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM,
and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored
data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove
and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter
programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all
parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile
equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF
may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center
for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center
only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for
As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the
Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search
function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data.
For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the
PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate
the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures >
Page 388
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures >
Page 389
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Removal
1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a
Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS).
Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt.
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM.
5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged.
Installation
1. Install the PCM cowl seal.
2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures >
Page 390
4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt.
5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 394
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 395
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank.
Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur.
Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 403
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 407
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 408
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 413
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 414
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 415
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 416
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 417
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Removal
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: When installing a new Restraints Control Module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out
Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option
that is disabled. The RCM and Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) must be configured
correctly to fully support 911 assist functionality.
1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 418
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
in the General Procedures.
3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts.
4. Remove the RCM access cover.
- Remove the scrivet.
- Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover.
5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM.
Installation
1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 419
3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM
on an angle can cause bad electrical
connections and damage components.
Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM.
- NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light
pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure.
With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle
audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt.
4. Connect the RCM electrical connector.
- Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the
RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in.
6. Install the RCM access cover.
- Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace.
- Install the scrivet.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 420
7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws.
8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module
Installation (PMI).
10. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 424
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 429
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 430
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 436
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 437
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 438
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 439
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 440
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 445
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 446
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 453
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 454
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 455
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 458
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 459
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 460
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 461
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid
sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require
rear bumper cover removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper cover.
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s).
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 465
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 466
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Console Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 475
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 478
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 479
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 480
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 481
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior
Door Handle - Front.
2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 485
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 486
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 487
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 488
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 489
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Exterior Mirror Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH sail panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 493
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 494
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 495
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 496
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 497
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 498
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch
Liftgate Release Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 504
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 509
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 510
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 511
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch
Seat Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Body
and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the recliner handle cover.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
3. Remove the outboard side shield.
- Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the knob and seat control switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 515
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 516
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 517
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 521
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded
Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN
PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded
Liftgate Opening > Page 530
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN
PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 536
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 09-20-3 >
Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates
Pedal Vibration
TSB 09-20-3
10/19/09
ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12
MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in
the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test
at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time
self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now
available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change
the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h).
ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher.
This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained
at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2C219 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 547
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 548
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor
Block > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 556
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 560
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 561
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 565
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 566
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Stability/Traction Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel.
2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 >
Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 >
Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 575
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: >
09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front
Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: >
09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 581
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 584
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 585
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 586
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 589
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 590
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 591
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are
located at right angles to the sensor wire.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 594
4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer.
5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 595
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at
right angles to the sensor wire.
3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer.
5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 596
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 597
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Removal
1. Remove the front halfshaft.
2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 598
1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the
previous illustration.
2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 599
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Removal and Installation
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut.
- To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fan Speed Sensor (FSS)
The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a
waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a
relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch
speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the
frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan
clutch. For additional information on the cooling fan clutch, refer to the Cooling Fan Clutch.
Cooling Fan Clutch with Fan Speed Sensor (FSS)
Cooling Fan Clutch with FSS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 608
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 612
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 613
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant
temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a
fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern
such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to
major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy,
the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For
additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Typical CHT Sensor
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 614
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced.
1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations > Page 619
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 622
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake
Deactivator Switch
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch
The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A
normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is
not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is
removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used
for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be
disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not
changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch
Speed Control Switch
Escape and Mariner shown, Hybrid similar
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch > Page 630
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn.
3. Remove the speed control deactivator switch.
4. NOTE: When installing the speed control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to
the correct position. Do not pull up or push down
on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the speed control deactivator switch allows for
one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 635
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 636
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing.
Remove the engine oil filter.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees.
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
- To install, tighten to 14 Nm (124 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch,
Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control
gains and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch
HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 644
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 645
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 649
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 650
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Speed Control
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the blower motor speed control.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 654
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 655
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity
Sensor
In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown. In-vehicle temperature sensor similar.
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel
enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature
sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is
positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument
cluster finish panel could result.
Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow
access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and
humidity sensor.
3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor
electrical connector.
4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing.
5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel.
6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing
for installation. When installing the venturi, it
must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to
indicated that it is correctly attached.
Remove the venturi (if needed).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 658
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper.
2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 662
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary
evaporator core on hybrid vehicles.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this
thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The
HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor
and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air
temperature.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and
prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the
A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to
cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls
below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the
evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels.
On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be
closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature
below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows
continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator
core to warm to acceptable levels.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core
housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning > Page 665
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor
The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a
thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a
thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the
temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN
also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the
sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET
sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects.
The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling and improve defrost/demist
performance.
Note: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were
calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts.
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 666
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away
from the evaporator discharge air temperature
sensor.
3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector.
4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 670
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling
Switch
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C
cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of
the A/C cycling switch, refer to the Climate Control System Air Conditioning System Overview.
Also, refer to the applicable Wiring Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring.
If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate.
For additional information, refer to wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff (WAC).
Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is
requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 673
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) High
Pressure Switch
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch
The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high
pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled for electric fan
applications, or single function for all others.
For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a
predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from
rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve.
For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high
speed fan to help reduce the pressure.
For additional information, refer to the Climate Control System, Air Conditioning System Overview
or the Wiring Diagrams.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 674
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP)
Transducer Sensor
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor
The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The
ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C
pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control.
A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage Vs Pressure Chart
Typical ACP Transducer Sensor
Typical ACP Transducer Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Solar Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 680
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 681
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 682
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 683
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 684
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 685
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 686
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 687
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 688
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 689
Solar Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 690
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 691
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 692
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 693
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 694
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 695
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 696
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 697
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 698
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 699
Solar Sensor: Description and Operation
SOLAR AMPLIFIER (SUNLOAD SENSOR)
The solar amplifier (dual-channel sunload sensor), supplies information to the DATC module
indicating LH side and RH side sunload. The sunload senor is capable of sensing the intensity and
direction of the solar rediation entering the cabin of the car through the windshield for comfort of the
driver and front passenger. The smart junction box processes this information to control the air
conditioning system. For information on the location and service of the sunload sensor. See:
Locations Diagrams By Number, Diagram set 55-004 Auto Climate Control System.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 700
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel.
2. Disconnect the connector.
3. Remove the A/C sunload sensor from the instrument panel upper finish panel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC) finish panel.
2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from
behind.
Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 708
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Engine Control Components
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is
located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the
engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a
check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 713
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
Engine Control Components
Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check
valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting
concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low
tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 716
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 717
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 718
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 719
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 723
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 724
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 730
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 733
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 734
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Light Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 738
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 739
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Reversing Lamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector.
2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 >
ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 >
Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC
C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 753
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 754
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 755
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 756
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
Stoplamp Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch
otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur.
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp
switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Console Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 763
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 767
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 770
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 771
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 772
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 773
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 777
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 778
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 779
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 780
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
Headlamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel.
2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 787
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 791
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 792
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 793
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 799
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 800
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a
concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred
from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There
are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six
circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits
and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit
used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is
converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these
degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer
to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the
indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM
receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is
incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present
with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal
return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and
the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared
with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB)
throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle
Control Module/Description and Operation.
3-Track APP Sensor
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 804
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 805
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM
calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This
input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque
converter clutch (TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals.
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 806
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 807
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1 > Page 812
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1 > Page 815
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 816
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 817
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 824
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
828
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
829
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has
39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring
the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
830
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
831
4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
835
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
836
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant
temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a
fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern
such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to
major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy,
the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For
additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Typical CHT Sensor
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
837
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced.
1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Level Input (FLI)
The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type
FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 843
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 844
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 845
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 846
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 847
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Level Sender
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module
See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Fuel Pump/Service and Repair/Fuel Pump Module.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the locking tabs and remove the fuel level sender
from the FP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 848
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
852
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
853
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
857
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
858
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air
temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are two types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use two IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard
OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the
intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency.
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type
MAF Sensor
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type
MAF sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 863
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 866
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 867
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 868
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal
Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Engine block-mounted KS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 869
3. Remove the lower intake manifold.
4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector.
5. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Installation
Engine block-mounted KS
1. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2. Connect the KS electrical connector.
3. Install the lower intake manifold.
Cylinder head-mounted KS
4. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Connect the KS electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 873
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 874
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the
MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 875
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the MAP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
- When installing the sensor, if the bolt fails to hold specified torque, relocate the sensor and retain,
using the auxiliary bolt hole in the upper intake manifold.
3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control
gains and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 883
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 884
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 885
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 888
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 889
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 890
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Engine Control Components
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 893
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Engine Control Components
Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 896
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Removal and Installation
LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the LH HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench
Adapter Formulas in the Appendix
.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
RH HO2S
5. Disconnect the RH HO2S electrical connector.
6. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 897
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the RH HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench
Adapter Formulas in the Appendix
.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
All HO2S
7. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 898
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench
Adapter Formulas in the Appendix
.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 903
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during
parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations > Page 907
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle
Position Sensor
Engine Control Components
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant
ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position
sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second
signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position
sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is
1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit
and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits
used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle
Control Module/Description and Operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 913
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
Engine Control Components
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the
PCM from the TP. These are:
- closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
6F35
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 917
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 918
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 919
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 920
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
8. Position the main control cover in place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 921
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 922
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment.
3.0L Engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 923
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Engine Control Components
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is
generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 928
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Engine Control Components
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the
sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations >
Page 933
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 938
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 939
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a
concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred
from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There
are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six
circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits
and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit
used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is
converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these
degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer
to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the
indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM
receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is
incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present
with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal
return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and
the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared
with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB)
throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle
Control Module/Description and Operation.
3-Track APP Sensor
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 943
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 944
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM
calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This
input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque
converter clutch (TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals.
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 945
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 946
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
950
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 954
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 958
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 959
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is
to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel cone held in place by a magnet.
When a sharp impact occurs, the cone breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and
strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel
pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the
Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch.
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 960
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel.
2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle
Position Sensor
Engine Control Components
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant
ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position
sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second
signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position
sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is
1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit
and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits
used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle
Control Module/Description and Operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 966
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
Engine Control Components
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the
PCM from the TP. These are:
- closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor
1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor
1 > Page 972
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
1 > Page 975
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 976
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 977
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 981
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 982
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has
39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring
the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 983
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 984
4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder > Page 994
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 1000
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 1001
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 1006
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 1009
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1010
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1011
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal
Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Engine block-mounted KS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1012
3. Remove the lower intake manifold.
4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector.
5. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Installation
Engine block-mounted KS
1. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2. Connect the KS electrical connector.
3. Install the lower intake manifold.
Cylinder head-mounted KS
4. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Connect the KS electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1017
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1022
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1023
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1024
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1025
Impact Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1026
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1027
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1028
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1029
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1030
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1031
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Front Impact Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 1034
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 1035
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 1036
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
Front Impact Severity Sensor
Removal and Installation
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
in the General Procedures.
2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are
clean and free of foreign material.
Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 1039
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
NOTE: RH shown, LH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free
of foreign material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 1040
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign
material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 1045
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 1048
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog.
Belt Tension Sensor (BTS)
The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front
passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1055
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1058
Removal
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an
assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system,
OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit
(seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an
assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM
electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to
the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the
wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat
cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1059
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad.
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as
an assembly with the bladder.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1060
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan.
4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
- To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest.
10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1061
12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset.
14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
16. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1062
sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS
fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1063
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1064
Removal
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components (seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are
serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new
OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system
service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and Occupant Classification
System Module (OCSM)) must be installed as an assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit,
inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the
OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM electrical
connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat
wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left
unplugged and secured by a tie strap.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused.
Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the
seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1065
6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan.
8. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1066
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical
connector is not used.
NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan.
1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
3. Install the rivets.
4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1067
- To aid in installation, recline the seat.
6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside.
8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
12. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1068
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS.
The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete
inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder,
OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part
OCS only).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1072
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1073
Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Seat Position Sensor
NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the driver seat.
2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip.
Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat
position sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1079
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1080
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1081
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 1084
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch
Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch
Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 1094
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 1100
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1101
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 1108
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during
parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and
Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1114
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1115
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire
Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive.
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Column Shift)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Floor Shift)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
6F35
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1127
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1128
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1129
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1130
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
8. Position the main control cover in place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1131
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1132
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment.
3.0L Engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1133
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
TSB 09-8-6
05/04/09
6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706,
P0707, P1702
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before
10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707,
P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and
transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND
CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED
(TSS) SENSOR.
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9.
2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS
connector from the solenoid body lead frame.
3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow
WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor
wires during the installation of the main control.
4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM,
Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr.
2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time
To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C
(Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 1142
7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H557 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts > Page 1148
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
TSB 09-8-6
05/04/09
6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706,
P0707, P1702
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before
10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707,
P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and
transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND
CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED
(TSS) SENSOR.
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9.
2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS
connector from the solenoid body lead frame.
3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow
WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor
wires during the installation of the main control.
4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM,
Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr.
2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time
To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C
(Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 1153
7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H557 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts > Page 1159
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1160
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1161
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
6F35
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS
sensor.
Installation
1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor > Page 1164
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
6F35
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor > Page 1165
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor > Page 1166
11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor > Page 1167
Installation
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And
Assembly Of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly,
continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor > Page 1168
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor > Page 1169
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor > Page 1170
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1180
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1181
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1182
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 1185
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 1186
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 1187
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1190
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1191
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1192
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1193
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1194
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1195
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
Window Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar.
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1200
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1201
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1202
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1203
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1204
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Wiper Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1208
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1209
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1210
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1211
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1212
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride
Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation
Alignment: Specifications Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance
Weight, and Tire Inflation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride
Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 1218
Alignment: Specifications Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride
Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 1219
Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications
Alignment Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride
Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 1220
Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber
Alignment: Description and Operation Camber
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative and Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1223
Alignment: Description and Operation Caster
Wheel Alignment Angles
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest
caster.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1224
Alignment: Description and Operation Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Wheel Alignment Angles
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1225
Alignment: Description and Operation Drift/Pull
Wheel Alignment Angles
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
- A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead
path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
- Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1226
Alignment: Description and Operation
Camber
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative and Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Caster
Wheel Alignment Angles
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest
caster.
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Wheel Alignment Angles
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1227
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Drift/Pull
Wheel Alignment Angles
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
- A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead
path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
- Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown).
Nibble
Wheel Alignment Angles
Nibble
Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various
road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel.
Poor Groove Feel
Wheel Alignment Angles
Poor Groove Feel
Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as
the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead
(under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center."
- Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the
gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the
effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch.
- In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between
wander and poor groove feel.
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Wheel Alignment Angles
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to
center after a turn or steering correction.
Shimmy
Wheel Alignment Angles
Shimmy
Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering
wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements.
Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire
contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface.
Toe
Wheel Alignment Angles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1228
Toe
Positive Toe (Toe In)
Negative Toe (Toe Out)
The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability.
Wander
Wheel Alignment Angles
Wander
Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel
corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Front Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the
camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the
front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5.
4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle.
Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment.
5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle.
Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1231
6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1232
Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement
Ride Height Measurement
Front Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface
and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is
located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position.
2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement 2).
3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's
arm until the scriber point is located in the center of
the forward lower arm bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position.
4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement 3).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1233
5. Subtract measurement 3 from measurement 2 to obtain the front ride height.
- Refer to Specifications.
Rear Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower
bolt (measurement 2).
2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower arm inner bolt
(measurement 3).
3. Subtract measurement 2 from measurement 3 to obtain the rear ride height.
- Refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1234
Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment
Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel.
2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position using a suitable
holding device.
3. Check the toe settings following the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is
rotated.
Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
5. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut(s).
- Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie-rod threads.
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe.
7. NOTICE: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut, or damage to the
boot can occur.
NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s).
Tighten the tie-rod end jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1235
9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor.
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. NOTICE: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct
clamping.
NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean
the area using only mild liquids.
NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the
serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush
and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
- Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel
knuckle bolt.
- Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
5. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel
Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and
Testing of Steering. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications > Page 1240
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L
engines do not have a Schrader valve.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect
Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine
5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications > Page 1241
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve.
Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine
7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and
Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
All vehicles
9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure
and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP fuse.
10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information >
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Measured/PID Values
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 689.5 RPM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Cleaner Fresh Air
Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
TSB 11-3-5
03/15/11
3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or
before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner
housing.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-12.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe
Comes Loose
TSB 11-3-5
03/15/11
3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or
before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner
housing.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-12.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter
Element > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications > Firing Order
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 1270
Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification
Engine
Engine Cylinder Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark plug gap.....................................................................................................................................
....................................1.15-1.25 mm (0.045-0.048 in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 1275
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark plugs...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................15 Nm (133 lb-in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1276
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................CGSF-22F
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1277
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
- Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
- Install a new spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
- Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
- Correct the oil leak concern.
- Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
- Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1278
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
- Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1281
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1282
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See:
Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur
to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the gap as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1283
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1284
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1285
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition RH
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1286
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest
reading is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications > Page 1290
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position.
3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams
Drive Belt: Diagrams
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive Belt Routing
Accessory Drive Belt
Coolant Pump Drive Belt
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Noise/Flutter
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
NOTICE: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any
fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping
mechanism may occur.
Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of
a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley.
To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area
with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft
direction or at an angle to the straightedge.
Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on
an accessory pulley under certain conditions.
A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start up and shut down or during very rapid
engine acceleration and decelerations, such as:
- Wide Open Throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back-out shifts on automatic
transmissions.
- WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions.
These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias
required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or
reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur:
- if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged.
- the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked.
- the A/C anti-slugging strategy executes after a long hot heat soak.
- if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after
several minutes) exceeds specifications.
- if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All
accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory.
- if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has
been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power
steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with
clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a
localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt
and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and
rinsed with clean water.
- if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive
belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will
release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal
installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt.
- NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Noise/Flutter > Page 1296
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
NOTICE: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may
cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys.
Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt
tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive
belt.
Incorrect Installation
Correct Installation
With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the
accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur.
Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking
condition exists, proceed with the following:
- Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting
pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the
mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of
alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises.
- With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the
pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary.
- Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any
interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference
condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
- Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware
to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory
Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory
Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1299
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt.
4. NOTE: Refer to the illustration for correct drive belt routing.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 >
Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
TSB 11-3-5
03/15/11
3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or
before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner
housing.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-12.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 >
Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe
Comes Loose
TSB 11-3-5
03/15/11
3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or
before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner
housing.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-12.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations
Cabin Air Filter: Locations
A cabin air filter is available for this vehicle as a dealer installed accessory. The accessory cabin air
filter will be located in the air inlet under the RH side of the cowl panel grille, if installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 1321
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
A cabin air filter is available for this vehicle as a dealer installed accessory. The accessory cabin air
filter will be located in the air inlet under the RH side of the cowl panel grille, if installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and
Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter
Removal
1. Remove the camshaft phaser and sprocket. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Phaser
and Sprocket See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket.
2. NOTE: RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) system oil filter shown, LH similar.
Remove and discard the VCT system oil filter from the camshaft.
Installation
1. NOTE: RH VCT system oil filter shown, LH similar.
Install the new VCT system oil filter in the camshaft.
2. Install the camshaft phaser and sprocket. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Phaser
and Sprocket See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair
Coolant Inlet Pipe - 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on the hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the Throttle Body (TB).
4. Remove the 2 coolant inlet pipe housing bolts.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the coolant inlet pipe from the coolant inlet pipe hose.
- Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. Remove and inspect the O-ring seal, install new seal if necessary.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine coolant.
8. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line - 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover refrigerant.
3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1337
6. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1338
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser To Receiver Drier Line
Condenser to Receiver Drier Line
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the compressor manifold and tube bracket nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1339
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
9. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seal and O-ring seal.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1340
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line
Evaporator Inlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the evaporator inlet line bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Remove the evaporator inlet line.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1341
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line
Evaporator Outlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Detach the wire harness clip from the evaporator outlet line.
6. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1342
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket.
8. Remove the evaporator outlet line.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and a new O-ring seal.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
BRAKE FLUID
Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................. PM-1-C Ford Specification
.................................................................................................................................................
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A11
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
HYDRAULIC CLUTCH FLUID
Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................. PM-1-C Ford Specification
..................................................................................................................................................
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant Capacity
Coolant ................................................................................................................................................
............................................. 9.5 Quarts ( 9.0 Liters )
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1354
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
ENGINE COOLANT
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored)
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................. VC-7-B
Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................
................................................ WSS-M97B51-A1
NOTE: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1359
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacity.......................................................................................................................................
............................................................8.5L (9 quarts)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1362
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft Mercon LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-10-QLV
Ford Specification - MERCON LV
Note: The use of any transmission fluid other than what is recommended for this transaxle will
cause transaxle damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing will be carried out using the Turbo-Tank Heated
Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included with the
machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present before proceeding.
1. Check and top off fluid level of the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent tank
with transmission fluid.
2. Allow the fluid in the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent 15-30 minutes to heat
up to 60°C (140°F) before using.
3. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler lines.
4. NOTE: The TOP transaxle cooler tube on the transaxle is the pressure line.
Attach the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent red line to the transmission fluid
cooler pressure line quick disconnect fitting.
5. Attach the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent blue line to the transmission
fluid cooler return line quick disconnect fitting.
6. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the cooler lines and cooler prior to starting the
flushing procedure.
7. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the cooler in a normal flow
direction for an additional 10-15 minutes.
8. Clean the transaxle mounted fluid cooler tubes by hand.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 1365
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
NOTE: In order to completely clean the torque converter, this procedure needs to be carried out 3
times.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A
small amount of metal or friction particles may be
found from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present, the
transaxle will need to be overhauled.
Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
3. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid.
5. Start the engine and let it run for 3 minutes. Move the range selector lever into each gear
position. Repeat Steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 two more times.
After the transmission fluid has been changed a total of 3 times, check the transmission fluid level
for a final time, making sure that the transmission fluid is at the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Specifications
Manual Transmission Fluid Type
Ford Part Name ...................................................................................................................................
............................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil Ford Part Number ............................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
XT-4-QGL Ford Specification ..............................................................................................................
...................................................... WSS-M2C206-A1 and GL-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1369
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair
Transaxle Draining and Filling
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.
3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug.
Install the drain plug.
- Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
4. Remove the fill level inspection plug.
5. Remove the transaxle fill plug.
6. Fill the transmission with gear oil until level with the fill level inspection plug hole.
7. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill plug.
Install the transaxle fill plug.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1370
- Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
8. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug.
Install the fill level inspection plug.
- Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 5.7 Liters (6.0 Qt)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1375
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
Ford Part Name
....................................................................................................................................... Motorcraft
SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Ford Part Number ...................................................................
...................................................................................................................... XO-5W20-QSP Ford
Specification
.........................................................................................................................................
WSS-M2C930-A with API Certification Mark
Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid
This vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power-Assisted Steering (EPAS) System. There is no fluid
reservoir to check or fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...................................................................0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1383
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...................................................................0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1384
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection
Refrigerant Identification Testing
Refrigerant Identification
1. NOTE: A Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer must be used to identify gas samples taken
directly from the refrigeration system or storage
containers prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system.
Follow the instructions included with the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer to obtain the
sample for testing.
2. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer will display one of the following:
- If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS LED will light. The
weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons and air will be displayed on the digital
display.
- If refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an alarm
will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22
and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display.
- If hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light,
"Hydrocarbon High" will be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the
user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will
also be displayed on the digital display.
3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or
greater. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with
Printer eliminates the effect of air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is
not considered a contaminant, although air can affect A/C system performance. When the
Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer has determined that a refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is
98% or greater by weight) and air concentration levels are 2% or greater by weight, it will prompt
the user if an air purge is desired.
4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the
refrigerant is indeed contaminated.
Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
NOTICE: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R-134a
recovery/recycling equipment. Recovery of contaminated refrigerant will contaminate the recovered
refrigerant supply and may damage the recovery/recycling equipment.
NOTE: A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the A/C system
flushing procedure.
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant only.
- If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in the area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customers initial concern.
3. Flush the A/C system.
4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local
regulations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Refrigerant System Recovery
NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any
vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If
the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1387
facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use
the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All
contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow
the equipment manufacturer procedures and instructions.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends the use of R-134a refrigerant management equipment
that meets the requirements of the SAE J2788 standard.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out recovery. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant
system recovery may be accomplished using a separate recovery station.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Prior to recovering, the purity of the refrigerant must be verified. For additional information, refer
to Refrigerant Identification Testing See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Refrigerant Identification Testing.
2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. Note the amount of oil
removed during the refrigerant recovery (if any). Add that same amount back into the system once
repairs are complete.
4. Once the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine has recovered the refrigerant, switch OFF
the power supply.
5. Allow the system to set for about 2 minutes, and observe the system vacuum reading. If the
vacuum is not lost, disconnect the recovery equipment.
6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable
for 2 minutes.
7. Carry out the required repairs.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out recovery, evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant
Management Machine is not available, evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum
Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of
vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible.
Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
3. Turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that
the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for
5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Vacuum Pump
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out evacuation of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump
and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Connect the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the low-side and high-side service gauge port
valves.
2. Connect the center (yellow) hose from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the suction port on the
Vacuum Pump.
3. Open all valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and both service gauge port valves.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1388
4. Turn on the Vacuum Pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least
99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to
101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45
minutes.
5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set (not the service
gauge port valves) and turn OFF the Vacuum Pump.
6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If
vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the
system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic
Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may
be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks
are present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low-side and high-side service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Automatic Refrigerant
Charging Meter
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic
Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may
be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks
are present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Assemble the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set, Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a
supply tank following the Automatic Refrigerant
Charging Meter operating instructions.
3. Charge the refrigerant system following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating
instructions.
4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the engine, select
MAX A/C operation and allow the refrigerant charge
to complete.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1389
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor Installation
Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation
WARNING: Use extreme care and observe all safety and service precautions related to the use of
refrigerants as outlined on refrigerant tank and on recovery and charging equipment. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any
vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If
the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried
out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery
equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C
refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment
manufacturer's procedures and instructions.
NOTICE: On vehicles being serviced for an internal compressor or desiccant failure, a new suction
accumulator or receiver/drier, Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) or evaporator core orifice and
any hoses containing mufflers must be installed prior to filtering the Air Conditioning (A/C) system.
Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible to correctly remove any foreign material.
These components are typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses without mufflers
can normally be reused unless they are clogged with foreign material. The filter is intended for use
on one vehicle only.
1. Orient the filter inlet toward the A/C condenser core.
2. NOTICE: The flexible extension adapters included in the A/C Flush Adapter Kit are designed for
low-pressure flushing and are not
designed for use with a charged refrigerant system. Do not make the condenser fitting connections
using the flexible extension adapters or damage to the adapters and loss of refrigerant will occur.
NOTE: The F8VZ-19E773-AB pancake filter is not permanently installed and will be removed at the
end of this procedure.
Disconnect the condenser outlet fitting and temporarily install the pancake filter between the 2
halves of the fitting.
- Use flexible refrigerant hose of 17,238 kPa (2,500 psi) burst rating.
- Make the connections using the correct adapters from the A/C Flush Adapter Kit and/or A/C Flush
and Purge Fitting Kit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1390
3. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
4. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning
(A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
5. Check all refrigerant system hoses, lines and the position of the newly installed filters to be sure
they do not interfere with other engine
compartment components. If necessary, use tie straps to make adjustments.
6. Provide adequate airflow to the front of the vehicle (with a fan, if necessary). Select A/C
operation and set the blower motor speed to maximum.
Start the engine and let it idle briefly. Make sure the A/C system is operating correctly.
7. Gradually bring the engine up to 1,200 rpm by running it at lower rpms for short periods (first at
800 rpm, then at 1,000 rpm). Set the engine at
1,200 rpm and run it for one hour with the A/C system operating.
8. Stop the engine.
9. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and
Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
10. Remove the adapters, flexible hoses and pancake filter from between the condenser and the
condenser to evaporator tube.
11. Discard the pancake filter. It can be used one time only.
12. Reconnect the condenser outlet fitting.
13. Evacuate, charge and leak-test the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation
and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG
Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification...............................................
..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................
......................................148 ml (5 fl oz) See: Service and Repair
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1395
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG
Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification...............................................
..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................
......................................148 ml (5 fl oz) See: Service and Repair
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1396
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
Refrigerant Oil Adding
Refrigerant Oil Adding
NOTE: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a
small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed,
some of the PAG oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is
necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part.
1. Refer to the chart below for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation.
a If an excessive amount of PAG oil is lost due to a hose rupture/separation or other damage, the
total system PAG oil capacity must be added.
b The amount specified may be used for one or multiple O-ring leak repairs. Do not multiply the
PAG oil amount by the number of O-ring leaks being repaired.
Adding Refrigerant Oil After A/C Compressor Replacement
Service A/C compressors shipped without clutch and pulley
1. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft 6 to 8 revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 oz), pour the
same amount plus 30 ml (1 oz) of clean PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
(YN-12-D) WSH M1C231-B or equivalent into the new A/C compressor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1397
- If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5 oz),
pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) or
equivalent into the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 oz), pour
85 ml (3 oz) of clean A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) or equivalent into the new
A/C compressor.
Service A/C compressors shipped with clutch and pulley
2. Rotate the old A/C compressor shaft 6 to 8 revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is less than 89 ml (3 oz), remove 118 ml
(4 oz) from the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 89 ml (3 oz), remove 89 ml (3 oz) from
the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 118 ml (4 oz), remove 59 ml (2 oz)
from the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 148 ml (5 oz), remove 29 ml (1 oz)
from the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is greater than 148 ml (5 oz), remove 0
ml (0 oz) from the new A/C compressor.
Adding Refrigerant Oil After New Suction Accumulator or Receiver/Drier Replacement
NOTE: This refrigerant oil adding method is to be used when a new suction accumulator or
receiver drier only has been installed. If a new A/C compressor and evaporator core orifice or TXV
have also been installed due to system contamination, refer to the appropriate heading.
1. Drill one 12.7 mm (1/2 in) hole in the old suction accumulator or receiver/drier cylinder and drain
the oil into a clean measuring cup.
2. Add the same quantity of new PAG oil, plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery and
60 ml (2 fl oz).
Adding Refrigerant Oil After Multiple Component Replacement After A/C System Contamination
NOTE: This refrigerant oil adding method is to be used when a new A/C compressor, suction
accumulator or receiver drier and evaporator core orifice or TXV have been installed due to system
contamination and the A/C system has been flushed.
NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without refrigerant oil.
1. Add 60 ml (2 fl oz) directly to the new A/C compressor suction port.
2. Inject the total vehicle PAG oil capacity minus 60 ml (2 fl oz) to the low-side service port during
system charging. For the total PAG oil capacity
specification, refer to the Specifications table.
Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector
NOTE: If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the dye may be
added to the dye/lubricant injector, from the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set, along with the
PAG oil.
1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery,
Evacuation and Charging.
2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector and the correct adapters from the R-134a Loop/Add On
Injector Kit-Set to match the amount of refrigerant
compressor oil to be injected.
3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed.
4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of clean, new PAG oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1398
5. Install the dye/lubricant injector between the low-side service gauge port valve and the
refrigerant service station or manifold gauge set.
6. Open all valves and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or
partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the
ends submerged in the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air
bubbles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1403
5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes.
- Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications.
Non-hybrid vehicles
6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to
the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the
rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir.
7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air
bubbles.
9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
All vehicles
10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake
System Bleeding.
Brake Caliper
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1404
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1405
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1406
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
1. Clean all the dirt from around the brake fluid reservoir cap and remove the cap. Fill the brake
master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake
fluid.
2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and
submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1407
4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw.
7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber
drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge
the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber
hose and install the bleeder screw cap.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw.
Pressure Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any
components upstream of the HCU are installed new.
NOTE: Pressure bleed the brake system at 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi).
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1408
1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master
cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose
to the fitting on the adapter.
3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the
bleeding operation.
Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container
partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank.
- Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system.
5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten
the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to
Specifications. Remove the rubber hose.
6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF
bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw.
- Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to
Specifications.
7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter
and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean,
specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap.
8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake
booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm.
- If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any
remaining air from the system.
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1409
plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
All vehicles
1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Service Bleed instructions.
3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
Hybrid vehicles
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1414
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1415
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1416
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1417
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1418
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1419
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1420
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1421
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom the
fuse cover to remove.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box > Page 1427
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box > Page 1428
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box > Page 1429
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Smart Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom the
fuse cover to remove.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1432
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1433
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1434
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1439
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1440
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1441
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1442
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1443
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1446
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1447
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1448
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1449
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1450
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1451
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1452
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1453
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1454
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1455
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1456
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1457
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1458
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1459
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1460
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1461
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1462
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1463
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1464
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1465
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1466
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1467
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1468
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1469
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1470
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1471
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1472
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1473
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1478
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1479
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1480
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1481
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1482
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1485
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1486
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1487
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1488
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1489
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1490
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1491
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1492
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1493
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1496
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1497
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1498
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board
diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets.
- The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol.
- The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately four seconds.
- The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if:
- an emission-related concern and DTC exists.
- the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL
controlled through the communication link).
- the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster
concern is present.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern.
- For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/No Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) Present Symptom Chart Index.
- If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist.
- If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low.
- The MIL flashes after a period of time with the ignition in the RUN position (engine not running) if
DTC P1000 is set.
CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON, or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Oil Life
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change ( approximately 7,500 miles (
12,000 km ) or 12 months ) perform the following:
1. Press and release the SETUP control to display "OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW".
2. Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds and release. Oil life is set to 100% and "OIL
LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed. 3. While "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed, if a lower oil life
is start value is desired , press and release the RESET control to reduce the start
value. Each press of the RESET control reduces the value by 10 percent.
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles ( 12,000 km ) or 12 months. For example,
setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life start value to 4,500 miles ( 7,200 km ) and 108
days.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
Jacking and Lifting
WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the
parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended
vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could
unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the
vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or
jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline
unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could
cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result
in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a
deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other
purpose.
NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on
lift without first checking for possible interference.
NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage
components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting
the vehicle.
Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 1515
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 1516
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1522
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1523
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
TSB 09-5-8
03/23/09
ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT
BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009
and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the
chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF
THE POWERTRAIN.
1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type
maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h).
2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for
noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting
noise.
3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 204-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire
Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1,
1015D)
090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 1532
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
TSB 09-5-8
03/23/09
ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT
BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009
and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the
chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF
THE POWERTRAIN.
1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type
maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h).
2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for
noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting
noise.
3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 204-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire
Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1,
1015D)
090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page
1538
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1543
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer
wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the
wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1544
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1545
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing - Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1546
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor ring.
4. Remove the brake drum.
5. Using the Front Hub Remover and Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent tools, remove the wheel
hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1547
6. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using a suitable press and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, press the inner
bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
7. Remove and discard the wheel bearing snap ring.
8. Using the Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent and the Axle Bearing Remover, remove the
bearing from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer,
install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Using the Half Shaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
4. Install the wheel speed sensor ring.
5. Install the brake drum.
6. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install the new wheel hub nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1548
- Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Rear Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Front Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Install the 5 wheel nuts. Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern. Tighten to.......................................
............................................................................................................................................................1
35 Nm (100 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub See: Wheel Bearing/Service and
Repair/Front Suspension.
2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub.
- Discard the wheel stud.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1558
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove a wheel stud. Damage to the wheel hub may result.
1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, remove the wheel stud.
3. NOTE: Make sure to use washers that have an ID that is larger than the OD of the wheel stud
serrations. Use enough washers (approximately 4) to
allow the wheel stud to fully seat against the hub flange.
Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made
by the original wheel stud.
- Place approximately 4 washers over the outside end of the wheel stud and thread a standard
wheel nut onto the wheel stud with the flat side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1559
against the washers.
- Tighten the wheel nut until the wheel stud head seats against the back side of the wheel hub
flange.
4. Remove the wheel nut and washers.
5. Install the brake shoes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10L06 Date: 100419
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED
Yes, OASIS will only be activated on stock vehicles for this service action.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website for stock vehicles only on April 19, 2010.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
Dealer action is not required. Owner Guide Supplement booklets are being mailed to owners
beginning April 30, 2010.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1568
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Stock Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets for stock vehicles are being mailed to
dealerships the week of April 19, 2010. The package will be sent to the attention of the service
manager.
Sold Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets and installation instructions are being mailed
directly to customers of the affected vehicles.
A small quantity of booklets have been set aside in case an Owner Guide Supplement booklet is
misplaced. To order an additional Owner Guide Supplement booklet, contact the Special Service
Support Center. A VIN number will be required for each replacement booklet ordered.
DEALER PRICE
Dealers will not be charged for Owner Guide Supplement booklets ordered for this program.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1569
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1570
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1571
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1572
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1573
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1574
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1575
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1576
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10L06 Date: 100419
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED
Yes, OASIS will only be activated on stock vehicles for this service action.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website for stock vehicles only on April 19, 2010.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
Dealer action is not required. Owner Guide Supplement booklets are being mailed to owners
beginning April 30, 2010.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1582
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Stock Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets for stock vehicles are being mailed to
dealerships the week of April 19, 2010. The package will be sent to the attention of the service
manager.
Sold Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets and installation instructions are being mailed
directly to customers of the affected vehicles.
A small quantity of booklets have been set aside in case an Owner Guide Supplement booklet is
misplaced. To order an additional Owner Guide Supplement booklet, contact the Special Service
Support Center. A VIN number will be required for each replacement booklet ordered.
DEALER PRICE
Dealers will not be charged for Owner Guide Supplement booklets ordered for this program.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1583
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1584
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1585
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1586
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1587
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1588
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1589
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 1590
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10L06 Date: 100419
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED
Yes, OASIS will only be activated on stock vehicles for this service action.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website for stock vehicles only on April 19, 2010.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
Dealer action is not required. Owner Guide Supplement booklets are being mailed to owners
beginning April 30, 2010.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 1596
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Stock Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets for stock vehicles are being mailed to
dealerships the week of April 19, 2010. The package will be sent to the attention of the service
manager.
Sold Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets and installation instructions are being mailed
directly to customers of the affected vehicles.
A small quantity of booklets have been set aside in case an Owner Guide Supplement booklet is
misplaced. To order an additional Owner Guide Supplement booklet, contact the Special Service
Support Center. A VIN number will be required for each replacement booklet ordered.
DEALER PRICE
Dealers will not be charged for Owner Guide Supplement booklets ordered for this program.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 1597
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 1598
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 1599
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 1600
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 1601
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 1602
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 1603
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 1604
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page
1609
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1615
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1621
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
Jacking and Lifting
WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the
parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended
vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could
unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the
vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or
jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline
unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could
cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result
in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a
deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other
purpose.
NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on
lift without first checking for possible interference.
NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage
components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting
the vehicle.
Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing
Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's
Set
TSB 10-19-1
10/11/10
3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/1/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion
2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List
and production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L
engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010.
a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for
normal diagnostics.
b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2.
2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable
camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET
AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF
DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE
INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES
THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs.
Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing
Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 1636
101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs.
Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve
Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT
Solenoid DTC's Set
TSB 10-19-1
10/11/10
3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/1/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion
2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List
and production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L
engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010.
a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for
normal diagnostics.
b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2.
2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable
camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET
AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF
DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE
INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES
THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs.
Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve
Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 1642
101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs.
Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 1645
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 1648
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1649
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
Overview
The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function
of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT systems.
- Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have four operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default
mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM)
determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant
temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine
RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine
power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque.
In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the
overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS
and DEPS systems are used.
The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the Testing and Inspection
section. For additional information, refer to the Engine System - General Information. Verification of
incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a
stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If
the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are
primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine System - General
Information.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank.
A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant
temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP,
throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions
of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft
position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft
position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not
operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The
PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1650
achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position
error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a
default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When
the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil
pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil
flow.
VCT System
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH or RH valve cover.
2. Remove the 2 bolts and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest
reading is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications > Page 1657
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position.
3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Tighten the LH camshaft bearing cap bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to.
..............................................................................................................................................................
.........................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Stage 2: Individually loosen and then tighten each camshaft
bearing cap to.................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Tighten the RH camshaft bearing cap bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to.
..............................................................................................................................................................
.........................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Stage 2: Individually loosen and then tighten each camshaft
bearing cap to.................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Tighten the 3 LH camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts
to..............................................................................................................................18 Nm (159 lb-in)
Tighten the 3 RH camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts
to.............................................................................................................................18 Nm (159 lb-in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft: > 09-17-8 > Sep > 09 > Engine Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise
Camshaft: Customer Interest Engine - Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise
TSB 09-17-8
09/07/09
3.0L INTERMITTENT CYLINDER HEAD CAMSHAFT KNOCK/THUMP NOISE
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-11-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles, equipped with 3.0L engine, may exhibit an
intermittent knocking or thumping type noise from the cylinder head. After engine temperature
reaches 210-220 °F (99-104 °C), the noise is typically heard from the rear of the engine as the
vehicle comes to a stop. An example would be coming to a stop at the end of a highway exit ramp.
Noise will continue 45-60 seconds and then diminish. Noise will occur again once engine reaches
210-220 °F (99-104 °C) and vehicle comes to another stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Is noise a 45-60 second knock/thump from a hot engine as the vehicle comes to a stop?
a. Yes - Go to Step 2.
b. No - Stop as this procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 100-04 diagnostics.
2. Using Chassis Ears, isolate the noise to Right Hand (RH) (Bank 1) or Left Hand (LH) (Bank 2)
cylinder head. Noise is typically heard as 45-60
second knock/thump as the vehicle comes to a stop after engine reaches 210-220 °F (99-104 °C).
a. Isolate noise to RH - Listen to the cylinder head by the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid
connectors. There will also be a vibration felt at
the VCT solenoid connector when noise is present. Noise from RH - go to Step 3.
b. Isolate noise to LH - Listen to the cylinders 4 and 6 valve cover fasteners (number 6 is by the
coolant pump). There will be a significant
difference in transmitted noise between the cylinder 4 and 6 fasteners when noise is present. Noise
from LH - go to Step 4.
NOTE
THE RH AND LH NOISES HAVE DIFFERENT CAUSES. FOLLOW ALL STEPS CAREFULLY
FOR PROPER DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR.
3. Replace the RH cylinder head per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-01B.
a. Verify repair by repeating Step 2. If noise is still present then proceed with normal engine NVH
diagnostics per WSM, Section 100-04.
4. Remove LH valve cover. Refer to WSM, Section 303-01.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft: > 09-17-8 > Sep > 09 > Engine Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise > Page 1673
a. Rotate the engine clockwise until cylinder number 6 exhaust cam lobes are pointing up and
valves are fully closed. Exhaust camshaft needs to be
left in this position for all bearing caps in Step 4b. (Figure 1)
b. On the LH exhaust camshaft only, starting at the front of the engine with the thrust bearing cap
(1L), perform the following on all 5 camshaft
bearing caps: (Figure 2)
NOTE
EACH CAM CAP MUST BE COMPLETELY REMOVED AND INSTALLED, PER INSTRUCTIONS,
BEFORE PROCEEDING TO NEXT CAM CAP OR DAMAGE TO THE ENGINE MAY OCCUR.
(1) Loosen both bolts.
(2) Remove cap.
(3) Install cap and push cap toward intake camshaft while tightening bolts, excluding thrust bearing
cap (1L).
(4) Torque bolts to 89 lb-in (10 N.m) starting with bolt closest to intake camshaft.
(5) Proceed to next cam cap.
NOTE
CYLINDER HEAD CAMSHAFT BEARING CAPS MUST BE ASSEMBLED IN THEIR ORIGINAL
POSITIONS AND ORIENTATION. FAILURE TO INSTALL THE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAPS IN
THEIR ORIGINAL POSITIONS AND ORIENTATION MAY RESULT IN SEVERE ENGINE
DAMAGE.
c. Install the LH valve cover. Refer to WSM, Section 303-01.
d. Verify repair by repeating Step 2. If noise is still present then proceed with normal engine NVH
diagnostics per WSM, Section 100-04.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091708A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 9.4 Hrs.
Engine: Replace The RH Cylinder Head. Includes Time To Road Test And Diagnose (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
091708B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 2.1 Hrs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft: > 09-17-8 > Sep > 09 > Engine Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise > Page 1674
Engine: Remove The LH Valve Cover, Remove And Install LH Exhaust Camshaft Bearing Caps.
Includes Time To Road Test And Diagnose (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091708C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 9.5 Hrs.
Engine: Replace The RH Cylinder Head, Remove And Install LH Exhaust Camshaft Bearing Caps.
Includes Time To Road Test And Diagnose (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6049 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft: > 09-17-8 > Sep >
09 > Engine - Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise
Camshaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise
TSB 09-17-8
09/07/09
3.0L INTERMITTENT CYLINDER HEAD CAMSHAFT KNOCK/THUMP NOISE
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-11-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles, equipped with 3.0L engine, may exhibit an
intermittent knocking or thumping type noise from the cylinder head. After engine temperature
reaches 210-220 °F (99-104 °C), the noise is typically heard from the rear of the engine as the
vehicle comes to a stop. An example would be coming to a stop at the end of a highway exit ramp.
Noise will continue 45-60 seconds and then diminish. Noise will occur again once engine reaches
210-220 °F (99-104 °C) and vehicle comes to another stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Is noise a 45-60 second knock/thump from a hot engine as the vehicle comes to a stop?
a. Yes - Go to Step 2.
b. No - Stop as this procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 100-04 diagnostics.
2. Using Chassis Ears, isolate the noise to Right Hand (RH) (Bank 1) or Left Hand (LH) (Bank 2)
cylinder head. Noise is typically heard as 45-60
second knock/thump as the vehicle comes to a stop after engine reaches 210-220 °F (99-104 °C).
a. Isolate noise to RH - Listen to the cylinder head by the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid
connectors. There will also be a vibration felt at
the VCT solenoid connector when noise is present. Noise from RH - go to Step 3.
b. Isolate noise to LH - Listen to the cylinders 4 and 6 valve cover fasteners (number 6 is by the
coolant pump). There will be a significant
difference in transmitted noise between the cylinder 4 and 6 fasteners when noise is present. Noise
from LH - go to Step 4.
NOTE
THE RH AND LH NOISES HAVE DIFFERENT CAUSES. FOLLOW ALL STEPS CAREFULLY
FOR PROPER DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR.
3. Replace the RH cylinder head per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-01B.
a. Verify repair by repeating Step 2. If noise is still present then proceed with normal engine NVH
diagnostics per WSM, Section 100-04.
4. Remove LH valve cover. Refer to WSM, Section 303-01.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft: > 09-17-8 > Sep >
09 > Engine - Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise > Page 1680
a. Rotate the engine clockwise until cylinder number 6 exhaust cam lobes are pointing up and
valves are fully closed. Exhaust camshaft needs to be
left in this position for all bearing caps in Step 4b. (Figure 1)
b. On the LH exhaust camshaft only, starting at the front of the engine with the thrust bearing cap
(1L), perform the following on all 5 camshaft
bearing caps: (Figure 2)
NOTE
EACH CAM CAP MUST BE COMPLETELY REMOVED AND INSTALLED, PER INSTRUCTIONS,
BEFORE PROCEEDING TO NEXT CAM CAP OR DAMAGE TO THE ENGINE MAY OCCUR.
(1) Loosen both bolts.
(2) Remove cap.
(3) Install cap and push cap toward intake camshaft while tightening bolts, excluding thrust bearing
cap (1L).
(4) Torque bolts to 89 lb-in (10 N.m) starting with bolt closest to intake camshaft.
(5) Proceed to next cam cap.
NOTE
CYLINDER HEAD CAMSHAFT BEARING CAPS MUST BE ASSEMBLED IN THEIR ORIGINAL
POSITIONS AND ORIENTATION. FAILURE TO INSTALL THE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAPS IN
THEIR ORIGINAL POSITIONS AND ORIENTATION MAY RESULT IN SEVERE ENGINE
DAMAGE.
c. Install the LH valve cover. Refer to WSM, Section 303-01.
d. Verify repair by repeating Step 2. If noise is still present then proceed with normal engine NVH
diagnostics per WSM, Section 100-04.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091708A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 9.4 Hrs.
Engine: Replace The RH Cylinder Head. Includes Time To Road Test And Diagnose (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
091708B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 2.1 Hrs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft: > 09-17-8 > Sep >
09 > Engine - Intermittent Knock Or Thump Noise > Page 1681
Engine: Remove The LH Valve Cover, Remove And Install LH Exhaust Camshaft Bearing Caps.
Includes Time To Road Test And Diagnose (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091708C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 9.5 Hrs.
Engine: Replace The RH Cylinder Head, Remove And Install LH Exhaust Camshaft Bearing Caps.
Includes Time To Road Test And Diagnose (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6049 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Camshaft: Procedures
Camshaft Journal To Bearing Clearance - OHC Engines
Camshaft Journal to Bearing Clearance - OHC Engines
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. NOTE: The camshaft journals must meet specifications before checking camshaft journal
clearance.
Measure each camshaft bearing in 2 directions.
- Subtract the camshaft journal diameter from the camshaft bearing diameter.
Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines
Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, measure the camshaft end play.
2. Position the camshaft to the rear of the cylinder head.
3. Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge.
4. Move the camshaft to the front of the cylinder head. Note and record the camshaft end play.
- If camshaft end play exceeds specifications, install a new camshaft and recheck end play.
- If camshaft end play exceeds specification after camshaft installation, install a new cylinder head.
Camshaft Surface Inspection
Camshaft Surface Inspection
1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the contact area. Minor pitting is acceptable
outside the contact area.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1684
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Measure each camshaft journal diameter in 2 directions.
Camshaft Lobe Lift
Camshaft Lobe Lift
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Use the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure camshaft intake/exhaust lobe lift.
- Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest Dial Indicator Gauge reading from the highest Dial
Indicator Gauge reading to figure the camshaft lobe lift.
Camshaft Runout
Camshaft Runout
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1685
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. NOTE: Camshaft journals must be within specifications before checking runout.
Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, measure the camshaft runout.
- Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest Dial Indicator Gauge reading from the highest Dial
Indicator Gauge reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1686
Camshaft: Removal and Replacement
Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket
Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the timing drive components. For additional information, refer to Timing Drive
Components See: Timing Components/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
3. NOTICE: Do not allow the camshaft to rotate from the neutral position while removing the
camshaft phaser and sprocket or damage to
the engine may occur.
NOTE: Install a 3/8-in ratchet and extension into the D-slot on the rear of the LH intake camshaft to
hold the camshaft in place for removal of the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts and the LH camshaft phaser and sprocket.
- Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
4. NOTICE: Do not allow the camshaft to rotate from the neutral position while removing the
camshaft phaser and sprocket or damage to
the engine may occur.
NOTE: Install a 3/8-in ratchet and extension into the D-slot on the rear of the RH intake camshaft to
hold the camshaft in place for removal of the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts and the RH camshaft phaser and sprocket.
- Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
LH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1687
LH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshafts
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1688
Coolant Pump Belt and Pulley
RH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring
RH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshaft
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1689
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Camshafts - LH
Camshafts - LH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1690
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1691
Removal
1. Remove the coolant pump belt.
2. Remove the timing drive components. For additional information, refer to Timing Drive
Components See: Timing Components/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
3. NOTICE: Failure to use the correct special tools, assembled as shown in the illustration, will
result in damage to the coolant pump pulley
and/or special tools.
Using the Water Pump Pulley Plate, Water Pump Shaft Protector and the Crankshaft Vibration
Damper Remover, remove the coolant pump pulley.
4. NOTICE: Do not scratch the camshaft sealing surface while removing the camshaft oil seal. If
scratched, camshaft oil seal leakage may
occur.
Using the Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the camshaft oil seal.
5. Remove the 2 bolts and the camshaft oil seal retainer.
- Discard the press-in-place gasket.
6. NOTICE: The camshafts must be in the neutral position before removing the bearing caps or
damage to the engine may occur.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1692
Verify the LH camshafts are in the neutral position.
7. NOTICE: Do not allow the camshaft to rotate from the neutral position while removing the
camshaft phaser and sprocket or damage to
the engine may occur.
NOTE: Install a 3/8-in ratchet and extension into the D-slot on the rear of the intake camshaft to
hold the camshaft in place for removal of the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts and the LH camshaft phaser and sprocket.
8. NOTICE: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps must be assembled in their original positions.
Some engines have factory markings on the
camshaft bearing caps (as shown in illustration). Engines that do not have the factory markings
must be marked for correct position and orientation prior to removal. Failure to install the camshaft
bearing caps in their original positions may result in severe engine damage.
If necessary, mark the camshaft bearing cap position and orientation as shown in the illustration.
9. NOTICE: After loosening all of the camshaft bearing cap bolts, remove the camshaft bearing
thrust caps (1L and 5L) first, or damage to
the thrust caps may occur.
NOTE: Make sure the camshaft bearing caps are marked as instructed in the previous step.
Loosen the bolts evenly in the sequence shown.
1. Remove the camshaft bearing thrust caps (1L and 5L).
2. Remove the remaining camshaft bearing caps.
3. Remove the camshafts from the cylinder head.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1693
Installation
1. Position the camshaft phaser and sprocket onto the intake camshaft.
- Install the 3 bolts finger-tight.
2. Lubricate the LH camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts onto the
cylinder head.
- Align the LH camshafts as shown.
3. NOTICE: Cylinder head camshaft journal caps and cylinder heads are numbered to verify that
they are assembled in their original
positions. If not reassembled in their original positions, severe engine damage may occur.
NOTICE: Do not install the camshaft journal thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps have
been installed or damage to the thrust caps can occur.
Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the LH camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil and install the
bearing caps.
- Loosely install the bolts.
4. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the LH camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil and
install the bearing thrust caps.
- Loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1694
5. NOTE: Make sure to tighten the camshaft bearing cap bolts in sequence in 2 stages.
Tighten the LH camshaft bearing cap bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Individually loosen and then tighten each camshaft bearing cap to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. NOTICE: Do not allow the camshaft to rotate from the neutral position while tightening the
camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts or
damage to the engine may occur.
NOTE: Install a 3/8-in ratchet and extension into the D-slot on the rear of the intake camshaft to
hold the camshaft in place for tightening of the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts.
Tighten the 3 LH camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
7. NOTE: Clean the sealing surfaces with metal surface prep before installing a new press-in-place
gasket.
Install the camshaft oil seal retainer and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1695
8. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft oil seal with clean engine oil.
Using the Camshaft Oil Seal Installer, Camshaft Oil Seal Protector and the Power Steering Pump
Pulley Installer, install the camshaft oil seal.
9. NOTICE: Failure to use the correct special tools, assembled as shown in the illustration, will
result in damage to the coolant pump pulley
and/or special tools.
Install the Camshaft Pulley Installer in the camshaft as shown in the illustration.
- Adjust the collar on the Camshaft Pulley Installer screw to get the best thread engagement in the
rear of the camshaft.
10. NOTICE: Failure to use the correct special tools, assembled as shown in the illustration, will
result in damage to the coolant pump pulley
and/or special tools.
NOTE: Only the roller collared nut from the Power Steering Pump Pulley Installer (211-185) is used
on Camshaft Pulley Installer (303-458).
Position the coolant pump pulley over the previously installed Camshaft Pulley Installer and on the
end of the camshaft. Install the Camshaft Pulley Installer, Power Steering Pump Pulley Installer
and the Water Pump Pulley Spacer as shown in the illustration. Using the Camshaft Pulley Installer, Power Steering Pump Pulley Installer and the Water Pump
Pulley Spacer, install a new service coolant pump pulley flush with the end of the camshaft.
11. Install the timing drive components. For additional information, refer to Timing Drive
Components See: Timing Components/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
12. Install the coolant pump belt.
Camshafts - RH
Camshafts - RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1696
Removal
1. Remove the timing drive components. For additional information, refer to Timing Drive
Components See: Timing Components/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
2. NOTICE: The camshafts must be in the neutral position before removing the bearing caps or
damage to the engine may occur.
Verify the RH camshafts are in the neutral position.
3. NOTICE: Do not allow the camshaft to rotate from the neutral position while removing the
camshaft phaser and sprocket or damage to
the engine may occur.
NOTE: Install a 3/8-in ratchet and extension into the D-slot on the rear of the intake camshaft to
hold the camshaft in place for removal of the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts and the RH camshaft phaser and sprocket.
4. NOTICE: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps must be assembled in their original positions.
Some engines have factory markings on the
camshaft bearing caps (as shown in illustration). Engines that do not have the factory markings
must be marked for correct position and orientation prior to removal. Failure to install the camshaft
bearing caps in their original positions may result in severe engine damage.
If necessary, mark the camshaft bearing cap position and orientation as shown in the illustration.
5. NOTICE: After loosening all of the camshaft bearing cap bolts, remove the camshaft bearing
thrust caps (5R and 1R) first, or damage to
the thrust caps may occur.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1697
NOTE: Make sure the camshaft bearing caps are marked as instructed in the previous step.
Loosen the bolts evenly in the sequence shown.
1. Remove the camshaft bearing thrust caps (5R and 1R).
2. Remove the remaining camshaft bearing caps.
3. Remove the camshafts from the cylinder head.
Installation
1. Position the RH camshaft phaser and sprocket onto the intake camshaft.
- Install the 3 bolts finger-tight.
2. Lubricate the RH camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts onto the
cylinder head.
- Align the RH camshafts as shown.
3. NOTICE: Cylinder head camshaft journal caps and cylinder heads are numbered to verify that
they are assembled in their original
positions. If not reassembled in their original positions, severe engine damage may occur.
NOTICE: Do not install the camshaft journal thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps have
been installed or damage to the thrust caps can occur.
NOTE: Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the RH camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil.
Install the camshaft bearing caps. Loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1698
4. NOTE: Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the RH camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine
oil.
Install the camshaft bearing thrust caps.
- Loosely install the bolts.
5. NOTE: Make sure to tighten the camshaft bearing cap bolts in sequence in 2 stages.
Tighten the RH camshaft bearing cap bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Individually loosen and then tighten each camshaft bearing cap to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. NOTICE: Do not allow the camshaft to rotate from the neutral position while tightening the
camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts or
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1699
damage to the engine may occur.
NOTE: Install a 3/8-in ratchet and extension into the D-slot on the rear of the intake camshaft to
hold the camshaft in place for tightening of the camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts.
Tighten the 3 RH camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
7. Install the timing drive components. For additional information, refer to Timing Drive Components
See: Timing Components/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Procedures
Valve Tappet Inspection
Valve Tappet Inspection
1. Inspect the valve tappet for damage, especially in the indicated areas. If any damage is evident,
inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage.
Install new components as necessary.
Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection
Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection
1. Inspect the hydraulic lash adjuster and roller follower for damage. If any damage is found,
inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1704
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Removal and Replacement
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
LH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring
LH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshafts
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1705
Coolant Pump Belt and Pulley
RH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1706
RH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshaft
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1707
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Hydraulic Lash Adjuster
Hydraulic Lash Adjuster
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the camshaft roller followers. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Roller
Follower See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Roller Follower.
2. NOTE: Mark the positions of the hydraulic lash adjusters to make sure they are assembled in
their original positions.
Remove the hydraulic lash adjusters.
3. NOTE: Inspect the hydraulic lash adjusters for scoring marks and uneven wear in the bore.
Install new lash adjusters if necessary.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the hydraulic lash adjusters with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Rocker Arm Assembly: Procedures
Roller Follower Inspection
1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft
lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1712
Rocker Arm Assembly: Removal and Replacement
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
LH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring
LH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshafts
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1713
Coolant Pump Belt and Pulley
RH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1714
RH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshaft
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1715
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Camshaft Roller Follower
Camshaft Roller Follower
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the LH and RH valve covers. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover - LH See:
Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service
and Repair/Valve Cover - LH and Valve Cover - RH See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve
Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Cover - RH.
3. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs.
4. Remove the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly away from the roller follower.
6. Using the Valve Spring Compressor, remove the roller followers.
7. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing
Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's
Set
TSB 10-19-1
10/11/10
3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/1/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion
2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List
and production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L
engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010.
a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for
normal diagnostics.
b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2.
2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable
camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET
AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF
DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE
INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES
THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs.
Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing
Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 1724
101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs.
Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve
Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT
Solenoid DTC's Set
TSB 10-19-1
10/11/10
3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/1/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion
2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List
and production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L
engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010.
a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for
normal diagnostics.
b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2.
2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable
camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET
AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF
DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE
INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES
THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs.
Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve
Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 1730
101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs.
Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 1733
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 1736
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1737
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
Overview
The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function
of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT systems.
- Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have four operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default
mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM)
determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant
temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine
RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine
power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque.
In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the
overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS
and DEPS systems are used.
The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the Testing and Inspection
section. For additional information, refer to the Engine System - General Information. Verification of
incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a
stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If
the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are
primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine System - General
Information.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank.
A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant
temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP,
throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions
of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft
position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft
position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not
operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The
PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1738
achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position
error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a
default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When
the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil
pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil
flow.
VCT System
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1743
a Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod: Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1747
a Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1751
a Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft: Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1755
a Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1756
Crankshaft: Service and Repair
Crankshaft End Play
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Install the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture.
2. Position the crankshaft to the rear of the cylinder block.
3. Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge.
4. Move the crankshaft to the front of the cylinder block. Note and record the crankshaft end play.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair
Block Heater
2.5L
3.0L
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and
Repair.
3. NOTICE: Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from rotating or hot
components, or damage to the wiring
can occur.
Disconnect the block heater electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1760
4. Remove the block heater.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in) (2.5L).
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft) (3.0L).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling
System/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Using the Crankshaft Vibration Damper Installer, install the crankshaft pulley. Install the bolt and
washer. Tighten the bolt in 4 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to....................................................................
...................................................................................................................120 Nm (89 lb-ft). Stage 2:
Loosen..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................one full turn. Stage 3: Tighten to........................................................
.................................................................................................................................50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
Stage 4: Tighten an additional..............................................................................................................
...................................................................90 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Pulley
Crankshaft Pulley
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the accessory drive belt.
3. Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
- Discard the crankshaft pulley bolt.
4. Using the 3 Jaw Puller, remove the crankshaft pulley.
Installation
1. Lubricate the crankshaft front seal inner lip with clean engine oil.
2. NOTE: Clean the keyway and slot using metal surface prep before applying silicone gasket and
sealant.
NOTE: The crankshaft pulley must be installed and the bolt tightened within 4 minutes of applying
the silicone gasket and sealant.
Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the end of the keyway slot.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley > Page 1766
3. NOTE: Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surface with clean engine oil.
Using the Crankshaft Vibration Damper Installer, install the crankshaft pulley.
4. Install the bolt and washer. Tighten the bolt in 4 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
- Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
- Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
5. Install the accessory drive belt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley > Page 1767
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Exploded View - Crankshaft Pulley and
Front Seal
Lower End Components - Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal
Flexplate and Rear Seal
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston: Specifications
a Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston Ring: Specifications
a Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Rocker Arm Assembly: Procedures
Roller Follower Inspection
1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft
lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1782
Rocker Arm Assembly: Removal and Replacement
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
LH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring
LH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshafts
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1783
Coolant Pump Belt and Pulley
RH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1784
RH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshaft
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1785
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Camshaft Roller Follower
Camshaft Roller Follower
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the LH and RH valve covers. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover - LH See:
Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Cover LH and Valve Cover - RH See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Cover - RH.
3. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs.
4. Remove the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly away from the roller follower.
6. Using the Valve Spring Compressor, remove the roller followers.
7. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH
Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover - LH
Valve Cover - LH
LH Valve Cover (View 1 of 3)
LH Valve Cover (View 2 of 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1790
LH Valve Cover (View 3 of 3)
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine failure.
1. Remove the LH ignition coil-on-plugs.
2. Detach the upper radiator hose from the 2 retainers on the cooling fan shroud and position the
hose aside.
3. Detach the 2 wiring retainers from the valve cover.
4. Detach the 2 wiring retainers from the valve cover stud bolts.
5. Disconnect the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1791
7. NOTE: Inspect the crankcase ventilation tube and valve cover sealing area. If either a new valve
cover or crankcase ventilation tube is required,
both components must be installed new.
Remove the 8 bolts, 6 stud bolts and the valve cover.
- Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. NOTE: If the valve cover is not secured within 4 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the
sealing area cleaned with metal surface prep.
Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
Apply a bead of silicone gasket and sealant in 2 places where the engine front cover meets the
cylinder head.
2. Position the valve cover and install the bolts and stud bolts.
- Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Connect the HO2S electrical connector.
4. Connect the VCT electrical connector.
5. Attach the 2 wiring retainers to the valve cover stud bolts.
6. Attach the 2 wiring retainers to the valve cover.
7. Attach the upper radiator hose to the 2 retainers on the cooling fan shroud.
8. Install the LH ignition coil-on-plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1792
Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover - RH
Valve Cover - RH
RH Valve Cover (View 1 of 2)
RH Valve Cover (View 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1793
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine failure.
1. Remove the RH ignition coil-on-plugs.
2. Detach the 3 main engine control wiring harness retainers from the valve cover stud bolts.
3. Detach the 3 main engine control wiring harness retainers from the valve cover.
4. Disconnect the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) electrical connector.
5. Detach the Crankshaft Position (CKP) wiring harness retainer from the stud.
6. Remove the 11 bolts, 3 stud bolts and the valve cover.
- Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. NOTE: If the valve cover is not secured within 4 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the
sealing area cleaned with metal surface prep.
Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
Apply a bead of silicone gasket and sealant in 2 places where the engine front cover meets the
cylinder head.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1794
2. Position the valve cover and install the 11 bolts and 3 stud bolts.
- Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Attach the CKP wiring harness retainer on the stud.
4. Connect the VCT electrical connector.
5. Attach the 3 main engine control wiring harness retainers to the valve cover.
6. Attach the 3 main engine control wiring harness retainers to the valve cover stud bolts.
7. Install the RH ignition coil-on-plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Valve Guide: Service and Repair
Valve Guide Inner Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. NOTE: Valve guides tend to wear in an hourglass pattern. The ball gauge can be inserted into
the combustion chamber side of the valve guide, if
necessary.
Use a ball gauge to determine the inside diameter of the valve guides in 2 directions at the top,
middle and bottom of the valve guide.
2. Measure the ball gauge with a micrometer.
3. If the valve guide is not within specifications, install a new cylinder head assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements
Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements
Valve Seat Inspection
Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
NOTE: After grinding valves or valve seats, check valve clearance.
1. Check the valve head and seat.
- Check valve angles.
- Check margin width.
- Be sure margin width is within specification.
2. Inspect for abnormalities on the valve face and seat. Install a new cylinder head assembly if
abnormalities are found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements > Page 1802
Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Width
Valve Seat Width
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Measure the valve seat width. If necessary, grind the valve seat to specification.
- Measure the intake valve seat width.
- Measure the exhaust valve seat width.
- Recheck the valve spring installed length after the seats have been ground, and shim the valve
springs as necessary to achieve the correct installed spring length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements > Page 1803
Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Runout
Valve Seat Runout
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Use a valve seat runout gauge to check valve seat runout.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Valve Spring: Procedures
Valve Spring Installed Length
Valve Spring Installed Length
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Measure the installed length of each valve spring.
Valve Spring Free Length
Valve Spring Free Length
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Measure the free length of each valve spring.
Valve Spring Squareness
Valve Spring Squareness
1. Measure the out-of-square on each valve spring.
- Turn the valve spring and observe the space between the top of the valve spring and the square.
Valve Spring Strength
Valve Spring Strength
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1808
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Use the Valve/Clutch Spring Pressure Gauge to check the valve spring for correct strength at the
specified valve spring length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1809
Valve Spring: Removal and Replacement
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
LH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring
LH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshafts
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1810
Coolant Pump Belt and Pulley
RH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1811
RH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshaft
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1812
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal
Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal
Removal
1. Remove the camshaft roller followers. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Roller
Follower See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Roller Follower.
2. NOTE: If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss of air pressure
will allow the valve(s) to fall into the cylinder. A
rubber band, tape or string wrapped around the end of the valve stem will prevent this from
happening.
Pressurize the cylinder using compressed air.
3. Using the Valve Spring Compressor, remove the key, retainer and the valve spring.
4. NOTE: Camshaft removed for clarity.
Remove the valve seal.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1813
1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve guide with clean engine oil.
Using the Valve Stem Oil Seal Installer, install the valve seal.
2. Using the Valve Spring Compressor, install the valve spring, retainer and key.
3. Install the camshaft roller followers. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Roller Follower
See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Roller Follower.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter
Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem Diameter
Valve Stem Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Measure the diameter of each intake and exhaust valve stem at the points shown. Verify the
diameter is within specification.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1818
Valve: Service and Repair Valve Inspection
Valve Inspection
1. Inspect the following valve areas:
1. The end of the stem for grooves or scoring.
2. The valve face and the edge for pits, grooves or scores.
3. The valve head for signs of burning, erosion, warpage and cracking.
4. The valve margin for wear.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1819
Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem To Valve Guide Clearance
Valve Stem to Valve Guide Clearance
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
NOTE: The valve stem diameter must be within specifications before checking valve stem-to-valve
guide clearance.
1. NOTE: If necessary, use a magnetic base.
Install a Valve Guide Clearance Gauge on the valve stem and install a Dial Indicator Gauge with
Holding Fixture. Lower the valve until the clearance gauge contacts the upper surface of the valve
guide.
2. Move the Valve Guide Clearance Gauge toward the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture
and zero the Dial Indicator Gauge. Move the
Valve Guide Clearance Gauge away from the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture and note
the reading. The reading will be DOUBLE the valve stem-to-valve guide clearance.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Diagrams
Drive Belt: Diagrams
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive Belt Routing
Accessory Drive Belt
Coolant Pump Drive Belt
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
NOTICE: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any
fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping
mechanism may occur.
Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of
a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley.
To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area
with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft
direction or at an angle to the straightedge.
Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on
an accessory pulley under certain conditions.
A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start up and shut down or during very rapid
engine acceleration and decelerations, such as:
- Wide Open Throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back-out shifts on automatic
transmissions.
- WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions.
These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias
required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or
reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur:
- if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged.
- the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked.
- the A/C anti-slugging strategy executes after a long hot heat soak.
- if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after
several minutes) exceeds specifications.
- if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All
accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory.
- if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has
been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power
steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with
clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a
localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt
and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and
rinsed with clean water.
- if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive
belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will
release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal
installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt.
- NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter > Page 1826
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
NOTICE: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may
cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys.
Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt
tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive
belt.
Incorrect Installation
Correct Installation
With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the
accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur.
Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking
condition exists, proceed with the following:
- Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting
pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the
mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of
alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises.
- With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the
pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary.
- Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any
interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference
condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
- Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware
to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1829
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt.
4. NOTE: Refer to the illustration for correct drive belt routing.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation
Drive Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation
Accessory Drive
Belt Tensioner
Automatic tensioners are calibrated to provide the correct amount of tension to the belt for a given
accessory drive system. Unless a spring or damping band within the tensioner assembly breaks, or
some other mechanical part of the tensioner fails, there is no need to check the tensioner for
correct tension.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind.
1. With the engine off, check routing of the accessory drive belt. Refer to the illustrations under
Accessory Drive See: Description and Operation in
the Description and Operation.
2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to
release.
Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, release the tension
on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt from the tensioner. Carry out the following tests:
- Using the release tool, move the tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full stroke and
back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make sure that
there is tension on the tensioner spring.
- Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition.
- Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination and
repair any leaks.
3. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the criteria in the previous step, install a new
tensioner. If the accessory drive belt tensioner
meets the criteria in the previous step, proceed to testing the tensioner dynamically.
4. If the tensioner is saturated with oil and grease internally, install a new tensioner.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Belt Tensioner - Mechanical > Page 1835
Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Belt Tensioner - Dynamics
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Belt Tensioner - Dynamics
The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows:
1. With the engine running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory
drive tensioner should move (respond) when the
A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory drive
belt tensioner movement is excessive without A/C clutch cycling or engine acceleration, check belt
rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can cause excessive
accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a new belt. If
excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory drive belt
tensioner.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Belt
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Belt
Coolant Pump Belt
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield.
3. Position the Stretchy Belt Remover under the coolant pump belt as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Belt > Page 1838
4. NOTE: Feed the Stretchy Belt Remover on to the camshaft coolant pump pulley approximately
90 degrees.
With the help of an assistant, turn the crankshaft clockwise and feed the Stretchy Belt Remover
evenly on the camshaft coolant pump pulley as shown.
5. Remove the coolant pump belt.
- Fold the Stretchy Belt Remover over the top of the coolant pump belt.
- In one quick motion, pull the Stretchy Belt Remover up and toward the RH front of the vehicle
removing the coolant pump belt.
Installation
1. Install the coolant pump belt on the coolant pump pulley and position it on the camshaft pulley.
2. NOTICE: Do not use any screwdrivers, pliers or other metal objects that could cause damage to
the belt or camshaft pulley while
installing the belt.
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to seat the coolant pump belt on the camshaft pulley.
3. Install the RH lower splash shield, pin-type retainer and 5 bolts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Belt > Page 1839
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Belt > Page 1840
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt.
4. Remove the 3 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. NOTE: Refer to the illustration for correct drive belt routing.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Mount: Procedures
Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount Neutralizing
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate system and procedure for special instructions on loosening and
tightening mount fasteners.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners.
3. Lower the vehicle.
4. NOTICE: Do not twist or strain the powertrain/drivetrain mounts or damage to the mounts may
occur.
Start the vehicle and move it in forward 0.6-1.2 m (2-4 ft). Then move the vehicle in reverse the
same distance.
5. Raise and support the vehicle.
6. Tighten the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners.
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. Test the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1845
Engine Mount: Removal and Replacement
Engine Support Insulators
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Lower Intake Manifold
See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Lower Intake Manifold.
2. Remove the engine support insulator bracket bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1846
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
3. Install the Engine Support Bar, Universal Adapter Brackets and a suitable piece of chain in the
following sequence.
1. Position the 2 Universal Adapter Brackets on top of the cylinder block.
2. Install 2 M8 x 1.25 x 36 mm (1.41 in) bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Use a suitable piece of chain.
4. Fasten the chain to the 2 Universal Adapter Brackets with a suitable nut, washer and bolt.
4. Using the Engine Support Bar, lift the engine 12 mm (0.47 in).
5. Remove the nut and ground wire eyelet from the engine support insulator bracket stud.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. Remove the 3 nuts and the engine support insulator bracket.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
7. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine support insulator.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler
Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair
Idler Pulley: Service and Repair
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil pressure (Minimum at 1,500 rpm with engine warmed up after 10 minutes of
idling).............................................................................172 kPa (25 psi)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1854
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Oil Pressure Test
1. Disconnect and remove the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch from the engine.
2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port.
3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached.
4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading.
5. The oil pressure should be within specifications; for additional information, refer to the
specification chart in the appropriate engine system.
6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources:
- Insufficient oil
- Oil leakage
- Worn or damaged oil pump
- Oil pump screen cover and tube
- Excessive main bearing clearance
- Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance
- Chain tensioner leak
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components Exploded View
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1859
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1860
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Oil Level Indicator and Tube
Oil Level Indicator and Tube
Oil Level Indicator and Tube
Upper Radiator Support Brackets
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1861
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe and the ACL.
2. Detach the upper radiator hose from the 2 retaining clips on the cooling fan shroud.
- Position the hose aside.
3. Remove the 4 upper radiator support bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. Remove the oil level indicator.
5. Remove the 3 bolts and position aside the heat shield.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the oil level indicator tube.
7. Remove the stud bolt and then remove the oil level indicator tube by guiding it between the
radiator support and the cooling fan.
- Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. NOTE: Install a new O-ring seal and lubricate with clean engine oil.
NOTE: Installation of the oil level indicator may require the assistance of a second technician to
align the tube with the orifice.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 5.7 Liters (6.0 Qt)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1866
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
Ford Part Name
....................................................................................................................................... Motorcraft
SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Ford Part Number ...................................................................
...................................................................................................................... XO-5W20-QSP Ford
Specification
.........................................................................................................................................
WSS-M2C930-A with API Certification Mark
Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component
Information > Tools and Equipment
Oil Cooler: Tools and Equipment
1/2" Oil Cooler Line Rem.
AST tool# 8023
Used to disconnect 1/2" transmission oil cooler lines.
- Used for R and R of Transmission Oil Cooler Lines
- Orange-Anodized Aluminum Construction
- Quick line removal
- Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set
- Fits 2009 Escape with 6F Trans
- Fits Ford Edge
Contact AST for pricing.
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943
This Tool is also available in the following kits:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component
Information > Tools and Equipment > Page 1870
8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter
Removal
1. Remove the camshaft phaser and sprocket. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Phaser
and Sprocket See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push
Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket.
2. NOTE: RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) system oil filter shown, LH similar.
Remove and discard the VCT system oil filter from the camshaft.
Installation
1. NOTE: RH VCT system oil filter shown, LH similar.
Install the new VCT system oil filter in the camshaft.
2. Install the camshaft phaser and sprocket. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Phaser
and Sprocket See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push
Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Pan: Specifications
Install the 2 oil pan-to-transaxle bolts. Tighten to.................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................40 Nm (30 lb-ft)
Tighten the oil pan-to-engine bolts in the sequence shown
to........................................................................................................................25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Tighten the 4 M6 oil pan baffle nuts in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to...................................................
.......................................................................................................................................5 Nm (44
lb-in). Stage 2: Tighten an additional....................................................................................................
.............................................................................45 degrees.
Then install and tighten the 4 M8 oil pan baffle nuts in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to.........................
.............................................................................................................................................................
15 Nm (133 lb-in). Stage 2: Tighten an additional................................................................................
.................................................................................................45 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1879
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1880
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan
Oil Pan
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe.
3. Drain the engine oil and install the drain plug.
- Tighten to 26 Nm (19 lb-ft).
4. Remove and discard the oil filter.
5. Remove the access cover.
6. Remove the 2 oil pan-to-transaxle bolts.
7. Remove the 15 bolts and the oil pan.
- Remove and discard the oil pan gasket.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths.
Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of the oil pan gasket.
- Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface prep and install a new oil pan gasket.
2. NOTE: The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of sealant
application.
Apply a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter dot of silicone sealant to the areas indicated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1881
3. Position the oil pan and loosely install the bolts.
4. Install the 2 oil pan-to-transaxle bolts.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Tighten the oil pan-to-engine bolts in the sequence shown to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. Install the access cover.
7. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing.
Install a new oil filter.
- Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees.
8. Install the exhaust Y-pipe.
9. Fill the engine with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1882
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and
Pickup Tube
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1883
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1884
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Baffle
Oil Pan Baffle
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the oil pump screen and pickup tube. For additional information, refer to Engine
Lubrication Components - Exploded View See: Engine
Lubrication Components - Exploded View and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube See: Oil Pick
Up/Strainer/Service and Repair/Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube.
3. Remove the 8 nuts and the oil pan baffle in the following sequence.
1. To install, tighten the 4 M6 oil pan baffle nuts in 2 stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten an additional 45 degrees.
2. Then install and tighten the 4 M8 oil pan baffle nuts in 2 stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten an additional 45 degrees.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1888
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1889
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing.
Remove the engine oil filter.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees.
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
- To install, tighten to 14 Nm (124 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1894
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1895
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup
Tube
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles
NOTE: Automatic transmission shown, manual transmission similar.
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1896
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the oil pan. For additional information, refer to Engine Lubrication Components Exploded View See: Oil Pan/Service and
Repair/Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View and Oil Pan See: Oil Pan/Service and
Repair/Oil Pan.
3. Remove the bolts the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
- Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. Install a new O-ring seal on the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
- Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
2. Install the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
1. Position the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
2. Install the bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Install the oil pan. For additional information, refer to Oil Pan See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Oil
Pan.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1897
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump
Screen and Pickup Tube
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan, Oil Pan Baffle and Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1898
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil pressure (Minimum at 1,500 rpm with engine warmed up after 10 minutes of
idling).............................................................................172 kPa (25 psi)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1903
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Oil Pressure Test
1. Disconnect and remove the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch from the engine.
2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port.
3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached.
4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading.
5. The oil pressure should be within specifications; for additional information, refer to the
specification chart in the appropriate engine system.
6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources:
- Insufficient oil
- Oil leakage
- Worn or damaged oil pump
- Oil pump screen cover and tube
- Excessive main bearing clearance
- Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance
- Chain tensioner leak
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch,
Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control
gains and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Intake Manifold
Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Manifold
Position the lower intake manifold and install the 8 bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown to.............
.....................................................................................................................................................10
Nm (89 lb-in).
Position the upper intake manifold and install the 7 bolts. Tighten the bolts in 2 stages in the
sequence shown. Stage 1: Tighten to..................................................................................................
......................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Stage 2: Tighten an additio
nal.........................................................................................................................................................
........................45 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Intake Manifold > Page 1911
Intake Manifold: Specifications Throttle Body
To install, tighten to..............................................................................................................................
.........................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Upper Intake Manifold
Upper Intake Manifold
Upper Intake Manifold (View 1 of 2)
Upper Intake Manifold (View 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1914
Removal
1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe and the ACL.
2. Remove the EGR tube fitting from the EGR valve.
3. Disconnect the electronic throttle control electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the EGR regulator electrical connector and detach the wiring retainer.
6. Disconnect the EVAP tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling and the brake
booster vacuum tube from the upper intake
manifold.
7. Detach the engine control wiring harness retainer from the upper intake manifold.
8. Disconnect the PCV tube from the upper intake manifold.
9. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) electrical connector and detach the wiring
retainer.
10. Remove the 2 upper intake manifold support bracket bolts from the upper intake manifold.
11. Remove the 7 bolts and the upper intake manifold.
- Remove and discard the gaskets.
Installation
1. NOTICE: If the engine is repaired or replaced because of upper engine failure, typically including
valve or piston damage, check the
intake manifold for metal debris. If metal debris is found, install a new intake manifold. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in engine damage.
NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install new gaskets.
Position the upper intake manifold and install the 7 bolts.
- Tighten the bolts in 2 stages in the sequence shown. Stage 1: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten an additional 45 degrees.
2. Install the 2 upper intake manifold support bracket bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Connect the MAP electrical connector and attach the wiring retainer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1915
4. Connect the PCV tube to the upper intake manifold.
5. Attach the engine control wiring harness retainer to the upper intake manifold.
6. Connect the EVAP tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling and the brake
booster vacuum tube to the upper intake manifold.
7. Connect the EGR regulator electrical connector and attach the wiring retainer.
8. Connect the EVAP canister purge valve electrical connector.
9. Connect the electronic throttle control electrical connector.
10. Install the EGR tube fitting to the EGR valve.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
11. Install the ACL outlet pipe and the ACL.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1916
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Lower Intake Manifold
Lower Intake Manifold
Removal
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the fuel rail.
4. Remove the 8 lower intake manifold bolts and the lower intake manifold.
- Remove and discard the gaskets.
Installation
1. NOTICE: If the engine is repaired or replaced because of upper engine failure, typically including
valve or piston damage, check the
intake manifold for metal debris. If metal debris is found, install a new intake manifold. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in engine damage.
NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install new gaskets.
Position the lower intake manifold and install the 8 bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1917
- Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Install the fuel rail.
3. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Rear Seal
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the flexplate. For additional information, refer to Flexplate See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair.
3. Using the Slide Hammer and the Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the
crankshaft rear oil seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface prep.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal > Page 1923
NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the seal lip and seal bore before installing the seal.
Using the Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal Installer Bolts and the Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal
Installer, install the crankshaft rear oil seal.
2. Install the flexplate. For additional information, refer to Flexplate See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal > Page 1924
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Exploded View - Flexplate and Rear Seal
Lower End Components - Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal
Flexplate and Rear Seal
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Front Seal
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Front Seal
Crankshaft Front Seal
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Crankshaft Pulley See:
Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Crankshaft Pulley.
3. Using the Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface prep.
Apply clean engine oil to the seal lip and seal bore before installing the seal.
2. Using the Front Cover Oil Seal Installer and the Crankshaft Vibration Damper Installer, install a
new crankshaft front seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Front Seal > Page 1929
3. Install the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder
Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Crankshaft Pulley.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Front Seal > Page 1930
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Exploded View - Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal
Lower End Components - Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal
Flexplate and Rear Seal
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal
Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal
Removal
1. Remove the camshaft roller followers. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Roller
Follower See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push
Rods/Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Roller
Follower.
2. NOTE: If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss of air pressure
will allow the valve(s) to fall into the cylinder. A
rubber band, tape or string wrapped around the end of the valve stem will prevent this from
happening.
Pressurize the cylinder using compressed air.
3. Using the Valve Spring Compressor, remove the key, retainer and the valve spring.
4. NOTE: Camshaft removed for clarity.
Remove the valve seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve guide with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal > Page 1935
Using the Valve Stem Oil Seal Installer, install the valve seal.
2. Using the Valve Spring Compressor, install the valve spring, retainer and key.
3. Install the camshaft roller followers. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Roller Follower
See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker
Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Roller Follower.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal > Page 1936
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
LH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring
LH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshafts
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal > Page 1937
Coolant Pump Belt and Pulley
RH Side Roller Follower, Hydraulic Lash Adjuster and Valve Spring
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal > Page 1938
RH Side Intake and Exhaust Camshaft
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal > Page 1939
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1944
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1945
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing.
Remove the engine oil filter.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees.
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
- To install, tighten to 14 Nm (124 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature
Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control
gains and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Tighten the 3 LH camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts
to..............................................................................................................................18 Nm (159 lb-in)
Tighten the 3 RH camshaft phaser and sprocket bolts
to.............................................................................................................................18 Nm (159 lb-in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Diagrams
Timing Chain: Diagrams
NOTICE: Failure to verify correct timing drive component alignment will result in severe engine
damage.
Install the crankshaft sprocket with the timing mark facing out. The timing mark on the LH and RH
timing chains will be aligned to this mark during assembly.
If timing marks in the timing chains are not evident, use a permanent-type marker to mark the
crankshaft and camshaft timing marks on the LH and RH timing chains.
1. Mark any link to use as the crankshaft timing mark. 2. Starting with the crankshaft timing mark,
count 29 links and mark the link. 3. Continue counting to link 42 and mark the link.
Position the LH timing chain and guide and install the bolts. - Align the marks on the timing chain
with the marks on the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets.
Install the crankshaft pulley bolt and rotate the crankshaft clockwise 120 degrees until the
crankshaft keyway is in the 3 o'clock position.
Verify that the RH camshafts are correctly positioned.
Install the RH timing chain and chain guide and install the bolts. - Align the marks on the timing
chain with the marks on the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 1956
Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise 120 degrees to TDC.
NOTICE: Failure to verify correct timing drive component alignment will result in severe engine
damage.
Verify the timing with the following steps.
1. There should be 12 chain links between the camshaft timing marks. 2. There should be 27 chain
links between the camshaft and the crankshaft timing marks. 3. There should be 30 chain links
between the camshaft and the crankshaft timing marks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Tighten to..............................................................................................................................................
.........................................................25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1960
Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair
Timing Drive Components
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine failure.
NOTICE: Failure to verify correct timing drive component alignment will result in severe engine
damage.
1. Remove the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover See:
Timing Cover/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs.
3. NOTE: This pulse wheel is used in several different engines. Install the pulse wheel with the
keyway in the slot stamped "30RFF" (orange in
color).
Remove the ignition pulse wheel.
4. Install the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
5. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to position the crankshaft keyway in the 11 o'clock position and
position the camshafts in the correct position. This
will position the No. 1 cylinder at Top Dead Center (TDC). Verify that the camshafts are correctly located. If not, rotate the crankshaft one additional turn and
recheck.
6. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise 120 degrees to the 3 o'clock position to position the RH
camshafts in the neutral position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1961
7. Verify that the RH camshafts are in the neutral position.
8. Remove the RH timing chain tensioner arm.
1. Remove the 2 bolts.
2. Remove the tensioner.
3. Remove the tensioner arm.
9. Remove the 2 bolts and the RH timing chain guide.
- Remove the RH timing chain from the engine.
10. Rotate the crankcase clockwise 600 degrees (one and two-third turns) to position the
crankcase keyway in the 11 o'clock position. This will
position the LH camshafts in the neutral position.
11. Verify the LH camshafts are in the neutral position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1962
12. Remove the LH timing chain and tensioner arm.
1. Remove the 2 bolts.
2. Remove the tensioner.
3. Remove the tensioner arm.
13. Remove the 2 bolts and the LH timing chain guide.
- Remove the LH timing chain from the engine.
14. Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt and the crankshaft sprocket.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Failure to verify correct timing drive component alignment will result in severe engine
damage.
Install the crankshaft sprocket with the timing mark facing out. The timing mark on the LH and RH
timing chains will be aligned to this mark during assembly.
2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Position the chain tensioner in a soft-jawed vise.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1963
3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Hold the chain tensioner ratchet lock mechanism away from the ratchet stem with a small pick.
4. NOTICE: During tensioner compression, do not release the ratchet stem until the tensioner
piston is fully bottomed in its bore or damage
to the ratchet stem will result.
Slowly compress the timing chain tensioner.
5. Retain the tensioner piston with a 1.5 mm (0.06 in) diameter wire or paper clip.
6. If timing marks in the timing chains are not evident, use a permanent-type marker to mark the
crankshaft and camshaft timing marks on the LH and
RH timing chains.
1. Mark any link to use as the crankshaft timing mark.
2. Starting with the crankshaft timing mark, count 29 links and mark the link.
3. Continue counting to link 42 and mark the link.
7. Position the LH timing chain and guide and install the bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Align the marks on the timing chain with the marks on the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1964
8. Install the LH timing chain tensioner arm and the LH timing chain tensioner.
1. Install the tensioner arm.
2. Position the tensioner.
3. Install the bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
9. Install the crankshaft pulley bolt and rotate the crankshaft clockwise 120 degrees until the
crankshaft keyway is in the 3 o'clock position.
10. Verify that the RH camshafts are correctly positioned.
11. Install the RH timing chain and chain guide and install the bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Align the marks on the timing chain with the marks on the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets.
12. Install the RH timing chain tensioner and tensioner arm.
1. Install the tensioner arm.
2. Position the tensioner.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1965
3. Install the bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
13. Remove the LH and RH timing chain tensioner piston retaining wires.
14. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise 120 degrees to TDC.
15. NOTICE: Failure to verify correct timing drive component alignment will result in severe engine
damage.
Verify the timing with the following steps.
1. There should be 12 chain links between the camshaft timing marks.
2. There should be 27 chain links between the camshaft and the crankshaft timing marks.
3. There should be 30 chain links between the camshaft and the crankshaft timing marks.
16. Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
17. NOTE: This pulse wheel is used in several different engines. Install the pulse wheel with the
keyway in the slot stamped "30RFF" only (orange in
color).
Install the ignition pulse wheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1966
18. Install the LH and RH spark plugs.
19. Install the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover See:
Timing Cover/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications
Timing Cover: Specifications
Position the front cover and install the bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown..............
....................................................................................................................................................to 25
Nm (18 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1970
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
Engine Front Cover
Engine Front Cover (View 1 of 3)
Engine Front Cover (View 2 of 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1971
Engine Front Cover (View 3 of 3)
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Release the fuel system pressure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1972
3. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
4. Remove the crankshaft front seal. For additional information, refer to Lower End Components Exploded View See: Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Lower End Components - Exploded View and Crankshaft Front Seal See: Seals
and Gaskets/Front Crankshaft Seal/Service and Repair/Crankshaft Front Seal.
5. Remove the generator bolt and the 2 nuts.
6. Remove the stud and position the generator away from the engine.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner.
8. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the engine front cover stud bolt.
9. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the 2 Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connectors and detach the wiring
harness retainer from the engine front cover stud
bolt.
11. Remove the LH and RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoids.
12. Remove the engine support insulator. For additional information, refer to Engine Support
Insulators See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and
Accessories/Engine Mount/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
13. Remove the 2 oil pan-to-front cover bolts.
14. Remove the 14 bolts, 2 stud bolts and the engine front cover.
- Remove and discard the gaskets.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths.
NOTICE: Do not damage the oil pan gasket while cleaning the sealant from the lower cylinder
block-to-oil pan joint.
Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of sealant.
- Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface prep and install new gaskets.
2. NOTE: The engine front cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of
applying sealant.
Apply a 6 mm (0.23 in) diameter dot of silicone gasket and sealer to the cylinder block, lower
cylinder block, cylinder head and oil pan mating surfaces.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1973
3. Position the engine front cover and install the bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown to 25 Nm (18
lb-ft).
4. Install the 2 oil pan-to-front cover bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the engine oil.
- Install the plug and tighten to 26 Nm (19 lb-ft).
6. Install the engine support insulator. For additional information, refer to Engine Support Insulators
See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and
Accessories/Engine Mount/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
7. Install the LH and RH VCT oil control solenoids.
8. Connect the 2 CMP sensor electrical connectors and attach the wiring harness retainer to the
engine front cover stud bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1974
9. Connect the CKP electrical connector.
10. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the engine front cover stud bolt.
11. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the 3 bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
12. Position the generator and install the stud.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
13. Install the generator bolt and 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
14. Install the crankshaft front seal. For additional information, refer to Lower End Components Exploded View See: Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Lower End Components - Exploded View and Crankshaft Front Seal See: Seals
and Gaskets/Front Crankshaft Seal/Service and Repair/Crankshaft Front Seal.
15. Fill the engine with clean engine oil.
16. Connect the battery ground cable.
17. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable
Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's
Set
TSB 10-19-1
10/11/10
3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/1/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion
2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List
and production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L
engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010.
a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for
normal diagnostics.
b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2.
2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable
camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET
AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF
DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE
INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES
THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs.
Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable
Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 1984
101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs.
Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT
Solenoid DTC's Set
TSB 10-19-1
10/11/10
3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/1/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion
2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List
and production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L
engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010.
a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for
normal diagnostics.
b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2.
2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable
camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET
AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF
DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE
INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES
THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs.
Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 1990
101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs.
Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page
1993
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page
1996
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1997
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
Overview
The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function
of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT systems.
- Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have four operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default
mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM)
determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant
temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine
RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine
power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque.
In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the
overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS
and DEPS systems are used.
The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the Testing and Inspection
section. For additional information, refer to the Engine System - General Information. Verification of
incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a
stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If
the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are
primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine System - General
Information.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank.
A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant
temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP,
throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions
of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft
position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft
position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not
operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The
PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1998
achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position
error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a
default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When
the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil
pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil
flow.
VCT System
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Variable Valve Timing Filter: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter
Removal
1. Remove the camshaft phaser and sprocket. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Phaser
and Sprocket See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push
Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket.
2. NOTE: RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) system oil filter shown, LH similar.
Remove and discard the VCT system oil filter from the camshaft.
Installation
1. NOTE: RH VCT system oil filter shown, LH similar.
Install the new VCT system oil filter in the camshaft.
2. Install the camshaft phaser and sprocket. For additional information, refer to Camshaft Phaser
and Sprocket See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push
Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH or RH valve cover.
2. Remove the 2 bolts and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2009
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L
engines do not have a Schrader valve.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect
Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine
5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2010
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve.
Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine
7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and
Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
All vehicles
9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure
and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP fuse.
10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle
Speed > System Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Measured/PID Values
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 689.5 RPM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
TSB 11-3-5
03/15/11
3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or
before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner
housing.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-12.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe
Comes Loose
TSB 11-3-5
03/15/11
3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or
before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner
housing.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-12.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 2039
Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification
Engine
Engine Cylinder Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark plug gap.....................................................................................................................................
....................................1.15-1.25 mm (0.045-0.048 in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 2044
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark plugs...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................15 Nm (133 lb-in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2045
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................CGSF-22F
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2046
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
- Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
- Install a new spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
- Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
- Correct the oil leak concern.
- Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
- Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2047
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
- Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2050
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2051
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See:
Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur
to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the gap as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2052
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2053
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2054
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition RH
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2055
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest
reading is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2059
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position.
3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Using a new gasket, install the coolant pump and the 3 bolts. Tighten to............................................
........................................................................................................................................................15
Nm (133 lb-in).
Install the 5 coolant pump housing bolts. Tighten to............................................................................
..........................................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Coolant Pump
Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump
Coolant Pump - 3.0L (4V)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and
Repair.
3. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
4. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing.
5. Remove the coolant pump belt.
6. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump.
- Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. Using a new gasket, install the coolant pump and the 3 bolts.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
2. Install the coolant pump belt.
3. Connect the lower radiator hose to the thermostat housing.
4. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
5. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling
System/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Coolant Pump > Page 2065
Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Housing
Coolant Pump Housing - 3.0L (4V)
Coolant Hoses
Coolant Pump Housing
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Coolant Pump > Page 2066
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on the hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and
Repair.
3. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
4. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing.
5. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing.
6. Disconnect both heater hoses from the coolant pump housing.
7. Remove the 3 bolts, 2 nuts and the coolant pump housing.
- Remove and discard the O-ring seals and gasket.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new O-ring seals and gasket.
9. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Coolant Pump > Page 2067
System/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair
Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the engine coolant.
3. Remove the LH lower engine splash shield.
4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose.
5. Release the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose.
6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly.
9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other
detergents.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 2072
- Fill the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant Capacity
Coolant ................................................................................................................................................
............................................. 9.5 Quarts ( 9.0 Liters )
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2077
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
ENGINE COOLANT
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored)
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................. VC-7-B
Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................
................................................ WSS-M97B51-A1
NOTE: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair
Coolant Inlet Pipe - 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on the hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
3. Remove the Throttle Body (TB).
4. Remove the 2 coolant inlet pipe housing bolts.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the coolant inlet pipe from the coolant inlet pipe hose.
- Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. Remove and inspect the O-ring seal, install new seal if necessary.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine coolant.
8. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair
Degas Bottle
Removal and Installation
1. WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do not unscrew
the coolant pressure relief cap when the
engine is operating or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and
hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
Release the pressure in the cooling system by slowly turning the pressure relief cap one half turn
counterclockwise. When the pressure is released, remove the pressure relief cap.
2. Using hose clamp pliers, clamp the degas bottle-to-radiator hose.
3. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the coolant from the degas bottle.
4. Disconnect the radiator-to-degas bottle hose from the degas bottle.
5. Remove the 2 degas bottle nuts.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
6. Lift the degas bottle up and disconnect the degas bottle-to-radiator hose.
- Remove the degas bottle.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
8. Fill the degas bottle. Refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and
Repair for the recommended coolant mixture and
fill level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 > Page 2089
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 > Page 2090
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2093
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2094
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2095
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2096
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2097
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2098
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2099
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2100
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2101
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2102
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2103
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2104
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2105
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2106
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2107
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2108
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2109
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2110
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2111
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2112
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2113
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fan Control
The PCM monitors certain parameters (such as engine coolant temperature, vehicle speed, A/C
on/off status, A/C pressure) to determine engine cooling fan needs.
For variable speed electric fan(s):
The PCM controls the fan speed and operation using a duty cycle output on the fan control variable
(FCV) circuit. The fan controller (located at or integral to the engine cooling fan assembly) receives
the FCV command and operates the cooling fan at the speed requested (by varying the power
applied to the fan motor).
FCV Duty Cycle Output From PCM (Negative Duty Cycle)
For relay controlled fans:
The PCM controls the fan operation through the fan control (FC), (single speed fan applications),
low fan control (LFC), medium fan control (MFC), and high fan control (HFC) outputs. Some
applications will have the xFC circuit wired to 2 separate relays.
For 3-speed fans, although the PCM output circuits are called low, medium, and high fan control
cooling fan speed is controlled by a combination of these outputs. Refer to the following table.
2.0L Focus (with A/C): PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds
2.5L Escape: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2114
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2.5L vehicles only
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2115
All vehicles
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the 2 front impact severity sensors. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers.
6. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Loosen the nut, remove the 2 bolts and position aside the hood latch.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Remove the 2 wiring harness retainers from the radiator support.
9. Remove the center support bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2.5L vehicles only
10. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector.
11. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose from the radiator and position it aside.
All vehicles
12. Disconnect the 2 cooling fan electrical connectors and wire harness retainers.
13. Remove the 2 cooling fan bolts and the cooling fan motor and shroud.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2.5L vehicles only
15. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 2120
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 2121
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2124
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2125
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2126
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2127
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2128
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fan Speed Sensor (FSS)
The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a
waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a
relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch
speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the
frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan
clutch. For additional information on the cooling fan clutch, refer to the Cooling Fan Clutch.
Cooling Fan Clutch with Fan Speed Sensor (FSS)
Cooling Fan Clutch with FSS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fan Clutch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Cooling Fan Clutch
The cooling fan clutch is an electrically actuated viscous clutch that consists of three main
elements:
- a working chamber
- a reservoir chamber
- a cooling fan clutch actuator valve and a fan speed sensor (FSS)
The cooling fan clutch actuator valve controls the fluid flow from the reservoir into the working
chamber. Once viscous fluid is in the working chamber, shearing of the fluid results in fan rotation.
The cooling fan clutch actuator valve is activated with a pulse width modulated (PWM) output
signal from the PCM. By opening and closing the fluid port valve, the PCM can control the cooling
fan clutch speed. The cooling fan clutch speed is measured by a Hall-effect sensor and is
monitored by the PCM during closed loop operation.
The PCM optimizes fan speed based on engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature
(EOT), transmission fluid temperature (TFT), intake air temperature (IAT), or air conditioning
requirements. When an increased demand for fan speed is requested for vehicle cooling, the PCM
monitors the fan speed through the Hall-effect sensor. If a fan speed increase is required, the PCM
outputs the PWM signal to the fluid port, providing the required fan speed increase.
Cooling Fan Clutch with Fan Speed Sensor (FSS)
Cooling Fan Clutch with Fan Speed Sensor (FSS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2135
Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005
Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan.
2009 Suggested user price: $41.20
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2140
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2144
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2145
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant
temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a
fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern
such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to
major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy,
the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For
additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Typical CHT Sensor
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2146
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced.
1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Fan Shroud: Service and Repair
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2.5L vehicles only
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2150
All vehicles
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the 2 front impact severity sensors. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers.
6. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Loosen the nut, remove the 2 bolts and position aside the hood latch.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Remove the 2 wiring harness retainers from the radiator support.
9. Remove the center support bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2.5L vehicles only
10. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector.
11. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose from the radiator and position it aside.
All vehicles
12. Disconnect the 2 cooling fan electrical connectors and wire harness retainers.
13. Remove the 2 cooling fan bolts and the cooling fan motor and shroud.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2.5L vehicles only
15. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Heater Core
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core
1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the
Plugged Heater Core component test before the heater
core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as
follows:
Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant
leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in
the heater core.
2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of
non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the
heater hose connection and damage the heater core.
Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 2155
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Plugged
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Plugged
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level.
2. Start the engine and turn on the heater.
3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and outlet
hoses to see if they are hot.
4. If the outlet only is not hot:
- the heater core may have an air pocket.
- the heater core may be plugged.
5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 2156
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Pressure Test
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Pressure Test
Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test.
1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube.
4. Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter
BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater
hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the
heater core.
7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes.
8. If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the
heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the
vehicle.
9. Carry out the Bench Test. See: Heater Core - Bench Test
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 2157
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Bench Test
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Bench Test
1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle.
2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core.
3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then
connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 2158
Heater Core: Service and Repair
Heater Core
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
NOTE: Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle.
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater
Core And Evaporator Core Housing See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the dash panel seal.
3. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the heater core.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Radiator: Service and Repair
Radiator - 3.0L (4V)
Radiator Hoses
Radiator
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 2162
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
3. Remove the cooling fan motor and shroud. For additional information, refer to Cooling Fan Motor
and Shroud See: Radiator Cooling
Fan/Radiator Cooling Fan Motor/Service and Repair.
4. Disconnect the radiator-to-degas bottle hose and upper radiator hose from the radiator.
5. Disconnect the degas bottle-to-radiator hose from the radiator.
6. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the radiator.
7. Remove the 2 A/C condenser-to-radiator bolts and position aside the A/C condenser from the
radiator.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Remove the radiator.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 2168
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 2169
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2172
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2173
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2174
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2175
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2176
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fan Speed Sensor (FSS)
The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a
waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a
relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch
speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the
frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan
clutch. For additional information on the cooling fan clutch, refer to the Cooling Fan Clutch.
Cooling Fan Clutch with Fan Speed Sensor (FSS)
Cooling Fan Clutch with FSS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2185
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2189
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2190
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant
temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a
fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern
such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to
major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy,
the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For
additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Typical CHT Sensor
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2191
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced.
1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications
Thermostat: Specifications
Thermostat Opening Temperature
Thermostat fully open (2.5L).................................................................................................................
............................................................106°C (223°F) Thermostat fully open (3.0L 4V).......................
...............................................................................................................................................98.9°C
(210°F)
Thermostat starts to open (2.5L)..........................................................................................................
................................................................90°C (194°F) Thermostat starts to open (3.0L 4V)...............
.................................................................................................................................84°c-88°C
(183°F-190°F)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2195
Thermostat: Testing and Inspection
Engine Cooling
Component Tests
Thermostat
A new thermostat should be installed only after the following tests and checks have been carried
out:
- Pinpoint Test A, B or C
- Thermostat Visual Inspection
Thermostat Visual Inspection
1. Remove the thermostat.
2. Examine the thermostat for signs of damage including:
- Valve not fully seated (light visible through the valve)
- Foreign material lodged in the main valve
- Bent or broken frame or flange
- Bent or broken spring
- Bent or broken valve or valve stem
- Wax leaking from wax reservoir or a bulge in the reservoir
- Any other damage or distortion
3. NOTE: If no damage is found during the inspection, do not attempt to open the thermostat using
hot water or other heat sources. This method is
not an accurate means to test the function of the thermostat and may damage the thermostat.
If damage is found during the inspection, remove any foreign material or broken pieces and install
a new thermostat.
4. If no damage is found during the inspection, continue troubleshooting the system concern. Go to
the Symptom Chart for further instructions. See:
Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2196
Thermostat: Service and Repair
Thermostat - 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
3. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing.
4. NOTE: To install, lubricate the thermostat housing O-ring seal with clean engine coolant.
Remove the 2 bolts, thermostat housing cover, O-ring seal and thermostat.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Clean and inspect the O-ring seal. Install a new seal if necessary.
6. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Using a new gasket, install the coolant pump and the 3 bolts. Tighten to............................................
........................................................................................................................................................15
Nm (133 lb-in).
Install the 5 coolant pump housing bolts. Tighten to............................................................................
..........................................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Coolant Pump
Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump
Coolant Pump - 3.0L (4V)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
3. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
4. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing.
5. Remove the coolant pump belt.
6. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump.
- Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. Using a new gasket, install the coolant pump and the 3 bolts.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
2. Install the coolant pump belt.
3. Connect the lower radiator hose to the thermostat housing.
4. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
5. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Coolant Pump > Page 2202
Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Housing
Coolant Pump Housing - 3.0L (4V)
Coolant Hoses
Coolant Pump Housing
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Coolant Pump > Page 2203
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on the hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
3. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
4. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing.
5. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing.
6. Disconnect both heater hoses from the coolant pump housing.
7. Remove the 3 bolts, 2 nuts and the coolant pump housing.
- Remove and discard the O-ring seals and gasket.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new O-ring seals and gasket.
9. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
Catalyst and Exhaust Systems
Overview
The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine
exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N),
carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of
nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air pollutants
of CO, NOx, and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The
catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle
applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic
converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the
powertrain control module (PCM). For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the
description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness
Codes/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor.
For most vehicles, only two HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors
(HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the ones after the
catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some partial zero
emission vehicles (PZEVs) use three HO2Ss. The stream 1 sensor (HO2S11) located before the
catalyst is used for primary fuel control, the stream 2 sensor (HO2S12) is used to monitor the
light-off catalyst, and the stream 3 sensor (HO2S13) located after the catalyst is used for long term
fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (fore aft oxygen sensor control).
V-Engines
V-Engines
In-Line Engines
In-Line Engines
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The
concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated
ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust
gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The
catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components
so they are used up as much as possible.
Light Off Catalyst
As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency
exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C
(475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalytic converter (TWC) that is located as
close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the
exhaust manifold it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located
under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion
efficiency for that
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 2208
catalyst.
Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Conversion Efficiency
A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high
conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly
controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly
decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO
conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency.
TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart
TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart
Exhaust System
The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the
atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the
catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe
before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and
NOx in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed
from the catalytic converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into
the muffler. Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust
tailpipe.
On some PZEV, there is a total of three HO2Ss in the exhaust stream. One near the exhaust
manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream 2), and the third (stream 3) is
mounted after the light-off catalyst.
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 H2OS Configuration
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 3 H2OS Configuration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 2209
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 3 HO2S Configuration
Underbody Catalyst
The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line
with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to two light off catalysts,
forming a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a
specific vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System for the exhaust system exploded view.
Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter
The TWC contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The
TWC catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of
NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio
at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2Ss provide the PCM with information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. For
additional information on the HO2S, refer to Engine Control Components See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control
Components.
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold
Catalytic Converter - 3.0L LH Manifold
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 6 retainers and the passenger side splash shield.
3. Remove the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S).
4. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt.
5. Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
6. Remove the 3 bolts and position the A/C compressor aside.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH catalytic converter heat shield.
8. Remove exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L See: Exhaust
Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Y-Pipe.
9. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold nuts.
10. Remove the LH catalytic converter manifold from the vehicle.
- Discard the gasket.
11. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold studs.
12. Clean and inspect the LH catalytic converter manifold.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2212
Installation
1. Install the 6 new LH catalytic converter manifold studs.
- Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
2. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the
exhaust Y-pipe will cause the converter to
develop an exhaust leak.
NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the
converter to develop an exhaust leak.
Using a new gasket, install the LH catalytic converter and the 6 nuts. Tighten in 2 stages in the
sequence shown.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. Install the exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L See:
Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Y-Pipe.
4. Install the LH catalytic converter heat shield and the 3 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Position the A/C compressor and install the 3 bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. Connect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
7. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and install the accessory drive belt.
8. Install the LH HO2S.
9. Install the passenger side splash shield and the 6 retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2213
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2214
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - RH
Catalytic Converter - 3.0L RH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L See:
Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Y-Pipe.
2. Disconnect the RH Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. Remove and discard the 3 RH catalytic converter nuts and remove the converter.
- Discard the RH catalytic converter gasket.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new gasket and nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2215
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View
Exhaust System - Exploded View
2.5L
3.0L (View 1 of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2216
3.0L (View 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2217
2.5L Hybrid
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2218
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2219
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Underbody
Catalytic Converter - Underbody
Removal
NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator
to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
NOTE: The production catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a one-piece construction. The
service catalytic converter and muffler is a 2-piece construction.
NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can
be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable
the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the
position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed.
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2.5L vehicles
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
All vehicles
3. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the exhaust intermediate
pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange studs.
NOTE: When loosening the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts, alternately
loosen the nuts from side to side.
Remove and discard the two 10-mm exhaust catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate
pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts.
4. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the resonator flange studs.
NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side.
Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts.
5. NOTICE: Remove the gaskets by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the gasket on the pipe.
Do not pry under the gasket or damage
to the flange may occur.
Detach the 3 exhaust hangers and remove the catalytic converter and muffler assembly.
- Remove and discard the gaskets.
2.5L vehicles
6. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2220
3.0L vehicles
7. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration.
2.5L Hybrid vehicles
8. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration.
Installation
NOTICE: The exhaust hanger insulators are constructed of a special material. Use only the correct
specification exhaust hanger insulator or damage to the exhaust system may occur.
NOTE: Check the exhaust hanger insulators for damage and fatigue. Install new exhaust hanger
insulators as required.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad.
1. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time.
Install the service clamp onto the catalytic converter section.
2. Install the catalytic converter section and service clamp onto the muffler section.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2221
3. Inspect the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe and resonator flange studs for damage.
- If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s).
NOTE: If replacement of the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange stud(s) is required,
perform Steps 4 and 5.
4. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 10-mm stud out of the flange.
5. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe
flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls
with witness knurl grooves in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe flange.
Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 10-mm stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
NOTE: If replacement of the resonator flange stud(s) is required, perform Steps 6 and 7.
6. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 8-mm stud out of the flange.
7. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the
new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in
the resonator flange.
Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 8-mm stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
8. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time.
Attach the catalytic converter and muffler assembly to the 3 exhaust hangers.
9. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 2222
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket by hand.
10. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH
side in sequence in 3 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
11. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe gasket by hand.
12. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts
and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in
sequence in 3 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
13. Tighten the 4 service clamp nuts to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-11-5 > Jun > 10 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's
P013A Or P013C Set
Exhaust Crossover Pipe: Customer Interest Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A Or P013C Set
TSB 10-11-5
3.0L - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) P013A AND/OR P013C - POSSIBLE EXHAUST LEAK
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-3-1 to update the Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminated with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P013A - 02 sensor
slow response, rich to lean - bank 1/sensor 2 and/or P013C - 02 sensor slow response, rich to lean
- bank 2/sensor 2. This may be due to an exhaust leak.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
DTC P013A/P013C INDICATING A LACK OF SWITCH ARE TYPICALLY THE RESULT OF
EITHER AN EXHAUST LEAK, EXHAUST MODIFICATION, OR CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR
(CMS) FAILURE WHICH WILL CAUSE CMS VOLTAGE READINGS TO BE OUT OF RANGE.
EXHAUST LEAK INSPECTION SHOULD BE CONDUCTED PRIOR TO CMS SENSOR
DIAGNOSTICS.
1. Inspect and test the Y-pipe area for exhaust leaks.
a. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the bank 1 flange area, bank 2 ball
and flare joint and/or CMS threads.
b. Misting a soapy water spray solution on the welds, joints and threads while the exhaust is
restricted at the tailpipe will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks. Small foam bubbles or very slow growing large bubbles are normal,
represent leak rates within specification and will not illuminate the MIL.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - this procedure does not apply, proceed with normal WSM diagnostics.
b. Yes - leak present.
(1) If Y-pipe is misaligned or under-torqued, follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 309-00 to
service.
(2) If Y-pipe is found to be defective, replace Y-pipe assembly.
The CMS may be difficult to remove; apply penetrating oil and slowly twist sensor back and forth to
assist in removal.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101105A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner 3.0L: Replace The Y-Pipe Assembly, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In This
Article (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-11-5 > Jun > 10 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's
P013A Or P013C Set > Page 2231
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5E256 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's
P013A/P013C
Exhaust Crossover Pipe: Customer Interest Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C
TSB 08-20-3
10/13/08
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P013C AND/OR P013A - BUILT PRIOR TO 8/18/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built prior to
8/18/2008 may exhibit DTC P013C and/or P013A. The DTCs may be caused by an exhaust leak at
bank 2 Y-pipe ball and flare joint.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
DTCS P013A / P013C INDICATING A LACK OF SWITCH ARE TYPICALLY A RESULT OF
EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST MODIFICATIONS. EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST
MODIFICATIONS WILL CAUSE CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR (CMS) OUT OF RANGE
VOLTAGE READINGS. THE CMS SENSOR IS THE LEAST LIKELY CAUSE.
1. Inspect bank 2 (front of engine) Y-pipe ball and flare joint for exhaust leaks by restricting exhaust
flow at the tailpipe. Also look for carbon soot and moisture witness marks indicating a leak at the
bank 2 ball and flare joint.
2. If a leak is found replace the Y-pipe assembly.
3. Disconnect the left hand (LH) Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
4. Remove and discard the two (2) 10 mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and
gasket.
5. Remove and discard the four (4) exhaust Y-pipe nuts, gasket and remove the Y-pipe.
6. Install service Y-pipe assembly, and bank 1 flat flange gasket, tighten four (4) exhaust flange
nuts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) starting with flat flange on bank 1 and then ball and flare joint on bank 2.
7. Install catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe gasket and spring nuts, tighten to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m).
8. Recheck for exhaust leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.1 Hrs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's
P013A/P013C > Page 2236
Engine: Replace The Y-Pipe Assembly, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In This Article.
(Do Not Use With 12650D 5246A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5E256 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-11-5 > Jun > 10 > Exhaust System - MIL
ON/DTC's P013A Or P013C Set
Exhaust Crossover Pipe: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A
Or P013C Set
TSB 10-11-5
3.0L - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) P013A AND/OR P013C - POSSIBLE EXHAUST LEAK
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-3-1 to update the Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminated with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P013A - 02 sensor
slow response, rich to lean - bank 1/sensor 2 and/or P013C - 02 sensor slow response, rich to lean
- bank 2/sensor 2. This may be due to an exhaust leak.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
DTC P013A/P013C INDICATING A LACK OF SWITCH ARE TYPICALLY THE RESULT OF
EITHER AN EXHAUST LEAK, EXHAUST MODIFICATION, OR CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR
(CMS) FAILURE WHICH WILL CAUSE CMS VOLTAGE READINGS TO BE OUT OF RANGE.
EXHAUST LEAK INSPECTION SHOULD BE CONDUCTED PRIOR TO CMS SENSOR
DIAGNOSTICS.
1. Inspect and test the Y-pipe area for exhaust leaks.
a. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the bank 1 flange area, bank 2 ball
and flare joint and/or CMS threads.
b. Misting a soapy water spray solution on the welds, joints and threads while the exhaust is
restricted at the tailpipe will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks. Small foam bubbles or very slow growing large bubbles are normal,
represent leak rates within specification and will not illuminate the MIL.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - this procedure does not apply, proceed with normal WSM diagnostics.
b. Yes - leak present.
(1) If Y-pipe is misaligned or under-torqued, follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 309-00 to
service.
(2) If Y-pipe is found to be defective, replace Y-pipe assembly.
The CMS may be difficult to remove; apply penetrating oil and slowly twist sensor back and forth to
assist in removal.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101105A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner 3.0L: Replace The Y-Pipe Assembly, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In This
Article (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-11-5 > Jun > 10 > Exhaust System - MIL
ON/DTC's P013A Or P013C Set > Page 2242
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5E256 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL
ON/DTC's P013A/P013C
Exhaust Crossover Pipe: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's
P013A/P013C
TSB 08-20-3
10/13/08
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P013C AND/OR P013A - BUILT PRIOR TO 8/18/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built prior to
8/18/2008 may exhibit DTC P013C and/or P013A. The DTCs may be caused by an exhaust leak at
bank 2 Y-pipe ball and flare joint.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
DTCS P013A / P013C INDICATING A LACK OF SWITCH ARE TYPICALLY A RESULT OF
EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST MODIFICATIONS. EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST
MODIFICATIONS WILL CAUSE CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR (CMS) OUT OF RANGE
VOLTAGE READINGS. THE CMS SENSOR IS THE LEAST LIKELY CAUSE.
1. Inspect bank 2 (front of engine) Y-pipe ball and flare joint for exhaust leaks by restricting exhaust
flow at the tailpipe. Also look for carbon soot and moisture witness marks indicating a leak at the
bank 2 ball and flare joint.
2. If a leak is found replace the Y-pipe assembly.
3. Disconnect the left hand (LH) Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
4. Remove and discard the two (2) 10 mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and
gasket.
5. Remove and discard the four (4) exhaust Y-pipe nuts, gasket and remove the Y-pipe.
6. Install service Y-pipe assembly, and bank 1 flat flange gasket, tighten four (4) exhaust flange
nuts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) starting with flat flange on bank 1 and then ball and flare joint on bank 2.
7. Install catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe gasket and spring nuts, tighten to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m).
8. Recheck for exhaust leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.1 Hrs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL
ON/DTC's P013A/P013C > Page 2247
Engine: Replace The Y-Pipe Assembly, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In This Article.
(Do Not Use With 12650D 5246A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5E256 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Exhaust Crossover Pipe: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 >
Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Exhaust Crossover Pipe: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 >
Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 2253
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Exhaust Crossover Pipe: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 >
Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 2259
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications
Install 6 new RH exhaust manifold studs. Tighten to............................................................................
........................................................................................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Install a new gasket and the RH exhaust manifold and new nuts. Tighten the nuts in 2 stages in the
sequence shown. Stage 1: Tighten to..................................................................................................
....................................................................................20 Nm (177 lb-in). Stage 2: Tighten to.............
..............................................................................................................................................................
...........20 Nm (177 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures
Exhaust Manifold: Procedures
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection
1. Clean the exhaust manifold using a suitable solvent. Use a plastic scraping tool to clean the
gasket sealing surfaces.
2. NOTE: New exhaust manifold gaskets, studs, nuts and/or bolts must be installed when an
exhaust manifold is serviced.
NOTE: Use a Straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within 0.005 mm
(0.0002 in) per running foot of length, such as Snap-On(R) GA438A or equivalent. For example, if
the Straightedge is 61 cm (24 in) long, the machined edge must be flat within 0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
from end to end.
Using the Straightedge and a Feeler Gauge Set, check the exhaust manifold sealing surface for
warpage. If the warpage is greater than 0.76 mm (0.0299 in), install a new exhaust manifold.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2265
Exhaust Manifold: Removal and Replacement
Exhaust Manifold - RH
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 3.0L RH catalytic converter.
3. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
4. Remove the 3 exhaust manifold heat shield bolts and the heat shield.
5. Remove the EGR tube fitting nut from the exhaust manifold.
6. Remove and discard the 6 exhaust manifold nuts.
7. Remove the exhaust manifold and discard the exhaust manifold gasket.
8. Remove and discard the 6 exhaust manifold studs.
9. Clean and inspect the exhaust manifold.
Installation
1. Install the 6 new exhaust manifold studs.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
2. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the
converter bracket bolts will cause the
converter to develop an exhaust leak.
NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the
converter to develop an exhaust leak.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2266
Install a new exhaust manifold gasket, the exhaust manifold and 6 new nuts.
- Tighten the nuts in 2 stages in the sequence shown. Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
3. Install the EGR tube fitting nut on the exhaust manifold.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield and the 3 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Connect the HO2S electrical connector.
6. Install the 3.0L RH catalytic converter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C
Exhaust Pipe: Customer Interest Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C
TSB 08-20-3
10/13/08
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P013C AND/OR P013A - BUILT PRIOR TO 8/18/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built prior to
8/18/2008 may exhibit DTC P013C and/or P013A. The DTCs may be caused by an exhaust leak at
bank 2 Y-pipe ball and flare joint.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
DTCS P013A / P013C INDICATING A LACK OF SWITCH ARE TYPICALLY A RESULT OF
EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST MODIFICATIONS. EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST
MODIFICATIONS WILL CAUSE CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR (CMS) OUT OF RANGE
VOLTAGE READINGS. THE CMS SENSOR IS THE LEAST LIKELY CAUSE.
1. Inspect bank 2 (front of engine) Y-pipe ball and flare joint for exhaust leaks by restricting exhaust
flow at the tailpipe. Also look for carbon soot and moisture witness marks indicating a leak at the
bank 2 ball and flare joint.
2. If a leak is found replace the Y-pipe assembly.
3. Disconnect the left hand (LH) Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
4. Remove and discard the two (2) 10 mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and
gasket.
5. Remove and discard the four (4) exhaust Y-pipe nuts, gasket and remove the Y-pipe.
6. Install service Y-pipe assembly, and bank 1 flat flange gasket, tighten four (4) exhaust flange
nuts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) starting with flat flange on bank 1 and then ball and flare joint on bank 2.
7. Install catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe gasket and spring nuts, tighten to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m).
8. Recheck for exhaust leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.1 Hrs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C >
Page 2275
Engine: Replace The Y-Pipe Assembly, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In This Article.
(Do Not Use With 12650D 5246A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5E256 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's
P013A/P013C
Exhaust Pipe: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's P013A/P013C
TSB 08-20-3
10/13/08
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P013C AND/OR P013A - BUILT PRIOR TO 8/18/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built prior to
8/18/2008 may exhibit DTC P013C and/or P013A. The DTCs may be caused by an exhaust leak at
bank 2 Y-pipe ball and flare joint.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
DTCS P013A / P013C INDICATING A LACK OF SWITCH ARE TYPICALLY A RESULT OF
EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST MODIFICATIONS. EXHAUST LEAKS OR EXHAUST
MODIFICATIONS WILL CAUSE CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR (CMS) OUT OF RANGE
VOLTAGE READINGS. THE CMS SENSOR IS THE LEAST LIKELY CAUSE.
1. Inspect bank 2 (front of engine) Y-pipe ball and flare joint for exhaust leaks by restricting exhaust
flow at the tailpipe. Also look for carbon soot and moisture witness marks indicating a leak at the
bank 2 ball and flare joint.
2. If a leak is found replace the Y-pipe assembly.
3. Disconnect the left hand (LH) Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
4. Remove and discard the two (2) 10 mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and
gasket.
5. Remove and discard the four (4) exhaust Y-pipe nuts, gasket and remove the Y-pipe.
6. Install service Y-pipe assembly, and bank 1 flat flange gasket, tighten four (4) exhaust flange
nuts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) starting with flat flange on bank 1 and then ball and flare joint on bank 2.
7. Install catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe gasket and spring nuts, tighten to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m).
8. Recheck for exhaust leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.1 Hrs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-3 > Oct > 08 > Exhaust System - MIL ON/DTC's
P013A/P013C > Page 2281
Engine: Replace The Y-Pipe Assembly, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In This Article.
(Do Not Use With 12650D 5246A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5E256 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Exhaust Pipe: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer
Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer
Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Y-Pipe
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Y-Pipe
Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the LH Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the exhaust Y-pipe flange studs.
NOTE: When loosening the converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts
from side to side.
Remove and discard the two 10-mm exhaust catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts.
4. NOTICE: Remove the exhaust Y-pipe gasket by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the
gasket off the pipe. Do not pry under the
gasket or damage to the flange may occur.
Remove and discard the 4 exhaust Y-pipe nuts and remove the Y-pipe.
- Discard the gaskets.
Installation
1. Inspect the exhaust Y-pipe flange studs for damage.
- If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s).
2. If replacing the Y-pipe flange stud(s), use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the
10-mm stud(s) out of the flange.
3. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust Y-pipe flange, make sure to line up
the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl
grooves in the exhaust Y-pipe flange.
If replacing the exhaust Y-pipe flange stud(s), use a C-clamp and a deep well socket to push the
10-mm stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Y-Pipe > Page 2294
4. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe gasket.
5. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and alternately tighten
RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. Install a new gasket, the exhaust Y-pipe and 4 new nuts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Y-Pipe > Page 2295
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View
Exhaust System - Exploded View
2.5L
3.0L (View 1 of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Y-Pipe > Page 2296
3.0L (View 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Y-Pipe > Page 2297
2.5L Hybrid
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Y-Pipe > Page 2298
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View
Muffler: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View
Exhaust System - Exploded View
2.5L
3.0L (View 1 of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2303
3.0L (View 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2304
2.5L Hybrid
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2305
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2306
Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler
Muffler
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The production catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a one piece construction. The
service catalytic converter and muffler is a
2-piece construction.
NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can
be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable
the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the
position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed.
The muffler and catalytic converter are serviced together. For additional information, refer to
Catalytic Converter - Underbody See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair/Catalytic Converter Underbody.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Exhaust Resonator: Service and Repair
Resonator
Removal
NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator
to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the resonator flange studs.
NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side.
Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator spring nuts.
3. NOTICE: Remove the resonator-to-muffler gasket by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the
gasket off the pipe. Do not pry under
the gasket or damage to the flange may occur.
Detach the 2 resonator exhaust hangers and remove the resonator.
- Discard the gasket.
Installation
1. Inspect the resonator flange studs for damage.
- If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s).
2. If replacing the resonator flange stud(s), use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push
the 8-mm stud(s) out of the flange.
3. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the
new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in
the resonator flange.
If replacing the resonator flange stud(s), use a C-clamp and a deep well socket to push the 8-mm
stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Page 2310
4. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket.
5. Install the resonator and attach the 2 resonator exhaust hangers.
6. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH
side in sequence in 3 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
Torque-Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Overview
The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the
powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle
opening and engine torque.
Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft
timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions.
Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of torque-based ETC are:
- eliminate cruise control actuators
- eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve
- better airflow range
- packaging (no cable)
- more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster
when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and
may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics:
- The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires).
- There are two designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore
parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design
has a separate motor housing.
- An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The
default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This
hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal
return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also two throttle
position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased
monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing
voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage).
The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle
angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional
information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components See: Computers and Control
Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control Components.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2317
allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules
while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management:
a - ETC illuminates or displays a message on the message center immediately; MIL illuminates
after 2 driving cycles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2318
ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management:
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation:
a - Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to
register a concern.
APP and TP Sensor Inputs
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2319
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check:
Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to
register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional
DTC information.
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check:
a - Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM, TP inconsistent with requested throttle plate position. Monitor execution is continuous.
Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional DTC information.
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check:
a - Note: For all DTCs, in addition to the MIL, the powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) is on for
the concern that caused the FMEM action. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection
duration is less than 5 seconds to register a concern.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 09-19-5
10/05/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL
LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built
between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772,
P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E
(SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh
engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The
Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is:
a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14.
b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps.
2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the
transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With
12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page
2336
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
12A650 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 09-19-5
10/05/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL
LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built
between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772,
P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E
(SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh
engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The
Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is:
a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14.
b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps.
2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the
transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With
12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts
> Page 2354
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
12A650 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh
Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays
Twice In CD Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time
Displays Twice In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2369
Engine Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2370
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2371
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2372
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2373
Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2374
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2375
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2376
Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2377
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2378
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
Description
The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM).
The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle,
and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or
P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware
or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure
properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle
ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID
Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items
used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification
number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block is displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to
reset the VID block.
On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction
should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be
accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool.
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan
tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details.
Neutral Profile Correction
In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in
non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is
reset.
Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should
also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been
completed.
To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter
identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has
been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any
misfire DTCs.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two
procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM,
and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored
data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove
and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter
programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all
parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile
equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF
may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center
for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center
only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for
As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the
Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search
function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data.
For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the
PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate
the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 2381
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 2382
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Removal
1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a
Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS).
Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt.
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM.
5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged.
Installation
1. Install the PCM cowl seal.
2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 2383
4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt.
5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning
6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2387
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2388
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank.
Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur.
Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2396
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2400
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2401
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2407
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2408
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a
concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred
from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There
are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six
circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits
and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit
used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is
converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these
degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer
to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic
Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the
indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM
receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is
incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present
with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal
return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and
the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared
with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB)
throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description
and Operation.
3-Track APP Sensor
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2412
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2413
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM
calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This
input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque
converter clutch (TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals.
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2414
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2415
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1 > Page 2420
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1 > Page 2423
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2424
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2425
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2432
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2436
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2437
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has
39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring
the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2438
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2439
4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2443
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2444
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant
temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a
fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern
such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to
major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy,
the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For
additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Computers and Control
Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Typical CHT Sensor
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2445
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced.
1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Level Input (FLI)
The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type
FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2451
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2452
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2453
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2454
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2455
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Level Sender
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module
See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Pump/Service and Repair/Fuel Pump Module.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the locking tabs and remove the fuel level sender
from the FP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2456
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2460
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2461
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2465
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2466
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air
temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are two types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use two IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard
OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the
intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency.
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type
MAF Sensor
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type
MAF sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 2471
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 2474
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2475
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2476
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal
Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Engine block-mounted KS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2477
3. Remove the lower intake manifold.
4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector.
5. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Installation
Engine block-mounted KS
1. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2. Connect the KS electrical connector.
3. Install the lower intake manifold.
Cylinder head-mounted KS
4. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Connect the KS electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2481
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2482
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the
MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2483
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the MAP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
- When installing the sensor, if the bolt fails to hold specified torque, relocate the sensor and retain,
using the auxiliary bolt hole in the upper intake manifold.
3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control
gains and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2491
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2492
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2493
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2496
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2497
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2498
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Engine Control Components
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2501
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Engine Control Components
Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2504
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Removal and Installation
LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the LH HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench
Adapter Formulas in the Appendix
.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
RH HO2S
5. Disconnect the RH HO2S electrical connector.
6. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2505
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the RH HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench
Adapter Formulas in the Appendix
.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
All HO2S
7. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2506
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench
Adapter Formulas in the Appendix
.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 2511
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during
parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations > Page 2515
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle
Position Sensor
Engine Control Components
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant
ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position
sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second
signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position
sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is
1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit
and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits
used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description
and Operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 2521
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
Engine Control Components
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the
PCM from the TP. These are:
- closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
6F35
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2525
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2526
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2527
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2528
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
8. Position the main control cover in place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2529
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2530
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment.
3.0L Engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2531
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Engine Control Components
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is
generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 2536
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Engine Control Components
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the
sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2541
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2546
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2547
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a
concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred
from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There
are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six
circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits
and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit
used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is
converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these
degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer
to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic
Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the
indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM
receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is
incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present
with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal
return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and
the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared
with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB)
throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description
and Operation.
3-Track APP Sensor
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2551
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2552
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM
calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This
input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque
converter clutch (TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals.
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2553
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2554
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
2558
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2562
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2566
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2567
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is
to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel cone held in place by a magnet.
When a sharp impact occurs, the cone breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and
strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel
pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the
Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch.
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2568
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel.
2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle
Position Sensor
Engine Control Components
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant
ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position
sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second
signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position
sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is
1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit
and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits
used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description
and Operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 2574
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
Engine Control Components
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the
PCM from the TP. These are:
- closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor
1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor
1 > Page 2580
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
1 > Page 2583
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2584
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2585
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2589
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2590
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has
39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring
the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2591
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2592
4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 2602
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page
2608
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control
Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC
C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2619
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2624
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2627
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2628
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2629
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal
Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Engine block-mounted KS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2630
3. Remove the lower intake manifold.
4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector.
5. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Installation
Engine block-mounted KS
1. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2. Connect the KS electrical connector.
3. Install the lower intake manifold.
Cylinder head-mounted KS
4. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Connect the KS electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2635
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L
engines do not have a Schrader valve.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine
5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2636
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve.
Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine
7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
All vehicles
9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure
and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP fuse.
10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System
Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Measured/PID Values
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 689.5 RPM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-3-5 >
Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
TSB 11-3-5
03/15/11
3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or
before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner
housing.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-12.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe
Comes Loose
TSB 11-3-5
03/15/11
3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or
before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner
housing.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-12.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air
Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
TSB 09-5-8
03/23/09
ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT
BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009
and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the
chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF
THE POWERTRAIN.
1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type
maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h).
2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for
noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting
noise.
3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 204-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire
Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1,
1015D)
090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air
Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 2659
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air
Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 2665
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 2677
Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification
Engine
Engine Cylinder Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark plug gap.....................................................................................................................................
....................................1.15-1.25 mm (0.045-0.048 in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 2682
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark plugs...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................15 Nm (133 lb-in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2683
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................CGSF-22F
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2684
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
- Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
- Install a new spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
- Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
- Correct the oil leak concern.
- Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
- Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2685
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
- Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2688
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2689
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Ignition
System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur
to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the gap as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2690
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2691
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2692
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition RH
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2693
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest
reading is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications > Page 2697
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position.
3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2702
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2703
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a
concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred
from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There
are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six
circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits
and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit
used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is
converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these
degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer
to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control
Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the
indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM
receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is
incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present
with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal
return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and
the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared
with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB)
throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
3-Track APP Sensor
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2707
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2708
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM
calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This
input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque
converter clutch (TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals.
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2709
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2710
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2714
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2715
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air
temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are two types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use two IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard
OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the
intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency.
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type
MAF Sensor
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type
MAF sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2719
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 2722
Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch
The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A
normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is
not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is
removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used
for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be
disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not
changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2727
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2730
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2731
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2732
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2739
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2743
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2744
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has
39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring
the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2745
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2746
4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2750
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2754
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2755
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC)
The electronic TAC is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). There are 2 designs
for the TAC, parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the
plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a
separate motor housing. An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a
default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop
angle. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore.
This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
Typical In-line TAC Design
Typical In-line TAC Design
Typical Parallel TAC Design
Typical Parallel TAC Design
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
Torque-Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Overview
The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the
powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle
opening and engine torque.
Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft
timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions.
Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of torque-based ETC are:
- eliminate cruise control actuators
- eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve
- better airflow range
- packaging (no cable)
- more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster
when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and
may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics:
- The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires).
- There are two designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore
parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design
has a separate motor housing.
- An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The
default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This
hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal
return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also two throttle
position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased
monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing
voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage).
The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle
angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional
information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components See: Description and
Operation/Engine Control Components.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2759
allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules
while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management:
a - ETC illuminates or displays a message on the message center immediately; MIL illuminates
after 2 driving cycles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2760
ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management:
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation:
a - Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to
register a concern.
APP and TP Sensor Inputs
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2761
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check:
Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to
register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional
DTC information.
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check:
a - Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM, TP inconsistent with requested throttle plate position. Monitor execution is continuous.
Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional DTC information.
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check:
a - Note: For all DTCs, in addition to the MIL, the powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) is on for
the concern that caused the FMEM action. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection
duration is less than 5 seconds to register a concern.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10
> A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10
> Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09
> A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 09-19-5
10/05/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL
LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built
between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772,
P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E
(SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh
engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The
Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is:
a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14.
b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps.
2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the
transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With
12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09
> A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 2778
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
12A650 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09
> Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9
> Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5
> Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 09-19-5
10/05/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL
LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built
between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772,
P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E
(SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh
engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The
Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is:
a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14.
b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps.
2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the
transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With
12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5
> Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 2796
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
12A650 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-18-3
> Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh
Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2801
Engine Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2802
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2803
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2804
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2805
Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2806
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2807
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2808
Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2809
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2810
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
Description
The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM).
The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle,
and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or
P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware
or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure
properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle
ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID
Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items
used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification
number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block is displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to
reset the VID block.
On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction
should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be
accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool.
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan
tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details.
Neutral Profile Correction
In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in
non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is
reset.
Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should
also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been
completed.
To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter
identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has
been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any
misfire DTCs.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two
procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM,
and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored
data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove
and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter
programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all
parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile
equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF
may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center
for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center
only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for
As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the
Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search
function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data.
For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the
PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate
the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2813
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2814
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Removal
1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a
Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS).
Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt.
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM.
5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged.
Installation
1. Install the PCM cowl seal.
2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2815
4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt.
5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2819
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2820
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant
temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a
fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern
such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to
major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy,
the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For
additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Description and
Operation/Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Typical CHT Sensor
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2821
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced.
1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Level Input (FLI)
The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type
FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2827
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2828
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2829
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2830
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2831
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Level Sender
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module
See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Pump/Service and Repair/Fuel Pump Module.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the locking tabs and remove the fuel level sender
from the FP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2832
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2836
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2837
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve
Note: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned, also some IAC valves are
normally open and others are normally closed. Some IAC valves require engine vacuum to
operate.
The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC
valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve
assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals
the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the
IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or
decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control:
- no touch start
- cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up
- idle (corrects for engine load)
- stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function)
- over-temperature idle boost
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2845
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2846
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2847
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2848
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2849
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2850
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2851
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2852
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2853
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2854
Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2855
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2856
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2857
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2858
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2859
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2860
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2861
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2862
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2863
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
14-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2864
14-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2865
14-3
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2866
Information Bus: Description and Operation
Communications Network
Vehicle communication utilizes both ISO 9141 and Controller Area Network (CAN)
communications. ISO 9141 is used for diagnostic use only while CAN allows many modules to
communicate with each other on a common network. CAN in-vehicle networking is a method for
transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus.
Without serial networking, intermodule communication requires dedicated, point to point wiring
resulting in bulky, expensive, complex, and difficult to install wiring harnesses. Applying a serial
data network reduces the number of wires, combining the signals on a single network. Information
is sent to the individual control modules that control each function.
The vehicle has 3 module communication networks:
- ISO 9141
- Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
- High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
All 3 networks are connected to the Data Link Connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing
of these systems easier by allowing one scan tool to be able to diagnose and control any module
on the 3 networks from one connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel between
the steering column and the Audio Control Module (ACM).
Network Topology
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2867
ISO 9141 Network Operation
The ISO 9141 communications network is a single wire network, used for diagnostic purposes only.
The ISO 9141 communications network is used for the following module:
- Parking Aid Module (PAM) (if equipped)
Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Operation
The MS-CAN communicates using bussed messages. The MS-CAN has an unshielded twisted pair
cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, this network
allows sharing of information between all modules on the network.
The MS-CAN is a medium speed communication network used for the following modules:
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped)
- Audio Control Module (ACM)
- Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) (if equipped)
- Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
- HVAC module
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module (if equipped)
- Smart Junction Box (SJB)
High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Operation
The HS-CAN communicates using bussed messages. The HS-CAN uses an unshielded twisted
pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, this
network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network.
The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network used for the following modules:
- 4X4 control module (if equipped)
- ABS module
- APIM (if equipped)
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
- PCM
- Power Steering Control Module (PSCM)
- Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2868
Network Termination
The CAN uses a network termination circuit to improve communication reliability. The network
termination of the CAN bus takes place inside the termination modules by termination resistors.
Termination modules are located at either end of the bus network. As network messages are
broadcast, in the form of voltage signals, the network voltage signals are stabilized by the
termination resistors. Each termination module has a 120 ohm resistor across the positive and
negative bus connection in the termination module. With 2 termination modules on each network,
and the 120 ohm resistors located in a parallel circuit configuration, the total network impedance, or
total resistance, is 60 ohms.
Network termination improves bus message reliability by:
- Stabilizing bus voltage
- Eliminating electrical interference
Gateway Module
The Instrument Cluster (IC) is the gateway module, translating HS-CAN to MS-CAN and vice
versa. This information allows a message to be distributed throughout both networks. The IC is the
only module on this vehicle that has this ability.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Communications Network
Principles Of Operation
Communications Network
Principles of Operation
Vehicle communication utilizes both International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 and
Controller Area Network (CAN) communications. ISO 9141 is used for diagnostic use only, and
CAN is a method for transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus.
The vehicle is equipped with 3 module communication networks:
- ISO 9141
- Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
- High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
ISO 9141 Communications Network
The ISO 9141 communications network is a single wire network. The ISO communications network
does not permit intermodule communication and is only used for the Parking Aid Module (PAM).
When the scan tool communicates with the parking aid module, the scan tool must request all
information, the module cannot initiate communications.
The ISO network operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 10 Kbps for bus messages and is
designed for scan tool to module diagnostic use only.
The following fault chart describes the specific ISO 9141 network failures and their resulting
symptom:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2871
ISO 9141 Network Communication Fault Chart
Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
The MS-CAN uses an unshielded twisted pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The data (+)
and the data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or rested
network traffic. As bus messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by
approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a
bus message is sent. Multiple bus messages can be sent over the CAN circuits allowing multiple
modules to communicate with each other. The MS-CAN is used for the Instrument Cluster (IC), the
Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM), the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM), HVAC module,
the Audio Control Module (ACM), the APIM, the Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS)
module and the Smart Junction Box (SJB) communications, and is designed for general
information transfer. The MS-CAN will not communicate while certain faults are present, but will
operate with diminished performance with other faults present. The MS-CAN bus may remain
operational when 1 of the 2 termination resistors are not present.
The MS-CAN operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 125 Kbps for bus messages and is
designed for general information transfer. The network will remain operational, but at a degraded
level when certain circuit faults are present.
The following fault chart describes the specific MS-CAN failures and their resulting symptom:
MS-CAN Communication Fault Chart
High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
The HS-CAN uses an unshielded twisted pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The data (+)
and the data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or rested
network traffic. As bus messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by
approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a
bus message is sent. Multiple bus messages can be sent over the CAN circuits allowing multiple
modules to communicate with each other. The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network
used for the Instrument Cluster (IC), the PCM, the ABS module, the APIM, the Occupant
Classification System Module (OCSM), Restraints Control Module (RCM), the Battery Control
Module (BCM), the Transmission Control Module (TCM), the Power Steering Control Module
(PSCM) and the 4X4 control module communications, and designed for real time information
transfer and control. The HS-CAN will not communicate while certain faults are present, but will
operate with diminished performance with other faults present. The HS-CAN bus may remain
operational when 1 of the 2 termination resistors are not present.
The HS-CAN operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 500 Kbps and is designed for real time
information transfer and control. The network will remain operational, but at a degraded level when
certain circuit faults are present.
The following fault chart describes the specific HS-CAN failures and their resulting symptom:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2872
HS-CAN Communication Fault Chart
The following chart describes the specific CAN messages broadcast by each module, and the
module(s) that receive the message:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2873
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2874
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2875
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2876
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2877
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2878
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2879
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2880
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2881
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2882
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 6)
Inspection And Verification
Communications Network
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
- If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2883
Visual Inspection Chart
3. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
- NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Go To Pinpoint Test V, to diagnose No Power To The Scan Tool. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint
Test V: No Power To The Scan Tool
4. Establish a scan tool session.
- NOTE: The scan tool will first attempt to communicate with the PCM, after establishing
communication with the PCM, the scan tool will then attempt to communicate with all other
modules on the vehicle.
If an IDS session cannot be established wit the vehicle, (IDS may state "No communication can be
established with the PCM"): Choose "NO" when the scan tool prompts whether or not to retry communication.
- Enter either a PCM part number, tear tag or calibration number to identify the vehicle and start a
session.
5. Carry out the network test.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs and proceed to Step
6.
- If the network test fails, GO to Symptom Chart to diagnose the failed communication network.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
- If a module fails to communication during the network test, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
6. Retrieve and review the DTCs.
- If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. Follow the non-network DTC
diagnostics (B-codes, C-codes, P-codes) prior to the network DTC diagnostics (U-codes). For all
other DTCs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2884
Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Communications Network See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
- If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Module Configuration
Principles Of Operation
Module Configuration
Principles of Operation
Configurable modules accommodate a variety of vehicle options, eliminating the need for many
unique modules for one vehicle line. These modules must be configured when replaced as part of a
repair procedure. Configurable modules should not be exchanged between vehicles since the
settings are unique to each vehicle. Failure to configure a new module may result in incorrect
operation and/or DTCs setting.
The following are the 3 different methods of configuration:
- Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
- Module reprogramming ("flashing")
- Programmable parameters
Some modules do not support all 3 methods.
Definition of Terms
The following are definitions of configuration terms:
Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
PMI is a scan tool process which configures settings in a new module. Data used for the PMI
process is automatically downloaded from the original module and stored when a scan tool session
is started. If this data cannot be retrieved from the module being replaced, the scan tool may
prompt for As-Built data entry or display a list of parameter values that need to be manually
selected. Some modules are reprogrammed during PMI when a strategy/calibration update is
available. To carry out PMI, refer to Programmable Module Installation (PMI) See: Service and
Repair.
NOTE: It is important that the scan tool identifies the vehicle and obtains configuration data prior to
removing any modules. The new module must be able to communicate with the scan tool in order
to carry out PMI. See: Programming and Relearning
Module Reprogramming
Module reprogramming (also referred to as "flashing") is a scan tool process which updates the
strategy/calibration in a module. Reprogramming a module with the same level of software will not
improve module operation or repair a hardware failure. Module reprogramming is automatically
carried out during PMI when a later strategy/calibration is available.
NOTE: Module reprogramming should be limited to circumstances where a published TSB
procedure recommends doing so.
NOTE: A module cannot communicate with other modules on the communication network while
being reprogrammed. Clear any network communication DTCs which may have been set in other
modules during the reprogramming process.
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) programming is a process that updates the APIM
Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) and Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) software. The VIP
programming updates the calibration files in the portion of the APIM which interfaces with the
Controller
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2885
Area Network (CAN). The CIP programming updates calibration files in the portion of the APIM that
interfaces with mobile phones and other customer devices.
APIM programming uses the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) to read and program the VIP
software through the Data Link Connector (DLC). A web-based On-Line Automotive Service
Information System (OASIS) application is used to read and program the CIP software via a
Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable between the scan tool and vehicle USB port. Both the VCM and
OASIS application must be running on the scan tool during APIM programming. To carry out APIM
programming, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming See:
Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming.
Programmable Parameters
Programmable parameters are customer preference items that may be modified by the dealer via
scan tool or in some cases modified by the customer following a procedure listed in the vehicle
Owner's Literature. While many configuration options may exist for a module, only a few of these
options are programmable parameters.
Adaptive Learning and Calibration
Some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out if replaced as part of a repair
procedure. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
Transmission Identification Block
Some PCMs contain a memory area called a transmission identification block. The PCM
transmission identification block stores solenoid body flow data. If the solenoid body information is
not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur.
Vehicle Identification (VID) Block
Some PCMs contain a memory area called a Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The PCM VID block
commonly stores powertrain configuration items such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), tire
size, axle ratio, and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with speed control.
Module Address
A unique module address is assigned to each module on the network for identification.
As-Built Data
As-Built data is a VIN-specific module configuration record. During vehicle build, the configuration
from all modules is downloaded and stored in the As-Built database. As-Built data will not reflect
customer preference items that have been changed from the default state. These items will need to
be changed using programmable parameters after the module is configured.
NOTE: It is not necessary to obtain As-Built data unless directed to do so by the scan tool. This
data may be accessed from the technician service publication website.
The following chart lists As-Built data addresses and describes specific module configuration
information:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2886
Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2887
Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2888
Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Hybrid (Part 1)
Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Hybrid (Part 2)
Inspection And Verification
Module Configuration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2889
Inspection and Verification
This provides step-by-step module configuration procedures. Carry out the Programmable Module
Installation (PMI) procedures when another diagnostic/repair information directs to carry out
configuration or when DTCs from the below list are present: See: Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2890
Information Bus: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
Communications Network
Communications Network
DTC Charts
NOTE: Network DTCs (U-codes) are often a result of intermittent concerns such as faulty wiring or
low battery voltage occurrences. Additionally, vehicle service procedures such as module
reprogramming will often set network DTCs. Replacing a module to resolve a network DTC is
unlikely to resolve the concern. To prevent repeat network DTC concerns, inspect all network
wiring, especially connectors. Test the vehicle battery, refer to Battery.
NOTE: Some modules on this vehicle utilize a 5-character DTC followed by a 2-character
failure-type code. The failure-type code provides information about specific fault conditions such as
opens, or shorts to ground. Continuous memory DTCs have an additional 2-character DTC status
code suffix to assist in determining DTC history.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2891
U0001-U0114
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2892
U0114:00-U0151:87
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2893
U0151:88-U0162:00
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2894
U0163-U0255
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2895
U0255:00-U0423:00
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2896
U261A-U3000:88
Module Configuration
Module Configuration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2897
B2477-B2900 / P0602-P1639 / U201A:51-U0300:51
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2898
U2050-U3002:62
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2899
Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Communications Network
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2900
Symptom Chart (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2901
Information Bus: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 23 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic
Engine Controls - 2.5L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 24 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic
Engine Controls - 3.0L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The PCM communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network
(HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the
network connection to the PCM. Voltage for the PCM is provided by circuit CBB28 (GY/VT) or
SBB05 (GY/RD). Circuit GD122 (BK) provides ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- ABS module
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
- 4X4 control module (if equipped)
- IC
- PCM
- RCM
- PSCM
- OCSM
- TCM (Hybrid only)
- BCM (Hybrid only)
PINPOINT TEST A: THE PCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- A1 VERIFY WHETHER OTHER HS-CAN MODULES PASS
THE NETWORK TEST
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- In the left hand pane of the IDS network test display screen, verify whether any HS-CAN modules
passed the network test.
- Is the text "pass" or a DTC listed next to any of the following modules (if equipped): 4x4 control
module, ABS module, Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), Battery Control Module (BCM),
Instrument Cluster (IC), Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM), Power Steering Control
Module (PSCM), Restraints Control Module (RCM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) or PCM?
Yes
If "pass" or a DTC was listed next to the PCM, a network fault is not currently present. Go To
Pinpoint Test R to diagnose an intermittent HS-CAN fault condition. See: Pinpoint Test R:
Intermittent No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, Communication
Can Be Intermittently
If "pass" or a DTC was listed next to one or more modules other than the PCM, GO to A2.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2902
No
No modules are currently communicating on the HS-CAN. Go To Pinpoint Test s to diagnose no
HS-CAN communication. See: Pinpoint Test S: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------- A2 VERIFY COMPUTERS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
INFORMATION PINPOINT TEST QA HAS BEEN CARRIED OUT
- Verify that pinpoint test QA has been carried out.
- Has pinpoint test QA been carried out?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information, Pinpoint Tests, pinpoint test QA to
diagnose no communication with the PCM.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to A5.
No
GO to A4.
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PCM AND
THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-59, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-58, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2903
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to A5.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- A5 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 42 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Vehicle Dynamic
Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
Normal Operation - Escape and Mariner
The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area
Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide
the network connection to the ABS module. Voltage for the ABS module is provided by circuits
CBP34 (VT/BN), SBB09 (RD) and SBB18 (YE/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
Hybrid
The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area
Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide
the network connection to the ABS module. Voltage for the ABS module is provided by circuits
CBP34 (VT/BN), CBK03 (GY), SBB09 (RD) and SBB18 (YE/RD). Ground is provided by circuit
GD113 (BK/YE) and GD120 (BK/GN) .
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2904
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- ABS module
PINPOINT TEST B: THE ABS MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK THE ABS MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: ABS Module C155.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure voltage between the ABS module, harness side and ground as follows:
Escape And Mariner
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Escape and Mariner, VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 18 (20A) and fuse 9 (50A) and
the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 34 (5A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK,
refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
Hybrid, VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuses 27 (20A), 9 (50A) and 18 (20A) and the
Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 34 (5A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK,
refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE ABS MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the ABS module, harness side and ground as follows:
Escape And Mariner
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2905
Hybrid
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ABS
MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-12, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side
and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-13, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side
and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to B4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK FOR CORRECT ABS MODULE OPERATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2906
- Disconnect the ABS module connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the ABS module connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new ABS module. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The 4X4 Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test C: The 4X4 Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 34 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Four Wheel
Drive Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The 4X4 control module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area
Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide
the network connection to the 4X4 control module. Voltage for the 4X4 control module is provided
by circuits CBP35 (YE/GY) and SBP11 (BU/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD182 (BK/GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- 4X4 control module
PINPOINT TEST C: THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE VOLTAGE
SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the 4X4 control module C3184-4, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness
side and ground; and between the 4X4 control module C3184-5, circuit SBP11 (BU/RD), harness
side and ground.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2907
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 11 (10A) and 35 (10A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the
circuit in question. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the
circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE GROUND
CIRCUIT
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-15, circuit GD182 (BK/GY),
harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE 4X4
CONTROL MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-3, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU),
harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-11, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness
side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2908
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to C4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE
OPERATION
- Disconnect the 4X4 control module connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the 4X4 control module connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan
tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test D: The Instrument Cluster (IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test D: The Instrument Cluster (IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 60 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Instrument
Cluster for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The Instrument Cluster (IC) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller
Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -)
provide the HS-CAN connection to the IC and circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07
(VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) connection to
the IC. Voltage for the IC is provided by circuits CBP29 (WH/VT), and SBP26 (YE/RD). Circuits
GD112 (BK/GN) and GD114 (BK/BU) provide ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2909
- IC
PINPOINT TEST D: THE IC DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- D1 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Disconnect the scan tool cable from the Data Link Connector (DLC).
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
GO to D2.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to D4.
------------------------------------------------- D2 CHECK THE IC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: IC C220.
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-9, circuit GD112 (BK/GN) harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to D3.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- D3 CHECK THE IC VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN
OPEN
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the IC, harness side and ground as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2910
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to D4.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 26 (10A), 29 (5A) or 43 (10A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR
the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- D4 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-15, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC
C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to D5.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- D5 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE DLC
AND THE IC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-2, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2911
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-1, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to D6.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- D6 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION
- Disconnect the IC connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IC. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 46 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Supplemental
Restraint Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2912
Normal Operation
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed
Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH)
(HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN connection to the RCM. Voltage for the RCM is provided by
circuits CBP31 (BN/OG) and the RCM is case grounded.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- RCM
PINPOINT TEST E: THE RCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental
deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection
and verification before proceeding with the Pinpoint Test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Communications Network/Inspection And Verification
------------------------------------------------- E1 CHECK THE RCM CONNECTION
- Ignition OFF.
- Depower the SRS. Refer to Air Bag Systems.
- Disconnect: RCM C2041a.
- Disconnect: RCM C2041b.
- Are RCM C2041a and C2041b pins OK?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
REPAIR the RCM connector pins as necessary. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Air Bag Systems.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- E2 CHECK THE RCM CASE GROUND FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the metal RCM case and a good chassis ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to E3.
No
REPAIR the case ground connection. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Air Bag Systems. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- E3 CHECK THE RCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Repower the SRS. Refer to Air Bag Systems.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the RCM C2041a-13, circuit CBP31 (BN/OG), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2913
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to E4.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 31 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Air Bag Systems. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to
identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- E4 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE RCM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between the RCM C2041b-10, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the RCM C2041b-9, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to E5.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. REPOWER the SRS. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test
with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- E5 CHECK FOR CORRECT RCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the RCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2914
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the RCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new RCM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The
Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The
Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 46 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Supplemental
Restraint Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) communicates with the scan tool through the
High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05
(WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN connection to the OCSM. Voltage for the OCSM is provided
by circuit CBP46 (WH/BU) and circuit GD183 (BK/WH) provides ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- OCSM
PINPOINT TEST F: THE OCSM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- F1 CHECK THE OCSM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Disconnect: OCSM C3285.
- Ignition OFF.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the OCSM C3285-1, circuit CBP46 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2915
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 46 (7.5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question.
If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- F2 CHECK THE OCSM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-14, circuit GD183 (BK/WH), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to F3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- F3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE OCSM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-18, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2916
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2917
Information Bus: Programming and Relearning
Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The
Original Module Is Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures.
1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module
Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the
module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF
position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow
the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8.
The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9.
Test module for correct operation.
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The
Original Module Is Not Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the
Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable
Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions,
turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen
instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not
available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data
from the technician service
publication website at this time and press the check mark.
9. Enter the module data and press the check mark.
10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration
Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation.
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2918
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System
(IDS)
NOTE: If a new Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) is being installed, install the new
APIM before carrying out the following procedure.
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information
System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually
entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current APIM Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and
Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) software
levels.
8. NOTE: Do not disconnect the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) or USB cables during
APIM programming.
Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select the
"Program APIM" button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if
prompted.
- When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically.
9. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays "Programming
has been completed successfully".
10. Test the audio system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2919
Information Bus: Service and Repair
PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The
Original Module Is Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures.
1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module
Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the
module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF
position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow
the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8.
The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9.
Test module for correct operation.
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The
Original Module Is Not Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the
Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable
Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions,
turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen
instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not
available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data
from the technician service
publication website at this time and press the check mark.
9. Enter the module data and press the check mark.
10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration
Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2924
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2927
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2928
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2929
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal
Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Engine block-mounted KS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2930
3. Remove the lower intake manifold.
4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector.
5. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Installation
Engine block-mounted KS
1. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2. Connect the KS electrical connector.
3. Install the lower intake manifold.
Cylinder head-mounted KS
4. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Connect the KS electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2934
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2935
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board
diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets.
- The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol.
- The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately four seconds.
- The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if:
- an emission-related concern and DTC exists.
- the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL
controlled through the communication link).
- the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster
concern is present.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern.
- For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures/No Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) Present Symptom Chart Index.
- If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist.
- If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low.
- The MIL flashes after a period of time with the ignition in the RUN position (engine not running) if
DTC P1000 is set.
CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON, or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2942
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2943
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the
MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2944
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the MAP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
- When installing the sensor, if the bolt fails to hold specified torque, relocate the sensor and retain,
using the auxiliary bolt hole in the upper intake manifold.
3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control
gains and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2952
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2953
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2954
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2957
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2958
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2959
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Engine Control Components
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2962
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Engine Control Components
Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page
2965
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Removal and Installation
LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the LH HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench
Adapter Formulas in the Appendix
.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
RH HO2S
5. Disconnect the RH HO2S electrical connector.
6. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page
2966
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the RH HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench
Adapter Formulas in the Appendix
.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
All HO2S
7. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page
2967
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench
Adapter Formulas in the Appendix
.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 2972
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during
parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 2976
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
Torque-Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Overview
The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the
powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle
opening and engine torque.
Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft
timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions.
Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of torque-based ETC are:
- eliminate cruise control actuators
- eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve
- better airflow range
- packaging (no cable)
- more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster
when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and
may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics:
- The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires).
- There are two designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore
parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design
has a separate motor housing.
- An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The
default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This
hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal
return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also two throttle
position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased
monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing
voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage).
The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle
angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional
information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components See: Description and
Operation/Engine Control Components.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2981
allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules
while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management:
a - ETC illuminates or displays a message on the message center immediately; MIL illuminates
after 2 driving cycles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2982
ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management:
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation:
a - Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to
register a concern.
APP and TP Sensor Inputs
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2983
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check:
Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to
register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional
DTC information.
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check:
a - Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM, TP inconsistent with requested throttle plate position. Monitor execution is continuous.
Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions for additional DTC information.
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check:
a - Note: For all DTCs, in addition to the MIL, the powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) is on for
the concern that caused the FMEM action. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection
duration is less than 5 seconds to register a concern.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 09-19-5
10/05/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL
LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built
between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772,
P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E
(SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh
engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The
Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is:
a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14.
b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps.
2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the
transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With
12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 3000
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
12A650 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Engine Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's
Set
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 09-19-5
10/05/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL
LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built
between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772,
P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E
(SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh
engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The
Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is:
a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14.
b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps.
2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the
transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With
12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts > Page 3018
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
12A650 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh
Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3023
Engine Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3024
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3025
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3026
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3027
Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3028
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3029
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3030
Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3031
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3032
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
Description
The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM).
The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle,
and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or
P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware
or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure
properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle
ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID
Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items
used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification
number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block is displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to
reset the VID block.
On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction
should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be
accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool.
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan
tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details.
Neutral Profile Correction
In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in
non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is
reset.
Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should
also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been
completed.
To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter
identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has
been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any
misfire DTCs.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two
procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM,
and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored
data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove
and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter
programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all
parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile
equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF
may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center
for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center
only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for
As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the
Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search
function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data.
For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the
PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate
the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3035
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3036
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Removal
1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a
Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS).
Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt.
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM.
5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged.
Installation
1. Install the PCM cowl seal.
2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3037
4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt.
5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3041
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3042
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3047
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3048
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a
concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred
from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There
are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six
circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits
and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit
used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is
converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these
degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer
to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control
Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the
indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM
receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is
incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present
with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal
return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and
the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared
with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB)
throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
3-Track APP Sensor
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3052
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3053
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM
calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This
input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque
converter clutch (TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals.
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3054
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3055
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position
Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position
Sensor 1 > Page 3060
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position
Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position
Sensor 1 > Page 3063
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3064
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3065
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3072
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are three types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3076
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3077
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has
39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring
the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3078
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3079
4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3083
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3084
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant
temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a
fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern
such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to
major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy,
the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For
additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Description and
Operation/Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Typical CHT Sensor
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3085
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
NOTE: If the cylinder head is being replaced, the CHT must be replaced.
1. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Level Input (FLI)
The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type
FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3091
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3092
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3093
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3094
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3095
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Level Sender
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module
See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Pump/Service and Repair/Fuel Pump Module.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the locking tabs and remove the fuel level sender
from the FP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3096
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3100
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3101
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3105
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3106
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air
temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are two types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use two IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard
OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the
intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency.
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type
MAF Sensor
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into a Drop-in or Flange-type
MAF sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3111
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3114
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3115
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3116
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal
Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Engine block-mounted KS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3117
3. Remove the lower intake manifold.
4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector.
5. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Installation
Engine block-mounted KS
1. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2. Connect the KS electrical connector.
3. Install the lower intake manifold.
Cylinder head-mounted KS
4. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Connect the KS electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3121
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3122
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the
MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3123
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the MAP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
- When installing the sensor, if the bolt fails to hold specified torque, relocate the sensor and retain,
using the auxiliary bolt hole in the upper intake manifold.
3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control
gains and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11 > Page 3131
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11 > Page 3132
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11 > Page 3133
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22 > Page 3136
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22 > Page 3137
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22 > Page 3138
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Engine Control Components
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3141
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Engine Control Components
Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 3144
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Removal and Installation
LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the LH HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench
Adapter Formulas in the Appendix
.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
RH HO2S
5. Disconnect the RH HO2S electrical connector.
6. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 3145
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the RH HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench
Adapter Formulas in the Appendix
.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
All HO2S
7. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 3146
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to the Torque Wrench
Adapter Formulas in the Appendix
.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 3151
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during
parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page
3155
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle
Position Sensor
Engine Control Components
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant
ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position
sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second
signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position
sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is
1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit
and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits
used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 3161
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
Engine Control Components
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the
PCM from the TP. These are:
- closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
6F35
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3165
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3166
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3167
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3168
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
8. Position the main control cover in place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3169
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3170
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment.
3.0L Engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3171
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output
Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Engine Control Components
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is
generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output
Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3176
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Engine Control Components
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the
sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle
Position Sensor
Engine Control Components
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant
ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position
sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second
signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position
sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is
1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit
and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits
used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 3182
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
Engine Control Components
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the
PCM from the TP. These are:
- closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
6F35
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3186
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3187
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3188
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3189
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
8. Position the main control cover in place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3190
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3191
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment.
3.0L Engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3192
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL
ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's
Set
TSB 10-19-1
10/11/10
3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/1/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion
2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List
and production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L
engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010.
a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for
normal diagnostics.
b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2.
2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable
camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET
AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF
DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE
INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES
THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs.
Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL
ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 3201
101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs.
Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine
Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT
Solenoid DTC's Set
TSB 10-19-1
10/11/10
3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/1/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion
2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List
and production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L
engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010.
a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for
normal diagnostics.
b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2.
2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable
camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET
AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF
DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE
INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES
THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs.
Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine
Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 3207
101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs.
Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 3213
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 3214
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 3220
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 3221
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 3224
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 3227
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3228
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
Overview
The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function
of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT systems.
- Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have four operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default
mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM)
determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant
temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine
RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine
power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque.
In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the
overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS
and DEPS systems are used.
The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the Testing and Inspection
section. For additional information, refer to the Engine System - General Information. Verification of
incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a
stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If
the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are
primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine System - General
Information.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank.
A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant
temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP,
throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions
of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft
position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft
position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not
operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The
PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3229
achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position
error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a
default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When
the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil
pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil
flow.
VCT System
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH or RH valve cover.
2. Remove the 2 bolts and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Engine Control Components
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is
generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3237
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Engine Control Components
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the
sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Solenoid >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Diverter Solenoid: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Bypass Solenoid
The secondary AIR bypass solenoid is used by the PCM to control vacuum to the secondary air
injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve. The secondary AIR bypass solenoid is a normally closed
solenoid. The secondary AIR bypass solenoid also has a filtered vent feature to permit vacuum
release.
Secondary AIR Bypass Solenoid
Secondary AIR Bypass Solenoid
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Valve >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Diverter Valve: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Secondary AIR Diverter Valve
The secondary AIR diverter valve is used with the secondary AIR pump to provide on/off control of
air to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter. When the secondary AIR pump is on and
vacuum is supplied to the AIR diverter valve, air passes the integral check valve disk. When the
secondary AIR pump is off, and vacuum is removed from the AIR diverter valve, the integral check
valve disk is held on the seat and stops air from being drawn into the exhaust system and prevents
the back flow of the exhaust into the secondary AIR system.
Secondary AIR Diverter Valve
Secondary AIR Diverter Valve
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Injection Pump: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Secondary AIR Pump
The secondary AIR pump provides pressurized air to the secondary AIR system. The secondary
AIR pump functions independently of RPM and is controlled by the PCM. The secondary AIR pump
is only used for short periods of time. Delivery of air is dependent on the amount of system
backpressure and system voltage. The secondary AIR pump draws dry filtered air from the intake
air system downstream of the mass air flow/intake air temperature sensor. For additional
information on the secondary AIR injection system, refer to Secondary Air Injection (AIR) System
See: Description and Operation.
Secondary Air Pump
Secondary Air Pump
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
Catalyst and Exhaust Systems
Overview
The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine
exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N),
carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of
nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air pollutants
of CO, NOx, and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The
catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle
applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic
converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the
powertrain control module (PCM). For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the
description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor.
For most vehicles, only two HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors
(HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the ones after the
catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some partial zero
emission vehicles (PZEVs) use three HO2Ss. The stream 1 sensor (HO2S11) located before the
catalyst is used for primary fuel control, the stream 2 sensor (HO2S12) is used to monitor the
light-off catalyst, and the stream 3 sensor (HO2S13) located after the catalyst is used for long term
fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (fore aft oxygen sensor control).
V-Engines
V-Engines
In-Line Engines
In-Line Engines
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The
concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated
ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust
gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The
catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components
so they are used up as much as possible.
Light Off Catalyst
As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency
exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C
(475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalytic converter (TWC) that is located as
close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the
exhaust manifold it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located
under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion
efficiency for that
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3252
catalyst.
Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Conversion Efficiency
A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high
conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly
controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly
decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO
conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency.
TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart
TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart
Exhaust System
The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the
atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the
catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe
before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and
NOx in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed
from the catalytic converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into
the muffler. Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust
tailpipe.
On some PZEV, there is a total of three HO2Ss in the exhaust stream. One near the exhaust
manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream 2), and the third (stream 3) is
mounted after the light-off catalyst.
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 H2OS Configuration
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 3 H2OS Configuration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3253
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 3 HO2S Configuration
Underbody Catalyst
The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line
with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to two light off catalysts,
forming a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a
specific vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System for the exhaust system exploded view.
Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter
The TWC contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The
TWC catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of
NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio
at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2Ss provide the PCM with information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. For
additional information on the HO2S, refer to Engine Control Components See: Computers and
Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control Components.
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold
Catalytic Converter - 3.0L LH Manifold
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 6 retainers and the passenger side splash shield.
3. Remove the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S).
4. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt.
5. Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
6. Remove the 3 bolts and position the A/C compressor aside.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH catalytic converter heat shield.
8. Remove exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust
Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Y-Pipe.
9. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold nuts.
10. Remove the LH catalytic converter manifold from the vehicle.
- Discard the gasket.
11. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold studs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3256
12. Clean and inspect the LH catalytic converter manifold.
Installation
1. Install the 6 new LH catalytic converter manifold studs.
- Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
2. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the
exhaust Y-pipe will cause the converter to
develop an exhaust leak.
NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the
converter to develop an exhaust leak.
Using a new gasket, install the LH catalytic converter and the 6 nuts. Tighten in 2 stages in the
sequence shown.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. Install the exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust
Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Y-Pipe.
4. Install the LH catalytic converter heat shield and the 3 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Position the A/C compressor and install the 3 bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. Connect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
7. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and install the accessory drive belt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3257
8. Install the LH HO2S.
9. Install the passenger side splash shield and the 6 retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3258
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - RH
Catalytic Converter - 3.0L RH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L See:
Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust
System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Y-Pipe.
2. Disconnect the RH Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. Remove and discard the 3 RH catalytic converter nuts and remove the converter.
- Discard the RH catalytic converter gasket.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new gasket and nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3259
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View
Exhaust System - Exploded View
2.5L
3.0L (View 1 of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3260
3.0L (View 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3261
2.5L Hybrid
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3262
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3263
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Underbody
Catalytic Converter - Underbody
Removal
NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator
to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
NOTE: The production catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a one-piece construction. The
service catalytic converter and muffler is a 2-piece construction.
NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can
be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable
the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the
position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed.
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2.5L vehicles
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
All vehicles
3. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the exhaust intermediate
pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange studs.
NOTE: When loosening the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts, alternately
loosen the nuts from side to side.
Remove and discard the two 10-mm exhaust catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate
pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts.
4. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the resonator flange studs.
NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side.
Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts.
5. NOTICE: Remove the gaskets by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the gasket on the pipe.
Do not pry under the gasket or damage
to the flange may occur.
Detach the 3 exhaust hangers and remove the catalytic converter and muffler assembly.
- Remove and discard the gaskets.
2.5L vehicles
6. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3264
3.0L vehicles
7. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration.
2.5L Hybrid vehicles
8. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration.
Installation
NOTICE: The exhaust hanger insulators are constructed of a special material. Use only the correct
specification exhaust hanger insulator or damage to the exhaust system may occur.
NOTE: Check the exhaust hanger insulators for damage and fatigue. Install new exhaust hanger
insulators as required.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad.
1. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time.
Install the service clamp onto the catalytic converter section.
2. Install the catalytic converter section and service clamp onto the muffler section.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3265
3. Inspect the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe and resonator flange studs for damage.
- If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s).
NOTE: If replacement of the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange stud(s) is required,
perform Steps 4 and 5.
4. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 10-mm stud out of the flange.
5. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe
flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls
with witness knurl grooves in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe flange.
Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 10-mm stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
NOTE: If replacement of the resonator flange stud(s) is required, perform Steps 6 and 7.
6. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 8-mm stud out of the flange.
7. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the
new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in
the resonator flange.
Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 8-mm stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
8. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time.
Attach the catalytic converter and muffler assembly to the 3 exhaust hangers.
9. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 3266
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket by hand.
10. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH
side in sequence in 3 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
11. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe gasket by hand.
12. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts
and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in
sequence in 3 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
13. Tighten the 4 service clamp nuts to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister
Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's
Canister Purge Control Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - Driveability Issues
With/Without/MIL/DTC's
TSB 11-3-22
03/16/11
DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC
P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a
2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge
valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction
indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13.
2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel
exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in
the evaporative emission canister?
a. No - Proceed to Step 3.
b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to
step 3.
3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment,
Refer to WSM, Section 303-13.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr.
Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister
Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3276
110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs.
Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's
Canister Purge Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Driveability Issues
With/Without/MIL/DTC's
TSB 11-3-22
03/16/11
DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC
P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a
2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge
valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction
indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13.
2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel
exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in
the evaporative emission canister?
a. No - Proceed to Step 3.
b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to
step 3.
3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment,
Refer to WSM, Section 303-13.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr.
Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3282
110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs.
Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3283
Canister Purge Control Valve: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3284
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3285
Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve
The EVAP canister purge valve is part of the enhanced EVAP system that is controlled by the
PCM. This valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the EVAP canister to the intake manifold
during various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister purge valve is a normally closed valve.
The EVAP canister purge valve controls the flow of vapors by way of a solenoid, eliminating the
need for an electronic vacuum regulator and vacuum diaphragm. For E-Series, Escape/Mariner,
Expedition, F-Series, and Navigator, the PCM outputs a duty cycle between 0% and 100% to
control the EVAP canister purge valve. For all others, the PCM outputs a variable current between
0 mA and 1,000 mA to control the EVAP canister purge valve.
Typical EVAP Canister Purge Valve
Typical EVAP Canister Purge Valve (Part 1)
Typical EVAP Canister Purge Valve (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3286
Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve
2.5L Engine
3.0L Engine
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3287
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the EVAP canister purge valve.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Customer Interest Emissions - Driveability Issues
With/Without/MIL/DTC's
TSB 11-3-22
03/16/11
DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC
P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a
2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge
valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction
indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13.
2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel
exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in
the evaporative emission canister?
a. No - Proceed to Step 3.
b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to
step 3.
3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment,
Refer to WSM, Section 303-13.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr.
Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's >
Page 3296
110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs.
Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues
With/Without/MIL/DTC's
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Driveability
Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's
TSB 11-3-22
03/16/11
DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC
P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a
2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge
valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction
indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13.
2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel
exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in
the evaporative emission canister?
a. No - Proceed to Step 3.
b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to
step 3.
3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment,
Refer to WSM, Section 303-13.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr.
Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues
With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3302
110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs.
Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3303
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Canister
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the fresh air tube from the EVAP canister.
5. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-EVAP canister fuel vapor tube quick connect
coupling.
6. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge tube-to-fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, 2 bolts and the EVAP canister assembly.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3304
- Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair
Fuel Vapor Tube Assembly
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Position a suitable lifting device under the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3308
4. Remove the LH fuel tank strap bolt and position the strap aside.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
5. Partially lower the LH side of the fuel tank enough to access the fuel vapor tube assembly.
6. Disconnect the Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank quick connect coupling.
8. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister fuel vapor
tube quick connect coupling.
9. Remove the fuel vapor tube assembly.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation
Leak Detection Solenoid: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
During the evaporative emissions (EVAP) leak check monitor, the CV solenoid seals the EVAP
canister from the atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the
target vacuum in the fuel tank during the EVAP leak check monitor.
Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3315
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3316
Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Remove the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister assembly. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3317
Evaporative Emission Control Canister/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent solenoid electrical connector, release the pin-type retainer
and remove the EVAP canister wire harness.
3. Remove the 3 EVAP canister tray bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling.
5. Disconnect the EVAP canister fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling.
6. Remove the EVAP canister from the tray.
7. Depress the locking tab outward, rotate the EVAP canister vent solenoid clockwise and remove
it from the EVAP canister.
- Apply clean engine oil to the EVAP canister vent solenoid O-ring seal prior to installation.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Vacuum Regulator Solenoid
The EGR vacuum regulator solenoid is an electromagnetic device used to regulate the vacuum
supply to the EGR valve. The solenoid contains a coil which magnetically controls the position of a
disc to regulate the vacuum. As the duty cycle to the coil increases, the vacuum signal passed
through the solenoid to the EGR valve also increases. Vacuum not directed to the EGR valve is
vented through the solenoid vent to atmosphere. Note that at 0% duty cycle (no electrical signal
applied), the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid allows some vacuum to pass, but not enough to open
the EGR valve.
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Duty Cycle Graph
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Data
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Tube: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Orifice Tube Assembly
The orifice tube assembly is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the intake
manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also
contains the metering orifice and two pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates
a measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure
differential across the orifice is picked up by the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor which
provides feedback to the PCM.
EGR Orifice Tube Assembly
EGR Orifice Tube Assembly
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3325
EGR Tube: Service and Repair
Exhaust Manifold to Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Tube
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the exhaust manifold-to-EGR valve tube fitting from the EGR valve.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
2. Disconnect the exhaust manifold-to-EGR valve tube fitting from the RH exhaust manifold.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
3. Remove the exhaust manifold-to-EGR valve tube.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations > Page 3329
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve
EGR Valve: Description and Operation Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve
Engine Control Components
Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve
Depending on the application, the EEGR valve is a water cooled or an air cooled motor/valve
assembly. The motor is commanded to move in 52 discrete steps as it acts directly on the EEGR
valve. The position of the valve determines the rate of EGR. The built-in spring works to close the
valve (against the motor opening force).
EEGR Motor/Valve Assembly
EEGR Motor/Valve Assembly
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve > Page 3332
EGR Valve: Description and Operation Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Module (ESM)
Engine Control Components
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Module (ESM)
The ESM is an integrated differential pressure feedback EGR system that functions in the same
manner as a conventional differential pressure feedback EGR system. The various system
components have been integrated into a single component called the ESM. The flange of the valve
portion of the ESM bolts directly to the intake manifold with a metal gasket that forms the metering
orifice. This arrangement increases system reliability, response time, and system precision. By
relocating the EGR orifice from the exhaust to the intake side of the EGR valve, the downstream
pressure signal measures manifold absolute pressure (MAP). This MAP signal is used for EGR
correction and inferred barometric pressure (BARO) at ignition on. The system provides the PCM
with a differential pressure feedback EGR signal, identical to a traditional differential pressure
feedback EGR system.
ESM
ESM (Part 1)
ESM (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve > Page 3333
EGR Valve: Description and Operation Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve
Engine Control Components
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve
The EGR valve in the differential pressure feedback EGR system is a conventional,
vacuum-actuated valve. The valve increases or decreases the flow of EGR. As vacuum applied to
the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the spring force, the valve begins to open. As the vacuum
signal weakens, at 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring force closes the valve. The EGR valve is
fully open at about 15 kPa (4.5 in-Hg).
Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing repair specifications on flow rate is
impractical. The on board diagnostic (OBD) system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not
measured directly as part of the diagnostic procedures.
Typical EGR Valve
Typical EGR Valve (Part 1)
Typical EGR Valve (Part 2)
EGR Flow Rate Graph
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Components - Exploded View
EGR Valve: Service and Repair Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Components - Exploded
View
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Components - Exploded View
> Page 3336
EGR Valve: Service and Repair Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the exhaust manifold-to-EGR valve tube fitting from the EGR valve.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the EGR valve.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces
of the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve gasket.
NOTE: If there is no residual gasket material present, metal surface prep can be used to clean and
prepare the surfaces
NOTE: Do not reuse the EGR valve gasket.
Remove and discard the EGR valve gasket.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3340
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation >
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation >
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3345
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the PCV valve electrical connector.
2. Release the clamp and disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the PCV valve.
3. NOTICE: A new positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve must be installed if removed from the
valve cover. Damage will occur to the
locking mechanism on the PCV valve.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
NOTE: When installing, make sure the PCV valve electrical connector is pointing in the correct
position to allow the wiring harness to be connected. Incorrect installation would require removal
and replacement of the valve.
Rotate the PCV valve counterclockwise and remove it from the valve cover. Discard the PCV valve.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new PCV valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3350
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications > Page 3355
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L
engines do not have a Schrader valve.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line
Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine
5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications > Page 3356
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve.
Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine
7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line
Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
All vehicles
9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure
and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP fuse.
10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information >
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Measured/PID Values
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 689.5 RPM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal
2.5L and 3.0L Vehicles
2.5L Hybrid Vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3366
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
NOTE: The accelerator pedal and sensor assembly on the 2.5L and 3.0L are similar in appearance
to the 2.5L Hybrid but are not interchangeable.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2.5L and 3.0L vehicles
2. Remove the 3 self-tapping screws and the accelerator pedal and sensor assembly.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
2.5L Hybrid vehicles
3. Remove the 3 bolts and the accelerator pedal and sensor assembly.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
All vehicles
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3370
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3371
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a
concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred
from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There
are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six
circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits
and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit
used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is
converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these
degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer
to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic
Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the
indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM
receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is
incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present
with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal
return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and
the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared
with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB)
throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description
and Operation.
3-Track APP Sensor
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Cleaner Fresh Air
Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
TSB 11-3-5
03/15/11
3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or
before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner
housing.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-12.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 > Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe
Comes Loose
TSB 11-3-5
03/15/11
3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or
before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner
housing.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-12.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter
Element > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3392
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3393
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM
calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This
input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque
converter clutch (TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals.
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3394
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3395
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Check Fuel Cap Indicator
The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM
sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines there is a concern in the
EVAP system due to the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe not being sealed correctly.
This is detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank after a fueling event.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3407
Fuel Injector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3408
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Spring Lock Couplings
Spring Lock Couplings
Disconnect
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It
is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube spring lock coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the safety clip from the spring lock coupling.
4. Insert the Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool onto the fuel tube and into the spring lock
coupling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3413
5. Separate the spring lock coupling from the fuel tube.
Connect
1. Clean and inspect the fuel tube and spring lock coupling.
- Lubricate the end of the fuel tube with clean engine oil.
2. Install the spring lock coupling onto the fuel tube until fully seated.
3. Pull on the spring lock coupling to make sure it is correctly locked onto the fuel tube.
4. Install the safety clip onto the spring lock coupling.
5. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3414
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Coupling
Quick Connect Coupling
Disconnect - Type I
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It
is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube.
- Press the quick connect coupling release button and separate the quick connect coupling from
the tube.
Connect - Type I
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To
make sure that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3415
Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated.
2. Connect the battery ground cable.
Disconnect - Type II
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It
is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Rotate the lock tab on the quick connect coupling.
3. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the fitting.
- Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate from the fitting.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3416
Connect - Type II
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
Rotate the lock tab and install the quick connect coupling onto the fitting.
2. NOTE: Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the tube. To make sure that the
fuel tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Release the lock tab into the latched position.
3. Connect the battery ground cable.
Disconnect - Type III
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It
is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3417
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. NOTE: Carefully release the lock tab to avoid breakage.
Release the quick connect coupling primary lock tab.
4. Rotate the primary lock tab to the fully unlocked position and squeeze the secondary lock tabs to
release the locking mechanism.
5. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube.
- Push the locking mechanism outward and separate the quick connect coupling from the tube.
Connect - Type III
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing it into the quick connect coupling. To
make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated.
2. NOTE: Make sure the retainer clip clicks into place when installing.
Depress the retainer clip until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3418
3. NOTE: To make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the quick connect coupling.
Rotate the primary locking tab to the closed position.
4. Connect the battery ground cable.
Disconnect - Type IV
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It
is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Squeeze the quick connect coupling retainer clip tabs to release the locking mechanism.
4. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube.
- Push the locking mechanism outward to release the quick connect coupling.
- Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate it from the tube.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3419
Connect - Type IV
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To
make sure that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Connect the quick connect coupling to the tube.
1. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated.
2. Depress the locking tab until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing.
2. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3423
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications > Page 3428
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L
engines do not have a Schrader valve.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line
Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine
5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications > Page 3429
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve.
Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine
7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line
Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
All vehicles
9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure
and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP fuse.
10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control
Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank.
Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur.
Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3436
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Fuel Rail
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail
Fuel Rail
Removal
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Clean all fuel residue from the engine compartment. If not removed, fuel residue may
ignite when the engine is returned to operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the upper intake manifold.
4. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling.
5. Release the 4 wire harness pin-type retainers from the fuel rail.
6. Release the engine wire harness and the fuel charging wire harness pin-type retainers from the
fuel rail.
7. Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors.
8. Remove the 4 fuel rail bolts.
9. Remove the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly.
10. Remove the 6 clips and the fuel injectors.
- Remove and discard the 12 fuel injector O-ring seals.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. Use of ordinary
O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak. Do
not reuse the O-ring seals.
NOTE: The upper and lower fuel injector O-ring seals are similar in appearance, but are not
interchangeable.
NOTE: Install new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine oil.
Install the 6 fuel injectors and clips on the fuel rail.
2. Position the fuel rail and install the bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Connect the engine wire harness and the fuel charging wire harness pin-type retainers to the
fuel rail.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 3441
4. Connect the 4 wire harness pin-type retainers to the fuel rail.
5. Connect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling.
6. Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors.
7. Install the upper intake manifold.
8. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 3442
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail and Fuel Injector - Exploded View
Fuel Rail and Fuel Injector - Exploded View
Fuel Rail
NOTE: Early build shown, late build similar.
Fuel Injector
NOTE: Early build shown, late build similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 3443
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3448
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3449
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3450
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Lines
Fuel Lines
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
All vehicles
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Release the fuel system pressure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3451
3. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Hybrid vehicles
4. Remove the front and rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet lines.
All vehicles
5. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tubes after releasing the fuel system pressure.
Upon disconnecting or removing any fuel tubes,
carefully drain any residual fuel into a suitable container.
Disconnect the fuel supply jumper tube-to-fuel supply tube quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-vapor tube quick connect coupling.
7. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
8. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
9. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge tube-to-vapor tube quick connect
coupling (part of 9E857).
10. Release the 7 fuel tube bundle retainer clips and remove the fuel supply and vapor tubes.
11. Disconnect the fresh air tube from the EVAP canister.
12. Release the 4 pin-type retainer clips and remove the fresh air tube.
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3457
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3458
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3459
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
5. Remove the 2 fuel tank filler pipe flange screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
6. Remove the LR wheel and tire.
7. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tank filler pipe. Carefully drain into a suitable
container.
Release the clamp and remove the fuel tank filler pipe hose from the fuel tank.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
9. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe assembly.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Engine Control Components
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is
located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the
engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a
check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 3464
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
Engine Control Components
Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check
valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting
concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low
tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3467
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3468
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3469
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3470
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3474
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Fuel Tank Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Engine Control Components
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is
located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the
engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a
check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 3477
Fuel Tank Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
Engine Control Components
Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check
valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting
concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low
tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3481
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve
Note: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned, also some IAC valves are
normally open and others are normally closed. Some IAC valves require engine vacuum to
operate.
The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC
valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve
assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals
the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the
IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or
decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control:
- no touch start
- cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up
- idle (corrects for engine load)
- stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function)
- over-temperature idle boost
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3488
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3489
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is
to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel cone held in place by a magnet.
When a sharp impact occurs, the cone breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and
strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel
pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the
Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch.
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3490
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel.
2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View > Page 3495
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube quick connect coupling from the Air Cleaner (ACL)
outlet pipe.
2. Release the ACL outlet pipe retainer from the ACL housing.
3. Loosen the 2 clamps and remove the ACL outlet pipe.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
4. NOTE: The ACL outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering
the engine.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3499
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3500
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank.
Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur.
Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3508
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3512
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3513
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3518
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3519
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a
concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred
from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There
are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal circuits (a total of six
circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits
and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit
used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The pedal position signal is
converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these
degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer
to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic
Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are three pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the
indication of pedal position by the strategy. The three pedal position signals make sure the PCM
receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is
incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present
with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal
return circuits, and three signal circuits (a total of seven circuits and pins) between the PCM and
the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared
with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB)
throttle position sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description
and Operation.
3-Track APP Sensor
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3523
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3524
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM
calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This
input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque
converter clutch (TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Diagram of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals.
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3525
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3526
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3530
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3534
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3538
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3539
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is
to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel cone held in place by a magnet.
When a sharp impact occurs, the cone breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and
strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel
pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the
Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch.
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3540
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel.
2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic
Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle
Position Sensor
Engine Control Components
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant
ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position
sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second
signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position
sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is
1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit
and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits
used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description
and Operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic
Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 3546
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
Engine Control Components
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the
PCM from the TP. These are:
- closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Throttle Body: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122
Throttle Body: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122
TSB 09-23-5
11/30/09
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P2135 - BUILT BETWEEN 6/22/2009-10/15/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion, Milan,
Fusion Hybrid, and Milan Hybrid vehicles, built on or between 6/22/2009 - 10/15/2009, may exhibit
a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or wrench light with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P2135. DTCs
P2111 and/or P0122 may also be present. Drivability symptoms may include intermittent rough
idle, idle speed below specification and/or reduced power. This concern may be attributed to
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) hardware. If the vehicle only exhibits DTCs P2111 or P0122 follow
normal Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test (PPT) diagnostics.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check for DTCs and confirm vehicle build date. Is DTC P2135 present and vehicle built on or
between 6/22/2009-10/15/2009?
a. Yes - proceed to Step 2.
b. No - Procedure does not apply. Refer to PC/ED PPT DV for appropriate diagnostic routines.
2. Replace the ETB per the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092305A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Fusion 0.6 Hr.
Hybrid, Milan, Milan Hybrid 2.5L Engine: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Throttle Body: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 3555
Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr.
Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9E926 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Body: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine
Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122
Throttle Body: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122
TSB 09-23-5
11/30/09
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P2135 - BUILT BETWEEN 6/22/2009-10/15/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion, Milan,
Fusion Hybrid, and Milan Hybrid vehicles, built on or between 6/22/2009 - 10/15/2009, may exhibit
a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or wrench light with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P2135. DTCs
P2111 and/or P0122 may also be present. Drivability symptoms may include intermittent rough
idle, idle speed below specification and/or reduced power. This concern may be attributed to
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) hardware. If the vehicle only exhibits DTCs P2111 or P0122 follow
normal Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test (PPT) diagnostics.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check for DTCs and confirm vehicle build date. Is DTC P2135 present and vehicle built on or
between 6/22/2009-10/15/2009?
a. Yes - proceed to Step 2.
b. No - Procedure does not apply. Refer to PC/ED PPT DV for appropriate diagnostic routines.
2. Replace the ETB per the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092305A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Fusion 0.6 Hr.
Hybrid, Milan, Milan Hybrid 2.5L Engine: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Body: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine
Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 3561
Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr.
Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9E926 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3562
Throttle Body: Service and Repair
Throttle Body
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2. Disconnect the electronic throttle control electrical connector.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the Throttle Body (TB).
- Discard the TB gasket.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new TB gasket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle
Position Sensor
Engine Control Components
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant
ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position
sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second
signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position
sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is
1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit
and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits
used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description
and Operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor > Page 3568
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
Engine Control Components
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the
PCM from the TP. These are:
- closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System >
Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV)
WARNING Substantial opening and closing torque is applied by this system. To prevent injury, be
careful to keep fingers away from lever mechanisms when actuated. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
The IMTV is a motorized actuated unit mounted directly to the intake manifold. The IMTV actuator
controls a shutter device attached to the actuator shaft. There is no monitor input to the PCM with
this system to indicate shutter position.
The motorized IMTV unit is not energized below a calibrated RPM. The shutter is in the closed
position to prevent airflow blend from occurring in the intake manifold. The motorized unit is
energized above a calibrated RPM. The motorized unit is commanded on by the PCM initially at a
100 percent duty cycle to move the shutter to the open position, and then falling to approximately
50 percent to continue to hold the shutter open.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications > Firing Order
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications > Firing Order > Page 3578
Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification
Engine
Engine Cylinder Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3583
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3586
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3587
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3588
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3592
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3593
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has
39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring
the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3594
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3595
4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3600
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3601
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3602
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3603
Ignition Coil: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3604
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3605
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3606
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Coil on Plug (COP)
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil on Plug (COP)
Engine Control Components
Coil On Plug (COP)
The COP ignition operates similar to a standard coil pack ignition except each plug has one coil per
plug. The COP has 3 different modes of operation: engine crank, engine running, and CMP failure
mode effects management (FMEM). For additional information, refer to Ignition Systems See:
Description and Operation/Ignition Systems.
Typical Coil On Plug (COP)
Typical Coil On Plug (COP)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Coil on Plug (COP) > Page 3609
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil Pack
Engine Control Components
Coil Pack
The PCM provides a grounding switch for the coil primary circuit. When the switch is closed,
voltage is applied to the coil primary circuit. This creates a magnetic field around the primary coil.
The PCM opens the switch, causing the magnetic field to collapse, inducing the high voltage in the
secondary coil windings and firing the spark plug. The spark plugs are paired so that as one spark
plug fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next
time the coil is fired the order is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine
firing order.
Coil packs come in 4-tower, 6-tower horizontal and 6-tower series 5 models. Two adjacent coil
towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair. For 6-tower coil pack (6 cylinder)
applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2 and 6, and 3 and 4. For 4-tower coil pack (4 cylinder)
applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 4 and 2 and 3.
When the coil is fired by the PCM, spark is delivered through the matched pair towers to their
respective spark plugs. The spark plugs are fired simultaneously and are paired so that as one fires
on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil
is fired, the situation is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing
order.
Typical Four-Tower Coil Pack
Typical Four-Tower Coil Pack
Typical Six-Tower Coil Pack
Typical Six-Tower Coil Pack
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3612
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3613
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil-On-Plug
Ignition Coil-On-Plug
Removal and Installation
LH side
1. Remove the air cleaner.
RH side
2. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH ignition coils only.
Remove the upper intake manifold.
Both sides
3. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors.
4. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and
ease removal.
Remove the bolts and the ignition coils.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before attaching to
the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3614
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3615
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3616
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition RH
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3617
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3622
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3625
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 3626
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 3627
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal
Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Engine block-mounted KS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 3628
3. Remove the lower intake manifold.
4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector.
5. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Installation
Engine block-mounted KS
1. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2. Connect the KS electrical connector.
3. Install the lower intake manifold.
Cylinder head-mounted KS
4. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Connect the KS electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3634
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3637
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3638
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3639
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3643
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3644
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has
39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring
the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3645
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install the CKP sensor and bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3646
4. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 3656
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page
3662
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3663
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3668
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3671
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3672
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Two Types of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3673
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Cylinder Head-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Engine Block-Mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal
Cylinder head-mounted Knock Sensor (KS)
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Engine block-mounted KS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3674
3. Remove the lower intake manifold.
4. Disconnect the KS electrical connector.
5. Remove the bolt and the KS.
Installation
Engine block-mounted KS
1. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2. Connect the KS electrical connector.
3. Install the lower intake manifold.
Cylinder head-mounted KS
4. Install the KS and the bolt.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Connect the KS electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark plug gap.....................................................................................................................................
....................................1.15-1.25 mm (0.045-0.048 in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Gap > Page 3679
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark plugs...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................15 Nm (133 lb-in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3680
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................CGSF-22F
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3681
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
- Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
- Install a new spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
- Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
- Correct the oil leak concern.
- Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
- Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3682
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
- Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3685
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3686
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur
to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the gap as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3687
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3688
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3689
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View - Engine Ignition RH
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition LH
Engine Ignition RH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3690
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3697
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3700
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3701
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3702
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3703
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3704
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3705
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3706
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3707
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3708
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3709
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3710
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3711
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3712
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3713
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3714
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3715
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3716
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control
Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3717
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3718
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3719
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3720
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 3724
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3727
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3728
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3729
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3730
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3731
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3732
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3733
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3734
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3735
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3736
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3737
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3738
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3739
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3740
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3741
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3742
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3743
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control
Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3744
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3745
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3746
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3747
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3751
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3754
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3755
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3756
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3757
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3758
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3759
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3760
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3761
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3762
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3763
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3764
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3765
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3766
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3767
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3768
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3769
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3770
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control
Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3771
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3772
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3773
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3774
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive.
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Column Shift)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Floor Shift)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
6F35
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3791
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3792
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3793
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3794
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
8. Position the main control cover in place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3795
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3796
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment.
3.0L Engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3797
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
TSB 09-8-6
05/04/09
6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706,
P0707, P1702
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before
10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707,
P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and
transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND
CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED
(TSS) SENSOR.
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9.
2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS
connector from the solenoid body lead frame.
3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow
WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor
wires during the installation of the main control.
4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM,
Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr.
2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time
To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C
(Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 3806
7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H557 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T
6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T
6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 3812
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T
Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
TSB 09-8-6
05/04/09
6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706,
P0707, P1702
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before
10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707,
P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and
transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND
CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED
(TSS) SENSOR.
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9.
2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS
connector from the solenoid body lead frame.
3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow
WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor
wires during the installation of the main control.
4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM,
Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr.
2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time
To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C
(Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T
Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 3817
7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H557 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 3823
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3824
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3825
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
6F35
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS
sensor.
Installation
1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3828
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
6F35
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3829
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3830
11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3831
Installation
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And
Assembly Of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly,
continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3832
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3833
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3834
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability
Technical Service Bulletin # 10B15 Date: 100419
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3847
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes, OASIS will be activated on April 19, 2010.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by April 19, 2010. Owner names and
addresses will be available by May 31, 2010.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but
are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available)
and schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this service action performed on a timely basis.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3848
If the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that complete transmission overhaul
is necessary, dealers must perform a Cost Cap Analysis using the Cost Cap Tool found on the
Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the
repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter. This refund offer expires
October 31, 2010.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the date of the Owner Notification Letter. There is no
expiration date for emergency repair refunds. Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be
excessive, will not be reimbursed.
^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with low regulated fluid pressure to
transmission clutches (burnt or slipping) and/or replacement of the transmission valve body.
RENTAL VEHICLES
In most cases, a rental vehicle will not be required. If a customer's vehicle requires a transmission
repair and it is necessary to order parts, Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for
fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. The parts order must be an emergency
order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to
guarantee next day delivery. Prior approval for additional rental days is required from the Special
Service Support Center. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for
part replacement. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter
the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense
area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which
the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 10B15 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair
should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit,
the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines.
^ For rental vehicle claiming, follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts.
Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous
Expense area.
^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through April 30, 2011. There is no mileage
limit for this program.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3849
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Note:
Less than 2% of the affected vehicles are expected to require parts.
To manage part availability, dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center parts order
line (except for transmission fluid and silicone sealant). Dealers will receive a DOES II message
when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels.
When calling to place an order for any of the parts in the chart below please be prepared to provide
Dealer P&A; Code, VIN, and Mileage.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3850
In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission solenoid regulator valve bore may wear. The
function of a solenoid regulator is to provide regulated pressure to shift solenoids. Wear in the
solenoid regulator bore causes low clutch pressure and results in transmission slips/harsh shifts.
Continued driving with this condition may cause premature wear on the clutches. This may
eventually lead to a loss of 4th through 6th gears and ultimately loss of transmission function. This
service action will reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration. This calibration will reposition the
solenoid regulator valve to eliminate bore wear. A flowchart has been developed to help direct you
to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MODULE REPROGRAMMING
NOTE:
Reprogramming concerns! errors may be caused by the following:
^ Data Link Connector (DLC) or Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) becoming disconnected.
^ Allowing the IDS to enter any type of sleep mode.
^ Using a wireless IDS to VCM connection.
^ Low voltage on the IDS laptop.
^ Low voltage in the vehicle battery (use of a battery charger is recommended).
If you encounter reprogramming concerns, DO NOT DELETE the session. If the original session
has accidentally been deleted, recover the original session from the IDS "TRASH CAN" (located in
the lower right corner of the previous session screen) and continue to reprogram.
1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off.
2. Verify that the IDS is updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3851
3. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session.
4. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick.
5. Select Module Reprogramming and then select PCM. Touch the tick.
6. NOTE: If the IDS states there are no updates available, either the IDS has not been updated to
software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and
higher, or the PCM has already been reprogrammed.
A screen will appear stating a later PCM calibration is available. Follow the on-screen instructions
to program the PCM to the latest calibration.
7. After the PCM has been reprogrammed, inspect the vehicle's odometer for mileage:
^ If the mileage is LESS THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), remove the IDS. This service procedure is
complete and no additional repairs are necessary.
^ If the mileage is MORE THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), leave the IDS connected to the vehicle
and proceed to Step 8.
TRANSMISSION LOAD TEST
WARNING:
Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake to reduce the risk of
vehicle movement during this procedure Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
8. NOTE: In order to perform a valid Transmission Load Test, Transmission Fluid Temperature
(TFT) must be between 185-200° F (85-93° C).
Using the IDS, make sure the Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) is at an operating
temperature of 185-200° F (85-93° C). If the TFT is BELOW 185-200° F (85-93° C), perform the
following:
^ With the vehicle's brakes applied, start the engine.
^ Place the gear selector in D, bring the engine up to 1500 rpm and hold for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in R and bring the engine up to 1500 rpm for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute.
^ Repeat this procedure until the vehicle's TFT is 185-200° F (85-93° C).
9. Perform the Transmission Load Test:
NOTE:
Conduct this test after the PCM has been reprogrammed. Make sure that the engine coolant and
transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature and fluid levels are correct.
1. Block all wheels, set the parking brake, and firmly apply the service brakes.
2. Turn off Traction Control if equipped
3. Set the IDS to record engine rpm and TSS_SRC rpm.
4. Place the gear selector in D.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3852
5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold the pedal just long enough to let the engine get
to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and observe the
TSS_SRC rpm (it should be at ZERO when engine speed has reached maximum rpm). While
performing this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5 seconds. See Figure 2.
After the test, place the gear selector in N and run the engine at 1,000 rpm for 15 seconds to cool
the torque converter.
10. If the TSS_SRC rpm was ZERO during the Transmission Load Test, then this service
procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary.
If the TSS_SRC rpm was MORE than ZERO (transmission slipping) during the Transmission Load
Test, then proceed to Attachment IV for transmission repair.
Table of Contents
TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE
Pan and Tool Requirements
Transaxle Removal
Transaxle Disassembly
Main Control Valve Body Replacement
Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4, 5, 6) Disassembly and Assembly
Filter Removal and Replacement
Transaxle Assembly
Transaxle Installation and Post Test
Part and Tool Requirements
TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE
This transmission repair procedure involves installing a new transmission valve body and clutch
packs in the Overdrive/Direct (O/D) and forward clutch assemblies.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3853
PART AND TOOL REQUIREMENTS
NOTE:
Special tools that are needed for this portion of the service procedure are as follows:
^ Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 or equivalent
^ Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566
^ Torque Converter Handle # 307-091
^ Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Drive Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1
^ Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2
^ Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002 or equivalent
^ Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300
^ Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635
^ Suitable Depth Gauge
Transaxle Removal
1. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle For additional information refer to the appropriate WSM
Section 307.
Transaxle Disassembly
If the technician determines that the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that a
complete overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a cost cap analysis using the cost cap tool
found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website.
If the cost cap tool states "Repair", contact the Special Service Support Center (SSSC) with the
repair estimate (parts and labor at warranty prices) Be prepared to provide the dealership's P/A
code and have the repair order, which contains the VIN and mileage of the vehicle.
If the cost cap tool states "Replace" continue with the Transmission Prior Approval request, make
sure to select FSA on the main menu.
1. Install the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 onto the transaxle.
2. Using the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding
fixture.
3. Remove the Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566.
4. Install the Torque Converter Handle # 307-091.
5. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result.
Using Torque Converter Handle #307-091,remove the torque converter from the transaxle.
6. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3854
Remove the 13 bolts and the main control cover. See Figure 1.
7. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the Transmission Range (TR) sensor
electrical connectors. See Figure 2.
8. Remove and discard the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. See Figure 3.
9. NOTE: Record the location of the short and long main control Torx(R) bolts for reassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3855
Remove the nut and the 22 Torx(R) bolts and remove the main control assembly. See Figure 4.
10. Remove and discard the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate.
11. Remove and discard the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and low/reverse clutch transaxle
case-to-center support seals. See Figure 5.
1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal.
2. Low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3856
12. Remove the internal cooler bypass spring, sleeve and valve. See Figure 6.
13. Remove the bolt and the 055 sensor. See Figure 7.
14. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolt for assembly.
Remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts.
15. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case.
16. Remove the loose torque converter housing from the transaxle case
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3857
17. Remove the No 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 8.
18. Remove the differential. See Figure 9.
19. Remove the differential planetary sun gear.
20. Remove the No. 13 thrust washer. See Figure 10.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3858
21. Remove the No 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 11.
22. Simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain.
23. Remove the No 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 12.
24. Remove the No 10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 13.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3859
25. Remove the 2 bolts and the lube funnel hold down bracket. See Figure 14.
26. Remove the transmission fluid baffle. See Figure 15.
27. Remove the park pawl pin and spring. See Figure 16.
28. Remove the park pawl.
29. NOTE: The forward (1 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring is beveled. The beveled side of the snap ring
goes up (flat side down).
NOTE:
The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap faces the front of the transmission.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3860
Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. See Figure 17.
30. Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate, clutch pack, and wave spring.
31. Remove the front sun gear and shell assembly See Figure 18.
32. Remove the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 19.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3861
33. Remove the No 7 and No 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 20.
1. No 7 thrust bearing
2. No. 8 thrust bearing
34. Remove the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 21.
35. Remove the center planetary sun gear.
36. Remove the No 5 and No 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 22.
1. No. 5 thrust bearing
2. No. 6 thrust bearing
37. Remove the center support assembly. See Figure 23.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3862
38. Remove the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly See Figure 24.
39. Remove the low/reverse wave spring, clutch pack and pressure plate. See Figure 25.
40. Remove the low One-Way Clutch (OWC). See Figure 26.
41. NOTE: The intermediate (2, 6) clutch is removed with the rear planetary sun gear and shell
assembly.
Remove the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly and remove the intermediate (2, 6) clutch
from the assembly. See Figure 27.
42. Remove the pressure plate and the wave spring.
43. Remove the No 3 thrust bearing. See Figure 28.
44. Remove the overdrive/direct clutch assembly.
45. NOTE: If the No. 1 thrust bearing is stuck to the overdrive/direct clutch assembly remove the
No. 1 thrust bearing from the overdrive/direct clutch
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3863
Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing. See Figure 29.
46. Remove and discard the 5 clutch feed seals. See Figure 30.
Main Control Valve Body Replacement
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3864
1. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the main control valve body from the solenoid body. See
Figure 31.
2. Remove and discard the separator plate from the solenoid body. Install the new separator plate
from the new main control valve body.
3. Position the new main control valve body on the solenoid body assembly and install the 2 bolts.
See Figure 32.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4,5,6) Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the Overdrive (O/D) (4, 5, 6) clutch hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3865
2. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub, No 2 thrust bearing See Figure 33.
3. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. See Figure 33.
4. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate and discard the clutch pack. See Figure 33.
5. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor 30758412 on
the balance piston.
6. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and remove the snap ring. See
Figure 34.
7. Remove the Overdrive Clutch Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307584/2.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3866
8. Remove and discard the balance piston See Figure 35.
9. Remove the O/D (4, 5 6) piston return spring. See Figure 36.
10. Install the No.1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 37.
11. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3867
12. Apply compressed air to the O/D (4 5, 6) clutch piston port and remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch
piston. See Figure 38.
13. Remove the O/D/direct clutch assembly from the transaxle case.
14. Remove and discard the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal from the O/D/direct clutch
assembly. See Figure 39.
15. Remove and discard the 2 seals from the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3868
16. Install 2 new seals on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston and lubricate the seals with petroleum jelly.
See Figure 40.
17. Install a new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal and lubricate the seal with petroleum jelly.
See Figure 41.
18. Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston in place.
19. Using the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston, and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911,install
the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston into the O/D/direct
clutch assembly by hand. See Figure 42.
20. NOTE: Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring with the holes facing upward Install
the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3869
21. Lubricate the seals on the new balance piston and position the balance piston in place. See
Figure 43.
22. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 30758412
on the balance piston.
23. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and install the snap ring. See
Figure 44.
24. Remove the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307589/1 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor #
307-584/2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3870
25. Install the No 2 thrust bearing. See Figure 45.
26. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. See Figure 46.
27. Soak the new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 47.
28. Install the new O/D (4. 5, 6) clutch pack.
29. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate.
30. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3871
31. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case, install Dial Indicator Gauge with
Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator
and position the plunger on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air
pressure to the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the Dial
Indicator. The clearance should be between 0.950 mm (0.037 in) and 1.778 mm (0.07 in). If the
clearance is out of range, check the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack for correct installation. See Figure 48.
32. Remove Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002, O/D/direct clutch assembly and
the No. 1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing.
Filter Removal and Replacement
1. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil baffle from the torque converter housing. See Figure 49.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3872
2. NOTE: Record the location of the 6mm bolt for assembly Remove the 9 bolts and the pump and
filter assembly. See Figure 50.
3. Remove filter from the pump. making note of the orientation of the fluid filter to the fluid pump.
See Figure 51.
4. Remove the magnet from the filter.
5. Install the magnet on the filter.
6. Install the filter.
A. Position the filter on the pump.
B. Rotate the filter counterclockwise 90 degrees.
7. Install the pump and filter assembly in the torque converter housing and install the pump bolts.
See Figure 52.
A. Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3873
B. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. Install the transmission fluid baffle and the 2 bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Transaxle Assembly
1. Clean the silicone from the transaxle case-to-torque converter housing sealing surface and the
main control cover sealing surface.
2. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up or damage to
the transaxle can occur
Install the No. 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up. See Figure 53.
3. Install the overdrive/direct clutch assembly.
4. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down or damage
to the transaxle can occur
Install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down. See Figure 54.
5. Install the direct/intermediate clutch hub and rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3874
6. Install the intermediate (2, 6) wave spring assembly. See Figure 55.
7. Soak the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly in clean transmission fluid See Figure 56.
8. Install the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly, temporarily reversing the top friction and
steel plates for the clutch stack-up measurement.
9. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3875
10. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300
to the top of the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack at 3
different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement A. See Figure 57.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3876
11. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the transaxle case step above the
intermediate (2, 6) clutch Record this as measurement B. See Figure 58.
12. Subtract measurement B from measurement A. The clearance should be between 0.240 mm
(0009 in) and 260 mm (0.102 in). If the clearance is out
of range, check the intermediate (2,6) clutch pack for correct installation. If the intermediate (2, 6)
clutch pack is correctly installed, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the intermediate (2, 6)
clutch pack.
13. NOTE: When the intermediate (2, 6) clutch is correctly installed, a friction plate is on top.
Remove the top intermediate (2, 6) clutch friction and steel plate and correctly install the plates
back in the transaxle case.
14. Install the One-Way Clutch (OWC) assembly.
15. Install the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly.
16. NOTE: The position of the low/reverse pressure plate is important. When installing the center
support, the long support legs must fit through the
low/reverse pressure plate and rest on the OWC.
Position the low/reverse pressure plate so that the center support legs fit through the pressure
plate and rest on the OWC and install the low/reverse pressure plate. See Figure 59.
17. Soak the original low/reverse clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 60.
18. Align the low/reverse clutch pack with the pressure plate and install it in the transaxle case,
temporarily reversing the wave spring and top steel
plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3877
19. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the side of the center support with the long
support legs. See Figure 61.
20. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the contact surface of the low/reverse clutch
piston Record this as measurement A. See Figure 62.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3878
21. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the leg surface of the center support Record
this as measurement B. See Figure 63.
22. Subtract measurement B from measurement A and record as measurement C.
23. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case.
24. Using a suitable depth micrometer measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the top of the OWC Record this as
measurement D. See Figure 64.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3879
25. Using a suitable depth gauge measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307300 to the top of the low/reverse clutch at 3 different
points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement E. See Figure 65.
26. Subtract measurement E from measurement D and record as measurement F.
27. Subtract measurement F from measurement C to get the low/reverse clutch clearance. The
clearance should be between 0.406 mm (0.015 in) and
2.000 mm (0.078 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the low/reverse clutch pack for correct
installation. If the low/reverse clutch pack is still out of range, call the SSSC for authorization to
replace the low/reverse clutch pack.
28. NOTE: When the low/reverse clutch is correctly installed, the wave spring is on top.
Remove the top low/reverse clutch steel plate and wave spring and correctly install the plates back
in the transaxle case.
29. NOTE: Make sure the center support is installed with the long center support legs facing down
and the feed holes facing the front of the transaxle
case. Improper alignment will cause transmission failure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3880
Install the center support with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes aligned
with the feed holes in the transaxle case. See Figure 66.
1. Long center support legs face down.
2. Feed holes face the front of the transaxle case.
30. Install the No. 5 and No. 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 67.
1. No. 5 thrust bearing
2. No. 6 thrust bearing
31. Install the center planetary sun gear. See Figure 68.
32. Install the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 68.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3881
33. Install the No. 7 and No. 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 69.
1. No. 7 thrust bearing
2. No. 8 thrust bearing
34. Install the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 70.
35. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch wave spring See Figure 70
36. Soak the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure
71.
37. Install the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack.
38. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate.
NOTICE: Be sure to install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side facing
down or the snap ring can come loose causing damage to the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3882
Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side down with the gap facing
the front of the transaxle. See Figure 72.
1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring.
2. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap.
40. Using a suitable tool, seat the snap ring in the snap ring groove. See Figure 73.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3883
41. Install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator on the
transaxle case and position the plunger on the top
forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch friction plate. See Figure 74.
42. Install new low/reverse and forward (1, 2, 3, 4) transaxle case-to-center support seals in the
transaxle case. See Figure 75.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3884
43. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch piston port while
recording the clutch pack clearance on the dial indicator.
The clearance should be between 0.076 mm (0.002 in) and 1.840 mm (0.072 in). If the clearance is
out of range, check the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack for correct installation and the transaxle for
correct assembly. See Figure 76.
44. Install the front planetary sun gear and shell assembly.
45. Install the No.10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 77.
46. Install the park pawl.
47. Install the park pawl pin and spring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3885
48. Install the 5 new clutch feed seals. See Figure 78.
49. Position the transmission fluid baffle in place.
50. Install the lube funnel and position the alignment pin in the alignment hole.
51. Position the lube funnel hold-down bracket in place and install the 2 bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
52. Install the No. 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 79.
53. Simultaneously install the drive and driven sprocket and chain assembly Lightly tap on the
driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case.
54. Install the No. 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 80.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3886
55. Install the No.13 thrust washer. See Figure 81.
56. Install the differential planetary sun gear.
57. Install the differential assembly.
58. Install the No. 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 82.
59. Install the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 on the input shaft.
60. Clean the torque converter housing sealing surface.
61. NOTE: Be sure the sealing surfaces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing
are free of oil before applying silicone.
Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA-29 or equivalent) to the sealing surface of the transaxle case.
62. NOTE: Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as recorded during disassembly.
Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 transaxle
case-to-torque converter housing bolts. See Figure 83.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3887
1. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft)
2. Stud bolt location
63. Remove the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector 307-635.
64. Install the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
65. Assemble the internal cooler bypass valve in the sleeve and install the assembly in the case.
See Figure 84.
1. Bypass valve.
2. Bypass valve sleeve
66. Install the internal cooler bypass valve spring. See Figure 85.
67. Install the new main control-to-transaxle separator plate and align it on the stud and the guide
pin.
68. NOTE: Be sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual
valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3888
Position the main control assembly in place and align the manual valve on the TR sensor. Install
the nut hand-tight. See Figure 86.
69. Install the short main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 87.
70. Install the long main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 88.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3889
71. Tighten the 22 main control Torx(R) bolts and the nut in a crisscross pattern.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
72. NOTE: Be sure the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal is installed with the holes facing
up.
Install the new solenoid body-to-main control cover seal.
73. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
74. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
75. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA 29 or equivalent) to the main control sealing surface of the
transaxle case.
76. Position the main control cover in place.
77. NOTE: Install the main control cover stud bolts in the correct location as noted during
disassembly.
Install the 13 main control cover bolts. See Figure 89.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
1. Bolt location
2. Stud bolt location
78. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using
the Torque Converter Handle 307-091 install the
torque converter.
79. Remove the Torque Converter Handle 3O7-091.
80. Install the Torque Converter Retainer 307-566.
81. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture.
82. Remove the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625.
Transaxle Installation and Post Test
1. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to the appropriate WSM, Section 307.
2. Perform post test drive to verify transmission is operating correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3890
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3891
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In
5th Gear/DTC's Set
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In
5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh
Upshifts/Downshifts
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh
Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh
Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability
Technical Service Bulletin # 10B15 Date: 100419
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3918
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes, OASIS will be activated on April 19, 2010.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by April 19, 2010. Owner names and
addresses will be available by May 31, 2010.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but
are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available)
and schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this service action performed on a timely basis.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3919
If the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that complete transmission overhaul
is necessary, dealers must perform a Cost Cap Analysis using the Cost Cap Tool found on the
Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the
repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter. This refund offer expires
October 31, 2010.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the date of the Owner Notification Letter. There is no
expiration date for emergency repair refunds. Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be
excessive, will not be reimbursed.
^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with low regulated fluid pressure to
transmission clutches (burnt or slipping) and/or replacement of the transmission valve body.
RENTAL VEHICLES
In most cases, a rental vehicle will not be required. If a customer's vehicle requires a transmission
repair and it is necessary to order parts, Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for
fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. The parts order must be an emergency
order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to
guarantee next day delivery. Prior approval for additional rental days is required from the Special
Service Support Center. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for
part replacement. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter
the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense
area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which
the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 10B15 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair
should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit,
the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines.
^ For rental vehicle claiming, follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts.
Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous
Expense area.
^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through April 30, 2011. There is no mileage
limit for this program.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3920
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Note:
Less than 2% of the affected vehicles are expected to require parts.
To manage part availability, dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center parts order
line (except for transmission fluid and silicone sealant). Dealers will receive a DOES II message
when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels.
When calling to place an order for any of the parts in the chart below please be prepared to provide
Dealer P&A; Code, VIN, and Mileage.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3921
In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission solenoid regulator valve bore may wear. The
function of a solenoid regulator is to provide regulated pressure to shift solenoids. Wear in the
solenoid regulator bore causes low clutch pressure and results in transmission slips/harsh shifts.
Continued driving with this condition may cause premature wear on the clutches. This may
eventually lead to a loss of 4th through 6th gears and ultimately loss of transmission function. This
service action will reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration. This calibration will reposition the
solenoid regulator valve to eliminate bore wear. A flowchart has been developed to help direct you
to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MODULE REPROGRAMMING
NOTE:
Reprogramming concerns! errors may be caused by the following:
^ Data Link Connector (DLC) or Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) becoming disconnected.
^ Allowing the IDS to enter any type of sleep mode.
^ Using a wireless IDS to VCM connection.
^ Low voltage on the IDS laptop.
^ Low voltage in the vehicle battery (use of a battery charger is recommended).
If you encounter reprogramming concerns, DO NOT DELETE the session. If the original session
has accidentally been deleted, recover the original session from the IDS "TRASH CAN" (located in
the lower right corner of the previous session screen) and continue to reprogram.
1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off.
2. Verify that the IDS is updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3922
3. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session.
4. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick.
5. Select Module Reprogramming and then select PCM. Touch the tick.
6. NOTE: If the IDS states there are no updates available, either the IDS has not been updated to
software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and
higher, or the PCM has already been reprogrammed.
A screen will appear stating a later PCM calibration is available. Follow the on-screen instructions
to program the PCM to the latest calibration.
7. After the PCM has been reprogrammed, inspect the vehicle's odometer for mileage:
^ If the mileage is LESS THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), remove the IDS. This service procedure is
complete and no additional repairs are necessary.
^ If the mileage is MORE THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), leave the IDS connected to the vehicle
and proceed to Step 8.
TRANSMISSION LOAD TEST
WARNING:
Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake to reduce the risk of
vehicle movement during this procedure Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
8. NOTE: In order to perform a valid Transmission Load Test, Transmission Fluid Temperature
(TFT) must be between 185-200° F (85-93° C).
Using the IDS, make sure the Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) is at an operating
temperature of 185-200° F (85-93° C). If the TFT is BELOW 185-200° F (85-93° C), perform the
following:
^ With the vehicle's brakes applied, start the engine.
^ Place the gear selector in D, bring the engine up to 1500 rpm and hold for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in R and bring the engine up to 1500 rpm for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute.
^ Repeat this procedure until the vehicle's TFT is 185-200° F (85-93° C).
9. Perform the Transmission Load Test:
NOTE:
Conduct this test after the PCM has been reprogrammed. Make sure that the engine coolant and
transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature and fluid levels are correct.
1. Block all wheels, set the parking brake, and firmly apply the service brakes.
2. Turn off Traction Control if equipped
3. Set the IDS to record engine rpm and TSS_SRC rpm.
4. Place the gear selector in D.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3923
5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold the pedal just long enough to let the engine get
to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and observe the
TSS_SRC rpm (it should be at ZERO when engine speed has reached maximum rpm). While
performing this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5 seconds. See Figure 2.
After the test, place the gear selector in N and run the engine at 1,000 rpm for 15 seconds to cool
the torque converter.
10. If the TSS_SRC rpm was ZERO during the Transmission Load Test, then this service
procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary.
If the TSS_SRC rpm was MORE than ZERO (transmission slipping) during the Transmission Load
Test, then proceed to Attachment IV for transmission repair.
Table of Contents
TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE
Pan and Tool Requirements
Transaxle Removal
Transaxle Disassembly
Main Control Valve Body Replacement
Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4, 5, 6) Disassembly and Assembly
Filter Removal and Replacement
Transaxle Assembly
Transaxle Installation and Post Test
Part and Tool Requirements
TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE
This transmission repair procedure involves installing a new transmission valve body and clutch
packs in the Overdrive/Direct (O/D) and forward clutch assemblies.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3924
PART AND TOOL REQUIREMENTS
NOTE:
Special tools that are needed for this portion of the service procedure are as follows:
^ Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 or equivalent
^ Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566
^ Torque Converter Handle # 307-091
^ Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Drive Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1
^ Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2
^ Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002 or equivalent
^ Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300
^ Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635
^ Suitable Depth Gauge
Transaxle Removal
1. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle For additional information refer to the appropriate WSM
Section 307.
Transaxle Disassembly
If the technician determines that the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that a
complete overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a cost cap analysis using the cost cap tool
found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website.
If the cost cap tool states "Repair", contact the Special Service Support Center (SSSC) with the
repair estimate (parts and labor at warranty prices) Be prepared to provide the dealership's P/A
code and have the repair order, which contains the VIN and mileage of the vehicle.
If the cost cap tool states "Replace" continue with the Transmission Prior Approval request, make
sure to select FSA on the main menu.
1. Install the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 onto the transaxle.
2. Using the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding
fixture.
3. Remove the Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566.
4. Install the Torque Converter Handle # 307-091.
5. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result.
Using Torque Converter Handle #307-091,remove the torque converter from the transaxle.
6. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3925
Remove the 13 bolts and the main control cover. See Figure 1.
7. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the Transmission Range (TR) sensor
electrical connectors. See Figure 2.
8. Remove and discard the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. See Figure 3.
9. NOTE: Record the location of the short and long main control Torx(R) bolts for reassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3926
Remove the nut and the 22 Torx(R) bolts and remove the main control assembly. See Figure 4.
10. Remove and discard the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate.
11. Remove and discard the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and low/reverse clutch transaxle
case-to-center support seals. See Figure 5.
1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal.
2. Low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3927
12. Remove the internal cooler bypass spring, sleeve and valve. See Figure 6.
13. Remove the bolt and the 055 sensor. See Figure 7.
14. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolt for assembly.
Remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts.
15. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case.
16. Remove the loose torque converter housing from the transaxle case
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3928
17. Remove the No 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 8.
18. Remove the differential. See Figure 9.
19. Remove the differential planetary sun gear.
20. Remove the No. 13 thrust washer. See Figure 10.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3929
21. Remove the No 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 11.
22. Simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain.
23. Remove the No 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 12.
24. Remove the No 10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 13.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3930
25. Remove the 2 bolts and the lube funnel hold down bracket. See Figure 14.
26. Remove the transmission fluid baffle. See Figure 15.
27. Remove the park pawl pin and spring. See Figure 16.
28. Remove the park pawl.
29. NOTE: The forward (1 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring is beveled. The beveled side of the snap ring
goes up (flat side down).
NOTE:
The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap faces the front of the transmission.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3931
Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. See Figure 17.
30. Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate, clutch pack, and wave spring.
31. Remove the front sun gear and shell assembly See Figure 18.
32. Remove the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 19.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3932
33. Remove the No 7 and No 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 20.
1. No 7 thrust bearing
2. No. 8 thrust bearing
34. Remove the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 21.
35. Remove the center planetary sun gear.
36. Remove the No 5 and No 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 22.
1. No. 5 thrust bearing
2. No. 6 thrust bearing
37. Remove the center support assembly. See Figure 23.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3933
38. Remove the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly See Figure 24.
39. Remove the low/reverse wave spring, clutch pack and pressure plate. See Figure 25.
40. Remove the low One-Way Clutch (OWC). See Figure 26.
41. NOTE: The intermediate (2, 6) clutch is removed with the rear planetary sun gear and shell
assembly.
Remove the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly and remove the intermediate (2, 6) clutch
from the assembly. See Figure 27.
42. Remove the pressure plate and the wave spring.
43. Remove the No 3 thrust bearing. See Figure 28.
44. Remove the overdrive/direct clutch assembly.
45. NOTE: If the No. 1 thrust bearing is stuck to the overdrive/direct clutch assembly remove the
No. 1 thrust bearing from the overdrive/direct clutch
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3934
Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing. See Figure 29.
46. Remove and discard the 5 clutch feed seals. See Figure 30.
Main Control Valve Body Replacement
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3935
1. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the main control valve body from the solenoid body. See
Figure 31.
2. Remove and discard the separator plate from the solenoid body. Install the new separator plate
from the new main control valve body.
3. Position the new main control valve body on the solenoid body assembly and install the 2 bolts.
See Figure 32.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4,5,6) Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the Overdrive (O/D) (4, 5, 6) clutch hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3936
2. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub, No 2 thrust bearing See Figure 33.
3. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. See Figure 33.
4. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate and discard the clutch pack. See Figure 33.
5. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor 30758412 on
the balance piston.
6. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and remove the snap ring. See
Figure 34.
7. Remove the Overdrive Clutch Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307584/2.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3937
8. Remove and discard the balance piston See Figure 35.
9. Remove the O/D (4, 5 6) piston return spring. See Figure 36.
10. Install the No.1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 37.
11. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3938
12. Apply compressed air to the O/D (4 5, 6) clutch piston port and remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch
piston. See Figure 38.
13. Remove the O/D/direct clutch assembly from the transaxle case.
14. Remove and discard the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal from the O/D/direct clutch
assembly. See Figure 39.
15. Remove and discard the 2 seals from the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3939
16. Install 2 new seals on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston and lubricate the seals with petroleum jelly.
See Figure 40.
17. Install a new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal and lubricate the seal with petroleum jelly.
See Figure 41.
18. Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston in place.
19. Using the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston, and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911,install
the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston into the O/D/direct
clutch assembly by hand. See Figure 42.
20. NOTE: Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring with the holes facing upward Install
the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3940
21. Lubricate the seals on the new balance piston and position the balance piston in place. See
Figure 43.
22. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 30758412
on the balance piston.
23. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and install the snap ring. See
Figure 44.
24. Remove the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307589/1 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor #
307-584/2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3941
25. Install the No 2 thrust bearing. See Figure 45.
26. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. See Figure 46.
27. Soak the new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 47.
28. Install the new O/D (4. 5, 6) clutch pack.
29. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate.
30. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3942
31. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case, install Dial Indicator Gauge with
Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator
and position the plunger on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air
pressure to the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the Dial
Indicator. The clearance should be between 0.950 mm (0.037 in) and 1.778 mm (0.07 in). If the
clearance is out of range, check the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack for correct installation. See Figure 48.
32. Remove Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002, O/D/direct clutch assembly and
the No. 1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing.
Filter Removal and Replacement
1. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil baffle from the torque converter housing. See Figure 49.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3943
2. NOTE: Record the location of the 6mm bolt for assembly Remove the 9 bolts and the pump and
filter assembly. See Figure 50.
3. Remove filter from the pump. making note of the orientation of the fluid filter to the fluid pump.
See Figure 51.
4. Remove the magnet from the filter.
5. Install the magnet on the filter.
6. Install the filter.
A. Position the filter on the pump.
B. Rotate the filter counterclockwise 90 degrees.
7. Install the pump and filter assembly in the torque converter housing and install the pump bolts.
See Figure 52.
A. Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3944
B. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. Install the transmission fluid baffle and the 2 bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Transaxle Assembly
1. Clean the silicone from the transaxle case-to-torque converter housing sealing surface and the
main control cover sealing surface.
2. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up or damage to
the transaxle can occur
Install the No. 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up. See Figure 53.
3. Install the overdrive/direct clutch assembly.
4. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down or damage
to the transaxle can occur
Install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down. See Figure 54.
5. Install the direct/intermediate clutch hub and rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3945
6. Install the intermediate (2, 6) wave spring assembly. See Figure 55.
7. Soak the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly in clean transmission fluid See Figure 56.
8. Install the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly, temporarily reversing the top friction and
steel plates for the clutch stack-up measurement.
9. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3946
10. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300
to the top of the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack at 3
different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement A. See Figure 57.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3947
11. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the transaxle case step above the
intermediate (2, 6) clutch Record this as measurement B. See Figure 58.
12. Subtract measurement B from measurement A. The clearance should be between 0.240 mm
(0009 in) and 260 mm (0.102 in). If the clearance is out
of range, check the intermediate (2,6) clutch pack for correct installation. If the intermediate (2, 6)
clutch pack is correctly installed, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the intermediate (2, 6)
clutch pack.
13. NOTE: When the intermediate (2, 6) clutch is correctly installed, a friction plate is on top.
Remove the top intermediate (2, 6) clutch friction and steel plate and correctly install the plates
back in the transaxle case.
14. Install the One-Way Clutch (OWC) assembly.
15. Install the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly.
16. NOTE: The position of the low/reverse pressure plate is important. When installing the center
support, the long support legs must fit through the
low/reverse pressure plate and rest on the OWC.
Position the low/reverse pressure plate so that the center support legs fit through the pressure
plate and rest on the OWC and install the low/reverse pressure plate. See Figure 59.
17. Soak the original low/reverse clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 60.
18. Align the low/reverse clutch pack with the pressure plate and install it in the transaxle case,
temporarily reversing the wave spring and top steel
plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3948
19. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the side of the center support with the long
support legs. See Figure 61.
20. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the contact surface of the low/reverse clutch
piston Record this as measurement A. See Figure 62.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3949
21. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the leg surface of the center support Record
this as measurement B. See Figure 63.
22. Subtract measurement B from measurement A and record as measurement C.
23. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case.
24. Using a suitable depth micrometer measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the top of the OWC Record this as
measurement D. See Figure 64.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3950
25. Using a suitable depth gauge measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307300 to the top of the low/reverse clutch at 3 different
points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement E. See Figure 65.
26. Subtract measurement E from measurement D and record as measurement F.
27. Subtract measurement F from measurement C to get the low/reverse clutch clearance. The
clearance should be between 0.406 mm (0.015 in) and
2.000 mm (0.078 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the low/reverse clutch pack for correct
installation. If the low/reverse clutch pack is still out of range, call the SSSC for authorization to
replace the low/reverse clutch pack.
28. NOTE: When the low/reverse clutch is correctly installed, the wave spring is on top.
Remove the top low/reverse clutch steel plate and wave spring and correctly install the plates back
in the transaxle case.
29. NOTE: Make sure the center support is installed with the long center support legs facing down
and the feed holes facing the front of the transaxle
case. Improper alignment will cause transmission failure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3951
Install the center support with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes aligned
with the feed holes in the transaxle case. See Figure 66.
1. Long center support legs face down.
2. Feed holes face the front of the transaxle case.
30. Install the No. 5 and No. 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 67.
1. No. 5 thrust bearing
2. No. 6 thrust bearing
31. Install the center planetary sun gear. See Figure 68.
32. Install the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 68.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3952
33. Install the No. 7 and No. 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 69.
1. No. 7 thrust bearing
2. No. 8 thrust bearing
34. Install the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 70.
35. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch wave spring See Figure 70
36. Soak the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure
71.
37. Install the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack.
38. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate.
NOTICE: Be sure to install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side facing
down or the snap ring can come loose causing damage to the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3953
Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side down with the gap facing
the front of the transaxle. See Figure 72.
1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring.
2. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap.
40. Using a suitable tool, seat the snap ring in the snap ring groove. See Figure 73.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3954
41. Install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator on the
transaxle case and position the plunger on the top
forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch friction plate. See Figure 74.
42. Install new low/reverse and forward (1, 2, 3, 4) transaxle case-to-center support seals in the
transaxle case. See Figure 75.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3955
43. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch piston port while
recording the clutch pack clearance on the dial indicator.
The clearance should be between 0.076 mm (0.002 in) and 1.840 mm (0.072 in). If the clearance is
out of range, check the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack for correct installation and the transaxle for
correct assembly. See Figure 76.
44. Install the front planetary sun gear and shell assembly.
45. Install the No.10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 77.
46. Install the park pawl.
47. Install the park pawl pin and spring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3956
48. Install the 5 new clutch feed seals. See Figure 78.
49. Position the transmission fluid baffle in place.
50. Install the lube funnel and position the alignment pin in the alignment hole.
51. Position the lube funnel hold-down bracket in place and install the 2 bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
52. Install the No. 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 79.
53. Simultaneously install the drive and driven sprocket and chain assembly Lightly tap on the
driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case.
54. Install the No. 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 80.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3957
55. Install the No.13 thrust washer. See Figure 81.
56. Install the differential planetary sun gear.
57. Install the differential assembly.
58. Install the No. 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 82.
59. Install the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 on the input shaft.
60. Clean the torque converter housing sealing surface.
61. NOTE: Be sure the sealing surfaces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing
are free of oil before applying silicone.
Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA-29 or equivalent) to the sealing surface of the transaxle case.
62. NOTE: Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as recorded during disassembly.
Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 transaxle
case-to-torque converter housing bolts. See Figure 83.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3958
1. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft)
2. Stud bolt location
63. Remove the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector 307-635.
64. Install the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
65. Assemble the internal cooler bypass valve in the sleeve and install the assembly in the case.
See Figure 84.
1. Bypass valve.
2. Bypass valve sleeve
66. Install the internal cooler bypass valve spring. See Figure 85.
67. Install the new main control-to-transaxle separator plate and align it on the stud and the guide
pin.
68. NOTE: Be sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual
valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3959
Position the main control assembly in place and align the manual valve on the TR sensor. Install
the nut hand-tight. See Figure 86.
69. Install the short main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 87.
70. Install the long main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 88.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3960
71. Tighten the 22 main control Torx(R) bolts and the nut in a crisscross pattern.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
72. NOTE: Be sure the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal is installed with the holes facing
up.
Install the new solenoid body-to-main control cover seal.
73. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
74. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
75. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA 29 or equivalent) to the main control sealing surface of the
transaxle case.
76. Position the main control cover in place.
77. NOTE: Install the main control cover stud bolts in the correct location as noted during
disassembly.
Install the 13 main control cover bolts. See Figure 89.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
1. Bolt location
2. Stud bolt location
78. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using
the Torque Converter Handle 307-091 install the
torque converter.
79. Remove the Torque Converter Handle 3O7-091.
80. Install the Torque Converter Retainer 307-566.
81. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture.
82. Remove the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625.
Transaxle Installation and Post Test
1. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to the appropriate WSM, Section 307.
2. Perform post test drive to verify transmission is operating correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3961
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3962
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls Sync Software Programming
TSB 08-21-2
10/27/08
SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2009 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer
Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator 2009 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE The Sync Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) may require updates to add system
enhancements, improve system reliability or address consumer issues. The installation or
availability of these updates may be made available in two different methods:
^ Downloadable consumer Service Pack updates available through www.SYNCmyride.com
website.
^ APIM Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS).
The tool and installation requirements vary between these two methods. This information is being
provided to supplement current publications, clarify the requirements needed to reprogram or
update the APIM module and provide some additional diagnostic/operational system information.
ACTION Refer to the Service Tips for details.
SERVICE TIPS
Downloadable Consumer Service Pack Updates (Available At www.SyncMyRide.com)
These Service Pack Updates are for the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) side of the APIM
module only and are customized for each vehicle based on the last reported APIM software level
state. The software download process will bundle the appropriate service packs that are required to
achieve the desired state. This is why consumers are asked to report back to the website once they
have completed the install.
NOTE
IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO REUSE A DOWNLOADED SERVICE PACK ACROSS
MULTIPLE VEHICLES. EACH DOWNLOAD IS PACKAGED ACCORDINGLY TO THE CURRENT
STATE OF THE VEHICLE THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS INTENDED FOR.
NOTE
CONSUMERS DO NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO REMOVE SERVICE PACK UPDATES ONCE
THEY ARE INSTALLED.
Steps For Consumer's To Update Sync With The Latest Enhancements
1. Prepare universal serial bus (USB) storage drive by:
a. Log into their Sync account and select applications and updates to download.
b. Locates a portable USB storage drive that they can take to their vehicle.
NOTE
FOR OWNERS OF MULTIPLE SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLES, IT IS STRONGLY
RECOMMENDED TO USE A SEPARATE USB DRIVE FOR EACH SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3971
Dedicating a USB drive to each vehicle's Sync system helps keep each vehicle's download and
installation history current and accurate. In addition, as new Sync features and functionalities
become available, consumers may decide to install different features on different vehicles.
Dedicated USB drives will help maintain the unique applications for each vehicle.
2. Download files by:
a. Plug the USB drive into the computer's USB port.
b. Select the USB port being used on the computer.
c. Confirm choice of USB storage drive. Then click Next.
d. After clicking Next, the files will automatically begin downloading.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE UNTIL THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. THE SCREEN
WILL CONFIRM THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE.
e. Safely remove the USB storage drive from the computer's USB port by clicking on the Windows
personal computer (PC) Safely Remove Hardware icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to
the clock.
3. Install files by:
a. Insert USB storage drive into the vehicle's Sync USB port.
b. Turn on both, the vehicle and radio.
NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED TO HAVE THE VEHICLE RUNNING (WITH PROPER EXHAUST
VENTILATION) AND NOT IN THE ACCESSORY MODE. THIS IS TO ENSURE THE VEHICLE'S
BATTERY SUPPLY VOLTAGE REMAINS STABLE DURING THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS.
c. Select User Device.
d. Select Settings.
e. Select Install. Display will change to Begin Installation?
f. Select Yes. Installing file - will display on the screen.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE WHILE THE INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS.
g. Upon completion of downloading of files, Installation Complete will display on the Sync screen.
h. The Sync voice will say, Installation complete. Sync may also say, The system will now reboot.
Please wait a few moments before using the system. Installation Complete will remain on the Sync
display until you exit the installation mode.
i. Select the Menu radio button to exit installation mode.
j. Remove the USB storage drive.
k. Consumer takes their USB storage drive back to their computer to report the successful install.
(This feature allows for tracking and determining if the consumers vehicle has a newer version
available for downloading or not.)
NOTE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DETAILS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM
WEBSITE. REGISTERED SYNC OWNERS WILL SEE VEHICLE SPECIFIC DETAILS AND
DIRECTIONS BASED ON THEIR VEHICLE'S OPTION CONTENT.
APIM Programming Using IDS
This method programs both, the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) (through the data link connector)
and CIP (through the USB port), portions of the APIM module.
NOTE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3972
SOFTWARE PACKAGES OBTAINED THROUGH THE PROFESSIONAL TECHNICIAN SOCIETY
(PTS) WEBSITE CONTAINS BOTH, VIP AND CIP FILES, THESE DO NOT NEED TO BE
INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE LIKE THE CONSUMER DOWNLOAD SERVICE PACK UPDATES,
BUT THE ENTIRE PACKAGE MUST BE INSTALLED DURING REPROGRAMMING FOR
PROPER OPERATION. THESE SOFTWARE PACKAGES ARE MUCH LARGER IN SIZE AND
CONTAIN ALL THE PREVIOUS LEVELS OF ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES AS WELL AS
ANY ADDITIONAL ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES FOR BOTH THE VIP AND CIP
PROCESSORS LOCATED IN THE APIM MODULE.
NOTE
YOU WILL NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO RESTORE THE PREVIOUS LEVEL OF SYNC
OPERATING SOFTWARE ONCE THE APIM MODULE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY UPDATED
TO THE NEXT HIGHER LEVEL.
NOTE
If a new APIM is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure.
For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00.
It is recommended to install a battery charger to the vehicles battery and set at the low charge
setting and insure the PC being used for reprogramming is fully charged or plugged into a power
source prior to starting the reprogramming process.
1. Turn the ignition key to the On position.
2. Turn the audio control module (ACM) on.
3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Connect one end of the USB male-A to male-A cable Rotunda part number
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 (1-800-Rotunda option 6) or equivalent to the scan tool. Compatible cables.
(Figures 1) Non-compatible cables. (Figure 2)
5. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
6. From the technician service publication website, run OASIS using Quick Start or by manually
entering the vehicle identification number (VIN).
7. From the OASIS tab, select the Sync/APIM bullet.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3973
8. Select the Read APIM button to verify the current APIM VIP and CIP software levels.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VEHICLE COMMUNICATION MODULE (VCM) OR USB CABLES
DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
9. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select
the Program APIM button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if
prompted.
a. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to
program the VIP.
b. When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically.
10. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays Programming
has been completed successfully.
11. Test the audio system for correct operation. PC requirements for successful reprogramming an
APIM module.
Ford And LIM Logon Issues - Including Proper Browser Settings
The following list will have you check various computer settings to insure your PC is set to the
proper configuration for reprogramming an APIM module.
NOTE
CHANGES TO PC SETTINGS MAY REQUIRE
ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS.
1. Do not use a customized browser like AOL, it will not work. Please use Internet Explorer (IE)
version 5.5 5P2, 6.0, or higher.
2. Log into website.
3. Navigate to PTS (Professional Technician Society) under the Technical Tools on the Parts and
Service tab.
4. Check IE settings by completing the following:
a. Preliminary Checks.
NOTE
THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO WINDOWS XP MACHINES WITH 5P2 AND IE 6.0 AND
ABOVE.
(1) Open IE, select Tools at the top of the screen and select Security.
(2) Click on the Internet Zone, and find Navigate Sub-frames across different domains and enable
this function.
(3) Then click OK, system may ask you if you want to accept these function please select Yes.
(4) Check the Windows Firewall to make sure it is turned off by:
(a) Selecting the Start button.
(b) Select Control Panel.
(c) Select Windows Firewall (if you do not see the icon, make sure you are using Classic View) and
set to off.
(5) Check Windows Pop-up Blocker to make sure it is turned off.
(a) Open IE.
(b) Select Tools at the top of the screen.
(c) Select Pop-up Blocker and turn it off.
(6) Remove any add-on toolbars such as Google or Yahoo toolbars, as these have additional built
in pop-up blockers.
(7) Verify that any third party anti-virus, anti-spyware, firewall, or internet security software is
temporarily disabled.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3974
b. Browser Settings - Open IE and select Internet Options under the Tools heading.
(1) Select the General tab
(2) Select Delete Files and check the Delete all offline content and select OK
(3) Select Delete Cookies and click OK
(4) Select Clear History and select Yes.
(5) Click on the Security tab.
(6) Click on the Trusted Sites icon.
(7) Click on Sites.
(8) In the box below add this website to the zone type in - website.
(9) Ensure that required server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone is not checked.
(10) Click the Add button.
(11) Click the Close button.
(12) Re-select the Security tab and select Custom Level.
(13) Under Reset Custom Settings, pull down and Reset to: Low, select Reset, select Yes and then
OK.
NOTE
IF RUNNING OASIS ON IE 7.0, RESET TO: MEDIUM-LOW. ALSO, UNDER SETTINGS, SCROLL
TO NAVIGATE SUB-FRAMES ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS, SET TO ENABLED AND CLICK
OK.
(14) Select the Privacy tab, and move the slider to Low.
(15) Click on the Advanced, check the box Override automatic cookie handling and check the box
to Always allow session cookies' and
click OK.
(16) Select the Advanced tab and scroll down to HTP 1.1 settings; make sure both options under
this section are checked.
(17) Scroll down to Security section and make sure the following are checked:
(a) Empty Temporary Internet folder when browser is closed.
(b) Use SSL 2.0.
(c) Use SSL 3.0.
(d) Use TLS 1.0.
(e) Select Apply and then click on OK.
5. Close all browsers and reboot the computer to have the browser settings take affect properly.
The browser settings have now been setup correctly as per Ford Browser settings
recommendations.
Additional PC Security Settings (May Or May Not Be Required - Depends On Operating System)
Changes to PC Security Settings may require Administrator access.
1. Check for Information Bar near top of IE page stating - This website wants to run the following
add-ons.
2. Click on Information Bar and select Run ActiveX Controls or Temporarily Allow Pop-ups
depending on your operating system.
3. Click on Retry button to refresh information. (May not be required on some operating systems)
PC and Server Troubleshooting (Optional)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3975
^ If you wish to test another browser for web-based training only, download the free version of
Opera at www.Opera.com.
^ For web-based training sound problems, make sure your firewall allows downloading sound file
types such as MP3.
^ If you have installed special search and add-on programs such as Gator or Bonzi please remove
them.
^ If you have a router, make sure that port 443 is open for Secure Socket Layer (SSL), and ports
80 and 8080 are open for HTTP.
^ Internet access uses a caching or proxy server. Make sure the caching/proxy servers are set to
automatically detect settings. Contact your local network administrator and/or your Internet service
provider and have them turn off the caching on any and all caching proxy servers for the following:
^ Uniform Resource Locator (URL): www.proservicetech.com or ford website
Additional Sync Related Service Tips
1. Performing a Master Reset of the APIM module or removing and restoring the Keep Alive Power
circuit fuse (refer to the appropriate wiring manual) for 3-minutes, prior to reprogramming will
restore the factory APIM defaults. This can reduce the possibilities of corrupt files, that may have
been transferred into the APIM modules memory, from interfering with the reprogramming of the
CIP portion of the APIM module.
2. Non-factory installed items that can cause background noise, wind noise or obstruct the voice
path to the Sync system's microphone, will reduce the reliability or accuracy of the consumer's
voice commands or speech being recognized properly. Some examples may include but are not
limited to:
^ Objects hanging from the rear view mirror that may make noise or obstruct the system
microphone located on the mirror.
^ Bug shields.
^ Roof mounted accessories.
^ Damaged window moldings.
^ Non-factory installed overhead consoles or sun-visor storage compartments that obstruct the
voice path to the systems microphone. (It is recommended when diagnosing voice recognition or
phone call sound quality issues to eliminate these types of items before replacing any system
components)
3. Remote Starts may prevent the Automatic Discovery Process, of previously paired phones, from
connecting with the consumer's phone as it may be outside of the device's Bluetooth reception
range. Once the vehicle is started remotely, the Sync system automatically begins to search for
previously paired phones; eventually this process will time out if the customers phone does not
enter the vehicle prior to the expiration of this internal timer, resulting in the vehicle Sync not
automatically recognize the phone and pair with it. If this occurs, once the customer enters the
vehicle, the consumer will be required to manually connect the phone through the Sync menus if
they would like to use the hands free phone features.
NOTE
THE CONSUMER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PAIR THE PHONE AGAIN.
4. When Reprogramming APIM modules, it is strongly recommended to use a hard wired internet
connection if possible, due to the APIM program file sizes. If a wired internet connection is not
available, it is recommended to access the PTS website and download the latest Sync software
files from the Tech Central tab prior to reprogramming. This will reduce the overall reprogramming
time when you are connected to the vehicle. If error messages appear during the reprogramming
process that indicate errors with the VIP or CIP file/image, comparing the saved file/image by
checking the file size, between your PC/IDS with the available file/image size indicated in the PTS
description can help determine if the file may be corrupt or damaged. If this has occurred or is
suspected, re-download the file/image and select Yes when asked Do you want to replace it?
5. Always diagnose and repair any DTC's for the Audio system or any module communication
related faults prior to APIM reprogramming.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh
Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls Sync Software Programming
TSB 08-21-2
10/27/08
SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2009 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer
Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator 2009 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE The Sync Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) may require updates to add system
enhancements, improve system reliability or address consumer issues. The installation or
availability of these updates may be made available in two different methods:
^ Downloadable consumer Service Pack updates available through www.SYNCmyride.com
website.
^ APIM Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS).
The tool and installation requirements vary between these two methods. This information is being
provided to supplement current publications, clarify the requirements needed to reprogram or
update the APIM module and provide some additional diagnostic/operational system information.
ACTION Refer to the Service Tips for details.
SERVICE TIPS
Downloadable Consumer Service Pack Updates (Available At www.SyncMyRide.com)
These Service Pack Updates are for the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) side of the APIM
module only and are customized for each vehicle based on the last reported APIM software level
state. The software download process will bundle the appropriate service packs that are required to
achieve the desired state. This is why consumers are asked to report back to the website once they
have completed the install.
NOTE
IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO REUSE A DOWNLOADED SERVICE PACK ACROSS
MULTIPLE VEHICLES. EACH DOWNLOAD IS PACKAGED ACCORDINGLY TO THE CURRENT
STATE OF THE VEHICLE THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS INTENDED FOR.
NOTE
CONSUMERS DO NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO REMOVE SERVICE PACK UPDATES ONCE
THEY ARE INSTALLED.
Steps For Consumer's To Update Sync With The Latest Enhancements
1. Prepare universal serial bus (USB) storage drive by:
a. Log into their Sync account and select applications and updates to download.
b. Locates a portable USB storage drive that they can take to their vehicle.
NOTE
FOR OWNERS OF MULTIPLE SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLES, IT IS STRONGLY
RECOMMENDED TO USE A SEPARATE USB DRIVE FOR EACH SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3993
Dedicating a USB drive to each vehicle's Sync system helps keep each vehicle's download and
installation history current and accurate. In addition, as new Sync features and functionalities
become available, consumers may decide to install different features on different vehicles.
Dedicated USB drives will help maintain the unique applications for each vehicle.
2. Download files by:
a. Plug the USB drive into the computer's USB port.
b. Select the USB port being used on the computer.
c. Confirm choice of USB storage drive. Then click Next.
d. After clicking Next, the files will automatically begin downloading.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE UNTIL THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. THE SCREEN
WILL CONFIRM THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE.
e. Safely remove the USB storage drive from the computer's USB port by clicking on the Windows
personal computer (PC) Safely Remove Hardware icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to
the clock.
3. Install files by:
a. Insert USB storage drive into the vehicle's Sync USB port.
b. Turn on both, the vehicle and radio.
NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED TO HAVE THE VEHICLE RUNNING (WITH PROPER EXHAUST
VENTILATION) AND NOT IN THE ACCESSORY MODE. THIS IS TO ENSURE THE VEHICLE'S
BATTERY SUPPLY VOLTAGE REMAINS STABLE DURING THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS.
c. Select User Device.
d. Select Settings.
e. Select Install. Display will change to Begin Installation?
f. Select Yes. Installing file - will display on the screen.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE WHILE THE INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS.
g. Upon completion of downloading of files, Installation Complete will display on the Sync screen.
h. The Sync voice will say, Installation complete. Sync may also say, The system will now reboot.
Please wait a few moments before using the system. Installation Complete will remain on the Sync
display until you exit the installation mode.
i. Select the Menu radio button to exit installation mode.
j. Remove the USB storage drive.
k. Consumer takes their USB storage drive back to their computer to report the successful install.
(This feature allows for tracking and determining if the consumers vehicle has a newer version
available for downloading or not.)
NOTE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DETAILS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM
WEBSITE. REGISTERED SYNC OWNERS WILL SEE VEHICLE SPECIFIC DETAILS AND
DIRECTIONS BASED ON THEIR VEHICLE'S OPTION CONTENT.
APIM Programming Using IDS
This method programs both, the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) (through the data link connector)
and CIP (through the USB port), portions of the APIM module.
NOTE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3994
SOFTWARE PACKAGES OBTAINED THROUGH THE PROFESSIONAL TECHNICIAN SOCIETY
(PTS) WEBSITE CONTAINS BOTH, VIP AND CIP FILES, THESE DO NOT NEED TO BE
INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE LIKE THE CONSUMER DOWNLOAD SERVICE PACK UPDATES,
BUT THE ENTIRE PACKAGE MUST BE INSTALLED DURING REPROGRAMMING FOR
PROPER OPERATION. THESE SOFTWARE PACKAGES ARE MUCH LARGER IN SIZE AND
CONTAIN ALL THE PREVIOUS LEVELS OF ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES AS WELL AS
ANY ADDITIONAL ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES FOR BOTH THE VIP AND CIP
PROCESSORS LOCATED IN THE APIM MODULE.
NOTE
YOU WILL NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO RESTORE THE PREVIOUS LEVEL OF SYNC
OPERATING SOFTWARE ONCE THE APIM MODULE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY UPDATED
TO THE NEXT HIGHER LEVEL.
NOTE
If a new APIM is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure.
For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00.
It is recommended to install a battery charger to the vehicles battery and set at the low charge
setting and insure the PC being used for reprogramming is fully charged or plugged into a power
source prior to starting the reprogramming process.
1. Turn the ignition key to the On position.
2. Turn the audio control module (ACM) on.
3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Connect one end of the USB male-A to male-A cable Rotunda part number
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 (1-800-Rotunda option 6) or equivalent to the scan tool. Compatible cables.
(Figures 1) Non-compatible cables. (Figure 2)
5. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
6. From the technician service publication website, run OASIS using Quick Start or by manually
entering the vehicle identification number (VIN).
7. From the OASIS tab, select the Sync/APIM bullet.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3995
8. Select the Read APIM button to verify the current APIM VIP and CIP software levels.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VEHICLE COMMUNICATION MODULE (VCM) OR USB CABLES
DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
9. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select
the Program APIM button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if
prompted.
a. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to
program the VIP.
b. When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically.
10. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays Programming
has been completed successfully.
11. Test the audio system for correct operation. PC requirements for successful reprogramming an
APIM module.
Ford And LIM Logon Issues - Including Proper Browser Settings
The following list will have you check various computer settings to insure your PC is set to the
proper configuration for reprogramming an APIM module.
NOTE
CHANGES TO PC SETTINGS MAY REQUIRE
ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS.
1. Do not use a customized browser like AOL, it will not work. Please use Internet Explorer (IE)
version 5.5 5P2, 6.0, or higher.
2. Log into website.
3. Navigate to PTS (Professional Technician Society) under the Technical Tools on the Parts and
Service tab.
4. Check IE settings by completing the following:
a. Preliminary Checks.
NOTE
THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO WINDOWS XP MACHINES WITH 5P2 AND IE 6.0 AND
ABOVE.
(1) Open IE, select Tools at the top of the screen and select Security.
(2) Click on the Internet Zone, and find Navigate Sub-frames across different domains and enable
this function.
(3) Then click OK, system may ask you if you want to accept these function please select Yes.
(4) Check the Windows Firewall to make sure it is turned off by:
(a) Selecting the Start button.
(b) Select Control Panel.
(c) Select Windows Firewall (if you do not see the icon, make sure you are using Classic View) and
set to off.
(5) Check Windows Pop-up Blocker to make sure it is turned off.
(a) Open IE.
(b) Select Tools at the top of the screen.
(c) Select Pop-up Blocker and turn it off.
(6) Remove any add-on toolbars such as Google or Yahoo toolbars, as these have additional built
in pop-up blockers.
(7) Verify that any third party anti-virus, anti-spyware, firewall, or internet security software is
temporarily disabled.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3996
b. Browser Settings - Open IE and select Internet Options under the Tools heading.
(1) Select the General tab
(2) Select Delete Files and check the Delete all offline content and select OK
(3) Select Delete Cookies and click OK
(4) Select Clear History and select Yes.
(5) Click on the Security tab.
(6) Click on the Trusted Sites icon.
(7) Click on Sites.
(8) In the box below add this website to the zone type in - website.
(9) Ensure that required server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone is not checked.
(10) Click the Add button.
(11) Click the Close button.
(12) Re-select the Security tab and select Custom Level.
(13) Under Reset Custom Settings, pull down and Reset to: Low, select Reset, select Yes and then
OK.
NOTE
IF RUNNING OASIS ON IE 7.0, RESET TO: MEDIUM-LOW. ALSO, UNDER SETTINGS, SCROLL
TO NAVIGATE SUB-FRAMES ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS, SET TO ENABLED AND CLICK
OK.
(14) Select the Privacy tab, and move the slider to Low.
(15) Click on the Advanced, check the box Override automatic cookie handling and check the box
to Always allow session cookies' and
click OK.
(16) Select the Advanced tab and scroll down to HTP 1.1 settings; make sure both options under
this section are checked.
(17) Scroll down to Security section and make sure the following are checked:
(a) Empty Temporary Internet folder when browser is closed.
(b) Use SSL 2.0.
(c) Use SSL 3.0.
(d) Use TLS 1.0.
(e) Select Apply and then click on OK.
5. Close all browsers and reboot the computer to have the browser settings take affect properly.
The browser settings have now been setup correctly as per Ford Browser settings
recommendations.
Additional PC Security Settings (May Or May Not Be Required - Depends On Operating System)
Changes to PC Security Settings may require Administrator access.
1. Check for Information Bar near top of IE page stating - This website wants to run the following
add-ons.
2. Click on Information Bar and select Run ActiveX Controls or Temporarily Allow Pop-ups
depending on your operating system.
3. Click on Retry button to refresh information. (May not be required on some operating systems)
PC and Server Troubleshooting (Optional)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3997
^ If you wish to test another browser for web-based training only, download the free version of
Opera at www.Opera.com.
^ For web-based training sound problems, make sure your firewall allows downloading sound file
types such as MP3.
^ If you have installed special search and add-on programs such as Gator or Bonzi please remove
them.
^ If you have a router, make sure that port 443 is open for Secure Socket Layer (SSL), and ports
80 and 8080 are open for HTTP.
^ Internet access uses a caching or proxy server. Make sure the caching/proxy servers are set to
automatically detect settings. Contact your local network administrator and/or your Internet service
provider and have them turn off the caching on any and all caching proxy servers for the following:
^ Uniform Resource Locator (URL): www.proservicetech.com or ford website
Additional Sync Related Service Tips
1. Performing a Master Reset of the APIM module or removing and restoring the Keep Alive Power
circuit fuse (refer to the appropriate wiring manual) for 3-minutes, prior to reprogramming will
restore the factory APIM defaults. This can reduce the possibilities of corrupt files, that may have
been transferred into the APIM modules memory, from interfering with the reprogramming of the
CIP portion of the APIM module.
2. Non-factory installed items that can cause background noise, wind noise or obstruct the voice
path to the Sync system's microphone, will reduce the reliability or accuracy of the consumer's
voice commands or speech being recognized properly. Some examples may include but are not
limited to:
^ Objects hanging from the rear view mirror that may make noise or obstruct the system
microphone located on the mirror.
^ Bug shields.
^ Roof mounted accessories.
^ Damaged window moldings.
^ Non-factory installed overhead consoles or sun-visor storage compartments that obstruct the
voice path to the systems microphone. (It is recommended when diagnosing voice recognition or
phone call sound quality issues to eliminate these types of items before replacing any system
components)
3. Remote Starts may prevent the Automatic Discovery Process, of previously paired phones, from
connecting with the consumer's phone as it may be outside of the device's Bluetooth reception
range. Once the vehicle is started remotely, the Sync system automatically begins to search for
previously paired phones; eventually this process will time out if the customers phone does not
enter the vehicle prior to the expiration of this internal timer, resulting in the vehicle Sync not
automatically recognize the phone and pair with it. If this occurs, once the customer enters the
vehicle, the consumer will be required to manually connect the phone through the Sync menus if
they would like to use the hands free phone features.
NOTE
THE CONSUMER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PAIR THE PHONE AGAIN.
4. When Reprogramming APIM modules, it is strongly recommended to use a hard wired internet
connection if possible, due to the APIM program file sizes. If a wired internet connection is not
available, it is recommended to access the PTS website and download the latest Sync software
files from the Tech Central tab prior to reprogramming. This will reduce the overall reprogramming
time when you are connected to the vehicle. If error messages appear during the reprogramming
process that indicate errors with the VIP or CIP file/image, comparing the saved file/image by
checking the file size, between your PC/IDS with the available file/image size indicated in the PTS
description can help determine if the file may be corrupt or damaged. If this has occurred or is
suspected, re-download the file/image and select Yes when asked Do you want to replace it?
5. Always diagnose and repair any DTC's for the Audio system or any module communication
related faults prior to APIM reprogramming.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability
Technical Service Bulletin # 10B15 Date: 100419
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4003
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes, OASIS will be activated on April 19, 2010.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by April 19, 2010. Owner names and
addresses will be available by May 31, 2010.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but
are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available)
and schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this service action performed on a timely basis.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4004
If the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that complete transmission overhaul
is necessary, dealers must perform a Cost Cap Analysis using the Cost Cap Tool found on the
Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the
repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter. This refund offer expires
October 31, 2010.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the date of the Owner Notification Letter. There is no
expiration date for emergency repair refunds. Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be
excessive, will not be reimbursed.
^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with low regulated fluid pressure to
transmission clutches (burnt or slipping) and/or replacement of the transmission valve body.
RENTAL VEHICLES
In most cases, a rental vehicle will not be required. If a customer's vehicle requires a transmission
repair and it is necessary to order parts, Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for
fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. The parts order must be an emergency
order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to
guarantee next day delivery. Prior approval for additional rental days is required from the Special
Service Support Center. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for
part replacement. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter
the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense
area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which
the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 10B15 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair
should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit,
the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines.
^ For rental vehicle claiming, follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts.
Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous
Expense area.
^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through April 30, 2011. There is no mileage
limit for this program.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4005
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Note:
Less than 2% of the affected vehicles are expected to require parts.
To manage part availability, dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center parts order
line (except for transmission fluid and silicone sealant). Dealers will receive a DOES II message
when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels.
When calling to place an order for any of the parts in the chart below please be prepared to provide
Dealer P&A; Code, VIN, and Mileage.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4006
In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission solenoid regulator valve bore may wear. The
function of a solenoid regulator is to provide regulated pressure to shift solenoids. Wear in the
solenoid regulator bore causes low clutch pressure and results in transmission slips/harsh shifts.
Continued driving with this condition may cause premature wear on the clutches. This may
eventually lead to a loss of 4th through 6th gears and ultimately loss of transmission function. This
service action will reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration. This calibration will reposition the
solenoid regulator valve to eliminate bore wear. A flowchart has been developed to help direct you
to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MODULE REPROGRAMMING
NOTE:
Reprogramming concerns! errors may be caused by the following:
^ Data Link Connector (DLC) or Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) becoming disconnected.
^ Allowing the IDS to enter any type of sleep mode.
^ Using a wireless IDS to VCM connection.
^ Low voltage on the IDS laptop.
^ Low voltage in the vehicle battery (use of a battery charger is recommended).
If you encounter reprogramming concerns, DO NOT DELETE the session. If the original session
has accidentally been deleted, recover the original session from the IDS "TRASH CAN" (located in
the lower right corner of the previous session screen) and continue to reprogram.
1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off.
2. Verify that the IDS is updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4007
3. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session.
4. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick.
5. Select Module Reprogramming and then select PCM. Touch the tick.
6. NOTE: If the IDS states there are no updates available, either the IDS has not been updated to
software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and
higher, or the PCM has already been reprogrammed.
A screen will appear stating a later PCM calibration is available. Follow the on-screen instructions
to program the PCM to the latest calibration.
7. After the PCM has been reprogrammed, inspect the vehicle's odometer for mileage:
^ If the mileage is LESS THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), remove the IDS. This service procedure is
complete and no additional repairs are necessary.
^ If the mileage is MORE THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), leave the IDS connected to the vehicle
and proceed to Step 8.
TRANSMISSION LOAD TEST
WARNING:
Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake to reduce the risk of
vehicle movement during this procedure Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
8. NOTE: In order to perform a valid Transmission Load Test, Transmission Fluid Temperature
(TFT) must be between 185-200° F (85-93° C).
Using the IDS, make sure the Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) is at an operating
temperature of 185-200° F (85-93° C). If the TFT is BELOW 185-200° F (85-93° C), perform the
following:
^ With the vehicle's brakes applied, start the engine.
^ Place the gear selector in D, bring the engine up to 1500 rpm and hold for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in R and bring the engine up to 1500 rpm for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute.
^ Repeat this procedure until the vehicle's TFT is 185-200° F (85-93° C).
9. Perform the Transmission Load Test:
NOTE:
Conduct this test after the PCM has been reprogrammed. Make sure that the engine coolant and
transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature and fluid levels are correct.
1. Block all wheels, set the parking brake, and firmly apply the service brakes.
2. Turn off Traction Control if equipped
3. Set the IDS to record engine rpm and TSS_SRC rpm.
4. Place the gear selector in D.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4008
5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold the pedal just long enough to let the engine get
to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and observe the
TSS_SRC rpm (it should be at ZERO when engine speed has reached maximum rpm). While
performing this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5 seconds. See Figure 2.
After the test, place the gear selector in N and run the engine at 1,000 rpm for 15 seconds to cool
the torque converter.
10. If the TSS_SRC rpm was ZERO during the Transmission Load Test, then this service
procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary.
If the TSS_SRC rpm was MORE than ZERO (transmission slipping) during the Transmission Load
Test, then proceed to Attachment IV for transmission repair.
Table of Contents
TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE
Pan and Tool Requirements
Transaxle Removal
Transaxle Disassembly
Main Control Valve Body Replacement
Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4, 5, 6) Disassembly and Assembly
Filter Removal and Replacement
Transaxle Assembly
Transaxle Installation and Post Test
Part and Tool Requirements
TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE
This transmission repair procedure involves installing a new transmission valve body and clutch
packs in the Overdrive/Direct (O/D) and forward clutch assemblies.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4009
PART AND TOOL REQUIREMENTS
NOTE:
Special tools that are needed for this portion of the service procedure are as follows:
^ Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 or equivalent
^ Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566
^ Torque Converter Handle # 307-091
^ Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Drive Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1
^ Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2
^ Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002 or equivalent
^ Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300
^ Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635
^ Suitable Depth Gauge
Transaxle Removal
1. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle For additional information refer to the appropriate WSM
Section 307.
Transaxle Disassembly
If the technician determines that the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that a
complete overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a cost cap analysis using the cost cap tool
found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website.
If the cost cap tool states "Repair", contact the Special Service Support Center (SSSC) with the
repair estimate (parts and labor at warranty prices) Be prepared to provide the dealership's P/A
code and have the repair order, which contains the VIN and mileage of the vehicle.
If the cost cap tool states "Replace" continue with the Transmission Prior Approval request, make
sure to select FSA on the main menu.
1. Install the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 onto the transaxle.
2. Using the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding
fixture.
3. Remove the Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566.
4. Install the Torque Converter Handle # 307-091.
5. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result.
Using Torque Converter Handle #307-091,remove the torque converter from the transaxle.
6. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4010
Remove the 13 bolts and the main control cover. See Figure 1.
7. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the Transmission Range (TR) sensor
electrical connectors. See Figure 2.
8. Remove and discard the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. See Figure 3.
9. NOTE: Record the location of the short and long main control Torx(R) bolts for reassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4011
Remove the nut and the 22 Torx(R) bolts and remove the main control assembly. See Figure 4.
10. Remove and discard the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate.
11. Remove and discard the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and low/reverse clutch transaxle
case-to-center support seals. See Figure 5.
1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal.
2. Low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4012
12. Remove the internal cooler bypass spring, sleeve and valve. See Figure 6.
13. Remove the bolt and the 055 sensor. See Figure 7.
14. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolt for assembly.
Remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts.
15. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case.
16. Remove the loose torque converter housing from the transaxle case
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4013
17. Remove the No 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 8.
18. Remove the differential. See Figure 9.
19. Remove the differential planetary sun gear.
20. Remove the No. 13 thrust washer. See Figure 10.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4014
21. Remove the No 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 11.
22. Simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain.
23. Remove the No 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 12.
24. Remove the No 10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 13.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4015
25. Remove the 2 bolts and the lube funnel hold down bracket. See Figure 14.
26. Remove the transmission fluid baffle. See Figure 15.
27. Remove the park pawl pin and spring. See Figure 16.
28. Remove the park pawl.
29. NOTE: The forward (1 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring is beveled. The beveled side of the snap ring
goes up (flat side down).
NOTE:
The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap faces the front of the transmission.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4016
Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. See Figure 17.
30. Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate, clutch pack, and wave spring.
31. Remove the front sun gear and shell assembly See Figure 18.
32. Remove the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 19.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4017
33. Remove the No 7 and No 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 20.
1. No 7 thrust bearing
2. No. 8 thrust bearing
34. Remove the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 21.
35. Remove the center planetary sun gear.
36. Remove the No 5 and No 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 22.
1. No. 5 thrust bearing
2. No. 6 thrust bearing
37. Remove the center support assembly. See Figure 23.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4018
38. Remove the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly See Figure 24.
39. Remove the low/reverse wave spring, clutch pack and pressure plate. See Figure 25.
40. Remove the low One-Way Clutch (OWC). See Figure 26.
41. NOTE: The intermediate (2, 6) clutch is removed with the rear planetary sun gear and shell
assembly.
Remove the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly and remove the intermediate (2, 6) clutch
from the assembly. See Figure 27.
42. Remove the pressure plate and the wave spring.
43. Remove the No 3 thrust bearing. See Figure 28.
44. Remove the overdrive/direct clutch assembly.
45. NOTE: If the No. 1 thrust bearing is stuck to the overdrive/direct clutch assembly remove the
No. 1 thrust bearing from the overdrive/direct clutch
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4019
Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing. See Figure 29.
46. Remove and discard the 5 clutch feed seals. See Figure 30.
Main Control Valve Body Replacement
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4020
1. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the main control valve body from the solenoid body. See
Figure 31.
2. Remove and discard the separator plate from the solenoid body. Install the new separator plate
from the new main control valve body.
3. Position the new main control valve body on the solenoid body assembly and install the 2 bolts.
See Figure 32.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4,5,6) Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the Overdrive (O/D) (4, 5, 6) clutch hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4021
2. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub, No 2 thrust bearing See Figure 33.
3. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. See Figure 33.
4. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate and discard the clutch pack. See Figure 33.
5. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor 30758412 on
the balance piston.
6. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and remove the snap ring. See
Figure 34.
7. Remove the Overdrive Clutch Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307584/2.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4022
8. Remove and discard the balance piston See Figure 35.
9. Remove the O/D (4, 5 6) piston return spring. See Figure 36.
10. Install the No.1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 37.
11. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4023
12. Apply compressed air to the O/D (4 5, 6) clutch piston port and remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch
piston. See Figure 38.
13. Remove the O/D/direct clutch assembly from the transaxle case.
14. Remove and discard the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal from the O/D/direct clutch
assembly. See Figure 39.
15. Remove and discard the 2 seals from the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4024
16. Install 2 new seals on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston and lubricate the seals with petroleum jelly.
See Figure 40.
17. Install a new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal and lubricate the seal with petroleum jelly.
See Figure 41.
18. Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston in place.
19. Using the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston, and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911,install
the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston into the O/D/direct
clutch assembly by hand. See Figure 42.
20. NOTE: Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring with the holes facing upward Install
the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4025
21. Lubricate the seals on the new balance piston and position the balance piston in place. See
Figure 43.
22. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 30758412
on the balance piston.
23. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and install the snap ring. See
Figure 44.
24. Remove the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307589/1 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor #
307-584/2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4026
25. Install the No 2 thrust bearing. See Figure 45.
26. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. See Figure 46.
27. Soak the new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 47.
28. Install the new O/D (4. 5, 6) clutch pack.
29. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate.
30. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4027
31. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case, install Dial Indicator Gauge with
Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator
and position the plunger on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air
pressure to the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the Dial
Indicator. The clearance should be between 0.950 mm (0.037 in) and 1.778 mm (0.07 in). If the
clearance is out of range, check the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack for correct installation. See Figure 48.
32. Remove Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002, O/D/direct clutch assembly and
the No. 1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing.
Filter Removal and Replacement
1. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil baffle from the torque converter housing. See Figure 49.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4028
2. NOTE: Record the location of the 6mm bolt for assembly Remove the 9 bolts and the pump and
filter assembly. See Figure 50.
3. Remove filter from the pump. making note of the orientation of the fluid filter to the fluid pump.
See Figure 51.
4. Remove the magnet from the filter.
5. Install the magnet on the filter.
6. Install the filter.
A. Position the filter on the pump.
B. Rotate the filter counterclockwise 90 degrees.
7. Install the pump and filter assembly in the torque converter housing and install the pump bolts.
See Figure 52.
A. Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4029
B. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. Install the transmission fluid baffle and the 2 bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Transaxle Assembly
1. Clean the silicone from the transaxle case-to-torque converter housing sealing surface and the
main control cover sealing surface.
2. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up or damage to
the transaxle can occur
Install the No. 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up. See Figure 53.
3. Install the overdrive/direct clutch assembly.
4. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down or damage
to the transaxle can occur
Install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down. See Figure 54.
5. Install the direct/intermediate clutch hub and rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4030
6. Install the intermediate (2, 6) wave spring assembly. See Figure 55.
7. Soak the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly in clean transmission fluid See Figure 56.
8. Install the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly, temporarily reversing the top friction and
steel plates for the clutch stack-up measurement.
9. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4031
10. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300
to the top of the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack at 3
different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement A. See Figure 57.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4032
11. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the transaxle case step above the
intermediate (2, 6) clutch Record this as measurement B. See Figure 58.
12. Subtract measurement B from measurement A. The clearance should be between 0.240 mm
(0009 in) and 260 mm (0.102 in). If the clearance is out
of range, check the intermediate (2,6) clutch pack for correct installation. If the intermediate (2, 6)
clutch pack is correctly installed, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the intermediate (2, 6)
clutch pack.
13. NOTE: When the intermediate (2, 6) clutch is correctly installed, a friction plate is on top.
Remove the top intermediate (2, 6) clutch friction and steel plate and correctly install the plates
back in the transaxle case.
14. Install the One-Way Clutch (OWC) assembly.
15. Install the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly.
16. NOTE: The position of the low/reverse pressure plate is important. When installing the center
support, the long support legs must fit through the
low/reverse pressure plate and rest on the OWC.
Position the low/reverse pressure plate so that the center support legs fit through the pressure
plate and rest on the OWC and install the low/reverse pressure plate. See Figure 59.
17. Soak the original low/reverse clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 60.
18. Align the low/reverse clutch pack with the pressure plate and install it in the transaxle case,
temporarily reversing the wave spring and top steel
plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4033
19. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the side of the center support with the long
support legs. See Figure 61.
20. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the contact surface of the low/reverse clutch
piston Record this as measurement A. See Figure 62.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4034
21. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the leg surface of the center support Record
this as measurement B. See Figure 63.
22. Subtract measurement B from measurement A and record as measurement C.
23. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case.
24. Using a suitable depth micrometer measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the top of the OWC Record this as
measurement D. See Figure 64.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4035
25. Using a suitable depth gauge measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307300 to the top of the low/reverse clutch at 3 different
points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement E. See Figure 65.
26. Subtract measurement E from measurement D and record as measurement F.
27. Subtract measurement F from measurement C to get the low/reverse clutch clearance. The
clearance should be between 0.406 mm (0.015 in) and
2.000 mm (0.078 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the low/reverse clutch pack for correct
installation. If the low/reverse clutch pack is still out of range, call the SSSC for authorization to
replace the low/reverse clutch pack.
28. NOTE: When the low/reverse clutch is correctly installed, the wave spring is on top.
Remove the top low/reverse clutch steel plate and wave spring and correctly install the plates back
in the transaxle case.
29. NOTE: Make sure the center support is installed with the long center support legs facing down
and the feed holes facing the front of the transaxle
case. Improper alignment will cause transmission failure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4036
Install the center support with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes aligned
with the feed holes in the transaxle case. See Figure 66.
1. Long center support legs face down.
2. Feed holes face the front of the transaxle case.
30. Install the No. 5 and No. 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 67.
1. No. 5 thrust bearing
2. No. 6 thrust bearing
31. Install the center planetary sun gear. See Figure 68.
32. Install the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 68.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4037
33. Install the No. 7 and No. 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 69.
1. No. 7 thrust bearing
2. No. 8 thrust bearing
34. Install the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 70.
35. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch wave spring See Figure 70
36. Soak the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure
71.
37. Install the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack.
38. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate.
NOTICE: Be sure to install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side facing
down or the snap ring can come loose causing damage to the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4038
Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side down with the gap facing
the front of the transaxle. See Figure 72.
1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring.
2. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap.
40. Using a suitable tool, seat the snap ring in the snap ring groove. See Figure 73.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4039
41. Install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator on the
transaxle case and position the plunger on the top
forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch friction plate. See Figure 74.
42. Install new low/reverse and forward (1, 2, 3, 4) transaxle case-to-center support seals in the
transaxle case. See Figure 75.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4040
43. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch piston port while
recording the clutch pack clearance on the dial indicator.
The clearance should be between 0.076 mm (0.002 in) and 1.840 mm (0.072 in). If the clearance is
out of range, check the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack for correct installation and the transaxle for
correct assembly. See Figure 76.
44. Install the front planetary sun gear and shell assembly.
45. Install the No.10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 77.
46. Install the park pawl.
47. Install the park pawl pin and spring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4041
48. Install the 5 new clutch feed seals. See Figure 78.
49. Position the transmission fluid baffle in place.
50. Install the lube funnel and position the alignment pin in the alignment hole.
51. Position the lube funnel hold-down bracket in place and install the 2 bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
52. Install the No. 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 79.
53. Simultaneously install the drive and driven sprocket and chain assembly Lightly tap on the
driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case.
54. Install the No. 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 80.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4042
55. Install the No.13 thrust washer. See Figure 81.
56. Install the differential planetary sun gear.
57. Install the differential assembly.
58. Install the No. 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 82.
59. Install the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 on the input shaft.
60. Clean the torque converter housing sealing surface.
61. NOTE: Be sure the sealing surfaces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing
are free of oil before applying silicone.
Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA-29 or equivalent) to the sealing surface of the transaxle case.
62. NOTE: Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as recorded during disassembly.
Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 transaxle
case-to-torque converter housing bolts. See Figure 83.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4043
1. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft)
2. Stud bolt location
63. Remove the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector 307-635.
64. Install the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
65. Assemble the internal cooler bypass valve in the sleeve and install the assembly in the case.
See Figure 84.
1. Bypass valve.
2. Bypass valve sleeve
66. Install the internal cooler bypass valve spring. See Figure 85.
67. Install the new main control-to-transaxle separator plate and align it on the stud and the guide
pin.
68. NOTE: Be sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual
valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4044
Position the main control assembly in place and align the manual valve on the TR sensor. Install
the nut hand-tight. See Figure 86.
69. Install the short main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 87.
70. Install the long main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 88.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4045
71. Tighten the 22 main control Torx(R) bolts and the nut in a crisscross pattern.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
72. NOTE: Be sure the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal is installed with the holes facing
up.
Install the new solenoid body-to-main control cover seal.
73. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
74. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
75. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA 29 or equivalent) to the main control sealing surface of the
transaxle case.
76. Position the main control cover in place.
77. NOTE: Install the main control cover stud bolts in the correct location as noted during
disassembly.
Install the 13 main control cover bolts. See Figure 89.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
1. Bolt location
2. Stud bolt location
78. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using
the Torque Converter Handle 307-091 install the
torque converter.
79. Remove the Torque Converter Handle 3O7-091.
80. Install the Torque Converter Retainer 307-566.
81. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture.
82. Remove the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625.
Transaxle Installation and Post Test
1. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to the appropriate WSM, Section 307.
2. Perform post test drive to verify transmission is operating correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4046
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 4047
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 4052
Dedicating a USB drive to each vehicle's Sync system helps keep each vehicle's download and
installation history current and accurate. In addition, as new Sync features and functionalities
become available, consumers may decide to install different features on different vehicles.
Dedicated USB drives will help maintain the unique applications for each vehicle.
2. Download files by:
a. Plug the USB drive into the computer's USB port.
b. Select the USB port being used on the computer.
c. Confirm choice of USB storage drive. Then click Next.
d. After clicking Next, the files will automatically begin downloading.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE UNTIL THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. THE SCREEN
WILL CONFIRM THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE.
e. Safely remove the USB storage drive from the computer's USB port by clicking on the Windows
personal computer (PC) Safely Remove Hardware icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to
the clock.
3. Install files by:
a. Insert USB storage drive into the vehicle's Sync USB port.
b. Turn on both, the vehicle and radio.
NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED TO HAVE THE VEHICLE RUNNING (WITH PROPER EXHAUST
VENTILATION) AND NOT IN THE ACCESSORY MODE. THIS IS TO ENSURE THE VEHICLE'S
BATTERY SUPPLY VOLTAGE REMAINS STABLE DURING THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS.
c. Select User Device.
d. Select Settings.
e. Select Install. Display will change to Begin Installation?
f. Select Yes. Installing file - will display on the screen.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE WHILE THE INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS.
g. Upon completion of downloading of files, Installation Complete will display on the Sync screen.
h. The Sync voice will say, Installation complete. Sync may also say, The system will now reboot.
Please wait a few moments before using the system. Installation Complete will remain on the Sync
display until you exit the installation mode.
i. Select the Menu radio button to exit installation mode.
j. Remove the USB storage drive.
k. Consumer takes their USB storage drive back to their computer to report the successful install.
(This feature allows for tracking and determining if the consumers vehicle has a newer version
available for downloading or not.)
NOTE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DETAILS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM
WEBSITE. REGISTERED SYNC OWNERS WILL SEE VEHICLE SPECIFIC DETAILS AND
DIRECTIONS BASED ON THEIR VEHICLE'S OPTION CONTENT.
APIM Programming Using IDS
This method programs both, the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) (through the data link connector)
and CIP (through the USB port), portions of the APIM module.
NOTE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 4053
SOFTWARE PACKAGES OBTAINED THROUGH THE PROFESSIONAL TECHNICIAN SOCIETY
(PTS) WEBSITE CONTAINS BOTH, VIP AND CIP FILES, THESE DO NOT NEED TO BE
INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE LIKE THE CONSUMER DOWNLOAD SERVICE PACK UPDATES,
BUT THE ENTIRE PACKAGE MUST BE INSTALLED DURING REPROGRAMMING FOR
PROPER OPERATION. THESE SOFTWARE PACKAGES ARE MUCH LARGER IN SIZE AND
CONTAIN ALL THE PREVIOUS LEVELS OF ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES AS WELL AS
ANY ADDITIONAL ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES FOR BOTH THE VIP AND CIP
PROCESSORS LOCATED IN THE APIM MODULE.
NOTE
YOU WILL NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO RESTORE THE PREVIOUS LEVEL OF SYNC
OPERATING SOFTWARE ONCE THE APIM MODULE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY UPDATED
TO THE NEXT HIGHER LEVEL.
NOTE
If a new APIM is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure.
For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00.
It is recommended to install a battery charger to the vehicles battery and set at the low charge
setting and insure the PC being used for reprogramming is fully charged or plugged into a power
source prior to starting the reprogramming process.
1. Turn the ignition key to the On position.
2. Turn the audio control module (ACM) on.
3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Connect one end of the USB male-A to male-A cable Rotunda part number
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 (1-800-Rotunda option 6) or equivalent to the scan tool. Compatible cables.
(Figures 1) Non-compatible cables. (Figure 2)
5. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
6. From the technician service publication website, run OASIS using Quick Start or by manually
entering the vehicle identification number (VIN).
7. From the OASIS tab, select the Sync/APIM bullet.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 4054
8. Select the Read APIM button to verify the current APIM VIP and CIP software levels.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VEHICLE COMMUNICATION MODULE (VCM) OR USB CABLES
DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
9. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select
the Program APIM button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if
prompted.
a. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to
program the VIP.
b. When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically.
10. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays Programming
has been completed successfully.
11. Test the audio system for correct operation. PC requirements for successful reprogramming an
APIM module.
Ford And LIM Logon Issues - Including Proper Browser Settings
The following list will have you check various computer settings to insure your PC is set to the
proper configuration for reprogramming an APIM module.
NOTE
CHANGES TO PC SETTINGS MAY REQUIRE
ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS.
1. Do not use a customized browser like AOL, it will not work. Please use Internet Explorer (IE)
version 5.5 5P2, 6.0, or higher.
2. Log into website.
3. Navigate to PTS (Professional Technician Society) under the Technical Tools on the Parts and
Service tab.
4. Check IE settings by completing the following:
a. Preliminary Checks.
NOTE
THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO WINDOWS XP MACHINES WITH 5P2 AND IE 6.0 AND
ABOVE.
(1) Open IE, select Tools at the top of the screen and select Security.
(2) Click on the Internet Zone, and find Navigate Sub-frames across different domains and enable
this function.
(3) Then click OK, system may ask you if you want to accept these function please select Yes.
(4) Check the Windows Firewall to make sure it is turned off by:
(a) Selecting the Start button.
(b) Select Control Panel.
(c) Select Windows Firewall (if you do not see the icon, make sure you are using Classic View) and
set to off.
(5) Check Windows Pop-up Blocker to make sure it is turned off.
(a) Open IE.
(b) Select Tools at the top of the screen.
(c) Select Pop-up Blocker and turn it off.
(6) Remove any add-on toolbars such as Google or Yahoo toolbars, as these have additional built
in pop-up blockers.
(7) Verify that any third party anti-virus, anti-spyware, firewall, or internet security software is
temporarily disabled.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 4055
b. Browser Settings - Open IE and select Internet Options under the Tools heading.
(1) Select the General tab
(2) Select Delete Files and check the Delete all offline content and select OK
(3) Select Delete Cookies and click OK
(4) Select Clear History and select Yes.
(5) Click on the Security tab.
(6) Click on the Trusted Sites icon.
(7) Click on Sites.
(8) In the box below add this website to the zone type in - website.
(9) Ensure that required server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone is not checked.
(10) Click the Add button.
(11) Click the Close button.
(12) Re-select the Security tab and select Custom Level.
(13) Under Reset Custom Settings, pull down and Reset to: Low, select Reset, select Yes and then
OK.
NOTE
IF RUNNING OASIS ON IE 7.0, RESET TO: MEDIUM-LOW. ALSO, UNDER SETTINGS, SCROLL
TO NAVIGATE SUB-FRAMES ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS, SET TO ENABLED AND CLICK
OK.
(14) Select the Privacy tab, and move the slider to Low.
(15) Click on the Advanced, check the box Override automatic cookie handling and check the box
to Always allow session cookies' and
click OK.
(16) Select the Advanced tab and scroll down to HTP 1.1 settings; make sure both options under
this section are checked.
(17) Scroll down to Security section and make sure the following are checked:
(a) Empty Temporary Internet folder when browser is closed.
(b) Use SSL 2.0.
(c) Use SSL 3.0.
(d) Use TLS 1.0.
(e) Select Apply and then click on OK.
5. Close all browsers and reboot the computer to have the browser settings take affect properly.
The browser settings have now been setup correctly as per Ford Browser settings
recommendations.
Additional PC Security Settings (May Or May Not Be Required - Depends On Operating System)
Changes to PC Security Settings may require Administrator access.
1. Check for Information Bar near top of IE page stating - This website wants to run the following
add-ons.
2. Click on Information Bar and select Run ActiveX Controls or Temporarily Allow Pop-ups
depending on your operating system.
3. Click on Retry button to refresh information. (May not be required on some operating systems)
PC and Server Troubleshooting (Optional)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 4056
^ If you wish to test another browser for web-based training only, download the free version of
Opera at www.Opera.com.
^ For web-based training sound problems, make sure your firewall allows downloading sound file
types such as MP3.
^ If you have installed special search and add-on programs such as Gator or Bonzi please remove
them.
^ If you have a router, make sure that port 443 is open for Secure Socket Layer (SSL), and ports
80 and 8080 are open for HTTP.
^ Internet access uses a caching or proxy server. Make sure the caching/proxy servers are set to
automatically detect settings. Contact your local network administrator and/or your Internet service
provider and have them turn off the caching on any and all caching proxy servers for the following:
^ Uniform Resource Locator (URL): www.proservicetech.com or ford website
Additional Sync Related Service Tips
1. Performing a Master Reset of the APIM module or removing and restoring the Keep Alive Power
circuit fuse (refer to the appropriate wiring manual) for 3-minutes, prior to reprogramming will
restore the factory APIM defaults. This can reduce the possibilities of corrupt files, that may have
been transferred into the APIM modules memory, from interfering with the reprogramming of the
CIP portion of the APIM module.
2. Non-factory installed items that can cause background noise, wind noise or obstruct the voice
path to the Sync system's microphone, will reduce the reliability or accuracy of the consumer's
voice commands or speech being recognized properly. Some examples may include but are not
limited to:
^ Objects hanging from the rear view mirror that may make noise or obstruct the system
microphone located on the mirror.
^ Bug shields.
^ Roof mounted accessories.
^ Damaged window moldings.
^ Non-factory installed overhead consoles or sun-visor storage compartments that obstruct the
voice path to the systems microphone. (It is recommended when diagnosing voice recognition or
phone call sound quality issues to eliminate these types of items before replacing any system
components)
3. Remote Starts may prevent the Automatic Discovery Process, of previously paired phones, from
connecting with the consumer's phone as it may be outside of the device's Bluetooth reception
range. Once the vehicle is started remotely, the Sync system automatically begins to search for
previously paired phones; eventually this process will time out if the customers phone does not
enter the vehicle prior to the expiration of this internal timer, resulting in the vehicle Sync not
automatically recognize the phone and pair with it. If this occurs, once the customer enters the
vehicle, the consumer will be required to manually connect the phone through the Sync menus if
they would like to use the hands free phone features.
NOTE
THE CONSUMER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PAIR THE PHONE AGAIN.
4. When Reprogramming APIM modules, it is strongly recommended to use a hard wired internet
connection if possible, due to the APIM program file sizes. If a wired internet connection is not
available, it is recommended to access the PTS website and download the latest Sync software
files from the Tech Central tab prior to reprogramming. This will reduce the overall reprogramming
time when you are connected to the vehicle. If error messages appear during the reprogramming
process that indicate errors with the VIP or CIP file/image, comparing the saved file/image by
checking the file size, between your PC/IDS with the available file/image size indicated in the PTS
description can help determine if the file may be corrupt or damaged. If this has occurred or is
suspected, re-download the file/image and select Yes when asked Do you want to replace it?
5. Always diagnose and repair any DTC's for the Audio system or any module communication
related faults prior to APIM reprogramming.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Page 4063
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4066
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4067
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4068
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4069
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4070
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4071
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4072
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4073
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4074
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4075
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4076
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4077
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4078
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4079
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4080
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4081
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4082
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing
a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4083
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4084
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4085
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4086
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4090
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4093
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4094
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4095
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4096
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4097
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4098
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4099
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4100
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4101
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4102
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4103
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4104
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4105
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4106
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4107
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4108
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4109
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing
a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4110
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4111
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4112
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 4113
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Page 4117
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4120
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4121
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4122
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4123
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4124
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4125
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4126
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4127
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4128
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4129
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4130
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4131
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4132
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4133
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4134
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4135
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4136
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing
a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4137
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4138
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4139
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4140
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4146
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4149
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4150
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4151
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4152
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4153
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4154
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4155
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4156
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4157
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4158
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4159
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4160
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4161
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4162
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4163
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4164
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4165
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this
procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4166
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4167
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4168
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4169
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4173
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4176
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4177
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4178
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4179
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4180
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4181
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4182
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4183
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4184
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4185
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4186
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4187
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4188
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4189
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4190
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4191
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4192
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this
procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4193
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4194
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4195
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4196
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4200
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4203
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4204
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4205
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4206
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4207
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4208
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4209
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4210
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4211
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4212
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4213
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4214
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4215
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4216
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4217
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4218
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4219
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this
procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4220
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4221
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4222
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4223
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic
Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Differential: > 10-10-1 > Jun > 10
> A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube
Differential: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube
TSB 10-10-1
06/07/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - NEW DIPSTICK AND FILLER TUBE KIT IS AVAILABLE - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 10/29/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-11-4 to update the Part List and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 6F35 automatic transmission and
built on or before 10/29/2008 may exhibit a loss of transmission fluid from the dipstick tube area.
This may be due to transmission being over-filled. A new transmission dipstick and filler tube kit is
now available with added minimum and maximum fluid level lines to easily determine proper fluid
level and with a revised vent system on the filler tube.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the vehicle was built on or before 10/29/2008 and the dipstick does not have minimum and
maximum lines indicated, then replace dipstick and
filler tube with latest level parts. Both the dipstick and filler tube must be installed and are sold as a
kit. Follow the instruction included in the kit. (Figure 1)
2. Check transmission fluid per Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 and adjust fluid level.
NOTE
TRANSMISSION FLUID WILL EXPAND WHEN WARM AND SHOULD NOT BE ADDED TO A
COLD TRANSMISSION. CORRECT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic
Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Differential: > 10-10-1 > Jun > 10
> A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube > Page 4235
FLUID LEVEL WILL READ IN THE CROSS HATCH AREA OF THE DIPSTICK AT NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF 185-200 ° F (85-93 °C).
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101001A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.7 Hr.
6F35 Transmission: Replace The Transmission Dipstick With Filler-Tube Kit Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7A020 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic
Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Differential: >
10-10-1 > Jun > 10 > A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube
Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube
TSB 10-10-1
06/07/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - NEW DIPSTICK AND FILLER TUBE KIT IS AVAILABLE - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 10/29/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-11-4 to update the Part List and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 6F35 automatic transmission and
built on or before 10/29/2008 may exhibit a loss of transmission fluid from the dipstick tube area.
This may be due to transmission being over-filled. A new transmission dipstick and filler tube kit is
now available with added minimum and maximum fluid level lines to easily determine proper fluid
level and with a revised vent system on the filler tube.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the vehicle was built on or before 10/29/2008 and the dipstick does not have minimum and
maximum lines indicated, then replace dipstick and
filler tube with latest level parts. Both the dipstick and filler tube must be installed and are sold as a
kit. Follow the instruction included in the kit. (Figure 1)
2. Check transmission fluid per Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 and adjust fluid level.
NOTE
TRANSMISSION FLUID WILL EXPAND WHEN WARM AND SHOULD NOT BE ADDED TO A
COLD TRANSMISSION. CORRECT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic
Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Differential: >
10-10-1 > Jun > 10 > A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube > Page 4241
FLUID LEVEL WILL READ IN THE CROSS HATCH AREA OF THE DIPSTICK AT NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF 185-200 ° F (85-93 °C).
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101001A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.7 Hr.
6F35 Transmission: Replace The Transmission Dipstick With Filler-Tube Kit Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7A020 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-10-1 > Jun > 10
> A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube
Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick
Tube
TSB 10-10-1
06/07/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - NEW DIPSTICK AND FILLER TUBE KIT IS AVAILABLE - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 10/29/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-11-4 to update the Part List and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 6F35 automatic transmission and
built on or before 10/29/2008 may exhibit a loss of transmission fluid from the dipstick tube area.
This may be due to transmission being over-filled. A new transmission dipstick and filler tube kit is
now available with added minimum and maximum fluid level lines to easily determine proper fluid
level and with a revised vent system on the filler tube.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the vehicle was built on or before 10/29/2008 and the dipstick does not have minimum and
maximum lines indicated, then replace dipstick and
filler tube with latest level parts. Both the dipstick and filler tube must be installed and are sold as a
kit. Follow the instruction included in the kit. (Figure 1)
2. Check transmission fluid per Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 and adjust fluid level.
NOTE
TRANSMISSION FLUID WILL EXPAND WHEN WARM AND SHOULD NOT BE ADDED TO A
COLD TRANSMISSION. CORRECT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-10-1 > Jun > 10
> A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube > Page 4250
FLUID LEVEL WILL READ IN THE CROSS HATCH AREA OF THE DIPSTICK AT NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF 185-200 ° F (85-93 °C).
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101001A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.7 Hr.
6F35 Transmission: Replace The Transmission Dipstick With Filler-Tube Kit Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7A020 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-10-1
> Jun > 10 > A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube
Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid leaks
From Dipstick Tube
TSB 10-10-1
06/07/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - NEW DIPSTICK AND FILLER TUBE KIT IS AVAILABLE - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 10/29/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-11-4 to update the Part List and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 6F35 automatic transmission and
built on or before 10/29/2008 may exhibit a loss of transmission fluid from the dipstick tube area.
This may be due to transmission being over-filled. A new transmission dipstick and filler tube kit is
now available with added minimum and maximum fluid level lines to easily determine proper fluid
level and with a revised vent system on the filler tube.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the vehicle was built on or before 10/29/2008 and the dipstick does not have minimum and
maximum lines indicated, then replace dipstick and
filler tube with latest level parts. Both the dipstick and filler tube must be installed and are sold as a
kit. Follow the instruction included in the kit. (Figure 1)
2. Check transmission fluid per Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 and adjust fluid level.
NOTE
TRANSMISSION FLUID WILL EXPAND WHEN WARM AND SHOULD NOT BE ADDED TO A
COLD TRANSMISSION. CORRECT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-10-1
> Jun > 10 > A/T - Fluid leaks From Dipstick Tube > Page 4256
FLUID LEVEL WILL READ IN THE CROSS HATCH AREA OF THE DIPSTICK AT NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF 185-200 ° F (85-93 °C).
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101001A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.7 Hr.
6F35 Transmission: Replace The Transmission Dipstick With Filler-Tube Kit Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7A020 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat
Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 4261
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Automatic
Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front
Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Automatic
Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page
4267
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Automatic
Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page
4273
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop
Drive Chain: Customer Interest A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop
TSB 10-20-1
10/25/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HOOT TYPE NOISE AT LOW SPEED - ON LIGHT ACCELERATION
FROM A STOP BEFORE THE FIRST SHIFT - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 1/25/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-25-3 to add a production build date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic
transmission and built on or before 1/25/2010 may exhibit a single hoot noise on light acceleration
from a stop just before the 1-2 shift. This noise will not occur any other time and will not occur
under heavy acceleration. On four wheel drive (4WD) vehicles, the noise may be heard at the rear
axle due to noise transfer through the rear differential unit (RDU). This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect transmission function and/or 4WD function or durability. A revised
transaxle chain has been released to reduce this noise.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
A SLIGHT NOISE WHILE ACCELERATING FROM A STOP MAY BE A NORMAL
CHARACTERISTIC.
Drive Chain Replacement:
1. Drain fluid and remove the transaxle, following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01.
2. Install the holding fixture 307-625.
3. Using the holding fixture 307-625, install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture.
4. Remove the torque converter retainer 307-566.
5. Install the torque converter handle 307-091.
6. The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using torque
converter handle 307-091, remove the torque converter
from the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4282
7. Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly and remove the 17 torque converter housing
bolts. (Figure 1)
8. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 2)
9. Remove the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4283
10. Remove the No.15 differential thrust bearing. (Figure 4)
11. Remove the differential. (Figure 5)
12. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4284
13. Remove the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 7)
14. Remove the No.11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. (Figure 8)
15. Lift the driven sprocket up first then simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and
the chain. (Figure 9)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4285
16. Remove the drive chain from the drive and driven sprockets. (Figure 10)
17. Install the new drive chain on the drive and driven sprockets.
18. Install the No.10 thrust bearing. (Figure 11)
19. Install the No.12 thrust bearing. (Figure 12)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4286
20. Simultaneously install the drive/driven sprocket and chain assembly by first seating the drive
sprocket then seat the driven sprocket, Lightly tap on
the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. (Figure 13)
21. Install the No.11 thrust bearing. (Figure 14)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4287
22. Install the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 15)
23. Install the final drive sun gear. (Figure 16)
24. Install the differential assembly. (Figure 17)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4288
25. Install the No.15 thrust bearing. (Figure 18)
26. Install the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635 on the input shaft. (Figure 19)
27. Clean the silicone off torque converter housing and transmission case sealing sur[ace.
28. Be sure the sealing sur[aces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free
of oil before applying Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone
Sealant. Apply Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant to the sealing surface of the transaxle case.
(Figure 20)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4289
29. Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the torque
converter housing on the transaxle case and install the
17 bolts. Tighten to 18 lb-ft (24 N.m). (Figure 21)
30. Remove the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635.
31. Using the torque converter handle 307-091, install the torque converter.
32. Remove the torque converter handle 307-091.
33. Install the torque converter retainer 307-566.
34. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture.
35. Remove the holding fixture 307-625.
36. Install transaxle and refill transaxle fluid following WSM, Section 307-01.
37. To correctly set and check the transmission fluid level monitor the transmission fluid
temperature (TFT) Parameter Identification (PID) using
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)/ Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) scan tool. Correct fluid
level will read in the cross hatch area of the dipstick at normal operating temperature 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.4 Hrs.
Mariner 4X2 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.7 Hrs.
Mariner 4X2 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.0 Hrs.
Mariner 4X4 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.5 Hrs.
Mariner 4X4 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4290
Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7G249 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop
Drive Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop
TSB 10-20-1
10/25/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HOOT TYPE NOISE AT LOW SPEED - ON LIGHT ACCELERATION
FROM A STOP BEFORE THE FIRST SHIFT - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 1/25/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-25-3 to add a production build date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic
transmission and built on or before 1/25/2010 may exhibit a single hoot noise on light acceleration
from a stop just before the 1-2 shift. This noise will not occur any other time and will not occur
under heavy acceleration. On four wheel drive (4WD) vehicles, the noise may be heard at the rear
axle due to noise transfer through the rear differential unit (RDU). This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect transmission function and/or 4WD function or durability. A revised
transaxle chain has been released to reduce this noise.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
A SLIGHT NOISE WHILE ACCELERATING FROM A STOP MAY BE A NORMAL
CHARACTERISTIC.
Drive Chain Replacement:
1. Drain fluid and remove the transaxle, following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01.
2. Install the holding fixture 307-625.
3. Using the holding fixture 307-625, install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture.
4. Remove the torque converter retainer 307-566.
5. Install the torque converter handle 307-091.
6. The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using torque
converter handle 307-091, remove the torque converter
from the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4296
7. Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly and remove the 17 torque converter housing
bolts. (Figure 1)
8. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 2)
9. Remove the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4297
10. Remove the No.15 differential thrust bearing. (Figure 4)
11. Remove the differential. (Figure 5)
12. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4298
13. Remove the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 7)
14. Remove the No.11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. (Figure 8)
15. Lift the driven sprocket up first then simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and
the chain. (Figure 9)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4299
16. Remove the drive chain from the drive and driven sprockets. (Figure 10)
17. Install the new drive chain on the drive and driven sprockets.
18. Install the No.10 thrust bearing. (Figure 11)
19. Install the No.12 thrust bearing. (Figure 12)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4300
20. Simultaneously install the drive/driven sprocket and chain assembly by first seating the drive
sprocket then seat the driven sprocket, Lightly tap on
the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. (Figure 13)
21. Install the No.11 thrust bearing. (Figure 14)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4301
22. Install the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 15)
23. Install the final drive sun gear. (Figure 16)
24. Install the differential assembly. (Figure 17)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4302
25. Install the No.15 thrust bearing. (Figure 18)
26. Install the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635 on the input shaft. (Figure 19)
27. Clean the silicone off torque converter housing and transmission case sealing sur[ace.
28. Be sure the sealing sur[aces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free
of oil before applying Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone
Sealant. Apply Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant to the sealing surface of the transaxle case.
(Figure 20)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4303
29. Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the torque
converter housing on the transaxle case and install the
17 bolts. Tighten to 18 lb-ft (24 N.m). (Figure 21)
30. Remove the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635.
31. Using the torque converter handle 307-091, install the torque converter.
32. Remove the torque converter handle 307-091.
33. Install the torque converter retainer 307-566.
34. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture.
35. Remove the holding fixture 307-625.
36. Install transaxle and refill transaxle fluid following WSM, Section 307-01.
37. To correctly set and check the transmission fluid level monitor the transmission fluid
temperature (TFT) Parameter Identification (PID) using
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)/ Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) scan tool. Correct fluid
level will read in the cross hatch area of the dipstick at normal operating temperature 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.4 Hrs.
Mariner 4X2 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.7 Hrs.
Mariner 4X2 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.0 Hrs.
Mariner 4X4 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.5 Hrs.
Mariner 4X4 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4304
Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7G249 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 4309
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacity.......................................................................................................................................
............................................................8.5L (9 quarts)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4312
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft Mercon LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-10-QLV
Ford Specification - MERCON LV
Note: The use of any transmission fluid other than what is recommended for this transaxle will
cause transaxle damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing will be carried out using the Turbo-Tank Heated
Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included with the
machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present before proceeding.
1. Check and top off fluid level of the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent tank
with transmission fluid.
2. Allow the fluid in the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent 15-30 minutes to heat
up to 60°C (140°F) before using.
3. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler lines.
4. NOTE: The TOP transaxle cooler tube on the transaxle is the pressure line.
Attach the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent red line to the transmission fluid
cooler pressure line quick disconnect fitting.
5. Attach the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent blue line to the transmission
fluid cooler return line quick disconnect fitting.
6. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the cooler lines and cooler prior to starting the
flushing procedure.
7. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the cooler in a normal flow
direction for an additional 10-15 minutes.
8. Clean the transaxle mounted fluid cooler tubes by hand.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 4315
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
NOTE: In order to completely clean the torque converter, this procedure needs to be carried out 3
times.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A
small amount of metal or friction particles may be
found from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present, the
transaxle will need to be overhauled.
Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
3. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid.
5. Start the engine and let it run for 3 minutes. Move the range selector lever into each gear
position. Repeat Steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 two more times.
After the transmission fluid has been changed a total of 3 times, check the transmission fluid level
for a final time, making sure that the transmission fluid is at the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Fluid Pan: Specifications
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. Tighten to.....................................................
...............................................................................................................................................12 Nm
(106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4319
Fluid Pan: Service and Repair
6F35
Main Control Cover
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4320
5. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
6. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
7. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4321
Installation
1. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
2. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
3. Position the main control cover in place.
4. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is
on the inside of the main control cover.
Transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4322
5. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in
place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
7. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers.
8. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4323
9. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T
> Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4331
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4334
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4335
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4336
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4337
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4338
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4339
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4340
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4341
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4342
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4343
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4344
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4345
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4346
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4347
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4348
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4349
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4350
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this
procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4351
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4352
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4353
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4354
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle
Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle
Shaft Seal > Page 4363
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle
Shaft Seal > Page 4364
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov
> 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov
> 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4370
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov
> 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4371
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 >
Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe
Comes Loose
TSB 11-3-5
03/15/11
3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or
before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner
housing.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-12.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4377
Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108
A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4378
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4379
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108
A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4380
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4381
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4382
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal
Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engines
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4385
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L Engine
8. Drain the cooling system.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4386
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4387
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
22. Using a suitable tool, remove the manual control lever shaft seal.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Using the Manual Lever Seal Installer, install a new manual control lever shaft seal.
2. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4388
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
3. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor
locking pin.
4. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
6. Install the main control cover grommet.
7. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4389
8. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
9. Position the main control cover in place.
10. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
11. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4390
12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
13. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
14. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
15. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4391
3.0L engine
16. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
17. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
18. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3.0L engine
19. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
3.0L engine
21. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
22. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
All vehicles
23. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4392
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal - RH
Halfshaft Seal - RH, Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the intermediate shaft.
3. Using a suitable awl, poke a small hole in the halfshaft seal.
4. Using a suitable dent puller, remove the halfshaft seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4393
Installation
1. Install a new halfshaft seal on the Seal Installer and Handle.
2. Using the Seal Installer and Handle, install the RH halfshaft seal.
3. Install the intermediate shaft.
4. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4394
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal - LH
Halfshaft Seal - LH
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the front LH halfshaft.
3. Using a suitable awl, poke a small hole in the halfshaft seal.
4. Using a suitable dent puller, remove the halfshaft seal.
Installation
1. Install a new halfshaft seal on the Seal Installer and Handle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4395
2. Using the Seal Installer and Handle, install the LH halfshaft seal.
3. Install the front LH halfshaft.
4. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive.
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Column Shift)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Floor Shift)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
6F35
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4406
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4407
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4408
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4409
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
8. Position the main control cover in place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4410
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4411
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment.
3.0L Engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4412
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 >
May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
TSB 09-8-6
05/04/09
6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706,
P0707, P1702
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before
10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707,
P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and
transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND
CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED
(TSS) SENSOR.
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9.
2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS
connector from the solenoid body lead frame.
3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow
WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor
wires during the installation of the main control.
4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM,
Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr.
2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time
To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C
(Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 >
May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 4421
7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H557 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page
4427
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
TSB 09-8-6
05/04/09
6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706,
P0707, P1702
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before
10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707,
P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and
transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND
CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED
(TSS) SENSOR.
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9.
2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS
connector from the solenoid body lead frame.
3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow
WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor
wires during the installation of the main control.
4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM,
Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr.
2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time
To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C
(Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page
4432
7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H557 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4438
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4439
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4440
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
6F35
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS
sensor.
Installation
1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor >
Page 4443
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
6F35
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor >
Page 4444
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor >
Page 4445
11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor >
Page 4446
Installation
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly Of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If
installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor >
Page 4447
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor >
Page 4448
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor >
Page 4449
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4454
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4455
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4456
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4457
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4458
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4459
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4460
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4461
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4462
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4463
Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4464
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4465
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4466
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4467
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4468
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4469
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4470
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4471
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4472
Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
37-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4473
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4474
Shift Interlock: Service and Repair
Brake Shift Interlock Override
NOTE: If it is necessary to use the override procedure to move the selector lever out of the PARK
position, it is possible that a fuse has blown and the brake lights are not operational. Before driving
the vehicle, verify that the brake lights are working. This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift
interlock feature that prevents the selector lever from being moved out of PARK when the ignition is
in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed. If the selector lever cannot be moved out
of the PARK position when the ignition is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key.
2. NOTE: Relief located at the front of the access panel.
Remove the access panel.
3. Using an suitable tool, depress the Brake Shift Interlock Actuator (BSIA) override mechanism on
the selector lever, apply the brake, depress the
button on the selector lever and move the selector lever into NEUTRAL.
4. Start the vehicle.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4478
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4481
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4482
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4483
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4484
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4485
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4486
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4487
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4488
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4489
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4490
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4491
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4492
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4493
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4494
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4495
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4496
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4497
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this
procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4498
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4499
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4500
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4501
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4505
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair
Selector Lever
Removal
All vehicles
1. Place the selector lever in the D position.
2. Gently pry up to remove the upper selector lever trim ring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4506
3. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray.
4. Remove the top finish panel.
5. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly.
1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever.
2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket.
6. Disconnect the wiring harness retainers from the selector lever.
7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the selector lever.
1. Disconnect the selector lever electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4507
2. Remove the vehicle harness connector from the selector lever.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
8. Pull the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) module straight back and remove it from the back of the selector
lever.
All vehicles
9. Remove the 2 screws from the center console.
10. Remove the 4 bolts and remove the selector lever assembly.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4508
All vehicles
1. Install the selector lever assembly and the 4 bolts.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
2. Install the 2 center console screws.
AWD vehicles
3. Install the AWD module on to the back of the selector lever.
All vehicles
4. Connect the electrical connectors to the selector lever.
1. Install the vehicle harness connector on the selector lever.
2. Connect the selector lever electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4509
5. Connect the wiring harness retainers to the selector lever.
6. Install the selector lever cable on the selector lever assembly.
1. Install the selector lever cable on the bracket.
2. Connect the selector lever cable end.
7. Install the top finish panel.
8. Install the center console compartment tray.
9. Install the upper selector lever trim ring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4510
10. Adjust the selector lever cable. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever Cable
Adjustment See: Adjustments.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments
Shift Cable: Adjustments
Selector Lever Cable Adjustment
1. Place the selector lever in the D position.
2. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
3. Place the manual control lever in the D position.
1. Rotate the manual control lever counterclockwise to the PARK position.
2. Rotate the manual control lever clockwise 3 detents to the D position.
4. Release the selector lever cable adjuster lock.
1. Pull out on the adjuster lock tabs.
2. Slide the lock over to unlock the selector lever cable.
5. Align the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever ball stud and install it with the
adjuster unlocked.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4515
6. Slide the adjuster tab in place to lock the selector lever cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4516
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
Selector Lever Cable
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Place the selector level in the D position.
3. Gently pry up to remove the upper selector lever trim ring.
4. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4517
5. Remove the top finish panel.
6. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly.
1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever.
2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket.
7. Remove the 2 grommet nuts for the selector lever cable.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. Remove the selector lever cable retainer from the transmission fluid filler tube.
9. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4518
10. Release the 2 tabs and remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever cable bracket.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the selector lever cable after installation. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever
Cable Adjustment See: Adjustments.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 10-7-4 > Apr > 10 > A/T MIL ON/DTC's P0741/P1744
Torque Converter: Customer Interest A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0741/P1744
TSB 10-7-4
04/26/10
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P0741 AND/OR P1744-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/23/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 08-21-1 to update the Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built on or
before 8/23/2008 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0741 and/or P1744.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A to replace the torque converter and
disassemble the transmission. Clean and reseal the transmission to remove all contamination.
NOTE
TRANSAXLE FLUID COOLER BACKFLUSHING AND CLEANING PROCEDURES IN WSM,
SECTION 307-01A MUST BE FOLLOWED.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 9.2 Hrs.
4X2: Check DTCs, Replace Torque Convertor Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To
Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 9.8 Hrs.
4X4: Check DTCs, Replace Torque Convertor Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To
Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 10-7-4 > Apr > 10 > A/T MIL ON/DTC's P0741/P1744 > Page 4527
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 9.6 Hrs.
4X2: Check DTCs Replace Torque Convertor Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To
Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 10.3
4X4: Check DTCs, Hrs.
Replace Torque Convertor, Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To Remove And Install
Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7902 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 09-10-3 > Jun > 09 > A/T
- Torque Converter Knocking Noises
Torque Converter: Customer Interest A/T - Torque Converter Knocking Noises
TSB 09-10-3
06/01/09
6F35 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TORQUE CONVERTER KNOCK - BUILT BEFORE
8/29/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission and
built before 8/29/2008 may exhibit a continuous knocking noise heard with the engine running and
vehicle stationary or moving slow. The noise is heard in drive and/or reverse, and is not typically
heard in neutral and/or park. This noise may be due to the torque converter assembly.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS A 3.0L V6, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION, AND THE NOISE IS HEARD IN
ALL 4 POSITIONS (P,R,N,D), THEN THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY.
1. Verify vehicle was built before 8/29/2008 and the noise is continuous knocking noise, heard from
rear of engine and/or front of transmission, with
engine running and vehicle stationary or moving slow.
a. Is the noise present in (D) and/or (R) but not in (N) and/or (P)? If yes, then go to Step 2.
b. Is the noise is heard in all four positions (P,R,N,D)? If yes, then stop. This procedure does not
apply and refer to Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 303-00.
2. Use chassis ears to listen for noise at the bottom of the transmission near the torque converter
access hole. If noise is present, then replace the torque
converter per WSM, Section 307-O1A
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 4.6 Hrs.
4X2: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 5.2 Hrs.
4X4: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 09-10-3 > Jun > 09 > A/T
- Torque Converter Knocking Noises > Page 4532
Operations)
091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 5.0 Hrs.
4X2: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 5.7 Hrs.
4X4: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7902 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 10-7-4 > Apr
> 10 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0741/P1744
Torque Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0741/P1744
TSB 10-7-4
04/26/10
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P0741 AND/OR P1744-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/23/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 08-21-1 to update the Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built on or
before 8/23/2008 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0741 and/or P1744.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A to replace the torque converter and
disassemble the transmission. Clean and reseal the transmission to remove all contamination.
NOTE
TRANSAXLE FLUID COOLER BACKFLUSHING AND CLEANING PROCEDURES IN WSM,
SECTION 307-01A MUST BE FOLLOWED.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 9.2 Hrs.
4X2: Check DTCs, Replace Torque Convertor Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To
Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 9.8 Hrs.
4X4: Check DTCs, Replace Torque Convertor Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To
Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 10-7-4 > Apr
> 10 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0741/P1744 > Page 4538
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 9.6 Hrs.
4X2: Check DTCs Replace Torque Convertor Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To
Remove And Install Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
100704A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 10.3
4X4: Check DTCs, Hrs.
Replace Torque Convertor, Clean And Reseal Transmission, Includes Time To Remove And Install
Transmission, And Fluid Cooler Backflushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7902 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 09-10-3 >
Jun > 09 > A/T - Torque Converter Knocking Noises
Torque Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Torque Converter Knocking Noises
TSB 09-10-3
06/01/09
6F35 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TORQUE CONVERTER KNOCK - BUILT BEFORE
8/29/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission and
built before 8/29/2008 may exhibit a continuous knocking noise heard with the engine running and
vehicle stationary or moving slow. The noise is heard in drive and/or reverse, and is not typically
heard in neutral and/or park. This noise may be due to the torque converter assembly.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS A 3.0L V6, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION, AND THE NOISE IS HEARD IN
ALL 4 POSITIONS (P,R,N,D), THEN THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY.
1. Verify vehicle was built before 8/29/2008 and the noise is continuous knocking noise, heard from
rear of engine and/or front of transmission, with
engine running and vehicle stationary or moving slow.
a. Is the noise present in (D) and/or (R) but not in (N) and/or (P)? If yes, then go to Step 2.
b. Is the noise is heard in all four positions (P,R,N,D)? If yes, then stop. This procedure does not
apply and refer to Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 303-00.
2. Use chassis ears to listen for noise at the bottom of the transmission near the torque converter
access hole. If noise is present, then replace the torque
converter per WSM, Section 307-O1A
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 4.6 Hrs.
4X2: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 5.2 Hrs.
4X4: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 09-10-3 >
Jun > 09 > A/T - Torque Converter Knocking Noises > Page 4543
Operations)
091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 5.0 Hrs.
4X2: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
091003A 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 5.7 Hrs.
4X4: Replace The Torque Converter Includes Time To Verify Noise (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7902 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4544
Torque Converter: Description and Operation
6F35
Torque Converter
The torque converter transmits and multiplies torque. The torque converter is a 4-element device:
- Impeller and cover assembly
- Turbine
- Reactor
- Clutch and damper assembly
Rotation of the torque converter housing and impeller set the transmission fluid in motion by driving
the impeller blades and pump.
The turbine is driven by the transmission fluid from the impeller and transmits power to the input
shaft.
The reactor redirects transmission fluid flow returned from the turbine to the impeller so that it
rotates in the same direction as the impeller. This action assists in torque multiplication.
The reactor has a One-Way Clutch (OWC) to hold it stationary during torque multiplication and
allows it to rotate at higher vehicle speeds.
Torque Converter Operation
The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) connects the torque converter housing to the damper when
the TCC is applied.
During TCC release, the direction that the transmission fluid flows through the torque converter
allows the TCC to release. During TCC apply, the transmission fluid flows in the opposite direction
to apply the TCC.
The PCM controls TCC operation using the TCC solenoid in the solenoid body. TCC solenoid
operation provides the modulation of hydraulic pressure to change the position of the TCC control
valve and TCC regulator apply valve which changes the pressure and transmission fluid direction in
the torque converter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4545
The TCC can be applied in 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gears.
Torque Converter Internal Component Exploded View
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis
Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Diagnosis
6F35
Torque Converter Diagnosis
Prior to torque converter installation, all diagnostic procedures must be followed. This is to prevent
the unnecessary installation of new or remanufactured torque converters. Only after a complete
diagnostic evaluation can the decision be made to install a new or remanufactured torque
converter.
Begin with the normal diagnostic procedures as follows:
1. Preliminary inspection
2. Know and understand the customer concern
3. Verify the concern - carry out the Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test. See: Torque
Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test
4. Carry out diagnostic procedures:
- Run on-board diagnostics. Refer to Diagnostics See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostics. Repair all non-transmission related DTCs first.
- Repair all transmission DTCs.
- Rerun On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) to verify repair.
- Carry out Line Pressure Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures. See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special Testing
Procedures/Line Pressure Test See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special Testing Procedures/Special Testing
Procedures
- Carry out Stall Speed Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures. See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special Testing
Procedures/Stall Speed Test See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special Testing Procedures/Special Testing
Procedures
- Carry out diagnostic routines. Refer to Diagnosis By Symptom. See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Routines
See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom
- Use the index to locate the appropriate routine that best describes the symptom(s). The routine
will list all possible components that may cause or contribute to the symptom. Check each
component listed, diagnose and repair as required, before installing a new torque converter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 4548
Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test
6F35
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test
This test verifies that the TCC control system and the torque converter are operating correctly.
1. Carry out Self Test, refer to the tester manual. Check for DTCs.
2. Connect a tachometer to the engine.
3. Bring the engine to normal operating temperature by driving the vehicle at highway speeds for
approximately 15 minutes in (D) position.
4. If the vehicle stalls in (D) at idle with vehicle at a stop, move the selector lever to manual L
position. If the vehicle stalls, see torque converter
operation concerns, refer to Diagnosis By Symptom See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom. Repair as
required. If the vehicle does not stall in (D), refer to Diagnosis By Symptom See: Transmission
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By
Symptom.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 4549
Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Contamination Inspection
6F35
Torque Converter Contamination Inspection
1. A new or remanufactured torque converter must be installed if one or more of the following
statements is true:
- A torque converter malfunction has been determined based on complete diagnostic procedures.
- The torque converter stud or studs, impeller hub or bushing are damaged.
- The torque converter exhibits external discoloration (due to overheating).
- There is evidence of transmission assembly or fluid contamination due to the following
transmission or converter failure modes. Major metallic failure
- Multiple clutch plates or band failures
- Sufficient component wear which results in metallic contamination
- Water or antifreeze contamination
2. If none of the above conditions are present, continue with the following fluid inspection.
3. Pour a small amount of transmission fluid from the torque converter onto an absorbent white
tissue or through a paper filter.
4. Examine the fluid for contaminants, color and smell. The fluid must be free of contaminants, red
in color and not have a burnt smell.
5. NOTICE: Do not use water-based cleaners or mineral spirits to clean or flush the torque
converter or transmission damage will occur.
If the fluid passed inspection:
- drain the remaining fluid from the torque converter.
- using only the recommended transmission fluid, add 1.9L (2 qt) of clean fluid into the converter
and agitate by hand.
- thoroughly drain the fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4553
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4556
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4557
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4558
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4559
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4560
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4561
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4562
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4563
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4564
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4565
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4566
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4567
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4568
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4569
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4570
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4571
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4572
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this
procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4573
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4574
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4575
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4576
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Transmission Cooler: Mechanical Specifications
6F35 Automatic Transmission - General Specifications
6F35 Automatic Transmission - Material
6F35 Automatic Transmission - Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 4581
Transmission Cooler: Capacity Specifications
Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 4582
Transmission Cooler: Fluid Type Specifications
Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4583
Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation
Transaxle Cooling
The transmission fluid cooling system consists of the following:
- Oil-To-Air (OTA) transmission fluid combo cooler
- Transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
- Transmission fluid cooler outlet tube
- Transmission fluid cooler return tube
These vehicles are equipped with an external transmission fluid cooler. The transmission fluid
cooler is part of the A/C condenser and cannot be serviced separately. The cooler is mounted in
front of the engine radiator. The cooling system also consists of a thermal bypass valve which is
mounted on the transaxle main control cover. When the transmission fluid is below normal
operating temperature, transmission fluid travels from the transaxle to the thermal bypass valve
and back to the transaxle. When the transmission fluid is at or above normal operating
temperature, the thermal bypass valve opens allowing transmission fluid to travel from the
transaxle through the cooler and back to the transaxle. The transmission fluid cooler transfers heat
from the transmission fluid to the outside air.
Transaxle Cooling
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Transmission Cooler: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Transaxle Cooling
Inspection And Verification
Transaxle Cooling
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition.
2. If the inspection reveals obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, repair as necessary.
3. Install new components if a transmission fluid leak is found in any of the transaxle cooling
components.
4. If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s). GO to Symptom Chart
- Transaxle Cooling or GO to Symptom Chart NVH. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom Chart - NVH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4586
Transmission Cooler: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling
Transaxle Cooling
Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling
Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling
Symptom Chart - NVH
Transaxle Cooling
Symptom Chart - NVH
Symptom Chart - NVH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4587
Transmission Cooler: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Transaxle Cooling - 6F35 Automatic Transmission
Transaxle Cooling
Check Transmission Fluid Level and Condition (All Vehicles)
NOTICE: The vehicle should not be driven if the transmission fluid level indicator shows the
transmission fluid below the minimum transmission fluid level mark or internal failure could result.
If the vehicle has been operated for an extended period of time, at highway speeds, in city traffic, in
hot weather or while pulling a trailer, the transmission fluid may need to cool down to obtain an
accurate reading.
The transmission fluid level reading on the transmission fluid level indicator will differ depending on
operating and ambient temperatures. The correct reading should be within the normal operating
temperature range.
Transmission Fluid Level Check
NOTE: The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 85°C-93°C
(185°F-200°F) on a level surface. Normal operating temperature can be reached after
approximately 32 km (20 mi) of driving and can be checked using the scan tool.
Under normal circumstances the transmission fluid level should be checked during normal
maintenance. If the transaxle starts to slip, shifts slowly or shows signs of transmission fluid
leaking, the transmission fluid level should be checked.
1. With the transaxle in PARK, the engine at idle, foot pressed on the brake, move the selector
lever through each gear and allow engagement of each
gear. Place the selector lever in the PARK position.
2. Wipe the transmission fluid level indicator cap and remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
3. Wipe the transmission fluid level indicator with a clean cloth.
4. Install the transmission fluid level indicator back in the transmission fluid filler tube until it is fully
seated, then remove the indicator. The
transmission fluid level should be within the crosshatch.
High Transmission Fluid Level
A transmission fluid level that is too high may cause the transmission fluid to become aerated due
to the churning action of the rotating internal parts. This will cause erratic control pressure,
foaming, loss of transmission fluid from the vent tube and possible transaxle malfunction and/or
damage.
Low Transmission Fluid Level
A low transmission fluid level could result in poor transaxle engagement, slipping, malfunction
and/or damage. This could also indicate a leak in one of
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4588
the transaxle seals or gaskets.
Adding Transmission Fluid
NOTICE: Automatic transmission fluids are not interchangeable. The use of any fluid other than
what is recommended for this transaxle will cause transaxle damage.
If transmission fluid needs to be added, add transmission fluid in 0.25L (1/2 pt) increments through
the transmission fluid level indicator tube with the selector lever in PARK and the engine idling. Do
not overfill the transmission fluid. For transmission fluid type, refer to the material chart.
Transmission Fluid Condition Check
1. Check the transmission fluid level.
2. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be a dark red
color, not brown or black or have a burnt odor.
3. Hold the transmission fluid level indicator over a white facial tissue and allow the transmission
fluid to drip onto the facial tissue and examine the
stain.
4. If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further
inspection.
5. If transmission fluid contamination or transaxle failure is confirmed by the sediment in the bottom
of the transmission fluid pan, repair the
transaxle and clean the transmission fluid cooler tubes and the transmission fluid cooler.
6. If the transaxle is to be overhauled or if installing a new transaxle, the transmission fluid cooler
must be backflushed.
6F35 Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid Cooler
Transaxle Cooling
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4589
When internal wear or damage has occurred in the transaxle, metal particles, clutch plate material
or band material may have been carried into the torque converter and transaxle fluid cooler. These
contaminants are a major cause of recurring transaxle troubles and must be removed from the
system before the transaxle is put back into use. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing
and Cleaning See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and
Cleaning.
Transmission Fluid Cooler Flow Test
NOTE: The selector lever linkage, selector lever cable adjustment, transmission fluid level and line
pressure must be within specification before carrying out this test. Refer to Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle for selector lever linkage and selector lever cable adjustment and refer to
Special Testing Procedures See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special Testing Procedures/Special Testing
Procedures for line pressure test. The transmission fluid must be above 82°C (180°F) for the cooler
by-pass to open to carry out this test. See: Adjustments
1. Using a scan tool, run the engine to establish the correct transmission fluid temperature of 82°C
(180°F).
2. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator from the transmission fluid filler tube.
3. Place funnel in the transmission fluid filler tube.
4. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair.
5. Remove the transmission fluid cooler return tube (rear fitting) from the fitting on the transaxle
case.
6. Connect one end of a hose to the cooler return tube and route other end of the hose up to a
point where it can be inserted into the funnel at the
transmission fluid filler tube.
7. Start the engine and run it at idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL position.
8. When transmission fluid flowing from hose is in a steady stream, a liberal amount of
transmission fluid should be observed. "Liberal" is described
as about 1L (1 qt) delivered in 30 seconds. If a liberal flow is observed, the test is complete.
9. If the flow is not liberal, stop the engine. Disconnect the hose from the cooler return tube and
connect it to the converter outlet tube fitting (front
fitting) on the transaxle case.
10. Repeat Steps 7 and 8. If flow is now approximately 1L (1 qt) in 30 seconds, refer to
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning See:
Service and Repair/Procedures/Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning. If the flow is
still not approximately 1L (1 qt) in 30 seconds, repair the pump and/or the torque converter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Transmission Cooler: Procedures
6F35
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing will be carried out using the Turbo-Tank Heated
Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included with the
machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present before proceeding.
1. Check and top off fluid level of the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent tank
with transmission fluid.
2. Allow the fluid in the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent 15-30 minutes to heat
up to 60°C (140°F) before using.
3. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler lines.
4. NOTE: The TOP transaxle cooler tube on the transaxle is the pressure line.
Attach the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent red line to the transmission fluid
cooler pressure line quick disconnect fitting.
5. Attach the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent blue line to the transmission
fluid cooler return line quick disconnect fitting.
6. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the cooler lines and cooler prior to starting the
flushing procedure.
7. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the cooler in a normal flow
direction for an additional 10-15 minutes.
8. Clean the transaxle mounted fluid cooler tubes by hand.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4592
Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement
6F35 Automatic Transmission - Transmission Fluid Cooler
Transmission Fluid Cooler
1. NOTE: The transmission fluid cooler is part of the A/C condenser assembly and cannot be
serviced separately.
If installation of a new transmission fluid cooler is required, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning.
6F35 Automatic Transmission - Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4593
Removal
NOTICE: Automatic transmission fluids are not interchangeable transmission fluids. The use of any
fluid other than what is recommended for this transaxle will cause transaxle damage.
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Remove the left side splash shield.
3. Release the transmission fluid cooler tube retaining clip and remove the transmission fluid cooler
tubes from the clip.
4. Compress the constant tension clamps and remove the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the
transmission fluid cooler.
5. Remove the secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler tubes at the transmission.
6. Using the Transmission Cooler Line Disconnect Tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler
tubes from the transaxle and remove the
transmission fluid cooler tubes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4594
Installation
1. If installing new transmission fluid cooler tubes, remove the secondary latches and the retainer
from the old transmission fluid cooler tubes and
install them on the new transmission fluid cooler tubes.
2. Position the transmission fluid cooler tubes in place. Install the transmission fluid cooler tubes in
the transaxle by inserting the tube into the fitting
until a click is heard/felt. Pull back to confirm connection is secure and install the secondary
latches.
3. Compress the constant tension clamps and install the transmission fluid cooler tubes on the
transmission fluid cooler.
4. Install the transmission fluid cooler tubes in the retaining clip and close the retaining clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4595
5. Install the left side splash shield.
6. Install the front bumper cover.
7. Check the transmission fluid level and add transmission fluid as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode
Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch,
A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive.
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Column Shift)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Floor Shift)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Exploded View
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4606
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
1. Remove the ACL assembly bracket bolt.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the ACL outlet pipe.
4. Detach the wiring harness fastener from the ACL assembly.
5. Disconnect the engine breather from the ACL assembly.
6. Loosen the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the Throttle Body (TB) and remove the ACL and ACL outlet
pipe assembly.
2. Install the Engine Support Bar, Support Leg and Adapters.
3. Install the Engine Lifting Chains.
4. Remove the LH support insulator.
1. Remove the LH support insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH support insulator nuts.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4607
3. Remove the LH support insulator bolts.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. Remove the LH support insulator.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4608
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front
Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the rear cross brace.
4. Remove the lower front insulator through bolt and the 2 cross brace bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4609
5. Remove the cross brace nut and remove the brace.
6. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower front insulator and remove the lower front insulator.
Installation
1. Install a new lower front insulator onto the cross brace and install the lower front insulator cross
brace bolts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Position the cross brace in place and install the nut.
- Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
3. Install the 2 bolts for the cross brace.
- Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
4. Install the lower front support insulator through bolt for the mount.
- Tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
5. Install the rear cross brace and the 4 bolts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4610
6. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4611
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear
Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear, 3.0L DOHC
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the lower support insulator.
1. Remove the lower support insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Remove the lower support insulator bolt and 2 nuts.
- To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
3. Remove the lower support insulator.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
6F35
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4615
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4616
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4617
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4618
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
8. Position the main control cover in place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4619
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4620
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment.
3.0L Engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4621
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T
Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
TSB 09-8-6
05/04/09
6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706,
P0707, P1702
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before
10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707,
P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and
transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND
CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED
(TSS) SENSOR.
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9.
2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS
connector from the solenoid body lead frame.
3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow
WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor
wires during the installation of the main control.
4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM,
Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr.
2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time
To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C
(Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T
Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 4630
7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H557 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission
Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission
Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4636
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission
Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
TSB 09-8-6
05/04/09
6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706,
P0707, P1702
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before
10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707,
P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and
transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND
CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED
(TSS) SENSOR.
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9.
2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS
connector from the solenoid body lead frame.
3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow
WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor
wires during the installation of the main control.
4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM,
Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr.
2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time
To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C
(Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission
Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 4641
7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H557 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed
Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed
Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4647
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4648
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4649
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
6F35
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS
sensor.
Installation
1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4652
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
6F35
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4653
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4654
11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4655
Installation
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly Of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If
installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4656
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4657
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4658
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body
Valve Body: Service and Repair 6F35 Main Control Valve Body
6F35
Main Control Valve Body
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4663
3. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
4. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
5. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
7. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4664
8. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
9. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
10. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
11. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4665
12. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
13. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
14. Remove the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate.
15. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body assembly from the main control valve
body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4666
Installation
1. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly Of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If
installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the solenoid body assembly onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4667
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4668
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is
on the inside of the main control cover.
Transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4669
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4670
16. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
17. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4671
Valve Body: Service and Repair 6F35 Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4672
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4673
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4674
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: 6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If
installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4675
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4676
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4677
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4678
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4679
Valve Body: Service and Repair 6F35 Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4680
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4681
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4682
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4683
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4684
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4685
Valve Body: Service and Repair 6F35 Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4686
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4687
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4688
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4689
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4690
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4691
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6F35 Main Control Valve Body > Page 4692
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Disc: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T - Premature Clutch Wear
(Mexico Only)
Clutch Disc: Customer Interest M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only)
TSB 09-18-4
MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2009 Escape
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive
clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions
within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs.
clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7B546 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Disc: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T - Premature Clutch
Wear (Mexico Only)
Clutch Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only)
TSB 09-18-4
MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2009 Escape
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive
clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions
within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs.
clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7B546 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures
Clutch Disc: Procedures
Clutch Disc Check
1. Check the clutch disc lining surface for hardening or the presence of oil.
2. Check for a worn clutch disc lining. Measure the minimum allowable depth to the rivet heads with
a slide caliper.
3. Check for loose clutch disc lining rivets.
4. Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
5. Check for wear or rust on the splines. If necessary, clean them with an emery cloth.
6. Check the clutch disc for cracking, scoring, discoloration or other surface marks. Install a new
clutch disc if necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4709
Clutch Disc: Removal and Replacement
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
Removal
1. Remove the transaxle.
2. Using the Flywheel Holding Tool, lock the flywheel to the engine.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4710
3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and
spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest.
4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.
Remove the 6 bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc.
5. Use a suitable cleaning solution to remove any oil film from the clutch pressure plate friction
surface.
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges.
7. NOTICE: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal
prior to clutch disc installation.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: oil or grease saturation.
- worn or loose facings.
- warpage or loose rivets at the hub.
- wear or rust on the splines.
8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear.
Installation
1. Using the Clutch Aligner, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the 6 clutch pressure plate bolts.
- Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in the sequence shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4711
3. Install the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid >
Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
HYDRAULIC CLUTCH FLUID
Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................. PM-1-C Ford Specification
..................................................................................................................................................
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Clutch Controls - Exploded View
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Controls - Exploded View
Clutch Controls - Exploded View
1. For further information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Clutch Controls - Exploded View > Page 4720
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder
Clutch Master Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional Information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder hose from the brake master cylinder.
- Plug the brake master cylinder.
- Plug the clutch master cylinder hose.
2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
3. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder push rod.
4. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting.
- Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube.
5. Remove the clutch master cylinder.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the air from the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair
Clutch Slave Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional Information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Remove the transaxle.
2. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic fluid tube adapter.
3. Remove the 3 clutch slave cylinder bolts and the clutch slave cylinder.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the air from the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch
> Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair
Clutch Hydraulic Fluid Tubes
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional Information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Remove the engine air cleaner.
2. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch master cylinder.
- Plug the clutch master cylinder.
- Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube.
3. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic
fluid tube adapter.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove the clutch hydraulic fluid tube.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the air from the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair
Clutch Pedal
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the master cylinder push rod.
2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
3. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly nut.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4734
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4735
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4736
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 4739
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Release Bearing: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only)
Clutch Release Bearing: Customer Interest M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only)
TSB 09-18-4
MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2009 Escape
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive
clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions
within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs.
clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7B546 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Release Bearing: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09
> M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only)
Clutch Release Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico
Only)
TSB 09-18-4
MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2009 Escape
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive
clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions
within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs.
clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7B546 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Pressure Plate: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T - Premature Clutch Wear
(Mexico Only)
Pressure Plate: Customer Interest M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only)
TSB 09-18-4
MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2009 Escape
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive
clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions
within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs.
clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7B546 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Plate: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T - Premature
Clutch Wear (Mexico Only)
Pressure Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only)
TSB 09-18-4
MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2009 Escape
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive
clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions
within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs.
clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7B546 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4766
Pressure Plate: Specifications
Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the 6 clutch pressure plate bolts.
Tighten to..............................................................................................................................................
....................29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in the sequence shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures
Pressure Plate: Procedures
Clutch Pressure Plate Check
1. Check the clutch pressure plate surface for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Minor scratches or
discoloration should be removed with a fine emery
cloth.
2. Measure the flatness of the clutch pressure plate surface with a straightedge and a feeler gauge.
3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring and bent or broken segments.
4. Measure the wear of the diaphragm spring fingers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 4769
Pressure Plate: Removal and Replacement
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
Removal
1. Remove the transaxle.
2. Using the Flywheel Holding Tool, lock the flywheel to the engine.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 4770
3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and
spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest.
4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.
Remove the 6 bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc.
5. Use a suitable cleaning solution to remove any oil film from the clutch pressure plate friction
surface.
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges.
7. NOTICE: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal
prior to clutch disc installation.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: oil or grease saturation.
- worn or loose facings.
- warpage or loose rivets at the hub.
- wear or rust on the splines.
8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear.
Installation
1. Using the Clutch Aligner, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the 6 clutch pressure plate bolts.
- Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in the sequence shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 4771
3. Install the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - LH
Differential Seals - LH
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Remove the retainers and remove the LH splash shield.
4. Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid.
5. Remove the LH halfshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4777
6. Using the Slide Hammer and Input Shaft Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the LH
differential seal.
Installation
1. Using the Drive Pinion Oil Seal Installer, install the LH differential seal.
2. Install the LH halfshaft.
3. Clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install
the drain plug.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle.
5. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the bottom of
the fill plug hole.
6. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug removing transmission fluid that may have spilled on
the transaxle case.
Install the fill plug.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: The check and fill plug is located on the left side of the transaxle near the front.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4778
NOTE: The transmission fluid is checked and filled by removing the fill plug and adding
transmission fluid to the bottom of the fill plug hole.
Start the engine and check for correct forward and reverse operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4779
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - RH
Differential Seals - RH
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Remove the retainers and remove the LH splash shield.
4. Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid.
5. Remove the RH halfshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4780
6. Using the Slide Hammer and RH Halfshaft Fluid Seal Remover, remove and discard the RH
differential seal.
Installation
1. Using the Output Shaft Oil Seal (4X2) Installer, install the RH differential seal.
2. Install the RH halfshaft.
3. Clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install
the drain plug.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle.
5. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the bottom of
the fill plug hole.
6. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug removing transmission fluid that may have spilled on
the transaxle case.
Install the fill plug.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: The check and fill plug is located on the left side of the transaxle near the front.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4781
NOTE: The transmission fluid is checked and filled by removing the fill plug and adding
transmission fluid to the bottom of the fill plug hole.
Start the engine and check for correct forward and reverse operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4786
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4787
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4788
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4789
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4790
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4791
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4792
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4793
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4794
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4795
Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4796
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4797
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4798
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4799
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4800
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4801
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4802
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4803
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4804
Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
37-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4805
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower
Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower
Removal and Installation
Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Remove the splash shield retainers and remove the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower >
Page 4813
4. Remove the bolts and the lateral support crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
5. Remove the lower insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
6. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
7. Remove and discard the engine support crossmember nut. Remove the 2 engine support
crossmember bolts.
- To install, tighten the new engine support crossmember nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
- To install, tighten the 2 engine support crossmember bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
8. Remove the engine support crossmember.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower >
Page 4814
9. Remove the rear roll restrictor through bolt and remove the rear roll restrictor from the bracket.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower >
Page 4815
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Rear
Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Rear
Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the rear insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
3. Remove the rear insulator nuts and bolt.
- To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower >
Page 4816
4. Remove the rear insulator studs.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Remove the rear insulator.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower >
Page 4817
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper
Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper
Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower >
Page 4818
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
2. Install the Engine Support Bar, Support Leg Adapter, Engine Support Bar Adapter and Lifting
Hook Adapter.
3. Remove the upper insulator bracket bolts and the bracket.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove the upper insulator.
1. Remove the upper insulator nuts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
2. Remove the upper insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten the bolt to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10
> A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
Axle Shaft Assembly: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10
> A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4828
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10
> A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4829
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11
> Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
Axle Shaft Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11
> Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4835
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11
> Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4836
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Material
Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Material > Page 4839
Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Front Drive Halfshafts
Front Drive Halfshafts
The halfshafts and intermediate shaft consists of the following components:
- Inner CV joints
- Outer CV joints
- A support bearing on the intermediate shaft
The shafts are serviced as assemblies only.
The front drive halfshafts are splined to drive the front wheel hubs. The LH halfshaft uses a circlip
to retain the inner CV joint stub shaft in the differential side gear. The RH halfshaft is connected to
an intermediate shaft with a circlip. The intermediate shaft is also driven by a differential side gear.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4842
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Halfshaft Joint
Halfshaft Joint
The front drive halfshaft CV joints consist of the following components:
- Inner CV joints
- Outer CV joints
- CV joint boot clamps
- Convoluted CV joint boots
- Tripod joint housings
- Ball and cage housings
- Retainer circlips
- Special CV high temperature grease
The halfshaft joint allows for smooth rotation of the interconnecting shaft and the outboard housing.
It also adjusts for length requirements as the vehicle goes through jounce and rebound.
The halfshaft joints are not repairable and are serviced as assemblies only.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Halfshaft
Halfshaft
NOTE: RH halfshaft shown, LH similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft > Page 4845
Removal
All halfshafts
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the wheel and tire.
3. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside.
5. Remove the lower ball joint bolt and nut.
- Discard the nut and bolt.
6. NOTE: Do not allow the ball joint stud to contact the CV joint boot.
Separate the lower arm from the front wheel knuckle.
7. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
Left halfshaft
8. Using the Halfshaft Remover and Slide Hammer, remove the LH halfshaft from the differential.
Right halfshaft
9. Using a brass drift to strike the RH halfshaft in the indicated area, separate and remove the
halfshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft > Page 4846
Installation
Left halfshaft
1. NOTE: When seated correctly, the halfshaft bearing retainer circlip can be felt as it snaps into
the differential side gear groove.
Position the LH halfshaft so the splines line up with the differential side gear splines. Push the
halfshaft into the differential side gear.
Right halfshaft
2. Align the RH halfshaft with the splines of the intermediate shaft and push the halfshaft in until the
circlip locks the shafts together.
- Apply a thin coat of the specified grease to the splines of the intermediate shaft.
All halfshafts
3. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the halfshaft into the front wheel hub.
4. Position the lower arm into the front wheel knuckle.
5. Install the new lower ball joint bolt and nut.
- Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
6. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor and bolt.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be
tightened to specification before the
vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded
with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install new front wheel hub nut.
- Tighten to 300 Nm (222 lb-ft).
8. Install the front tires and wheels.
9. Check and fill the transaxle fluid as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft > Page 4847
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Intermediate Shaft
Intermediate Shaft
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: If removing the intermediate shaft in order to repair a separate component, it should only
be removed as an assembly with the RH front
drive halfshaft.
Remove the RH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Halfshaft See: Halfshaft.
2. Remove the 2 intermediate shaft bearing retainer nuts.
- To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
3. Remove the intermediate shaft.
4. NOTICE: On All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles, the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) seal must be
replaced everytime the intermediate shaft is
removed.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Apply a thin coat of the specified grease to the splines of the intermediate shaft.
5. Check and fill the transaxle fluid as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov >
10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov >
10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4856
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov >
10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4857
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: >
10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: >
10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4863
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: >
10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4864
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
4865
Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108
A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
4866
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
4867
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108
A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
4868
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
4869
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
4870
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4875
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer
wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the
wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4876
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4877
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing - Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4878
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor ring.
4. Remove the brake drum.
5. Using the Front Hub Remover and Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent tools, remove the wheel
hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4879
6. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using a suitable press and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, press the inner
bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
7. Remove and discard the wheel bearing snap ring.
8. Using the Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent and the Axle Bearing Remover, remove the
bearing from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer,
install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Using the Half Shaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
4. Install the wheel speed sensor ring.
5. Install the brake drum.
6. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install the new wheel hub nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4880
- Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut >
Component Information > Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Rear Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Front Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
Position the flexplate and install the 8 bolts. Tighten to........................................................................
...............................................................................................................................80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
4888
Flex Plate: Diagrams
Lower End Components - Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal
Flexplate and Rear Seal
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
4889
Flex Plate: Testing and Inspection
Flexplate Inspection
1. Inspect the flexplate for:
1. any cracks.
2. worn ring gear teeth.
3. chipped or cracked ring gear teeth.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
4890
Flex Plate: Service and Repair
Flexplate
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the transaxle.
3. Remove the bolts and the flexplate.
- To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check
Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Runout Check
Flywheel Runout Check
NOTICE: Do not clean the dual mass flywheel with any kind of fluid. Use a dry cloth only or
damage to the dual mass flywheel may occur.
NOTICE: Do not clean the gap between the primary and secondary mass. Only clean the bolt
connection surface and the clutch surface or damage to the flywheel may occur.
1. Check the transaxle fluid level and fill to the correct level as necessary.
2. With the engine operating at idle and the transaxle in NEUTRAL, listen and check for
unacceptable noise. Determine if any unacceptable noise is
reduced when the clutch pedal is depressed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check > Page 4895
Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Inspection
Flywheel Inspection
NOTICE: Do not clean the dual mass flywheel with any kind of fluid, use a dry cloth only or damage
to the dual mass flywheel may occur.
NOTICE: Do not clean the gap between the primary and secondary mass. Only clean the bolt
connection surface and the clutch surface or damage to the flywheel may occur.
1. Check the transaxle fluid level and fill to the correct level as necessary.
2. With the engine operating at idle and the transaxle in NEUTRAL, listen and check for
unacceptable noise. Determine if any unacceptable noise is
reduced when the clutch pedal is depressed.
3. If unacceptable noise is identified, remove the transaxle.
4. Inspect the clutch slave cylinder for leaks. If a leak is identified, install a new clutch slave
cylinder.
5. Inspect the sliding surfaces of the clutch release hub and bearing. Any scoring or burr should be
removed with a fine grade of emery paper.
6. Inspect the transaxle input shaft for spline wear, scoring or burrs. Any scoring or burr should be
removed with a fine grade of emery paper. If
spline wear is identified, install a new transaxle.
7. NOTE: The clutch disc should be discarded due to possible hub spline wear or friction material
wear.
Remove the clutch disc and pressure plate.
- Discard the clutch disc.
8. Inspect the clutch pressure plate and diaphragm spring segments and discard as necessary.
- Inspect the clutch pressure plate for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Any minor scoring or
discoloration should be removed with a fine grade of emery cloth.
- Inspect the clutch diaphragm spring segments for damage, uneven height, scoring, cracks or
discoloration. Any minor scoring or discoloration should be removed with a fine grade of emery
cloth.
9. NOTE: The flywheel cannot be machined.
With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel surface for
scoring, cracks, discoloration or damage. If any of these conditions exist, install a new flywheel.
10. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise and
counterclockwise until the dual mass flywheel friction
control plate is centered between the secondary mass notches.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check > Page 4896
11. Inspect the dual mass flywheel friction control plate for damage or melting and install a new
dual mass flywheel if necessary.
12. NOTE: The dual mass flywheel rotational freeplay inspection cannot be carried out if the friction
control plate is off center or damaged.
With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel rotational
freeplay using the following Steps 13 through 17.
13. Check that the dual mass flywheel friction control plate is centered between the secondary
mass notches.
14. Place a reference mark on the secondary mass of the dual mass flywheel.
15. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass clockwise to the end of the freeplay.
Place a reference mark on the primary mass of the dual
mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass.
16. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise to the end of the
freeplay. Place a second reference mark on the primary
mass of the dual mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass.
17. Measure the rotational freeplay XX between the 2 reference marks on the primary mass of the
dual mass flywheel. If the rotational freeplay
exceeds 19 mm (0.750 in), install a new dual mass flywheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check > Page 4897
18. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel internal
spring operation using the following Steps 19 through
21.
19. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool.
20. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise. The
secondary mass should begin to engage the internal
spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass should
continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the secondary
mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel.
21. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise.
The secondary mass should begin to engage the
internal spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass
should continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the
secondary mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel.
22. Inspect the dual mass flywheel when removed from the engine and placed on a bench, using
the following Steps 23 and 24.
23. NOTE: Blocks must be placed under the dual mass flywheel to make sure it is level and stable.
Remove the dual mass flywheel and place it on a firm and level surface.
- Discard the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts and remove the Flywheel Holding Tool.
24. NOTE: Axial movement of the secondary mass flywheel is normal and the dual mass flywheel
should not be discarded based on this movement.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check > Page 4898
Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, inspect the dual mass flywheel hub bush for
wear and install new as necessary.
- Place a dial indicator gauge at a point on the outer upper surface of the secondary mass.
- Using light hand pressure, press downward at the opposite point on the outer upper surface of the
secondary mass and note the deflection on the dial indicator gauge.
- Repeat this measurement at 120 degree intervals around the dual mass flywheel and note any
deflection. If the deflection exceeds 1.5 mm (0.060 in) at any point, install a new dual mass
flywheel.
25. Inspect the rear face of the engine block.
1. Make sure that the 2 engine dowel pins are correctly installed and are not damaged, install new
dowel pins as necessary.
2. Inspect the upper and lower engine block rear face plates for damage or warping and install new
plates as necessary.
3. Inspect the crankshaft flange for residual thread locking compound or rust, and clean as
necessary.
26. Inspect the transaxle mounting face.
- Make sure that the 2 dowel pin holes are not elongated or damaged.
27. Inspect the dual mass flywheel crankshaft mounting flange for residual thread locking
compound or rust and clean as necessary.
28. NOTE: Install new dual mass flywheel retaining bolts.
Loosely install the dual mass flywheel.
29. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool.
30. Tighten the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts in the sequence shown to 112 Nm (83 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check > Page 4899
31. NOTE: A new clutch disc should be installed due to possible hub spline wear or friction material
wear.
Install the clutch disc and pressure plate.
32. Install the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and
Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Specifications
Manual Transmission Fluid Type
Ford Part Name ...................................................................................................................................
............................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil Ford Part Number ............................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
XT-4-QGL Ford Specification ..............................................................................................................
...................................................... WSS-M2C206-A1 and GL-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4909
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair
Transaxle Draining and Filling
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.
3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug.
Install the drain plug.
- Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
4. Remove the fill level inspection plug.
5. Remove the transaxle fill plug.
6. Fill the transmission with gear oil until level with the fill level inspection plug hole.
7. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill plug.
Install the transaxle fill plug.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4910
- Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
8. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug.
Install the fill level inspection plug.
- Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
Halfshaft Seal
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: New halfshaft oil seals should be installed any time the halfshafts are removed. Failure to
install new halfshafts seals may result in transmission oil leak(s).
NOTE: RH intermediate shaft oil seal shown, LH halfshaft oil seal similar.
1. Remove the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft.
2. Using the Slide Hammer with the Bearing Cup Remover, remove the RH intermediate shaft oil
seal or the LH halfshaft oil seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Page 4914
Installation
1. Using the Output Shaft Seal Installer, install the halfshaft oil seal.
2. NOTICE: Make sure to use the seal protector when installing the RH intermediate shaft and the
LH halfshaft. Failure to use the seal
protector may result in transmission oil leaks.
Install the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever
Gearshift Lever
Removal
1. Remove the gearshift lever knob and boot assembly.
2. Remove the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the 2 gearshift cable clips.
4. Carefully disconnect the gearshift cables from the gearshift lever.
5. Remove the 4 gearshift lever nuts.
6. Remove the gearshift lever.
Installation
1. Position the gearshift lever.
2. Connect the gearshift cables to the gearshift lever.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4923
3. NOTE: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully seated.
Install the 2 gearshift cable clips.
4. Install the 4 gearshift lever nuts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Adjust the gearshift cables.
6. Install the floor console finish panel.
7. Install the gearshift lever knob and boot assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4924
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Boot
Gearshift Lever Boot
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The gearshift lever boot and gearshift lever knob is one assembly.
1. Separate the gearshift lever boot from the floor console.
2. NOTE: The gearshift lever boot has been removed for clarity.
Cut the gearshift lever knob crimp ring.
3. Remove the gearshift lever knob and gearshift lever boot assembly.
4. NOTICE: A fully seated knob will conceal the knurled section on the gearshift lever. Failure to
fully seat the gearshift knob may cause
gearshift lever boot damage.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Crimp the ring to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift
Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments
Shift Cable: Adjustments
Gearshift Cable Adjustment
1. Separate the shift boot from the floor console finish panel. Rotate the gearshift knob
counterclockwise and remove the knob and boot as an
assembly.
2. Carefully pry the floor console finish panel from the floor console.
3. Disengage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it away from the shifter ball stud.
4. NOTE: If the primary shift cable lock is difficult to slide out, disconnect the shift cable from the
ball stud, push the primary lock from the rear,
and reattach the shift cable to the ball stud.
Disengage the primary shift cable lock by sliding it out away from the shift cable.
5. With the shifter and the transmission in NEUTRAL, engage the primary shift cable lock.
6. Engage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it over the primary shift cable lock.
7. Install the floor console finish panel.
8. Install the gearshift knob and the gearshift lever boot.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift
Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4929
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
Gearshift Cables
Removal
1. NOTE: Carefully disconnect the spring clip from the cable end. It can become unfastened from
the cable.
Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle gearshift control assembly.
- Pull the spring clip out of the groove, lift upward and rotate the clip 90 degrees.
2. NOTE: Carefully pry the gearshift cables from the transaxle bracket.
Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle bracket.
3. Remove the floor console.
4. Remove the Restraints Control Module (RCM). For additional information, refer to Air Bag
Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift
Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4930
5. Disconnect the Smart Junction Box (SJB) electrical connector and the 2 harness electrical
connectors.
6. Disconnect the gearshift cables from the gearshift lever assembly.
7. Remove the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts.
8. Remove the gearshift cables.
- Pull the gearshift cables into the vehicle. Using an assistant, carefully lift the LH floor duct, pull the
cables under the duct and remove from the vehicle.
Installation
1. NOTE: When inserting the gearshift cables through the dash panel, make sure the arrow on the
grommet is pointing down.
Insert the gearshift cables through the dash panel.
2. Connect the selector cable.
3. Connect the shift cable.
4. Install the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift
Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4931
5. NOTE: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully seated.
Install the 2 gearshift cable clips.
6. Connect the gearshift cables to the transaxle gearshift control assembly.
7. Connect the SJB electrical connector and the 2 harness electrical connectors.
8. Adjust the gearshift cables.
9. Install the floor console.
10. Install the RCM. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Manual Transmission
Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the air cleaner.
3. Using the Engine Support Bar, support the engine.
4. Remove the 4 LH transaxle support insulator bolts.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. Remove the through bolt and the LH transaxle support insulator.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4936
- To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
6. Remove the 3 nuts and the LH transaxle support insulator bracket.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Transaxle Front Support Insulator
Transaxle Front Support Insulator
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Using the Engine Support Bar, support the engine.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4937
3. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember.
1. Remove the 2 transaxle front support insulator bolts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
2. Remove the splash shield screw.
3. Remove the 2 front-to-aft crossmember bolts and the nut.
- To install, tighten bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
- To install, tighten nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
4. Remove the crossmember.
4. Remove the through bolt and the transaxle front support insulator.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
5. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle front support insulator bracket.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4938
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Rear Support Insulator
Transaxle Rear Support Insulator
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator bolt.
- To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
3. Remove the 2 transaxle rear support insulator nuts.
- To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
4. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator through-bolt and washer.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
5. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator.
6. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle rear support insulator bracket.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive.
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Column Shift)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Floor Shift)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
6F35
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4953
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4954
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4955
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4956
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
8. Position the main control cover in place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4957
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4958
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment.
3.0L Engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4959
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
TSB 09-8-6
05/04/09
6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706,
P0707, P1702
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before
10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707,
P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and
transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND
CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED
(TSS) SENSOR.
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9.
2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS
connector from the solenoid body lead frame.
3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow
WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor
wires during the installation of the main control.
4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM,
Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr.
2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time
To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C
(Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 4968
7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H557 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts > Page 4974
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
TSB 09-8-6
05/04/09
6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706,
P0707, P1702
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before
10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707,
P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and
transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND
CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED
(TSS) SENSOR.
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9.
2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS
connector from the solenoid body lead frame.
3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow
WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor
wires during the installation of the main control.
4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM,
Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr.
2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time
To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C
(Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 4979
7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H557 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts > Page 4985
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4986
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4987
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
6F35
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS
sensor.
Installation
1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4990
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
6F35
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4991
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4992
11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4993
Installation
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly Of
Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with
this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4994
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4995
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4996
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5007
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5010
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5011
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5012
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5013
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5014
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5015
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5016
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5017
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5018
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5019
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5020
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5021
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5022
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5023
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5024
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5025
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5026
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing
a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5027
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5028
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5029
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5030
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 5034
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5037
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5038
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5039
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5040
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5041
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5042
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5043
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5044
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5045
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5046
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5047
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5048
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5049
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5050
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5051
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5052
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5053
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing
a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5054
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5055
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5056
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5057
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
6F35
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position. CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5061
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
6F35
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5064
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5065
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5066
3. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5067
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5068
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5069
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
6F35
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5070
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5071
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5072
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5073
4. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
5. Install the Leadframe Guide Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
6. Position the leadframe on the Leadframe Guide Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
7. Remove the Leadframe Guide Pins.
8. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5074
9. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
11. Install the main control cover grommet.
12. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
13. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5075
14. Position the main control cover in place.
15. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5076
18. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
19. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
20. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5077
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
6F35
Solenoid Body Assembly
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5078
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5079
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5080
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6F35 Main Control Valve Body. If installing
a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5081
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5082
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5083
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 5084
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from
the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive.
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Column Shift)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Floor Shift)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
6F35
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 5101
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 5102
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 5103
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4 inch drive, install a new TR sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 5104
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
8. Position the main control cover in place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 5105
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 5106
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment.
3.0L Engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 5107
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
TSB 09-8-6
05/04/09
6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706,
P0707, P1702
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before
10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707,
P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and
transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND
CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED
(TSS) SENSOR.
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9.
2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS
connector from the solenoid body lead frame.
3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow
WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor
wires during the installation of the main control.
4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM,
Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr.
2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time
To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C
(Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 5116
7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H557 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T
6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T
6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 5122
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T
Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's
P0706/P0707/P1702
TSB 09-8-6
05/04/09
6F35 TRANSMISSIONS BUILT BEFORE 10/6/2008 WITH NO CRANK AND/OR DTC P0706,
P0707, P1702
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 8-23-2 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmissions built before
10/6/2008 may exhibit a no crank condition and/or diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0706, P0707,
P1702 caused by the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor wire pinched between the main control and
transmission case or an intermittently shorted Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
TR CODE DTC'S MAY BE A RESULT OF POOR COMMON POWER AND/OR GROUND
CIRCUIT SHARED BETWEEN THE TR SENSOR, OSS SENSOR AND TURBINE SHAFT SPEED
(TSS) SENSOR.
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01A pin point test (PPT) D through to Step 9.
2. If the cause for the condition has not been found by the end of step 9 in PPT D, unplug the OSS
connector from the solenoid body lead frame.
3. Check the resistance between the transmission case and each of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires one at a time. If any one of the three (3) OSS sensor
wires are shorted to ground (transmission case), less than 5 ohms, replace the OSS sensor. Follow
WSM, Section 307-01A, for replacing the OSS. Being very careful not to pinch the OSS sensor
wires during the installation of the main control.
4. If the OSS sensor wires are not shorted to ground, replace only the TR sensor following WSM,
Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090806A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.9 Hr.
2.5L/3.0L Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Perform Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, Includes Time
To Remove The Main Control Cover. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operation B Or C
(Do Not Use With 7000F5, 7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-8-6 > May > 09 > A/T
Controls - Engine No Crank/DTC's P0706/P0707/P1702 > Page 5127
7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806B 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The OSS Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
090806C 2009 Escape, Mariner 2.5L 1.4 Hrs.
Engine, 6F35 Transmission: Replace The TR Sensor, Includes Time To Install The Main Control
Cover. This Labor Operation Must Be Claimed With Operation A (Do Not Use With 7000F5,
7000F10, 7000F45, 7396A, 7396A1)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H557 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 10-1-7 > Feb > 10 > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 5133
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5134
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5135
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
6F35
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS
sensor.
Installation
1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5138
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
6F35
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan
studbolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5139
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5140
11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5141
Installation
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly Of
Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with
this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5142
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control and the nut and 22 bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5143
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover bolts and stud bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5144
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan studbolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Sensor Block >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic
Connector - ABS > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic
Connector - ABS > Component Information > Locations > Page 5157
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration
Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal
Vibration
TSB 09-20-3
10/19/09
ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12
MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in
the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test
at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time
self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now
available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change
the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h).
ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher.
This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained
at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2C219 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates
Pedal Vibration
TSB 09-20-3
10/19/09
ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12
MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in
the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test
at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time
self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now
available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change
the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h).
ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher.
This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained
at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2C219 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5171
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5172
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5173
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5174
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicles shown, hybrid vehicles similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the Hydraulic Control
Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly.
All vehicles
1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See:
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes/Service and Repair.
Non-hybrid vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5175
2. Remove the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes/Service and Repair. For additional information,
refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service
and Repair.
3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
All vehicles
5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
7. Configure the ABS module.
8. Calibrate the ABS module.
- For non-hybrid vehicles, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence following the scan tool
directions.
- For hybrid vehicles, carry out the Multi-Calibration routine following the scan tool directions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When installing a new ABS module/Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) assembly, it must be
configured (either by download/upload or uploading the as-built data method).
All vehicles
1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) and the ACL outlet pipe.
2. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
Vehicles with 3.0L engine
3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the master cylinder and remove the
brake tubes.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
All vehicles
4. NOTE: The brake tubes must be installed in the same location as removed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5179
Disconnect the front brake tube fittings from the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the rear brake tube fittings from the jumper tubes.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover.
7. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and remove the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5183
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5184
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Stability/Traction Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel.
2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 >
Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 >
Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 5193
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: >
09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front
Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: >
09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 5199
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 5202
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 5203
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 5204
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5207
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5208
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5209
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are
located at right angles to the sensor wire.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5212
4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer.
5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5213
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at
right angles to the sensor wire.
3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer.
5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5214
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5215
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Removal
1. Remove the front halfshaft.
2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5216
1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the
previous illustration.
2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5217
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Removal and Installation
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut.
- To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or
partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the
ends submerged in the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air
bubbles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5222
5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes.
- Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications.
Non-hybrid vehicles
6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to
the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the
rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir.
7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air
bubbles.
9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
All vehicles
10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake
System Bleeding.
Brake Caliper
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5223
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5224
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5225
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
1. Clean all the dirt from around the brake fluid reservoir cap and remove the cap. Fill the brake
master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake
fluid.
2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and
submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5226
4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw.
7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber
drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge
the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber
hose and install the bleeder screw cap.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw.
Pressure Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any
components upstream of the HCU are installed new.
NOTE: Pressure bleed the brake system at 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi).
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5227
1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master
cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose
to the fitting on the adapter.
3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the
bleeding operation.
Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container
partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank.
- Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system.
5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten
the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to
Specifications. Remove the rubber hose.
6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF
bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw.
- Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to
Specifications.
7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter
and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean,
specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap.
8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake
booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm.
- If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any
remaining air from the system.
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5228
plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
All vehicles
1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Service Bleed instructions.
3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
Hybrid vehicles
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Brake Pedal Assy: Description and Operation
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
The hydraulic brake actuation system consists of the following components:
- Brake master cylinder
- Brake pedal and bracket assembly
- Brake tubes and hoses
The hydraulic brake system is diagonally split with the LH front and RH rear brakes on one circuit
and the RH front and LH rear brakes on the other circuit.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
The brake pedal is connected to the power brake booster, which is connected to the brake master
cylinder. When the brake pedal is pressed, brake fluid is pushed from the master cylinder through
the double-walled steel tubes and flexible hoses to the front brake calipers and rear wheel
cylinders. The brake fluid enters the brake calipers and wheel cylinders, forcing brake pads and
shoes outward against the brake disc/drum friction surfaces, slowing or stopping rotation. When the
brake pedal is released, brake fluid pressure is relieved, returning the front and rear brake
components to the unapplied position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 5232
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair
Brake Pedal and Bracket
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp
switch and speed control deactivator
switch. These switches must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Switch
plungers must be compressed for the switch to rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the
switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the switch.
Remove the stoplamp switch.
2. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis locking pin is a one-time use only part. Any time the booster
push rod clevis locking pin is removed, a new
booster push rod clevis locking pin should be used.
NOTE: Remove the clevis locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the
opposite end.
Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis locking pin.
3. Disconnect the accelerator pedal electrical connector.
4. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper bolt.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
5. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper and lower nuts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 5233
6. Remove the 4 brake booster nuts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
7. Remove the brake pedal and bracket assembly.
- Position the brake booster forward to allow the brake pedal and bracket assembly to clear the
brake booster studs.
8. NOTICE: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp
switch or the speed control deactivator
switch. These switches must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and
with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing these switches with the brake pedal in any
other position will result in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switches.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Brake Calipers
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Calipers
Brake System Inspection
Brake Calipers
1. Inspect the brake calipers for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the brake caliper is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new brake caliper.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Brake Calipers > Page 5239
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper Guide Pins
Brake System Inspection
Brake Caliper Guide Pins
1. The guide pins should slide with a reasonable amount of hand force. If the brake pads show
taper wear or the guide pins are difficult to move,
carry out the following steps. Disassemble the brake caliper guide pins and inspect the guide pins and guide pin bores for wear,
damage and corrosion. If bore is worn or damaged, replace the damaged component.
- Use a wire brush, rolled-up sandpaper or emery cloth to remove all corrosion and foreign material
from the caliper guide pin bores. Clean any remaining foreign material from the bores with brake
parts cleaner and compressed air.
- Assemble the caliper guide pins using new caliper seals, boots and guide pins. Use an ample
amount of the specified grease to lubricate the bores and guide pins.
- Inspect the brake pads. For additional information, refer to Brake System Inspection. See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Caliper: Procedures
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5242
Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement
Brake Caliper
Brake Caliper
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If
brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may
damage the high-voltage components.
NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTICE: If the anchor housing spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake
caliper or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive
force or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
upper brake caliper cavity.
For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from
the lower brake caliper cavity.
3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper.
4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
lower brake caliper cavity.
For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5243
- Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from
the upper brake caliper cavity.
5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper.
6. NOTE: The brake caliper and brake flexible hose are removed as an assembly.
Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
7. Remove and discard the retainer clip from the brake flexible hose.
8. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper
aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
9. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper.
10. Remove the brake flexible hose from the brake caliper.
Installation
1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate.
2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps.
- Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first.
Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure:
1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity.
2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake
caliper cavity).
4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate.
5. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate.
6. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are
latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities.
7. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown, or damage to component may occur.
Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5244
8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted.
Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
9. Position the brake flexible and install a new retainer clip.
10. Attach the brake tube fitting to the brake flexible hose.
- Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
11. Bleed the brake caliper.
12. Install the wheel and tire.
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5245
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and
pressurizing the brake system.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuses 9 (50A) and 18 (50A).
3. Remove the wheel and tire.
4. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
5. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
6. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Pad: Specifications
Brake pad minimum thickness..............................................................................................................
........................................................3.0 mm (0.118 in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5249
Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Brake Pads
NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads when the brake discs are machined.
1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake pad friction material. For additional information,
refer to Specifications.
- Minor surface cracks do not require pad replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or
cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake pads.
- If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake pads.
- If the friction material shows taper wear that is not within specifications, install new brake pads
and verify the caliper guide pins are functioning correctly. For additional information, refer to Brake
Caliper Guide Pins inspection. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection/Brake Caliper Guide Pins
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 5252
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads
Brake Pads
Removal
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If
brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may
damage the high-voltage components.
NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads.
1. If necessary, using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder
reservoir until it is half filled.
2. Remove the wheel and tire.
3. NOTICE: If the brake pad anti-rattle spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake
caliper or damage to the spring can
occur.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive
force or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
upper brake caliper cavity.
For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from
the lower brake caliper cavity.
4. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 5253
5. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
lower brake caliper cavity.
For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring.
- Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from
the upper brake caliper cavity.
6. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper.
7. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper
aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
8. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper.
9. Inspect the brake pads for wear and contamination, install new pads as necessary.
10. NOTICE: Protect the piston and boots when pushing the caliper piston into the caliper piston
bores or damage to the piston or boots may
occur.
If installing new brake pads, using a C-clamp and worn brake pad, compress the brake caliper
piston into the brake caliper.
11. Inspect the brake disc and resurface or install new as necessary.
Installation
1. Using specified brake parts cleaner, clean, dry and inspect the brake caliper anchor plate. Apply
a light coat of specified lubricant to the 4 brake
pad contact points on the anchor plate.
2. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted.
Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate.
3. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps.
- Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: The 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first.
Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 5254
1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity.
2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake
caliper cavity).
5. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate.
6. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate.
7. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are
latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities.
8. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown or damage to component may occur.
Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring.
9. Install the wheel and tire.
10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
- Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications
Brake Disc minimum thickness.............................................................................................................
........................................................24 mm (0.944 in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Specifications > Page 5258
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Brake Discs
NOTICE: Using an impact tool without a torque socket will lead to unevenly tightened wheel nuts.
This causes brake disc on-vehicle lateral runout and brake roughness.
NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake discs to address noise issues.
1. Inspect the brake discs and measure the brake disc thickness in a minimum of 4 places around
the circumference of the brake disc. Record the
measurements, refer to Specifications. If the brake disc is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake disc.
- If any measurement is below the minimum thickness specification, install a new brake disc.
- If the diagnosis has revealed vibration in the steering wheel, seat or pedal while braking that
varies with vehicle speed, machine the brake disc. Heavily scored brake discs, similar to that
caused by pads worn down to the backing plate, should also be machined. In order to machine,
discs must be above the minimum thickness specification. For additional information, refer to
Specifications and Brake Disc Machining See: Service and Repair/Procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures
Brake Disc Machining
NOTE: Do not use a bench lathe to machine the brake discs. Use an on-vehicle brake lathe only.
Read the entire operating manual and/or view the video shipped with the lathe before installing,
operating or repairing the lathe.
NOTE: An on-vehicle brake lathe with an automatic runout adjustment feature is preferred.
However, if the lathe is not self adjusting, the lathe oscillation must be adjusted using a dial
indicator. The total indicated runout target is 0.000 mm (0.000 in). The maximum indicated runout
should be no more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in). If the runout adjustment (automatic or manual) is
carried out correctly prior to machining, then the final brake disc runout will be within specification,
and a runout measurement is not necessary after machining.
NOTE: Do not machine new brake discs.
NOTE: Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required because correct
adjustment of the on-vehicle brake lathe will make sure that these dimensions are within
specifications.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose may
occur.
NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube from the brake caliper.
Remove the bolts and position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside,
as required.
- Support the brake caliper using mechanic's wire.
3. Install the hub adapter using:
- four wheel nuts on a 4-stud wheel hub.
- five wheel nuts on a 5-stud wheel hub.
- six wheel nuts on a 6-stud wheel hub.
- four wheel nuts on a 7- or 8-stud wheel hub.
- five wheel nuts on a 10-stud wheel hub.
4. Install the cutting lathe.
5. If the lathe is not self adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator. The total
indicated runout target is 0.000 mm (0.000 in). The
maximum indicated runout should be no more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in).
6. Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits and install the chip deflector/silencer.
7. NOTE: The depth of the cut should be between 0.10 and 0.40 mm (0.004 and 0.015 in). Lighter
cuts will cause the bit to heat up and wear faster.
Heavier cuts will cause poor brake disc surface finish.
Machine the brake disc.
8. Remove the lathe and the silencer.
9. Remove the wheel nuts and hub adapter.
10. Remove the metal shavings.
11. NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads if friction material is within specifications. For
additional information, refer to Specifications.
Position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly.
- Install the bolts.
- For fastener torque specifications, refer to Disc Brake System. See: Specifications
12. Install the wheel and tire.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5261
Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Brake Disc
Brake Disc
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. For additional information, refer to Brake Caliper Anchor
Plate See: Brake Caliper/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Caliper Anchor Plate.
2. Remove the brake disc.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Backing Plate: Service and Repair
Brake Backing Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Wheel Cylinder See: Wheel
Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement.
2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Compress the parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the parking brake cable
assembly through the backing plate.
4. Remove the rear wheel hub.
5. Remove the 4 backing plate bolts and the backing plate.
- To install, tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Drum: Specifications
Brake drum maximum diameter...........................................................................................................
..................................................256.3 mm (10.090 in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5269
Brake Drum: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Brake Drums
NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake drums to address noise issues.
1. Inspect the brake drums and measure the brake drum diameter. Record the measurements,
refer to Specifications.
- If the brake drum is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake drum.
- If the diameter measurement is more than the maximum specification, install a new brake drum.
- Heavily scored brake drums, similar to that caused by shoes worn down to the backing plate,
should be machined. In order to machine, drums must be below the maximum diameter
specification.
- For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe / Adjustments. See: Brake Shoe/Adjustments
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5270
Brake Drum: Service and Repair
Brake Drum
Removal
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTICE: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can
result.
NOTE: If the brake drum is seized to the wheel hub pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum
between the wheel studs.
If the brake drum binds on the brake shoes, retract the brake shoes.
1. Move the brake shoe adjuster actuator lever away from the adjuster.
2. Rotate the brake shoe adjuster screw upward to retract the brake shoes.
3. Remove the brake drum.
Installation
1. Using the Brake Drum Gauge, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum.
- Install a new brake drum if the inside diameter exceeds the specification stamped on the outside
face of the brake drum.
2. Adjust the rear brakes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See: Brake
Shoe/Adjustments.
3. Position the brake drum on the vehicle.
4. Install the wheel and tire.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Shoe: Specifications
Brake shoe minimum thickness............................................................................................................
........................................................1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5274
Brake Shoe: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Brake Shoes
1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake shoe friction material. For additional information,
refer to Specifications.
- Minor surface cracks do not require shoe replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or
cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake shoes.
- If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake
shoes.
- Verify that the mounting hardware is installed correctly and operating correctly. Install new
hardware as necessary.
- Verify that the backing plate contact points are free of corrosion that may cause binding. Clean or
install new as necessary.
- Verify correct brake shoe adjustment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5275
Brake Shoe: Adjustments
Brake Shoe Adjustment
1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake
Drum/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Brake Adjustment Gauge, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum.
3. Position the Brake Adjustment Gauge on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly.
4. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service
and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5276
Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Brake Shoes
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Always install new brake shoes or pads at both ends of an axle to reduce the
possibility of brakes pulling vehicle to one side. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
uneven braking and serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed, resurface the brake drums to
remove glazing and to provide an equal friction
surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing also corrects out-of-round and bell conditions.
Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service
and Repair.
2. Remove the 2 brake shoe retaining springs and the 2 pins.
3. Remove the upper return spring.
4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
5. Remove the lower return spring.
6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
7. Remove the leading brake shoe.
- Using specified brake parts cleaner, clean and dry the brake shoe contact points on the backing
plate.
- Apply a thin coat of the specified silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing
plate.
8. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake
drum.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See:
Adjustments.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection
Wheel Cylinder: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Wheel Cylinders
1. Inspect the wheel cylinders for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the wheel cylinder is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures
Wheel Cylinder: Procedures
Wheel Cylinder Lubrication
Wheel Cylinder Lubrication
1. Remove the brake drum.
2. Remove the upper and lower return springs.
NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to
piston seals.
3. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until
the shoe bottoms out.
4. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant
around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
5. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out.
6. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant
around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
7. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3
times to distribute the lubricant and verify smooth
movement.
8. Install the upper and lower return springs.
9. Install the brake drum.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5282
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5283
Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
Wheel Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoes See: Brake
Shoe/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5284
Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul
Wheel Cylinder
Disassembly
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5285
has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination,
brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Removal is not necessary to disassemble, inspect, hone or overhaul the rear wheel
cylinder.
1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake
Drum/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the upper return spring.
3. Remove the lower return spring.
4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
5. Remove the retaining springs, the pins and the leading brake shoe.
6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
- Clean and dry the brake backing plate.
7. Remove the bleeder screw cap.
8. Remove the bleeder screw.
9. Remove the 2 dust boots.
10. Remove the 2 pistons.
11. Remove the 2 piston seals.
12. Remove the spring.
13. Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these
conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be installed.
Assembly
1. Install the spring.
2. Using clean brake fluid, lubricate and install the 2 piston seals.
3. Install the 2 pistons.
4. Install the 2 dust boots.
5. Install the bleeder screw.
6. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate.
7. Install the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
8. Install the leading brake shoe, the pins and the retaining springs.
9. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake
drum.
Install the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to
piston seals.
10. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until
the shoe bottoms out.
11. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified
lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5286
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
12. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out.
13. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified
lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
14. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3
times to distribute the lubricant and make sure of
smooth movement.
15. Install the lower return spring.
16. Install the upper return spring.
17. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake
Drum/Service and Repair.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See:
Brake Shoe/Adjustments.
18. Bleed the wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or
partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the
ends submerged in the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air
bubbles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5292
5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes.
- Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications.
Non-hybrid vehicles
6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to
the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the
rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir.
7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air
bubbles.
9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
All vehicles
10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake
System Bleeding.
Brake Caliper
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5293
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5294
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5295
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
1. Clean all the dirt from around the brake fluid reservoir cap and remove the cap. Fill the brake
master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake
fluid.
2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and
submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5296
4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw.
7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber
drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge
the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber
hose and install the bleeder screw cap.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw.
Pressure Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any
components upstream of the HCU are installed new.
NOTE: Pressure bleed the brake system at 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi).
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5297
1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master
cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose
to the fitting on the adapter.
3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the
bleeding operation.
Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container
partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank.
- Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system.
5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten
the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to
Specifications. Remove the rubber hose.
6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF
bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw.
- Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to
Specifications.
7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter
and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean,
specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap.
8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake
booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm.
- If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any
remaining air from the system.
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5298
plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
All vehicles
1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Service Bleed instructions.
3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
Hybrid vehicles
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Calipers
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Calipers
Brake System Inspection
Brake Calipers
1. Inspect the brake calipers for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the brake caliper is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new brake caliper.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Calipers > Page 5303
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper Guide Pins
Brake System Inspection
Brake Caliper Guide Pins
1. The guide pins should slide with a reasonable amount of hand force. If the brake pads show
taper wear or the guide pins are difficult to move,
carry out the following steps. Disassemble the brake caliper guide pins and inspect the guide pins and guide pin bores for wear,
damage and corrosion. If bore is worn or damaged, replace the damaged component.
- Use a wire brush, rolled-up sandpaper or emery cloth to remove all corrosion and foreign material
from the caliper guide pin bores. Clean any remaining foreign material from the bores with brake
parts cleaner and compressed air.
- Assemble the caliper guide pins using new caliper seals, boots and guide pins. Use an ample
amount of the specified grease to lubricate the bores and guide pins.
- Inspect the brake pads. For additional information, refer to Brake System Inspection. See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Caliper: Procedures
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5306
Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement
Brake Caliper
Brake Caliper
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If
brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may
damage the high-voltage components.
NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTICE: If the anchor housing spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake
caliper or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive
force or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
upper brake caliper cavity.
For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from
the lower brake caliper cavity.
3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper.
4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
lower brake caliper cavity.
For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5307
- Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from
the upper brake caliper cavity.
5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper.
6. NOTE: The brake caliper and brake flexible hose are removed as an assembly.
Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
7. Remove and discard the retainer clip from the brake flexible hose.
8. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper
aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
9. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper.
10. Remove the brake flexible hose from the brake caliper.
Installation
1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate.
2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps.
- Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first.
Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure:
1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity.
2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake
caliper cavity).
4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate.
5. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate.
6. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are
latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities.
7. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown, or damage to component may occur.
Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5308
8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted.
Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
9. Position the brake flexible and install a new retainer clip.
10. Attach the brake tube fitting to the brake flexible hose.
- Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
11. Bleed the brake caliper.
12. Install the wheel and tire.
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5309
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and
pressurizing the brake system.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuses 9 (50A) and 18 (50A).
3. Remove the wheel and tire.
4. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
5. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
6. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
BRAKE FLUID
Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................. PM-1-C Ford Specification
.................................................................................................................................................
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A11
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5316
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes
NOTICE: Never use copper tubing. It is subject to fatigue, cracking and corrosion, which may result
in brake tube failure.
NOTE: Double-wall steel tubing is used throughout the brake hydraulic system. All brake tube
fittings must be correctly double flared to provide strong, leakproof connections. When bending
tubing to fit the underbody or rear axle contours, be careful not to kink or crack the tube.
1. Inspect brake tubes for corrosion, cracks, leaks or any other signs of damage.
- If a section of the brake tube is damaged, the entire section must be installed with a new tube of
the same type, size, shape and length.
- When installing the hydraulic brake tubing, hoses or connectors, tighten all connections to
specifications. After installation, bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake
System Bleeding See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System Bleeding.
2. Inspect the brake flexible hoses for cracks, leaks and swelling during brake application or any
other signs of damage.
- Install a new brake flexible hose if the hose shows signs of softening, cracking or other damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Flexible Hose
Brake Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Disconnect the brake flexible hose fitting from the wheel cylinder.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
4. Remove the flexible hose clip and the brake hose.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 5322
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Brake Flexible Hose
Brake Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 5323
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If
brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove and discard the brake flexible hose retaining clip.
3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
4. Detach the brake flexible hose from the strut bracket.
5. Disconnect the brake flexible hose from the caliper.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new retaining clip.
- Bleed the brake caliper.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When installing a new ABS module/Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) assembly, it must be
configured (either by download/upload or uploading the as-built data method).
All vehicles
1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) and the ACL outlet pipe.
2. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
Vehicles with 3.0L engine
3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the master cylinder and remove the
brake tubes.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
All vehicles
4. NOTE: The brake tubes must be installed in the same location as removed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5327
Disconnect the front brake tube fittings from the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the rear brake tube fittings from the jumper tubes.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover.
7. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and remove the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
Component Tests
Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Plug the outlet ports of the master cylinder.
3. NOTE: Make sure the outlet port plugs do not show signs of leakage.
Lightly apply the brakes and hold for 10 seconds. Release the brakes and then reapply with heavy
force. If brake pedal height cannot be maintained, the brake master cylinder has an internal leak
and a new brake master cylinder must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5332
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port
Component Tests
Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair.
2. Apply and release the brakes.
3. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag.
- If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at multiple wheels, continue to Step 4.
- If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized brake
caliper, brake wheel cylinder or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as
necessary.
4. Check the brake stoplamp switch and the brake pedal free play to verify that the brake pedal is
not partially applied.
5. Loosen the brake master cylinder nuts and position the brake master cylinder away from the
brake booster.
6. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag.
- If the brake drag is no longer present, install a new brake booster.
- If the brake drag is still present, install a new master cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5333
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection
Brake Pads
Brake System Inspection
Brake Pads
NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads when the brake discs are machined.
1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake pad friction material. For additional information,
refer to Specifications.
- Minor surface cracks do not require pad replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or
cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake pads.
- If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake pads.
- If the friction material shows taper wear that is not within specifications, install new brake pads
and verify the caliper guide pins are functioning correctly. For additional information, refer to Brake
Caliper Guide Pins inspection. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection/Brake Caliper Guide Pins
Brake Shoes
Brake System Inspection
Brake Shoes
1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake shoe friction material. For additional information,
refer to Specifications.
- Minor surface cracks do not require shoe replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or
cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake shoes.
- If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake
shoes.
- Verify that the mounting hardware is installed correctly and operating correctly. Install new
hardware as necessary.
- Verify that the backing plate contact points are free of corrosion that may cause binding. Clean or
install new as necessary.
- Verify correct brake shoe adjustment.
Brake Discs
Brake System Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5334
Brake Discs
NOTICE: Using an impact tool without a torque socket will lead to unevenly tightened wheel nuts.
This causes brake disc on-vehicle lateral runout and brake roughness.
NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake discs to address noise issues.
1. Inspect the brake discs and measure the brake disc thickness in a minimum of 4 places around
the circumference of the brake disc. Record the
measurements, refer to Specifications. If the brake disc is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake disc.
- If any measurement is below the minimum thickness specification, install a new brake disc.
- If the diagnosis has revealed vibration in the steering wheel, seat or pedal while braking that
varies with vehicle speed, machine the brake disc. Heavily scored brake discs, similar to that
caused by pads worn down to the backing plate, should also be machined. In order to machine,
discs must be above the minimum thickness specification. For additional information, refer to
Specifications and Brake Disc Machining See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and
Repair/Procedures.
Brake Drums
Brake System Inspection
Brake Drums
NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake drums to address noise issues.
1. Inspect the brake drums and measure the brake drum diameter. Record the measurements,
refer to Specifications.
- If the brake drum is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake drum.
- If the diameter measurement is more than the maximum specification, install a new brake drum.
- Heavily scored brake drums, similar to that caused by shoes worn down to the backing plate,
should be machined. In order to machine, drums must be below the maximum diameter
specification.
- For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe / Adjustments. See: Drum Brake System/Brake
Shoe/Adjustments
Wheel Cylinders
Brake System Inspection
Wheel Cylinders
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5335
1. Inspect the wheel cylinders for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the wheel cylinder is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new wheel cylinder.
Brake Calipers
Brake System Inspection
Brake Calipers
1. Inspect the brake calipers for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the brake caliper is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new brake caliper.
Brake Caliper Guide Pins
Brake System Inspection
Brake Caliper Guide Pins
1. The guide pins should slide with a reasonable amount of hand force. If the brake pads show
taper wear or the guide pins are difficult to move,
carry out the following steps. Disassemble the brake caliper guide pins and inspect the guide pins and guide pin bores for wear,
damage and corrosion. If bore is worn or damaged, replace the damaged component.
- Use a wire brush, rolled-up sandpaper or emery cloth to remove all corrosion and foreign material
from the caliper guide pin bores. Clean any remaining foreign material from the bores with brake
parts cleaner and compressed air.
- Assemble the caliper guide pins using new caliper seals, boots and guide pins. Use an ample
amount of the specified grease to lubricate the bores and guide pins.
- Inspect the brake pads. For additional information, refer to Brake System Inspection. See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection
Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes
Brake System Inspection
Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes
NOTICE: Never use copper tubing. It is subject to fatigue, cracking and corrosion, which may result
in brake tube failure.
NOTE: Double-wall steel tubing is used throughout the brake hydraulic system. All brake tube
fittings must be correctly double flared to provide strong,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5336
leakproof connections. When bending tubing to fit the underbody or rear axle contours, be careful
not to kink or crack the tube.
1. Inspect brake tubes for corrosion, cracks, leaks or any other signs of damage.
- If a section of the brake tube is damaged, the entire section must be installed with a new tube of
the same type, size, shape and length.
- When installing the hydraulic brake tubing, hoses or connectors, tighten all connections to
specifications. After installation, bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake
System Bleeding See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System Bleeding.
2. Inspect the brake flexible hoses for cracks, leaks and swelling during brake application or any
other signs of damage.
- Install a new brake flexible hose if the hose shows signs of softening, cracking or other damage.
Brake Master Cylinder
Brake System Inspection
Brake Master Cylinder
NOTE: During normal operation of the brake master cylinder, the fluid level in the brake master
cylinder reservoir will fall during brake application and rise during release. The net fluid level (such
as after brake application and release) will remain unchanged. Fluid level will decrease with pad
wear.
NOTE: A trace of brake fluid will exist on the booster shell below the master cylinder mounting
flange. This results from the normal lubricating action of the master cylinder bore and seal.
1. Inspect the brake master cylinder for fluid leaks.
- Install a new master cylinder or brake fluid reservoir if signs of excessive leaking are present.
- To check for correct brake master cylinder operation, refer to Component Tests See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Brake Booster
Brake System Inspection
Brake Booster (Non-Hybrid Vehicles)
1. Inspect the brake booster for excessive corrosion or damage. Inspect the vacuum hoses for
leaks and kinks.
- Install a new brake booster if signs of excessive corrosion or damage is found.
- Repair or replace vacuum hoses as necessary.
- To check for correct brake booster operation, refer to Component Tests See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5337
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster
Component Tests
Brake Booster (Non-Hybrid Vehicles)
1. Disconnect the check valve from the brake booster and connect a suitable vacuum/pressure
tester to the booster side of the check valve.
2. Apply the parking brake, start the engine and place the transmission in NEUTRAL.
- Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
3. NOTE: Subtract approximately 4.0193 kPa (1 in-Hg) from the specified reading for every 304.8
m (1,000 ft) of elevation above sea level.
Verify that vacuum is available at the check valve with engine running at normal idle speed.
- The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg).
- If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the check valve and continue with Step
5.
- If specified vacuum is not available, continue with Step 4.
4. Disconnect the check valve from the vacuum hose and verify that the specified vacuum is
available at the hose with the engine at idle speed and
the transmission in NEUTRAL. If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, install a new check valve and continue with Step
5.
- If specified vacuum is not available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve
and refer to Engine to diagnose the no/low vacuum condition. See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Testing and Inspection
5. Apply the brake pedal several times to exhaust all vacuum from the system.
6. Apply the brake pedal and hold it in the applied position. Start the engine and verify that the
brake pedal moves downward after the engine starts.
- If the brake pedal moves, the brake booster is operating correctly.
- If the brake pedal does not move, install a new brake booster.
7. Operate the engine a minimum of 20 seconds at idle. Stop the engine and let the vehicle stand
for 10 minutes, then apply the brake pedal. The
brake pedal feel should be the same as that noted with the engine operating. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power assist), install a new brake booster check valve and retest.
- If condition still exists, install a new brake booster.
- If the brake pedal feels the same as noted with the engine operating, the check valve is
functioning properly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Master Cylinder: Procedures
Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or
partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the
ends submerged in the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air
bubbles.
5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes.
- Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5340
Non-hybrid vehicles
6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to
the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the
rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir.
7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air
bubbles.
9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
All vehicles
10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System
Bleeding.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5341
Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
Brake Master Cylinder
Brake Master Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector.
2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir.
3. If equipped with a manual transmission, release the clamp and disconnect the clutch hose from
the brake fluid reservoir.
- Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose.
4. Disconnect the 2 brake tube fittings and plug the brake tubes and the brake master cylinder
ports.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Remove and discard the 2 brake master cylinder nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5342
- To install, tighten new nuts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. Remove the brake master cylinder assembly.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the master cylinder.
- If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder.
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector.
2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir.
3. If equipped with a manual transmission, release the clamp and disconnect the clutch hose from
the brake fluid reservoir.
- Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose.
4. Remove the reservoir.
- Release the retaining clips on the underside of the reservoir.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5343
- Pull the reservoir upwards.
5. Remove and discard the 2 seals.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new seals. Lubricate the seals with clean, specified brake fluid.
- Bleed the brake system.
- If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Wheel Cylinder: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Wheel Cylinders
1. Inspect the wheel cylinders for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the wheel cylinder is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Wheel Cylinder: Procedures
Wheel Cylinder Lubrication
Wheel Cylinder Lubrication
1. Remove the brake drum.
2. Remove the upper and lower return springs.
NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to
piston seals.
3. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until
the shoe bottoms out.
4. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant
around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
5. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out.
6. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant
around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
7. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3
times to distribute the lubricant and verify smooth
movement.
8. Install the upper and lower return springs.
9. Install the brake drum.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5349
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5350
Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
Wheel Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoes See: Drum Brake
System/Brake Shoe/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5351
Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul
Wheel Cylinder
Disassembly
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5352
has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination,
brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Removal is not necessary to disassemble, inspect, hone or overhaul the rear wheel
cylinder.
1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Drum Brake
System/Brake Drum/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the upper return spring.
3. Remove the lower return spring.
4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
5. Remove the retaining springs, the pins and the leading brake shoe.
6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
- Clean and dry the brake backing plate.
7. Remove the bleeder screw cap.
8. Remove the bleeder screw.
9. Remove the 2 dust boots.
10. Remove the 2 pistons.
11. Remove the 2 piston seals.
12. Remove the spring.
13. Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these
conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be installed.
Assembly
1. Install the spring.
2. Using clean brake fluid, lubricate and install the 2 piston seals.
3. Install the 2 pistons.
4. Install the 2 dust boots.
5. Install the bleeder screw.
6. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate.
7. Install the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
8. Install the leading brake shoe, the pins and the retaining springs.
9. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake
drum.
Install the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to
piston seals.
10. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until
the shoe bottoms out.
11. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified
lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5353
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
12. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out.
13. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified
lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
14. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3
times to distribute the lubricant and make sure of
smooth movement.
15. Install the lower return spring.
16. Install the upper return spring.
17. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Drum Brake
System/Brake Drum/Service and Repair.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See:
Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Adjustments.
18. Bleed the wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Parking Brake Cable: Procedures
Parking Brake Cable Tension Release
1. With the help of an assistant, release the parking brake cable tension by pulling down on the
front cable at the cable union, until the parking brake
control drum track rotates to its stop and a 4 mm (0.15 in) x 100 mm (3.93 in) retainer pin can be
inserted.
2. NOTE: Before removing the brake control retaining pin, make sure all cable connections are
secure and the cable tension is reloaded slowly.
To reload the tension on the parking brake cable, follow the release procedure in reverse.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5359
Parking Brake Cable: Removal and Replacement
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH
NOTE: Rear disc shown, rear drum similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake
Cable Tension Release See: Procedures.
2. Remove the rear brake shoes.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by
compressing the cable conduit locking tabs.
4. Detach the cable-to-fuel tank strap pin type retainer.
5. Remove the 2 parking brake cable bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through
the brake backing plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5360
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH
Removal and Installation
1. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake
Cable Tension Release See: Procedures.
2. Remove the rear brake shoes.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by
compressing the cable conduit locking tabs.
4. Compress the retaining clip and detach the parking brake cable from the exhaust support
bracket.
5. Remove the parking brake cable bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through
the brake backing plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5361
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Parking Brake Cable - Front
Parking Brake Cable - Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the parking brake control. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Control
See: Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the floor console.
4. Remove the driver side front seat.
5. Remove the 3 front parking brake cable bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the RR parking brake cable connector by
releasing the locking tab.
7. Disconnect the front parking brake cable conduit from the LR parking brake cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5362
8. Release the front parking brake cable pass-through grommet from the vehicle underbody.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front driver side door scuff plate and kick panel.
2. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake
Cable Tension Release See: Parking Brake
Cable/Service and Repair/Procedures.
3. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector and detach the
harness pin-type retainer from the parking brake control
cover.
5. Remove the 2 parking brake control bolts.
- To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
6. Remove the 2 parking brake control nuts.
- To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
7. Remove the parking brake control.
- Disconnect the front parking brake cable.
8. NOTE: Make sure that the cable is in the groove on the control wheel prior to final tightening of
fasteners.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 5366
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Brake Pedal: > 09-6-7 > Apr > 09 > Brakes - Park
Brake Pedal Won't Fully Release
Parking Brake Pedal: Customer Interest Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully Release
TSB 09-6-7
04/06/09
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL WILL NOT FULLY RETURN WHEN RELEASED - INDICATOR STAYS
ON
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, built on
10/1/2008 through and including 1/26/2009, may exhibit a parking brake indicator on the dash, due
to the parking brake pedal not returning to the fully released position.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify parking brake indicator is illuminated in the dash.
2. Pull the pedal up to the fully released position by hand.
3. If the indicator does not go out, this procedure does not apply. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 206-00.
4. If the indicator does go out, replace the parking brake control assembly following WSM, Section
206-05.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090607A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.9 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Parking Brake Control Assembly (Do Not Use With
2780A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2780 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Pedal: > 09-6-7 > Apr > 09 >
Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully Release
Parking Brake Pedal: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully
Release
TSB 09-6-7
04/06/09
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL WILL NOT FULLY RETURN WHEN RELEASED - INDICATOR STAYS
ON
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, built on
10/1/2008 through and including 1/26/2009, may exhibit a parking brake indicator on the dash, due
to the parking brake pedal not returning to the fully released position.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify parking brake indicator is illuminated in the dash.
2. Pull the pedal up to the fully released position by hand.
3. If the indicator does not go out, this procedure does not apply. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 206-00.
4. If the indicator does go out, replace the parking brake control assembly following WSM, Section
206-05.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090607A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.9 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Parking Brake Control Assembly (Do Not Use With
2780A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2780 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5383
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5384
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications
Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5389
Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation
Brake Booster
The power brake actuation system consists of the following components:
- Brake booster
- Brake booster check valve
- Brake booster travel sensor (hybrid vehicles)
- Brake booster vacuum sensor (hybrid vehicles)
- Brake booster vacuum supply hose
- Vacuum pump (hybrid vehicles)
Conventional brake booster
The brake booster uses engine vacuum from the intake manifold to create a partial vacuum inside
the vacuum booster on both sides of the diaphragm. When the brake pedal is pressed, the booster
rod opens a valve, allowing air to enter the booster on one side of the diaphragm while sealing off
the opposite side. This increases pressure on that side of the diaphragm so that it helps push the
rod, which in turn pushes the piston in the master cylinder. As the brake pedal is released, the
valve seals off the outside air supply while opening the vacuum valve. This restores vacuum to
both sides of the diaphragm, allowing everything to return to its original position.
Active brake booster (hybrid vehicles)
The active brake booster uses vacuum supplied by an engine mounted electronic vacuum pump
and is similar to a conventional vacuum assist brake booster with the addition of a brake booster
(vacuum) solenoid, a brake booster travel sensor and a vacuum sensor. If it is necessary to apply
the vehicles friction brakes, the ABS module will send a signal to the brake booster solenoid that is
proportional to the amount of brake torque requested. The booster solenoid will open to allow
vacuum to draw the booster diaphragm and pushrod towards the master cylinder piston, building
hydraulic pressure. The brake booster vacuum sensor is used by the ABS module to monitor
vacuum maintained inside the brake booster. The brake booster travel sensor is used to monitor
the performance of the brake booster.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Booster
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster
Component Tests
Brake Booster (Non-Hybrid Vehicles)
1. Disconnect the check valve from the brake booster and connect a suitable vacuum/pressure
tester to the booster side of the check valve.
2. Apply the parking brake, start the engine and place the transmission in NEUTRAL.
- Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
3. NOTE: Subtract approximately 4.0193 kPa (1 in-Hg) from the specified reading for every 304.8
m (1,000 ft) of elevation above sea level.
Verify that vacuum is available at the check valve with engine running at normal idle speed.
- The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg).
- If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the check valve and continue with Step
5.
- If specified vacuum is not available, continue with Step 4.
4. Disconnect the check valve from the vacuum hose and verify that the specified vacuum is
available at the hose with the engine at idle speed and
the transmission in NEUTRAL. If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, install a new check valve and continue with Step
5.
- If specified vacuum is not available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve
and refer to Engine to diagnose the no/low vacuum condition. See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Testing and Inspection
5. Apply the brake pedal several times to exhaust all vacuum from the system.
6. Apply the brake pedal and hold it in the applied position. Start the engine and verify that the
brake pedal moves downward after the engine starts.
- If the brake pedal moves, the brake booster is operating correctly.
- If the brake pedal does not move, install a new brake booster.
7. Operate the engine a minimum of 20 seconds at idle. Stop the engine and let the vehicle stand
for 10 minutes, then apply the brake pedal. The
brake pedal feel should be the same as that noted with the engine operating. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power assist), install a new brake booster check valve and retest.
- If condition still exists, install a new brake booster.
- If the brake pedal feels the same as noted with the engine operating, the check valve is
functioning properly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Booster > Page 5392
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection - Brake Booster
Brake System Inspection
Brake Booster (Non-Hybrid Vehicles)
1. Inspect the brake booster for excessive corrosion or damage. Inspect the vacuum hoses for
leaks and kinks.
- Install a new brake booster if signs of excessive corrosion or damage is found.
- Repair or replace vacuum hoses as necessary.
- To check for correct brake booster operation, refer to Component Tests See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5393
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair
Brake Booster
NOTE: Hybrid vehicle shown, gas vehicle similar.
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTICE: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp
switch. This switch must be removed with
the brake pedal in the at-rest position. The switch plunger must be compressed for the switch to
rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal
apply) will result in damage to the switch.
Remove the stoplamp switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5394
2. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis-locking pin is a one-time use only part. Anytime the booster
push rod clevis-locking pin is removed, a new
booster push rod clevis-locking pin should be used.
NOTE: Remove the clevis-locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the
opposite end.
Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis-locking pin.
3. Remove and discard the 4 brake booster nuts.
- To install, tighten new nuts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose/check valve assembly from the brake booster.
Hybrid vehicles
5. Disconnect the vacuum pressure sensor, booster solenoid and the booster travel sensor
electrical connectors.
All vehicles
6. Remove and discard the 2 master cylinder nuts.
- To install, tighten new nuts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube fittings.
Carefully position the brake master cylinder assembly forward and remove the brake booster.
8. NOTICE: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp
switch. This switch must be installed with
the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position.
Installing this switch with the brake pedal in any other position will result in incorrect adjustment
and may damage the switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Hybrid vehicles
9. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Vacuum Pump: Service and Repair
Brake Vacuum Pump
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS) coolant pump bolts and position the
pump and ground strap aside.
- To install, tighten bolts to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the vacuum pump electrical connector and detach the harness retainer from the
vacuum pump bracket.
3. Remove the vacuum pump bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove the 2 vacuum pump bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Position the vacuum pump to detach the vacuum hose and remove the vacuum pump.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Brake
Control Module: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration
Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal
Vibration
TSB 09-20-3
10/19/09
ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12
MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in
the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test
at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time
self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now
available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change
the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h).
ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher.
This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained
at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2C219 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates Pedal Vibration
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates
Pedal Vibration
TSB 09-20-3
10/19/09
ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12
MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in
the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test
at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time
self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now
available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change
the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h).
ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher.
This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained
at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2C219 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5412
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5413
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5414
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5415
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicles shown, hybrid vehicles similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the Hydraulic Control
Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly.
All vehicles
1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See:
Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair.
Non-hybrid vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5416
2. Remove the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes/Service and Repair. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See:
Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service
and Repair.
3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
All vehicles
5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
7. Configure the ABS module.
8. Calibrate the ABS module.
- For non-hybrid vehicles, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence following the scan tool
directions.
- For hybrid vehicles, carry out the Multi-Calibration routine following the scan tool directions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS
Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5424
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5428
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5429
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5433
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5434
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Stability/Traction Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel.
2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: >
09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: >
09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 5443
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed
Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front
Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed
Sensor: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 5449
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 5452
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 5453
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 5454
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5457
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5458
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5459
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are
located at right angles to the sensor wire.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5462
4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer.
5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5463
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at
right angles to the sensor wire.
3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer.
5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5464
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5465
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Removal
1. Remove the front halfshaft.
2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5466
1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the
previous illustration.
2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5467
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Removal and Installation
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut.
- To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5474
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5475
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5476
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 5479
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct
> 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct
> 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5489
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5495
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
TSB 09-5-8
03/23/09
ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT
BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009
and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the
chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF
THE POWERTRAIN.
1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type
maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h).
2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for
noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting
noise.
3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 204-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire
Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1,
1015D)
090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 5501
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 5507
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5508
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5513
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5514
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
Battery Cable: Service and Repair
Battery Cables - 3.0L
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery Disconnect See: Service and
Repair/Battery Disconnect.
2. Remove the starter solenoid terminal cover.
3. Remove the starter motor positive cable nut.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 5519
4. Remove the starter solenoid wire nut.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Position the starter motor terminals aside.
6. Remove the battery ground cable-to-transaxle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. Position the battery ground cable aside.
8. Disconnect the retaining clip from the battery cables to the transmission fluid level indicator tube.
9. Open the Battery Junction Box (BJB) cover and remove the BJB terminal nut.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
10. Position the BJB terminal aside.
11. Disconnect the BJB electrical connector.
12. Remove the body ground terminal bolt from the left fenderwell.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Remove the generator B+ terminal nut.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
14. Release the battery cable locators and remove the battery cables from the vehicle.
15. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Alternator: Electrical Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5525
Alternator: Mechanical Specifications
General Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5526
Alternator: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5527
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5528
Alternator: Description and Operation
Charging System
The charging system is a negative ground system consisting of:
- a generator.
- an internal voltage regulator.
- a charging system warning indicator.
- a battery.
- circuitry and cables.
- a PCM.
The generator is driven by the accessory drive belt. When the engine is started, the generator
begins to generate AC which is internally converted to DC. The DC is controlled by the voltage
regulator (located on the rear of the generator) and supplied to the battery. The PCM controls the
voltage regulation set point, working with the generator internal voltage regulator over 2 control and
communication circuits.
The generator and voltage regulator:
- supply current to the electrical system.
- charge the battery.
- adjust the generator field current to increase or decrease the generator output.
- have a PCM-controlled warning lamp.
- output is controlled by the PCM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5529
Alternator: Service and Repair
Generator - 3.0L
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTICE: Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the generator housing and
internal diode cooling fins. A short circuit
may result and burn out the diodes. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component
damage.
Disconnect the battery.
3. Remove the 5 RH lower splash shield bolts and the 1 pin-type retainer.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Remove the RH lower splash shield.
5. Rotate the front end accessory drive tensioner counterclockwise and position the accessory
drive belt aside.
6. Disconnect the generator electrical connector.
7. Position the generator B+ protective cover aside and remove the generator B+ terminal nut.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5530
8. Remove the 3 A/C compressor bolts. Use a tie-strap and position the A/C compressor aside.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
9. Loosen the 2 generator nuts.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
10. Remove the 2 lower generator studs.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
11. Remove the upper generator bolt and the generator.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Clutch Cut Off Switch
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5536
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5537
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5538
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Clutch Cutoff Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 5541
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Lock: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page
5550
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign.
Cylinder
Ignition Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign.
Cylinder > Page 5556
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In
5th Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh
Erratic Engagement/Shifts
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 09-19-5
10/05/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL
LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built
between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772,
P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E
(SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh
engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The
Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is:
a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14.
b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps.
2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the
transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With
12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh
Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 5570
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
12A650 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh
Upshifts/Downshifts
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh
Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh
Erratic Engagement/Shifts > Page 5588
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
12A650 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 >
Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 >
Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5602
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: >
09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: >
09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5608
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5609
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
Key: Testing and Inspection Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using
Diagnostic Equipment
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and
does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a
programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase
key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory.
NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the
vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the
vehicle.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle starts.
NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the
correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be
the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If
the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the
customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In
this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool menu select: IGNITION KEY CODE ERASE. Follow all Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) screen instructions until the key
erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the
process.
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be
removed at this time).
5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are
programmed into the IC, then the RKE data
transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into
the SJB, the RKE functions does not operate.
NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take
place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second
time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3
second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT
should function.
9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the
IC), refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5614
Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to
be programmed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5615
Key: Testing and Inspection Key Programming Switch State Control
Key Programming Switch State Control
NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability
to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's
Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument
Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This
programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet
purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle
driver.
NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID.
NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC
using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLED,
the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This switch is
set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys procedure.
1. Insert a programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key (or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the
key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLED, when viewing the IC
SPAREKEY PID.
From the scan tool menu select: CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE - spare key programming procedure is
accessible.
- CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING DISABLE - spare key programming procedure is not
accessible.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5616
Key: Testing and Inspection Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
NOTE: This procedure works only if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key
Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and
Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment.
NOTE: The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not
enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID.
The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built.
NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the
anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not
successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at
least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the
failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the
appropriate pinpoint tests.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle will starts.
NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions.
Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or
are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on
programming the remaining keys. In this case, the PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends.
NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS
encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can
be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the
IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the
message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function,
but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative.
1. Insert a programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to
the ON position.
2. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the first key.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed ignition
key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into
the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
5. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the second key.
7. Within 20 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed ignition key
(new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON
position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data
transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key).
8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there
are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the
vehicle.
Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5617
9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5618
Key: Testing and Inspection Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Enabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for
their vehicle.
NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys
are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT
keys are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC)
will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of
them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition
lock cylinder.
NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder
security key code and programming this key code into all of the vehicle keys so they contain the
same key code.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how
many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed).
1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be
programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles
need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F.
2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be
turned off before viewing the stored code. At this
time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the
procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below.
Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should
not be the same key code.
3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen
instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security
Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen
instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the
customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
8. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
9. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
10. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
11. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Disabling Unlimited Key Mode
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5619
NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the
vehicle.
1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
5. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
6. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
8. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into
the IC using the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
procedure. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each
additional key that needs to be programmed. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5620
Key: Testing and Inspection
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and
does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a
programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase
key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory.
NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the
vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the
vehicle.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle starts.
NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the
correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be
the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If
the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the
customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In
this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool menu select: IGNITION KEY CODE ERASE. Follow all Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) screen instructions until the key
erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the
process.
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be
removed at this time).
5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are
programmed into the IC, then the RKE data
transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into
the SJB, the RKE functions does not operate.
NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take
place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second
time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3
second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT
should function.
9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the
IC), refer to Key Programming Using Two
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5621
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for
each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Key Programming Switch State Control
Key Programming Switch State Control
NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability
to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's
Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument
Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This
programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet
purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle
driver.
NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID.
NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC
using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLED,
the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This switch is
set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys procedure.
1. Insert a programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key (or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the
key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLED, when viewing the IC
SPAREKEY PID.
From the scan tool menu select: CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE - spare key programming procedure is
accessible.
- CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING DISABLE - spare key programming procedure is not
accessible.
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
NOTE: This procedure works only if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key
Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and
Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment.
NOTE: The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not
enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID.
The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built.
NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the
anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not
successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at
least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the
failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the
appropriate pinpoint tests.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle will starts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5622
NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions.
Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or
are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on
programming the remaining keys. In this case, the PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends.
NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS
encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can
be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the
IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the
message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function,
but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative.
1. Insert a programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to
the ON position.
2. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the first key.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed ignition
key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into
the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
5. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the second key.
7. Within 20 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed ignition key
(new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON
position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data
transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key).
8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there
are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the
vehicle.
Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions.
9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7.
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Enabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for
their vehicle.
NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys
are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT
keys
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5623
are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC) will
set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of them
will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition
lock cylinder.
NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder
security key code and programming this key code into all of the vehicle keys so they contain the
same key code.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how
many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed).
1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be
programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles
need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F.
2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be
turned off before viewing the stored code. At this
time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the
procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below.
Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should
not be the same key code.
3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen
instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security
Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen
instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the
customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
8. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
9. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
10. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
11. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Disabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the
vehicle.
1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
5. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
6. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
8. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into
the IC using the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
procedure. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5624
If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each
additional key that needs to be programmed. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment
Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs to have an additional key programmed into
the vehicle without erasing stored key codes, but does not have 2 programmed keys available. This
procedure is also useful when attempting to determine if an ignition key is defective, as a new key
can be installed without erasing keys or without having 2 programmed keys available.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock
cylinder.
NOTE: If 8 keys are already programmed, this procedure does not allow any more ignition keys to
be programmed. The number of keys that are programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) can be determined by viewing the N_KEYCODE PID.
1. Turn the new key to be programmed from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: Make sure the selection made is "Program additional ignition key". If the "Ignition Key
Code Erase" selection is made, all of the keys will
be erased from the system.
From the scan tool menu select: "Program additional ignition key".
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool.
5. Start the vehicle with the new PATS key. The vehicle will now start with the new PATS key and
also with the original PATS keys. If it is an IKT
key, verify the RKE functions (if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed).
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
NOTE: When using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS), the Instrument Cluster (IC) and the
PCM parameters are reset at the same time.
NOTE: Once security access has been granted, multiple security access commands should be
executed (if necessary) prior to exiting the command menu. This avoids an additional security
access procedure and the associated 10 minute time delay.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 5625
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool, select: Parameter Reset and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
4. NOTE: If the IC was replaced, follow Steps 4-9. If the IC and the PCM were replaced, follow
Steps 4-9. If only the PCM was replaced, cycle the
key off, then back on, to complete the procedure.
NOTE: If steps 4-9 are followed, 2 keys must be present.
From the scan tool, select: Ignition Key Code Erase and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
5. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool.
6. NOTE: Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys require a 6-second programming time frame
for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) data
transfer to take place, while standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys only require a
minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (if it is an IKT key).
7. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove it from the ignition lock cylinder.
8. Insert the second key and turn it to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (if it is an IKT
key).
9. Both keys will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions of the vehicle (if they
are IKT keys).
10. NOTE: The RKE data transfer will take place between the key and the IC first. After both keys
are programmed into the IC, the RKE data will
transfer from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into
the SJB, the RKE functions will not operate.
If more keys are required to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > General Specifications
Starter Motor: Specifications General Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > General Specifications > Page 5630
Starter Motor: Specifications Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5631
Starter Motor: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5632
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5633
Starter Motor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5634
Starter Motor: Service and Repair
Starter Motor - 3.0L
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the starter motor solenoid wire nut.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Remove the starter motor solenoid battery cable nut and position aside the cables.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Remove the ground wire nut and position aside the ground wire.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
5. Remove the 2 stud bolts and the starter motor.
- To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5638
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5639
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Specifications > General Specifications
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Specifications General Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 5645
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Specifications Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 5648
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 5649
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point
The DC/AC inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC current
with a rating of less than 150 watts.
DC/DC Converter
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery systems. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Principles Of Operation
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Principles of Operation
DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point
The DC/AC inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC current
with a rating of less than 150 watts. The 110 volts AC created by the inverter will measure
differently than a conventional AC outlet (utility-generated) with some multi-meters. The power
point will automatically shut off if the load exceeds 150 watts. This prevents damage to the inverter
or load. The inverter supplies 110 volts AC power only when the key is in the ON/START position.
This reduces the draw on the 12-volt system when the vehicle is not running. The DC/AC inverter
outlet (AC power point) is equipped with a green LED that indicates the system integrity. The green
LED illuminates continuously when the key is in the ON/START position and the system is
operating normally. The green LED flashes constantly if the key is in the ON/START position and a
fault is detected. Short circuits, overloads or overheating of the inverter will cause the green LED to
flash and the power to be cut off to the outlet. If the LED is flashing, the problem must be corrected
(short circuit or excessive load). If the inverter is overheated, it must be allowed time to cool off
(without the load connected). Refer to Owner's Literature for a list of appropriate electrical
loads/devices that can be used.
DC/DC Converter
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power, while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery systems. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
Inspection And Verification
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5652
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
5. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the Self Test Diagnostics for the PCM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to this concern, go to the DTC Chart. For all other DTCs, refer
to Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5653
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
P1A0C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5654
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5655
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power At The AC Power
Point
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power at the AC Power
Point
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is
grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 cycle
110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and
HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral).
NOTE: The electrical device that is powered by the AC power point must not exceed 150 watts.
NOTE: If the green LED is flashing, the AC power point may be overloaded, overheated or shorted.
Unplug the electrical device from the AC power point and cycle the key. Refer to the Owner's
Literature to determine if the electrical device is appropriate for the AC power point.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Circuits
- DC/AC inverter
- AC power point
PINPOINT TEST A: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO POWER
AT THE AC POWER POINT
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK CIRCUITS SBP04 (GN/RD) AND CBP35
(YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293a.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-1, circuit SBP04 (GN/RD), harness side
and ground.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 1 (30A) and 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit(s).
TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5656
A2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293a-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK CIRCUITS HYA01 (OG/GN) AND HYA02
(OG/WH) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293b.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-1, circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side
and AC power point C2292-1 circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side;
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-5, circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness
side and AC power point C2292-3 circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-1, component side and AC power point
C2292-2.
- Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-3, component side and AC power point
C2292-1.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5657
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current
(DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and
Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED
Indicator Is Never On
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED
Indicator is Never On
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is
grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 cycle
110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and
HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). If a fault in the system is detected, the LED flashes when the key is in
the ON position. The LED continuously illuminates if the system is operating correctly when the key
is in the ON position.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Circuits
- DC/AC inverter
- AC power point
PINPOINT TEST B: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE AC
POWER POINT LED INDICATOR IS NEVER ON
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP35 (YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293a.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5658
GO to B2.
No
CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system
for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293a-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK CIRCUITS LYA03 (YE/VT) AND RYA03 (BU/BN)
FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293b.
- Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-9, circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side
and AC power point C2292-6 circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side; and between DC/AC inverter
C2293b-8, circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side and AC power point C2292-5 circuit RYA03
(BU/BN), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
REPAIR the circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT LED
- Test the diode between AC power point C2292-5, component side and AC power point C2292-6,
component side in both directions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5659
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms in one direction and between 10-20 ohms in the
opposite direction?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current
(DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and
Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery system. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- PCM
- 12-volt battery
- Battery cables
- DC/DC converter
PINPOINT TEST C: THE DC/DC CONVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE PCM FOR DTCs
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test/Retrieve and Record On-Demand
and Continuous Memory DTCs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5660
- Are any PCM DTCs present?
Yes
For DTC P1A0C only, GO to C2. For all other DTCs, REFER to Computers and Control Systems
Information.
No
GO to C2.
------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- Ignition OFF.
- Carry out the Battery - Condition Test to determine if the battery can hold a charge and is OK for
use. Refer to Battery. See: Battery/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests
- Did the battery pass the condition test?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
INSTALL a new 12-volt battery.
------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS
- Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing in Battery. See:
Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Battery/Testing
and Inspection
- Are any circuits causing excessive current drains?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C4.
------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- Start the engine.
- NOTE: The vehicle will start when the ignition switch is turned to the START position, but after a
short period of time (approximately 2 minutes) the engine may shut down with the ignition switch
still in the ON position. The DC/DC converter will output a normal charging rate with the engine
running or not, but the engine MUST have run at least once. The state of charge of the High
Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) will have a direct affect on the length of engine running time.
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), monitor the
voltage at the 12-volt battery.
- Is the voltage between 13.2-16.0 volts?
Yes
The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C5.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5661
------------------------------------------------- C5 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on
high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter
positive C1457c, post side and 12-volt battery positive C1100a, post side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on
high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter
negative C1457b, post side and DC/DC converter ground G105, ground bolt side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C7 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER
OPERATION
- Disconnect all of the DC/DC converter connectors.
- Check for: corrosion.
- pushed-out pins.
- Connect all of the DC/DC converter connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter .
TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5662
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair High Voltage Converter/Inverter
Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint
Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery.
2. Remove the console trim insert.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the AC power point.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5665
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery.
2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the DC/AC inverter.
4. Remove the 2 DC/AC inverter nuts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Remove the DC/AC inverter bolt.
- To install, tighten 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5666
6. Remove the DC/AC inverter.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5667
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Point
Power Point
Removal
NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location.
1. Open the power point cover.
2. Install the Power Point Socket Remover in one of the power point socket slots.
3. Position the Power Point Socket Remover so that it engages in the adjacent slot.
4. Using the Power Point Socket Remover, pull the power point socket out of the retainer.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5671
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom the
fuse cover to remove.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 5676
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 5677
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 5678
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom the
fuse cover to remove.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 5681
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 5682
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 5683
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5688
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5689
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5690
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5691
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5692
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5695
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5696
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5697
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5698
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5699
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5700
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5701
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5702
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5703
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5704
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5705
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5706
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5707
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5708
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5709
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5710
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5711
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5712
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5713
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5714
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5715
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5716
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5717
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5718
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5719
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5720
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5721
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5722
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5726
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5731
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5732
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5733
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5734
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5735
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5736
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5737
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5738
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5739
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5740
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5741
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5742
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5743
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5744
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5745
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5746
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5747
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5748
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5749
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5750
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5751
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5752
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5753
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5754
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5755
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5756
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5757
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5758
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5759
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5760
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5761
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5762
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5763
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5764
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE
devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful
configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a
successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5768
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of
these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step will clear DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This will make sure that all displays are visible
under all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5772
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5777
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE
devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful
configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a
successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5781
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of
these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step will clear DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This will make sure that all displays are visible
under all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5785
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5790
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5791
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5792
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5793
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5794
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5797
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5798
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5799
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5800
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5801
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5802
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5803
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5804
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5805
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5808
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5809
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5810
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5815
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5816
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5817
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5818
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5819
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5822
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5823
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5824
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5825
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5826
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5827
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5828
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5829
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5830
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5833
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5834
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5835
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Specifications > General Specifications
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Specifications General Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Specifications > General Specifications > Page 5841
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Specifications Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Console
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Console > Page 5844
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5845
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point
The DC/AC inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC current
with a rating of less than 150 watts.
DC/DC Converter
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery systems. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Principles Of Operation
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Principles of Operation
DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point
The DC/AC inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC current
with a rating of less than 150 watts. The 110 volts AC created by the inverter will measure
differently than a conventional AC outlet (utility-generated) with some multi-meters. The power
point will automatically shut off if the load exceeds 150 watts. This prevents damage to the inverter
or load. The inverter supplies 110 volts AC power only when the key is in the ON/START position.
This reduces the draw on the 12-volt system when the vehicle is not running. The DC/AC inverter
outlet (AC power point) is equipped with a green LED that indicates the system integrity. The green
LED illuminates continuously when the key is in the ON/START position and the system is
operating normally. The green LED flashes constantly if the key is in the ON/START position and a
fault is detected. Short circuits, overloads or overheating of the inverter will cause the green LED to
flash and the power to be cut off to the outlet. If the LED is flashing, the problem must be corrected
(short circuit or excessive load). If the inverter is overheated, it must be allowed time to cool off
(without the load connected). Refer to Owner's Literature for a list of appropriate electrical
loads/devices that can be used.
DC/DC Converter
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power, while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery systems. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
Inspection And Verification
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5848
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
5. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the Self Test Diagnostics for the PCM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to this concern, go to the DTC Chart. For all other DTCs, refer
to Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5849
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
P1A0C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5850
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5851
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power At The AC Power
Point
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power at the AC Power
Point
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is
grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 cycle
110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and
HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral).
NOTE: The electrical device that is powered by the AC power point must not exceed 150 watts.
NOTE: If the green LED is flashing, the AC power point may be overloaded, overheated or shorted.
Unplug the electrical device from the AC power point and cycle the key. Refer to the Owner's
Literature to determine if the electrical device is appropriate for the AC power point.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Circuits
- DC/AC inverter
- AC power point
PINPOINT TEST A: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO POWER
AT THE AC POWER POINT
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK CIRCUITS SBP04 (GN/RD) AND CBP35
(YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293a.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-1, circuit SBP04 (GN/RD), harness side
and ground.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 1 (30A) and 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit(s).
TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5852
A2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293a-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK CIRCUITS HYA01 (OG/GN) AND HYA02
(OG/WH) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293b.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-1, circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side
and AC power point C2292-1 circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side;
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-5, circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness
side and AC power point C2292-3 circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-1, component side and AC power point
C2292-2.
- Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-3, component side and AC power point
C2292-1.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5853
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current
(DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and
Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED
Indicator Is Never On
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED
Indicator is Never On
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is
grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 cycle
110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and
HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). If a fault in the system is detected, the LED flashes when the key is in
the ON position. The LED continuously illuminates if the system is operating correctly when the key
is in the ON position.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Circuits
- DC/AC inverter
- AC power point
PINPOINT TEST B: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE AC
POWER POINT LED INDICATOR IS NEVER ON
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP35 (YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293a.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5854
GO to B2.
No
CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system
for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293a-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK CIRCUITS LYA03 (YE/VT) AND RYA03 (BU/BN)
FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293b.
- Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-9, circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side
and AC power point C2292-6 circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side; and between DC/AC inverter
C2293b-8, circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side and AC power point C2292-5 circuit RYA03
(BU/BN), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
REPAIR the circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT LED
- Test the diode between AC power point C2292-5, component side and AC power point C2292-6,
component side in both directions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5855
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms in one direction and between 10-20 ohms in the
opposite direction?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current
(DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and
Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery system. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- PCM
- 12-volt battery
- Battery cables
- DC/DC converter
PINPOINT TEST C: THE DC/DC CONVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE PCM FOR DTCs
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test/Retrieve and Record On-Demand
and Continuous Memory DTCs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5856
- Are any PCM DTCs present?
Yes
For DTC P1A0C only, GO to C2. For all other DTCs, REFER to Computers and Control Systems
Information.
No
GO to C2.
------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- Ignition OFF.
- Carry out the Battery - Condition Test to determine if the battery can hold a charge and is OK for
use. Refer to Battery. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests
- Did the battery pass the condition test?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
INSTALL a new 12-volt battery.
------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS
- Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing in Battery. See: Starting
and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See:
Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection
- Are any circuits causing excessive current drains?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C4.
------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- Start the engine.
- NOTE: The vehicle will start when the ignition switch is turned to the START position, but after a
short period of time (approximately 2 minutes) the engine may shut down with the ignition switch
still in the ON position. The DC/DC converter will output a normal charging rate with the engine
running or not, but the engine MUST have run at least once. The state of charge of the High
Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) will have a direct affect on the length of engine running time.
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), monitor the
voltage at the 12-volt battery.
- Is the voltage between 13.2-16.0 volts?
Yes
The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C5.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5857
------------------------------------------------- C5 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on
high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter
positive C1457c, post side and 12-volt battery positive C1100a, post side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on
high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter
negative C1457b, post side and DC/DC converter ground G105, ground bolt side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C7 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER
OPERATION
- Disconnect all of the DC/DC converter connectors.
- Check for: corrosion.
- pushed-out pins.
- Connect all of the DC/DC converter connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter .
TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5858
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair High Voltage Converter/Inverter
Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint
Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery.
2. Remove the console trim insert.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the AC power point.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5861
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery.
2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the DC/AC inverter.
4. Remove the 2 DC/AC inverter nuts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Remove the DC/AC inverter bolt.
- To install, tighten 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5862
6. Remove the DC/AC inverter.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5863
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Point
Power Point
Removal
NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location.
1. Open the power point cover.
2. Install the Power Point Socket Remover in one of the power point socket slots.
3. Position the Power Point Socket Remover so that it engages in the adjacent slot.
4. Using the Power Point Socket Remover, pull the power point socket out of the retainer.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5867
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction
Box
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom the
fuse cover to remove.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction
Box > Page 5872
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction
Box > Page 5873
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction
Box > Page 5874
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart
Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom the
fuse cover to remove.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart
Junction Box > Page 5877
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart
Junction Box > Page 5878
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart
Junction Box > Page 5879
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB)
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5884
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5885
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5886
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5887
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5888
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5891
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5892
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5893
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5894
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5895
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5896
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5897
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5898
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5899
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5900
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5901
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5902
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5903
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5904
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5905
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5906
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5907
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5908
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5909
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5910
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5911
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5912
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5913
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5914
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5915
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5916
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5917
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5918
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 5922
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5927
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5928
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5929
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5930
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5931
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5932
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5933
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5934
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5935
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5936
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5937
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5938
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5939
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5940
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5941
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5942
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5943
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5944
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5945
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5946
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5947
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5948
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5949
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5950
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5951
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5952
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5953
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5954
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5955
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5956
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5957
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5958
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5959
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5960
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE
devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful
configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a
successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 5964
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of
these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step will clear DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This will make sure that all displays are visible
under all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 5968
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5973
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE
devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful
configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a
successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5977
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of
these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step will clear DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This will make sure that all displays are visible
under all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5981
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5986
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5987
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5988
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5989
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5990
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5993
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5994
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5995
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5996
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5997
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5998
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5999
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6001
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6004
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6005
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6006
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6011
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6012
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6013
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6014
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6015
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6018
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6019
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6020
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6021
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6022
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6023
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6024
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6025
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6026
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6029
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6030
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6031
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint
Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation
Alignment: Specifications Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance
Weight, and Tire Inflation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint
Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 6037
Alignment: Specifications Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint
Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 6038
Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications
Alignment Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint
Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 6039
Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber
Alignment: Description and Operation Camber
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative and Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 6042
Alignment: Description and Operation Caster
Wheel Alignment Angles
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest
caster.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 6043
Alignment: Description and Operation Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Wheel Alignment Angles
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 6044
Alignment: Description and Operation Drift/Pull
Wheel Alignment Angles
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
- A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead
path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
- Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 6045
Alignment: Description and Operation
Camber
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative and Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Caster
Wheel Alignment Angles
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest
caster.
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Wheel Alignment Angles
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 6046
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Drift/Pull
Wheel Alignment Angles
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
- A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead
path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
- Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown).
Nibble
Wheel Alignment Angles
Nibble
Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various
road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel.
Poor Groove Feel
Wheel Alignment Angles
Poor Groove Feel
Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as
the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead
(under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center."
- Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the
gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the
effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch.
- In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between
wander and poor groove feel.
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Wheel Alignment Angles
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to
center after a turn or steering correction.
Shimmy
Wheel Alignment Angles
Shimmy
Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering
wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements.
Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire
contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface.
Toe
Wheel Alignment Angles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 6047
Toe
Positive Toe (Toe In)
Negative Toe (Toe Out)
The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability.
Wander
Wheel Alignment Angles
Wander
Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel
corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Front Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the
camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the
front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5.
4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle.
Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment.
5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle.
Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 6050
6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 6051
Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement
Ride Height Measurement
Front Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface
and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is
located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position.
2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement 2).
3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's
arm until the scriber point is located in the center of
the forward lower arm bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position.
4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement 3).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 6052
5. Subtract measurement 3 from measurement 2 to obtain the front ride height.
- Refer to Specifications.
Rear Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower
bolt (measurement 2).
2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower arm inner bolt
(measurement 3).
3. Subtract measurement 2 from measurement 3 to obtain the rear ride height.
- Refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 6053
Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment
Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel.
2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position using a suitable
holding device.
3. Check the toe settings following the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is
rotated.
Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
5. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut(s).
- Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie-rod threads.
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe.
7. NOTICE: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut, or damage to the
boot can occur.
NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s).
Tighten the tie-rod end jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 6054
9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor.
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. NOTICE: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct
clamping.
NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean
the area using only mild liquids.
NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the
serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush
and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
- Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel
knuckle bolt.
- Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
5. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel
Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and
Testing of Steering. See: Steering/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6060
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6061
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6062
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6063
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6064
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 6071
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during
parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring
System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 6077
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 6078
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Front Steering Knuckle: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel >
Page 6088
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left
Front Wheel
Front Steering Knuckle: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front
Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left
Front Wheel > Page 6094
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC
C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6105
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the brake disc.
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the outer CV joint spindle from the wheel hub.
4. Remove and discard the tie-rod end nut.
5. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to
the wheel knuckle can result.
NOTICE: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the Tie-Rod End Remover.
Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6106
6. Remove and discard the lower ball joint bolt and nut.
7. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside.
8. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts and the wheel knuckle.
- Discard the nuts and bolts.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the new lower ball joint bolt and nut.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
4. Install the wheel speed sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Position the tie-rod end into the wheel knuckle and install the new tie-rod end nut.
- Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
6. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the brake disc.
8. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be
tightened to specification before the
vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded
with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install the new front wheel hub nut.
- Tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid
This vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power-Assisted Steering (EPAS) System. There is no fluid
reservoir to check or fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6114
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6115
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6116
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6117
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6118
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Page 6123
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Page 6124
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Page 6125
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Page 6126
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Page 6127
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page
6133
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
Engine Control Components
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, for example, during
parking maneuvers.
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
6139
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
6140
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
6141
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
6142
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
6143
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
6144
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
6145
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
6146
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
Steering Column Lock: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder > Page 6155
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Steering Column Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign.
Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 6161
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 11-3-5 > Mar > 11 >
Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Comes Loose
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Air Cleaner Intake Pipe
Comes Loose
TSB 11-3-5
03/15/11
3.0L ENGINE - AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE COMING LOOSE FROM AIR CLEANER HOUSING BUILT ON OR BEFORE 2/1/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and built on or
before 02/01/2009 may exhibit the air cleaner intake pipe coming loose from the air cleaner
housing.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace air cleaner housing with a revised air cleaner housing. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-12.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110305A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Air Cleaner Housing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In
Cold Temps
Steering Damper: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In
Cold Temps > Page 6180
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel
Nibble In Cold Temps
Steering Damper: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel
Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 6186
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear
Steering Gear
Steering Gear - Exploded View
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the front wheels and tires.
2. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
- Remove the ignition key.
3. NOTICE: Do not allow the steering wheel to rotate while the intermediate shaft is disconnected
or damage to the clockspring can result.
If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered.
For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering gear bolt and disconnect the
coupling from the steering gear. To install, tighten the new bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
4. From the engine compartment, loosen the 2 steering gear bolts.
5. If equipped, remove the 3 pin-type retainers and the steering gear shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6191
6. Remove and discard the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts.
- To install, tighten the new nuts to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
7. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to
the wheel knuckle can result.
Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the tie-rod ends from the wheel knuckles.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles (except Hybrid)
8. Remove the rear transaxle insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles with automatic transaxle - 2.5L
9. Remove the 3 transmission damper bolts and the transmission damper.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
All vehicles
10. Remove and discard the 2 steering gear bolts.
- To install, tighten the new bolts to 125 Nm (92 lb-ft).
11. NOTE: For All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles (except Hybrid), it is necessary to grasp the
driveshaft by hand and apply slight downward pressure
to obtain clearance for the removal of the steering gear.
Rotate the steering gear 90 degrees clockwise and remove it from the LH side of the vehicle.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
13. Check and, if necessary, align the front end.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6192
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Boot
Steering Gear Boot
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the outer tie-rod end. For additional information, refer to Tie Rod End - Outer See: Tie
Rod/Service and Repair/Tie Rod End - Outer.
2. Remove the tie-rod end jam nut.
3. Remove and discard the 2 steering gear boot clamps and the steering gear boot.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On
Turns
Steering Shaft: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On
Turns > Page 6201
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column
Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column
Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6207
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6208
Steering Shaft: Service and Repair
Steering Column Shaft
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the LH instrument panel side finish panel.
3. Through the side finish panel opening, remove the ground wire eyelet bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6209
- Position the 2 ground wire eyelets and wires aside.
4. Through the side finish panel opening, disconnect the 2 instrument panel wiring harness
electrical connectors and, if equipped, the battery
high-voltage jumper switch electrical connector. Position the connectors and harnesses aside.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and rotate the steering wheel clockwise until the
steering column coupling-to-steering column bolt is
accessible.
6. Through the side finish panel opening, remove and discard the steering column shaft
coupling-to-steering column bolt.
- To install, tighten the new bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
7. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key.
- Rotate the steering wheel counter clockwise until the column locks.
8. NOTICE: Do not allow the steering column shaft to rotate while the lower shaft is disconnected
or damage to the clockspring can result.
If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered.
For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Separate the steering column coupling from the steering column.
9. Remove the 3 steering column dash seal nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
10. From the passenger compartment, slide the dash seal upwards on the steering column shaft.
11. Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt.
- To install, tighten the new bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
12. Remove the steering column shaft and dash seal.
13. Remove the steering column dash seal from the shaft.
- Inspect the dash seal and clip-type retainers for damage and, if necessary, install a new dash
seal.
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering
Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft Coupler: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering
Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6218
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft Coupler: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On
Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6224
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page
6233
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
> Page 6239
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 09-6-7 > Apr > 09 > Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't
Fully Release
Parking Brake Pedal: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully
Release
TSB 09-6-7
04/06/09
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL WILL NOT FULLY RETURN WHEN RELEASED - INDICATOR STAYS
ON
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, built on
10/1/2008 through and including 1/26/2009, may exhibit a parking brake indicator on the dash, due
to the parking brake pedal not returning to the fully released position.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify parking brake indicator is illuminated in the dash.
2. Pull the pedal up to the fully released position by hand.
3. If the indicator does not go out, this procedure does not apply. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 206-00.
4. If the indicator does go out, replace the parking brake control assembly following WSM, Section
206-05.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090607A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.9 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Parking Brake Control Assembly (Do Not Use With
2780A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2780 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch > Page 6252
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6253
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
2. Disconnect the steering wheel switch electrical connector from the clockspring.
- Detach the steering wheel switch wiring from the retainers and position the wires aside.
3. Remove the steering wheel bolt.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. NOTICE: Do not allow the Steering Wheel Puller to damage the steering wheel switch wires and
connector while removing the steering
wheel.
Using the Steering Wheel Puller, remove the steering wheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6254
5. Tape the clockspring center rotor to the outer housing to keep it from rotating.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Tie Rod End - Inner
Tie Rod: Service and Repair Tie Rod End - Inner
Tie Rod End - Inner
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Turn the steering wheel fully in the direction of the inner tie-rod end that is being removed.
3. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. Remove and discard the outer tie-rod end nut.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
5. Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the outer tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle and
remove the tie rod.
6. Remove the tie-rod end jam nut.
7. Remove and discard the boot clamps and the steering gear boot.
8. Using a suitable tool, hold the steering gear rack.
9. Using a suitable tool, remove the inner tie-rod end.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
10. NOTE: Using a suitable tool, hold the steering gear rack while tightening the inner tie rod.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Tie Rod End - Inner > Page 6259
Tie Rod: Service and Repair Tie Rod End - Outer
Tie Rod End - Outer
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar.
Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
3. Remove and discard the outer tie-rod end nut.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
4. Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the outer tie-rod end from the front wheel knuckle.
5. Remove the outer tie-rod end.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications
Ball Joint: Specifications
Ball Joint Deflection Lower...................................................................................................................
..................................................................................0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection
Control Arm Bushing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing
Inspection
TSB 09-5-1
03/23/09
LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING INSPECTION PROCEDURE
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Many states and Canadian provinces require annual safety inspections which include the
evaluation of suspension components. The information in this procedure is intended to assist the
technician performing the inspection with specific criteria for 2001-2009 Escape and Mariner lower
control arm (LCA) bushings and will prevent the unnecessary replacement of good components.
ACTION Inspect according to the procedure below.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
The LCA bushing is located at the rear of the front suspension lower control arm. The bushing is
identified as number 1 of Figure 1. The control arm is mounted in the front subframe with bolts
number 2 and number 3. The bushing is part of the LCA and cannot be serviced separately from
the arm.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 6269
Figure 2 - Shows a new bushing prior to assembly into the control arm. Bolt number 2 passes
through the inner sleeve and the outer sleeve is pressed into the control arm. The rubber bushing
is bonded to both the inner and outer sleeves.
Figure 3 - Illustrates a generic bushing showing minor sur[ace cracks that do not adversely affect
the performance of the bushing. Bushings exhibiting sur[ace cracks with a depth less than 3/8" (10
mm) are acceptable and will continue to function normally. These do not require replacement.
Figure 4 - Illustrates a partial separation between the rubber and the outer sleeve. The bushing
may show signs of movement on the rubber surface, making the surface shiny. Bushings with a
separation or crack depth less than or equal to 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and meet all functional
requirements. These do not require replacement.
Bushings with a separation or crack greater than 3/8" (10 mm) in depth should be replaced. The
customer may hear a bang or clunk in the front suspension if there is enough separation for the
arm to contact the subframe. This does not affect the retention of the control arm to the vehicle as
the bushing is sandwiched in the subframe and held in place with the bolt. The vehicle can be
safely operated in this condition until the bushing is replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 6270
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle - Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6274
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the wheel hub from rotating.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6275
Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor ring.
4. Remove the brake drum.
5. Using the Front Hub Remover and Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent tools, remove the wheel
hub.
6. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using a suitable press and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, press the inner
bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
7. Remove the brake shoes.
8. Remove the parking brake cable bracket-to-control arm bolt.
9. Unclip the wheel speed harness retainer from the parking brake cable and disconnect the cable
from the brake backing plate.
10. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
11. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor from the wheel knuckle, and position the sensor and
harness aside.
12. Remove the stabilizer bar link lower nut and disconnect the link from the wheel knuckle.
- Discard the nut.
13. Remove the coil spring. For additional information, refer to Spring See: Suspension Spring (
Coil / Leaf )/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear Suspension.
14. Remove and discard the lower ball joint nut.
15. Index-mark the notch on the cam nut adjustment cam.
16. Remove and discard the wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
17. Remove the wheel knuckle.
18. Remove the wheel bearing. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing - Front Wheel
Drive (FWD) See: Wheel Bearing/Service and
Repair/Rear Suspension.
Installation
1. Install the wheel bearing. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing - Front Wheel Drive
(FWD) See: Wheel Bearing/Service and
Repair/Rear Suspension.
2. NOTICE: The joint area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping.
NOTE: Align the notch on the cam nut with the index marks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6276
Position the wheel knuckle and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
3. Using a suitable tool, hold the cam nut stationary while tightening the new wheel knuckle bolt.
- Tighten to 125 Nm (92 lb-ft).
4. Position the lower ball joint into the wheel knuckle and install the new lower ball joint nut.
- Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
5. Install the coil spring. For additional information, refer to Spring See: Suspension Spring ( Coil /
Leaf )/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear Suspension.
6. Connect the stabilizer bar link and install the nut.
- Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
7. Position the wheel speed sensor harness and the sensor.
8. Install the wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
- Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
9. Connect the brake tube to the wheel cylinder.
- Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
10. Install the brake tube bracket bolt.
- Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
11. Connect the parking brake cable to the brake backing plate and install the parking brake cable
bracket bolt.
- Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
12. Install the brake shoes and brake drum.
13. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the wheel hub from rotating.
Install a new wheel hub nut.
- Tighten the nut to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
14. Bleed the brake system.
15. Check and, if necessary, align the rear end.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bar Bushing
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTICE: When installing the stabilizer bar bushings, make sure the bushings are correctly oriented
with the bushing flanges in the up position and the bushing split pointing to the front of the vehicle.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 2 stabilizer bar bushing bracket bolts and the stabilizer bar bushing bracket.
- Discard the bolts.
- To install, tighten the new bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar bushing for wear. If necessary, install a new part.
Remove the stabilizer bar bushing.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
Stabilizer Link: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
TSB 09-24-2
12/14/09
CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR
END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009
FORD: 2005-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over
bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links?
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-00 diagnostics.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2.
2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any
evidence present of loose upper nuts?
a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
NOTE
THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK
LOWER ATTACHMENT.
b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to
replace the stabilizer bar end link.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test,
Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End
Links (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 6289
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5K483 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec >
09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
Stabilizer Link: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On
Bumps
TSB 09-24-2
12/14/09
CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR
END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009
FORD: 2005-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over
bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links?
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-00 diagnostics.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2.
2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any
evidence present of loose upper nuts?
a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
NOTE
THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK
LOWER ATTACHMENT.
b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to
replace the stabilizer bar end link.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test,
Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End
Links (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec >
09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 6295
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5K483 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6296
Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTICE: Do not use power tools to remove or install the stabilizer bar link nuts. Damage to the
stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots may occur.
NOTICE: Do not hold the stabilizer bar link boot with any tool or damage to the boot may occur.
NOTE: The stabilizer bar links are designed with low friction ball joints that have a low breakaway
torque.
NOTE: When installing the stabilizer link to the stabilizer bar, make sure the stabilizer bar is
perpendicular to the stabilizer link when tightening the link nut or the link nut may not seat properly.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer link nut.
Remove and discard the lower stabilizer bar link nut.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots for wear. If necessary, install new
parts.
Remove the stabilizer bar link.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6306
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6307
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6313
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6314
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6315
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6316
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6317
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6318
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6319
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6320
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6321
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - FRONT
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6322
Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Shown, All Other Vehicles Similar
NOTE: Escape and Mariner only.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6323
Escape And Mariner Only
NOTE: Escape Hybrid only.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6324
Escape Hybrid Only
All vehicles
NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the
same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement
part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during
reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6325
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead
position and remove the key.
Hybrid vehicles 3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to
Hybrid Drive Systems. 4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer.
All vehicles 5. Remove the front tires.
6. NOTICE:
- Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
- Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. To install, tighten to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
- Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard
the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). 9. Remove the 6
bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield.
10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6326
11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Hybrid vehicles only 12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer
bracket.
All vehicles 13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
All vehicles except hybrid 14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6327
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
All vehicles 15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt.
- To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft).
16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and
installing the stabilizer link nut.
Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts. To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and
the bolts.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe.
21. NOTE:
- Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
- When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are
fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification.
Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts. To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
- To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the front subframe.
24. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer the components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6336
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6337
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6343
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6344
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6345
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6346
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6347
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6348
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6349
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6350
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6359
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6360
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6366
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6367
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6368
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6369
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6370
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6371
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6372
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6373
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6374
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - REAR
Subframe - Rear
Removal
All vehicles
1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance
of vital parts and systems and their failure can
result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if
installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute
design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct
retention of these parts.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 2. Remove the rear axle assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6375
All vehicles 3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and position
the 4 rear control arms aside.
5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts.
- To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
- To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe.
3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. Loosely install the bolts.
4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Vehicles with AWD 5. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles 6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6376
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6385
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6386
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6392
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6393
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 >
M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only)
Clutch Release Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico
Only)
TSB 09-18-4
MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2009 Escape
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive
clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions
within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs.
clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7B546 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6399
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6400
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6401
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6402
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6403
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6404
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Removal and Replacement
Front Suspension
Strut and Spring Assembly
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal.
Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip.
3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove the hose from the bracket and position
the brake jounce hose aside.
4. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
5. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
6. Remove and discard the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts.
7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6409
Remove and discard the 4 strut upper bushing nuts.
8. NOTICE: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod constant
velocity (CV) joint can result in the
separation of internal parts, causing failure of the axle shaft.
Remove the strut and spring assembly.
9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly,
refer to Strut and Spring Assembly See: Suspension
Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Overhaul.
Installation
1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender.
2. Align the 4 new strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks.
- Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
4. Install the new upper stabilizer bar link nut.
- Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
5. Install the wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip.
7. Check the front end alignment and adjust as necessary.
Rear Suspension
Spring
NOTE: All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle shown, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicle similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6410
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt.
3. Disconnect the brake tube from the wheel cylinder and position the brake tube and bracket
assembly aside.
4. Using a suitable jackstand, support the wheel knuckle.
5. Remove and discard the shock absorber lower nut, washer and bolt.
6. Remove the upper arm. For additional information, refer to Upper Arm See: Control Arm/Service
and Repair/Rear Suspension/Upper Arm.
7. Loosen the lower arm inner bolt.
8. NOTE: Note the position of the coil spring insulators and coil spring for installation.
Using the jackstand, carefully lower the wheel knuckle.
9. Remove the coil spring.
Installation
1. Align the coil spring and coil spring insulators to the previously noted position.
2. Using a suitable jackstand, carefully raise the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the new shock absorber lower bolt, washer and nut.
- Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
4. Install the upper arm. For additional information, refer to Upper Arm See: Control Arm/Service
and Repair/Rear Suspension/Upper Arm.
5. Connect the brake tube fitting to the wheel cylinder.
- Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6411
6. Install the brake tube bracket bolt.
- Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
7. Install the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt.
- Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
8. Bleed the rear wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6412
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Overhaul
Front Strut and Spring Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the strut rod nut.
Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor.
2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly.
3. Remove and discard the strut rod nut.
- To assemble, tighten the new nut to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
4. Remove the strut.
5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator.
6. Remove the coil spring.
7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator.
8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing
plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6413
the strut is installed.
Remove the bearing plate.
9. Remove the bearing.
10. Remove the strut upper bushing.
11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper.
12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6422
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6423
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6429
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6430
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement
Front Suspension
Front Strut and Spring Assembly
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal.
Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip.
3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove the hose from the bracket and position
the brake jounce hose aside.
4. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
5. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
6. Remove and discard the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts.
7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6433
Remove and discard the 4 strut upper bushing nuts.
8. NOTICE: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod constant
velocity (CV) joint can result in the
separation of internal parts, causing failure of the axle shaft.
Remove the strut and spring assembly.
9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly,
refer to Strut and Spring Assembly See: Overhaul.
Installation
1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender.
2. Align the 4 new strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks.
- Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
4. Install the new upper stabilizer bar link nut.
- Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
5. Install the wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip.
7. Check the front end alignment and adjust as necessary.
Rear Suspension
Rear Shock Absorber
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6434
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the wheel and tire.
3. Using a suitable jackstand, support the rear suspension.
4. Remove and discard the upper shock absorber nut and bushing assembly.
- To install, tighten the new nut and bushing assembly to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Remove and discard the lower shock absorber nut, washer and bolt.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
6. Remove the shock absorber.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6435
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul
Front Strut and Spring Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the strut rod nut.
Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor.
2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly.
3. Remove and discard the strut rod nut.
- To assemble, tighten the new nut to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
4. Remove the strut.
5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator.
6. Remove the coil spring.
7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator.
8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing
plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6436
the strut is installed.
Remove the bearing plate.
9. Remove the bearing.
10. Remove the strut upper bushing.
11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper.
12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6441
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Front
Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer
wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the
wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6442
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6443
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing - Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6444
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor ring.
4. Remove the brake drum.
5. Using the Front Hub Remover and Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent tools, remove the wheel
hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6445
6. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using a suitable press and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, press the inner
bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
7. Remove and discard the wheel bearing snap ring.
8. Using the Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent and the Axle Bearing Remover, remove the
bearing from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer,
install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Using the Half Shaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
4. Install the wheel speed sensor ring.
5. Install the brake drum.
6. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install the new wheel hub nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6446
- Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Rear Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Front Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
Jacking and Lifting
WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the
parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended
vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could
unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the
vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or
jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline
unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could
cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result
in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a
deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other
purpose.
NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on
lift without first checking for possible interference.
NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage
components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting
the vehicle.
Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training > Page 6460
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training > Page 6461
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page
6467
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page
6468
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
TSB 09-5-8
03/23/09
ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT
BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009
and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the
chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF
THE POWERTRAIN.
1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type
maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h).
2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for
noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting
noise.
3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 204-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire
Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1,
1015D)
090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 6477
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
TSB 09-5-8
03/23/09
ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT
BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009
and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the
chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF
THE POWERTRAIN.
1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type
maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h).
2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for
noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting
noise.
3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 204-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire
Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1,
1015D)
090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises >
Page 6483
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6488
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See:
Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer
wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the
wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6489
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering/Front
Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6490
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing - Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6491
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor ring.
4. Remove the brake drum.
5. Using the Front Hub Remover and Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent tools, remove the wheel
hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6492
6. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using a suitable press and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, press the inner
bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
7. Remove and discard the wheel bearing snap ring.
8. Using the Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent and the Axle Bearing Remover, remove the
bearing from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer,
install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Using the Half Shaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
4. Install the wheel speed sensor ring.
5. Install the brake drum.
6. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install the new wheel hub nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6493
- Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information
> Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Rear Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Front Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Install the 5 wheel nuts. Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern. Tighten to.......................................
............................................................................................................................................................1
35 Nm (100 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub See: Wheel Bearing/Service and
Repair/Front Suspension.
2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub.
- Discard the wheel stud.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6503
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove a wheel stud. Damage to the wheel hub may result.
1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, remove the wheel stud.
3. NOTE: Make sure to use washers that have an ID that is larger than the OD of the wheel stud
serrations. Use enough washers (approximately 4) to
allow the wheel stud to fully seat against the hub flange.
Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made
by the original wheel stud.
- Place approximately 4 washers over the outside end of the wheel stud and thread a standard
wheel nut onto the wheel stud with the flat side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6504
against the washers.
- Tighten the wheel nut until the wheel stud head seats against the back side of the wheel hub
flange.
4. Remove the wheel nut and washers.
5. Install the brake shoes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C Side To Side Temperature Variations
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Customer Interest A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations
TSB 10-8-6
05/10/10
CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURE VARIATION FROM SIDE TO SIDE-BUILT BEFORE
12/17/2008
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-12-6 to update the Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before
12/17/2008 may exhibit intermittent or erratic side to side temperature difference and/or temp
fluctuation from the climate control vents. The concern may be with the temperature blend door
actuator.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove temperature blend door actuator(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01.
2. Inspect the 5 digit manufacturer's date code on the temperature blend door actuator. It will be
the last 5 digits on the second line of manufacturer's
data. The first three digits equal day of year. The last two digits equal year. (Figure 1)
a. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30708 or lower - replace the
temperature blend door actuator assembly.
b. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30808 or higher - reinstall the
actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per
WSM, Section 412-00.
c. If the part number is something other than 8L84-19E616-EA - reinstall the actuator and continue
with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section
412-00.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC),
AND EITHER ONE OF THE ACTUATORS EXHIBITS THIS CONCERN AND HAS SUSPECT
DATE CODE, THEN REPLACE BOTH RIGHT (RH) AND LEFT HAND (LH) ACTUATORS AS A
SET.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C Side To Side Temperature Variations > Page 6515
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100806A 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.3 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic
Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
100806A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.7 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic
Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
100806B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.8 Hrs
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door
Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100806B 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.4 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door
Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E616 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May >
10 > A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations
Air Door Actuator / Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Side To Side Temperature
Variations
TSB 10-8-6
05/10/10
CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURE VARIATION FROM SIDE TO SIDE-BUILT BEFORE
12/17/2008
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-12-6 to update the Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before
12/17/2008 may exhibit intermittent or erratic side to side temperature difference and/or temp
fluctuation from the climate control vents. The concern may be with the temperature blend door
actuator.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove temperature blend door actuator(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01.
2. Inspect the 5 digit manufacturer's date code on the temperature blend door actuator. It will be
the last 5 digits on the second line of manufacturer's
data. The first three digits equal day of year. The last two digits equal year. (Figure 1)
a. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30708 or lower - replace the
temperature blend door actuator assembly.
b. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30808 or higher - reinstall the
actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per
WSM, Section 412-00.
c. If the part number is something other than 8L84-19E616-EA - reinstall the actuator and continue
with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section
412-00.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC),
AND EITHER ONE OF THE ACTUATORS EXHIBITS THIS CONCERN AND HAS SUSPECT
DATE CODE, THEN REPLACE BOTH RIGHT (RH) AND LEFT HAND (LH) ACTUATORS AS A
SET.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May >
10 > A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations > Page 6521
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100806A 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.3 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic
Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
100806A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.7 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic
Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
100806B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.8 Hrs
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door
Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100806B 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.4 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door
Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E616 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger (DATC)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger (DATC) > Page 6524
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger (DATC) > Page 6525
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger (DATC) > Page 6526
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger (DATC) > Page 6527
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6530
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6531
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6532
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6533
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Procedures
Auxiliary Mode Door Actuator
Removal and Installation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2
auxiliary line floorpan bracket nuts. To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6536
3. NOTE: The D-pillar bracket mill remain in place. Remove the LH D-pillar trim panel. See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim
4. NOTE: When installing, tighten the screws on the High voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) first to
make sure the duct is sealed correctly. Remove
the 4 battery airflow duct screws, the 1 pin-type retainer and the battery airflow duct assembly To
install, tighten 12 Nm (18 lb-in)
5. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control fresh air inlet duct nuts
^ To install tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control housing bolts.
^ To install tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. Remove the D-pillar bracket pin-type retainer.
8. Remove the D-pillar bracket upper pin-type retainer and bolt end remove the D-pillar bracket. 9.
Disconnect the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator electrical connector
10. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be slightly repositioned to remove the
screws. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6537
actuator screws. ^
Disconnect the rod.
^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
11. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator
12. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be installed behind the lower portion of the
D-pillar bracket. When installed correctly, the
auxiliary climate control housing bolt will go through the D-pillar bracket first, then through the
housing mounting location.
NOTE: Before the D-pillar trim panel and LH quarter trim panel are installed, correct auxiliary mode
door actuator operation can be verified by carrying out the Traction Battery Control Module (TBCM)
self-test while visually verifying correct actuator operation. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6538
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Removal and Replacement
Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door
Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator can be accessed from below the LH side of the
instrument panel.
1. Disconnect the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
3. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door
Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6539
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater
Core And Evaporator Core Housing See:
Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the air inlet mode door actuator electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH
Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH
Removal and Installation
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with dual-zone Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC),
the RH temperature blend door actuator is used to control only the RH temperature blend door. On
vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC), the RH temperature blend
door actuator is used to control the single temperature blend door for both sides of the vehicle.
1. Remove the upper center instrument panel finish panel.
2. Remove the passenger airbag module. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
3. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the RH panel duct screw.
4. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the upper RH center panel duct
screw
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6540
5. NOTE: The lower RH center panel duct screw is located just below the RH lower rear corner of
the Audio Control Module (ACM).
Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw.
1. Detach the wire harness pin-type retainer.
2. Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw.
6. Working through the glove compartment opening, detach the wire harness pin-type retainer
above the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
7. Disconnect the RH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector.
8. NOTICE: Use care to avoid dropping the RH temperature blend door actuator screws into the
plenum chamber when removing the
screws. If a screw is dropped into the plenum chamber, it may cause the airflow mode doors to
jam, or may cause noise concerns.
NOTE: The RH center instrument panel duct must be slightly repositioned to allow access to the
RH temperature blend door actuator screws.
Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
9. Remove the RH temperature blend door actuator.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH
Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6541
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The LH temperature blend door actuator is present on dual-zone Electronic Automatic
Temperature Control (EATC) vehicles to control the LH temperature blend door only. Vehicles
equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) are not equipped with this actuator.
For EMTC vehicles, refer to Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH See: Temperature Blend Door
Actuator - RH.
1. Disconnect the LH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 LH temperature blend door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
3. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Air Duct: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6550
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6551
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Air Duct: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 6557
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 6558
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement
Air Duct: Removal and Replacement
Footwell Duct - Rear
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats.
2. Remove the floor console.
3. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panels and the lower A-pillar trim panels.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
4. Detach the selector lever cable from the gearshift assembly.
1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the gearshift lever.
2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 6561
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 6562
Air Duct: Overhaul
Instrument Panel Air Distribution Ducts
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 6563
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the passenger airbag module. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
2. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM).
3. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC).
4. Remove the instrument panel.
5. Remove the 4 defroster duct adapter screws and the defroster duct adapter.
6. Remove the 4 Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) screws and the FDIM.
- Disconnect the FDIM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 instrument cluster opening instrument panel trim screws.
8. Remove the 4 instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket screws.
9. Remove the 2 instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket nuts.
10. Remove the 3 glove compartment screws and the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 6564
11. Remove the 2 glove compartment latch striker screws and the glove compartment latch striker.
12. Remove the lower center instrument panel trim screw.
13. Remove the 4 lower steering column opening instrument panel trim screws.
14. Disconnect the headlamp switch and the message center switch electrical connectors.
15. Remove the 2 upper corner instrument panel trim screws.
16. Remove the 2 lower corner instrument panel trim screws.
17. Remove the 2 instrument panel support-to-defroster duct screws.
18. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel
support to access the LH duct assembly upper center
screw.
Remove the 4 LH duct assembly screws and remove the LH duct assembly.
19. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel
support to access the RH duct assembly upper center
screw.
Remove the 4 RH duct assembly screws and remove the RH duct assembly.
20. To assemble, reverse the assembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 6573
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 6574
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From
Dash Vents
Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From
Dash Vents > Page 6580
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From
Dash Vents > Page 6581
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Register - Passenger Side
Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Passenger Side
Register - Passenger Side
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim
ring. Prying on the register trim ring will
damage the register assembly.
Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while
working around the perimeter of the register.
2. Remove the passenger side register.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Register - Passenger Side > Page 6584
Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Center
Register - Center
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The center registers are available only as part of the upper center instrument panel finish
panel assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Register - Passenger Side > Page 6585
Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Driver Side
Register - Driver Side
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim
ring. Prying on the register trim ring will
damage the register assembly.
Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while
working around the perimeter of the register.
2. Remove the driver side register.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6589
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6590
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair
Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the engine coolant.
3. Remove the LH lower engine splash shield.
4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose.
5. Release the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose.
6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly.
9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other
detergents.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6594
- Fill the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6600
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6601
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6602
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6603
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6604
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6605
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6606
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6607
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6608
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6609
Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6610
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6611
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6612
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6613
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6614
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6615
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6616
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6617
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6618
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6619
Blower Motor: Service and Repair
Blower Motor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector.
2. Release the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and pull the vent tube down until it is disengaged
from the heater core and evaporator core housing.
3. NOTE: The carpet below the blower motor must be slightly repositioned to remove the blower
motor.
Rotate the blower motor counterclockwise to disengage it from the housing and remove the blower
motor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6623
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6624
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6628
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6629
Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Blower Motor Resistor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6630
Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Resistor
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 blower motor resistor screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the blower motor resistor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6634
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6635
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Speed Control
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the blower motor speed control.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations
Cabin Air Filter: Locations
A cabin air filter is available for this vehicle as a dealer installed accessory. The accessory cabin air
filter will be located in the air inlet under the RH side of the cowl panel grille, if installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page
6639
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
A cabin air filter is available for this vehicle as a dealer installed accessory. The accessory cabin air
filter will be located in the air inlet under the RH side of the cowl panel grille, if installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6643
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6644
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity
Sensor
In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown. In-vehicle temperature sensor similar.
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel
enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature
sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is
positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument
cluster finish panel could result.
Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow
access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and
humidity sensor.
3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor
electrical connector.
4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing.
5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel.
6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing
for installation. When installing the venturi, it
must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to
indicated that it is correctly attached.
Remove the venturi (if needed).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 6647
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper.
2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications
Compressor Clutch: Specifications
Air gap between pulley and hub...........................................................................................................
........................................0.3-0.6 mm (0.012-0.024 in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6652
Compressor Clutch: Adjustments
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Air Gap Adjustment
1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at 3 equally spaced places between the clutch plate and the A/C
clutch pulley.
2. If the A/C clutch air gap is out of range, remove the clutch plate. Add or remove spacers
between the clutch plate hub and the compressor shaft
until the clearance is within specification.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 6656
Compressor Clutch Coil: Service and Repair
Clutch and Clutch Field Coil - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal
1. Remove the A/C compressor. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor - 2.5L See: Service and Repair or Air
Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 3.0L (4V) See: Service and Repair.
2. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt.
1. Using a suitable spanner-type wrench, hold the A/C clutch disc and hub.
2. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 6657
3. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub and the A/C clutch disc and hub spacer(s).
4. Remove the A/C compressor pulley snap ring.
5. NOTICE: Do not use air tools. Damage to the Air Conditioning (A/C) clutch pulley or A/C
compressor may result.
Remove the A/C compressor pulley.
1. Install the A/C Compressor Shaft Protector.
2. Install a suitable 3-jaw puller on the A/C compressor shaft protector and A/C compressor pulley.
3. Remove the A/C compressor pulley.
6. Remove the 4 A/C clutch field coil screws.
7. Remove the A/C clutch field coil.
Installation
NOTE: A new A/C compressor may come equipped with a clutch and pulley. If not, the A/C clutch
components should be reused unless obvious signs of damage are found.
1. Visually inspect the A/C clutch disc and hub, A/C compressor pulley and A/C clutch field coil for
damage.
- Inspect for physical damage, including cracked or melted components or discoloration due to
excessive heat.
- Inspect for excessive wear, including grooving in the A/C clutch disc and hub or A/C compressor
pulley that is more than fingernail depth.
- Inspect for roughness in the A/C compressor pulley bearing.
2. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces.
3. Install the A/C clutch field coil.
4. Install the 4 A/C clutch field coil screws.
5. NOTICE: The Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor must be positioned on the press so that only
the flat part of the A/C compressor
housing is contacting the base with the A/C compressor shaft aligned with the center of the press
shaft. If the A/C compressor is not installed correctly on the press, the A/C compressor and/or A/C
compressor pulley will be damaged.
Install the A/C compressor pulley.
1. Install the A/C compressor on a suitable press.
2. Position the A/C compressor pulley on the A/C compressor.
3. Install the A/C Clutch Installer on the A/C compressor pulley.
4. Using the press, install the A/C compressor pulley.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 6658
6. Install the A/C compressor pulley snap ring with the bevel side out.
7. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch disc and hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline
opening.
8. Install the A/C clutch disc and hub.
9. Install the A/C compressor clutch disc and hub bolt.
1. Hold the A/C clutch disc and hub with a suitable spanner-type wrench.
2. Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
10. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch disc and hub spacers.
11. Install the A/C compressor. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor - 2.5L See: Service and Repair or Air
Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 3.0L (4V) See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6662
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Relay (A/CCR)
Note: The PCM parameter identifiers (PIDs) wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff (WAC) and
wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WAC_F) are used to monitor the A/CCR output.
The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch
or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives
a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the
communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that
are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C
operation and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position),
the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/CCR.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6663
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6664
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
A/C Condenser
The A/C condenser is an aluminum fin-and-micro-channel design heat exchanger located in front of
the vehicle radiator. It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over fins and tubes
to extract heat and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled.
On 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the top portion of the
condenser is partitioned from the refrigerant system and is used for transmission fluid cooling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6668
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair
Condenser Core - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a condenser core leak is suspected, the condenser core must be leak tested before it is
removed from the vehicle.
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the 4 radiator bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6669
5. Detach and remove the RH and LH radiator brackets.
6. Remove the condenser outlet and inlet fitting nuts and disconnect the fittings.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Vehicles with automatic transmission
7. NOTE: The transmission cooler hose inlet (upper tube) attaches to the transmission outlet line
(passenger side front of transmission). The
transmission cooler outlet (lower tube) attaches to the transmission inlet line (driver side of
transmission).
Release the 2 transmission cooler line clamps and disconnect the lines from the A/C condenser.
All vehicles
8. Remove the 2 condenser bolts.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
9. Remove the condenser core.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module
Removal and Installation
NOTE: When installing a new HVAC module on vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual
Temperature Control (EMTC), the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be
carried out to configure the new module to the vehicle. Refer to Information Bus.
1. Remove the middle center instrument panel finish panel.
2. Remove the 4 HVAC module screws.
3. Remove the HVAC module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module > Page 6674
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Passenger Zone Valve
Passenger Zone Valve
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Disconnect the passenger zone valve electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the 2 passenger zone valve fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
4. Remove the passenger zone valve bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
5. Remove the passenger zone valve.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
HVAC Module-EMTC
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
HVAC Module-EMTC > Page 6679
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
HVAC Module-DATC
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-DATC
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6682
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6683
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-EMTC
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6684
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Line Fittings
NOTICE: Use only a plastic or nonmetallic tool for removing O-ring seals and gasket seals from the
refrigerant line fittings. Use of a metallic tool will create scratches on the sealing surface of the
fitting that can result in refrigerant system leaks.
Whenever a refrigerant line fitting is disconnected, the fitting must be cleaned of any foreign
material and new O-ring seals and/or gasket seals must be installed. Use only the O-ring seals and
gasket seals specified in the Ford Master Parts Catalog.
If a refrigerant system line fitting must remain disconnected for an extended period of time, it
should be capped to avoid contamination of the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6696
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6697
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 6703
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 6704
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC
P2135/P2111/P0122
Throttle Body: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122
TSB 09-23-5
11/30/09
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P2135 - BUILT BETWEEN 6/22/2009-10/15/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion, Milan,
Fusion Hybrid, and Milan Hybrid vehicles, built on or between 6/22/2009 - 10/15/2009, may exhibit
a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or wrench light with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P2135. DTCs
P2111 and/or P0122 may also be present. Drivability symptoms may include intermittent rough
idle, idle speed below specification and/or reduced power. This concern may be attributed to
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) hardware. If the vehicle only exhibits DTCs P2111 or P0122 follow
normal Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test (PPT) diagnostics.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check for DTCs and confirm vehicle build date. Is DTC P2135 present and vehicle built on or
between 6/22/2009-10/15/2009?
a. Yes - proceed to Step 2.
b. No - Procedure does not apply. Refer to PC/ED PPT DV for appropriate diagnostic routines.
2. Replace the ETB per the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092305A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Fusion 0.6 Hr.
Hybrid, Milan, Milan Hybrid 2.5L Engine: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC
P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 6710
Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr.
Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9E926 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC
P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 6716
Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr.
Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9E926 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6717
Evaporator Core: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Core
NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator core is used for HVTB cooling on hybrid vehicles.
The evaporator core is an aluminum plate/fin-type and is located in the heater core and evaporator
core housing. A mixture of liquid refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the evaporator core
through the evaporator core inlet tube and continues out of the evaporator core through the
evaporator core outlet tube as a vapor. During A/C compressor operation, airflow from the blower
motor is cooled and dehumidified as it flows through the evaporator core fins.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6718
Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Evaporator/Condenser Core - On-Vehicle Leak Test
1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery,
Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
2. Disconnect the suspect evaporator core (leave the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
attached to the evaporator core) or condenser core from
the A/C system.
3. Clean the fittings.
4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Fittings Set to the condenser or evaporator
core/TXV tube connections.
5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to
the test fittings. If available, use hoses without
shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to
the test fittings or install an adapter that will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off
valve does not open.
Connect the red and blue hoses from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the test fittings on the
evaporator core/TXV or condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump.
6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for
a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove
any refrigerant from oil left in the evaporator core or condenser core. If the refrigerant is not
completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a refrigerant
leak.
7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the
gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum
pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure
rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set
connections before installing a new evaporator core or condenser core.
8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump.
Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the
101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
- If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
- If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the evaporator core or
condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
- If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check
for vacuum loss.
9. If the condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure, install a new condenser
core.
If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, as verified by the above procedure, disconnect the TXV and
recheck the evaporator core for a leak. If the evaporator core does leak, install a new evaporator
core or condenser core. TEST the system for normal operation.
If the evaporator core does not leak, install new evaporator core/TXV seals and retest the
evaporator core/TXV. If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, install a new TXV. TEST the system
for normal operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6722
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary
evaporator core on hybrid vehicles.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this
thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The
HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor
and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air
temperature.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and
prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the
A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to
cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls
below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the
evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels.
On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be
closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature
below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows
continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator
core to warm to acceptable levels.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core
housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning > Page 6725
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor
The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a
thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a
thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the
temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN
also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the
sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET
sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects.
The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling and improve defrost/demist
performance.
Note: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were
calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts.
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 6726
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away
from the evaporator discharge air temperature
sensor.
3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector.
4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
Air Conditioning
Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
NOTE: A second (auxiliary) TXV is used for High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) cooling on
hybrid vehicles.
The TXV is located at the evaporator core inlet and outlet tubes at the dash panel at the rear of the
engine compartment. The TXV provides a restriction to the flow of refrigerant from the
high-pressure side of the refrigerant system and separates the low-pressure and high-pressure
sides of the refrigerant system. Refrigerant entering and exiting the evaporator core passes
through the TXV through 2 separate flow paths. An internal temperature sensing bulb senses the
temperature of the refrigerant flowing out of the evaporator core and adjusts an internal pin-type
valve to meter the refrigerant flow into the evaporator core. The internal pin-type valve decreases
the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at lower temperatures and increases the
amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at higher temperatures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) > Page 6731
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Transducer
Air Conditioning
A/C Pressure Transducer (2.5L or 3.0L [4V] Only)
The A/C pressure transducer monitors the compressor discharge pressure and communicates with
the PCM. The PCM will interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event that the A/C pressure
transducer indicates high system discharge pressures. It is also used to sense low charge
conditions. If the pressure is below a predetermined value for a given ambient temperature, the
PCM will not allow the clutch to engage.
The A/C pressure transducer is located on the receiver/drier. It is not necessary to recover the
refrigerant before removing the A/C pressure transducer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 6732
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair
Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 TXV bolts and the TXV.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the reverse the removal procedure.
- If the TXV stud has become loose during removal, or has been removed for any reason, tighten
the TXV stud to 6 Nm (53 lb-in) before the TXV fitting nut is reinstalled.
- Install new O-ring seals and gasket seals.
5. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Heater Core
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core
1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the
Plugged Heater Core component test before the heater
core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as
follows:
Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant
leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in
the heater core.
2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of
non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the
heater hose connection and damage the heater core.
Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Heater Core > Page 6737
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Plugged
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Plugged
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level.
2. Start the engine and turn on the heater.
3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and outlet
hoses to see if they are hot.
4. If the outlet only is not hot:
- the heater core may have an air pocket.
- the heater core may be plugged.
5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Heater Core > Page 6738
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Pressure Test
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Pressure Test
Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test.
1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube.
4. Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter
BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater
hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the
heater core.
7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes.
8. If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the
heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the
vehicle.
9. Carry out the Bench Test. See: Heater Core - Bench Test
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Heater Core > Page 6739
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Bench Test
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Bench Test
1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle.
2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core.
3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then
connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Page 6740
Heater Core: Service and Repair
Heater Core
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
NOTE: Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle.
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater
Core And Evaporator Core Housing See:
Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the dash panel seal.
3. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the heater core.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Service and Repair
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Relief Valve - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the A/C pressure relief valve and O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. NOTE: A new O-ring seal will already be installed on the new A/C pressure relief valve service
part.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Add the correct amount of clean PAG refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system.
5. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line - 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover refrigerant.
3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6748
6. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6749
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser To Receiver Drier Line
Condenser to Receiver Drier Line
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the compressor manifold and tube bracket nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6750
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
9. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seal and O-ring seal.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6751
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line
Evaporator Inlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the evaporator inlet line bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Remove the evaporator inlet line.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6752
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line
Evaporator Outlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Detach the wire harness clip from the evaporator outlet line.
6. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6753
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket.
8. Remove the evaporator outlet line.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and a new O-ring seal.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Installation
Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the instrument panel.
4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Release the clamps and disconnect the heater inlet and outlet hoses from the heater core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6758
6. Remove the 6 heater core and evaporator core housing nuts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing in the following sequence.
1. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing from the dash panel studs.
2. Rotate the RH side of the heater core and evaporator core housing toward the rear of the vehicle
while pulling the housing toward the RH door
opening to detach it from the rear footwell duct.
3. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing.
8. Disassemble the heater core and evaporator core housing as needed.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6759
Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6760
Disassembly and Assembly
Plenum chamber
1. Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
2. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the plenum chamber.
3. Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6761
4. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator.
5. Remove the 6 plenum chamber screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
6. Remove the plenum chamber.
Air inlet duct
7. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the air inlet duct.
8. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
9. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator.
Complete disassembly
10. Detach and remove the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness.
11. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
12. Remove the blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor.
13. Remove the heater core tube dash panel seal.
14. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
15. Remove the heater core.
16. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) dash panel seal.
17. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing drain dash panel seal.
18. Remove the 2 LH temperature blend door actuator screws (if equipped).
19. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator (if equipped).
20. Detach the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and disengage the vent tube from the heater core
and evaporator core housing.
21. Rotate counterclockwise and remove the blower motor.
22. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Receiver Dryer: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Receiver/Drier
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier. Damage to the receiver/drier includes leaks, physical damage to the receiver/drier
shell or desiccant, or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination results only from a complete
loss of refrigerant, and equalization of the refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure
for a period longer than one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present
in the refrigerant system before repairs are carried out, a new receiver/drier should not be installed.
The receiver/drier is mounted to the right of the radiator support for 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or at
the RH shock tower for hybrid vehicles. It stores high-pressure liquid after it leaves the condenser
core. A desiccant cartridge mounted inside the receiver/drier removes any retained moisture from
the refrigerant.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6765
Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair
Receiver Drier - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The receiver/drier fitting studs can be removed and installed separately from the
receiver/drier and are available as service parts. If only the fitting studs are damaged, it is not
necessary to install a new receiver/drier.
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier. Damage to the receiver/drier includes leaks, physical damage to the receiver/drier
shell or desiccant, or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination results only from a complete
loss of refrigerant, and equalization of the refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure
for a period longer than one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present
in the refrigerant system before repairs are carried out, a new receiver/drier should not be installed.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the front bumper cover.
3. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer electrical connector.
5. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6766
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
6. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket clip.
7. Remove the 2 receiver/drier nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Remove the receiver/drier.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...................................................................0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 6771
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...................................................................0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6772
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection
Refrigerant Identification Testing
Refrigerant Identification
1. NOTE: A Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer must be used to identify gas samples taken
directly from the refrigeration system or storage
containers prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system.
Follow the instructions included with the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer to obtain the
sample for testing.
2. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer will display one of the following:
- If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS LED will light. The
weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons and air will be displayed on the digital
display.
- If refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an alarm
will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22
and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display.
- If hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light,
"Hydrocarbon High" will be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the
user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will
also be displayed on the digital display.
3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or
greater. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with
Printer eliminates the effect of air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is
not considered a contaminant, although air can affect A/C system performance. When the
Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer has determined that a refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is
98% or greater by weight) and air concentration levels are 2% or greater by weight, it will prompt
the user if an air purge is desired.
4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the
refrigerant is indeed contaminated.
Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
NOTICE: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R-134a
recovery/recycling equipment. Recovery of contaminated refrigerant will contaminate the recovered
refrigerant supply and may damage the recovery/recycling equipment.
NOTE: A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the A/C system
flushing procedure.
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant only.
- If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in the area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customers initial concern.
3. Flush the A/C system.
4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local
regulations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Refrigerant System Recovery
NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any
vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If
the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6775
facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use
the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All
contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow
the equipment manufacturer procedures and instructions.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends the use of R-134a refrigerant management equipment
that meets the requirements of the SAE J2788 standard.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out recovery. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant
system recovery may be accomplished using a separate recovery station.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Prior to recovering, the purity of the refrigerant must be verified. For additional information, refer
to Refrigerant Identification Testing See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Refrigerant Identification
Testing.
2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. Note the amount of oil
removed during the refrigerant recovery (if any). Add that same amount back into the system once
repairs are complete.
4. Once the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine has recovered the refrigerant, switch OFF
the power supply.
5. Allow the system to set for about 2 minutes, and observe the system vacuum reading. If the
vacuum is not lost, disconnect the recovery equipment.
6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable
for 2 minutes.
7. Carry out the required repairs.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out recovery, evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant
Management Machine is not available, evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum
Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of
vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible.
Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
3. Turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that
the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for
5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Vacuum Pump
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out evacuation of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump
and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Connect the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the low-side and high-side service gauge port
valves.
2. Connect the center (yellow) hose from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the suction port on the
Vacuum Pump.
3. Open all valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and both service gauge port valves.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6776
4. Turn on the Vacuum Pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least
99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to
101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45
minutes.
5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set (not the service
gauge port valves) and turn OFF the Vacuum Pump.
6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If
vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the
system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic
Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may
be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks
are present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See:
Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low-side and high-side service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Automatic Refrigerant
Charging Meter
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic
Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may
be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks
are present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See:
Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Assemble the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set, Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a
supply tank following the Automatic Refrigerant
Charging Meter operating instructions.
3. Charge the refrigerant system following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating
instructions.
4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the engine, select
MAX A/C operation and allow the refrigerant charge
to complete.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6777
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor Installation
Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation
WARNING: Use extreme care and observe all safety and service precautions related to the use of
refrigerants as outlined on refrigerant tank and on recovery and charging equipment. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any
vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If
the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried
out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery
equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C
refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment
manufacturer's procedures and instructions.
NOTICE: On vehicles being serviced for an internal compressor or desiccant failure, a new suction
accumulator or receiver/drier, Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) or evaporator core orifice and
any hoses containing mufflers must be installed prior to filtering the Air Conditioning (A/C) system.
Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible to correctly remove any foreign material.
These components are typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses without mufflers
can normally be reused unless they are clogged with foreign material. The filter is intended for use
on one vehicle only.
1. Orient the filter inlet toward the A/C condenser core.
2. NOTICE: The flexible extension adapters included in the A/C Flush Adapter Kit are designed for
low-pressure flushing and are not
designed for use with a charged refrigerant system. Do not make the condenser fitting connections
using the flexible extension adapters or damage to the adapters and loss of refrigerant will occur.
NOTE: The F8VZ-19E773-AB pancake filter is not permanently installed and will be removed at the
end of this procedure.
Disconnect the condenser outlet fitting and temporarily install the pancake filter between the 2
halves of the fitting.
- Use flexible refrigerant hose of 17,238 kPa (2,500 psi) burst rating.
- Make the connections using the correct adapters from the A/C Flush Adapter Kit and/or A/C Flush
and Purge Fitting Kit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6778
3. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See:
Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
4. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning
(A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
5. Check all refrigerant system hoses, lines and the position of the newly installed filters to be sure
they do not interfere with other engine
compartment components. If necessary, use tie straps to make adjustments.
6. Provide adequate airflow to the front of the vehicle (with a fan, if necessary). Select A/C
operation and set the blower motor speed to maximum.
Start the engine and let it idle briefly. Make sure the A/C system is operating correctly.
7. Gradually bring the engine up to 1,200 rpm by running it at lower rpms for short periods (first at
800 rpm, then at 1,000 rpm). Set the engine at
1,200 rpm and run it for one hour with the A/C system operating.
8. Stop the engine.
9. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and
Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
10. Remove the adapters, flexible hoses and pancake filter from between the condenser and the
condenser to evaporator tube.
11. Discard the pancake filter. It can be used one time only.
12. Reconnect the condenser outlet fitting.
13. Evacuate, charge and leak-test the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation
and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG
Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification...............................................
..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................
......................................148 ml (5 fl oz) See: Service and Repair
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 6783
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG
Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification...............................................
..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................
......................................148 ml (5 fl oz) See: Service and Repair
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6784
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
Refrigerant Oil Adding
Refrigerant Oil Adding
NOTE: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a
small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed,
some of the PAG oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is
necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part.
1. Refer to the chart below for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation.
a If an excessive amount of PAG oil is lost due to a hose rupture/separation or other damage, the
total system PAG oil capacity must be added.
b The amount specified may be used for one or multiple O-ring leak repairs. Do not multiply the
PAG oil amount by the number of O-ring leaks being repaired.
Adding Refrigerant Oil After A/C Compressor Replacement
Service A/C compressors shipped without clutch and pulley
1. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft 6 to 8 revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 oz), pour the
same amount plus 30 ml (1 oz) of clean PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
(YN-12-D) WSH M1C231-B or equivalent into the new A/C compressor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6785
- If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5 oz),
pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) or
equivalent into the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 oz), pour
85 ml (3 oz) of clean A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) or equivalent into the new
A/C compressor.
Service A/C compressors shipped with clutch and pulley
2. Rotate the old A/C compressor shaft 6 to 8 revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is less than 89 ml (3 oz), remove 118 ml
(4 oz) from the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 89 ml (3 oz), remove 89 ml (3 oz) from
the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 118 ml (4 oz), remove 59 ml (2 oz)
from the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 148 ml (5 oz), remove 29 ml (1 oz)
from the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is greater than 148 ml (5 oz), remove 0
ml (0 oz) from the new A/C compressor.
Adding Refrigerant Oil After New Suction Accumulator or Receiver/Drier Replacement
NOTE: This refrigerant oil adding method is to be used when a new suction accumulator or
receiver drier only has been installed. If a new A/C compressor and evaporator core orifice or TXV
have also been installed due to system contamination, refer to the appropriate heading.
1. Drill one 12.7 mm (1/2 in) hole in the old suction accumulator or receiver/drier cylinder and drain
the oil into a clean measuring cup.
2. Add the same quantity of new PAG oil, plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery and
60 ml (2 fl oz).
Adding Refrigerant Oil After Multiple Component Replacement After A/C System Contamination
NOTE: This refrigerant oil adding method is to be used when a new A/C compressor, suction
accumulator or receiver drier and evaporator core orifice or TXV have been installed due to system
contamination and the A/C system has been flushed.
NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without refrigerant oil.
1. Add 60 ml (2 fl oz) directly to the new A/C compressor suction port.
2. Inject the total vehicle PAG oil capacity minus 60 ml (2 fl oz) to the low-side service port during
system charging. For the total PAG oil capacity
specification, refer to the Specifications table.
Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector
NOTE: If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the dye may be
added to the dye/lubricant injector, from the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set, along with the
PAG oil.
1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See:
Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector and the correct adapters from the R-134a Loop/Add On
Injector Kit-Set to match the amount of refrigerant
compressor oil to be injected.
3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed.
4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of clean, new PAG oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6786
5. Install the dye/lubricant injector between the low-side service gauge port valve and the
refrigerant service station or manifold gauge set.
6. Open all valves and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6790
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling
Switch
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C
cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of
the A/C cycling switch, refer to the Climate Control System Air Conditioning System Overview.
Also, refer to the applicable Wiring Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring.
If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate.
For additional information, refer to wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff (WAC).
Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is
requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6793
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) High
Pressure Switch
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch
The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high
pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled for electric fan
applications, or single function for all others.
For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a
predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from
rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve.
For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high
speed fan to help reduce the pressure.
For additional information, refer to the Climate Control System, Air Conditioning System Overview
or the Wiring Diagrams.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6794
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP)
Transducer Sensor
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor
The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The
ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C
pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control.
A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage Vs Pressure Chart
Typical ACP Transducer Sensor
Typical ACP Transducer Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6799
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6800
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6804
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Relay (A/CCR)
Note: The PCM parameter identifiers (PIDs) wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff (WAC) and
wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WAC_F) are used to monitor the A/CCR output.
The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch
or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives
a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the
communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that
are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C
operation and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position),
the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/CCR.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6805
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6806
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC > Page 6811
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-DATC
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6814
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6815
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-EMTC
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6816
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6821
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6822
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6826
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6827
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Speed Control
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the blower motor speed control.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6831
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6832
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity
Sensor
In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown. In-vehicle temperature sensor similar.
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel
enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature
sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is
positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument
cluster finish panel could result.
Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow
access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and
humidity sensor.
3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor
electrical connector.
4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing.
5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel.
6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing
for installation. When installing the venturi, it
must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to
indicated that it is correctly attached.
Remove the venturi (if needed).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 6835
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper.
2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6839
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary
evaporator core on hybrid vehicles.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this
thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The
HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor
and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air
temperature.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and
prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the
A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to
cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls
below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the
evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels.
On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be
closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature
below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows
continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator
core to warm to acceptable levels.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core
housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning > Page 6842
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor
The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a
thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a
thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the
temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN
also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the
sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET
sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects.
The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling and improve defrost/demist
performance.
Note: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were
calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts.
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6843
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away
from the evaporator discharge air temperature
sensor.
3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector.
4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6847
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling
Switch
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C
cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of
the A/C cycling switch, refer to the Climate Control System Air Conditioning System Overview.
Also, refer to the applicable Wiring Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring.
If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate.
For additional information, refer to wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff (WAC).
Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is
requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6850
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) High
Pressure Switch
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch
The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high
pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled for electric fan
applications, or single function for all others.
For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a
predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from
rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve.
For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high
speed fan to help reduce the pressure.
For additional information, refer to the Climate Control System, Air Conditioning System Overview
or the Wiring Diagrams.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6851
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP)
Transducer Sensor
Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor
The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The
ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C
pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control.
A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage Vs Pressure Chart
Typical ACP Transducer Sensor
Typical ACP Transducer Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Solar Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6857
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6858
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6859
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6860
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6861
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6862
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6863
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6864
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6865
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6866
Solar Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6867
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6868
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6869
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6870
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6871
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6872
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6873
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6874
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6875
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6876
Solar Sensor: Description and Operation
SOLAR AMPLIFIER (SUNLOAD SENSOR)
The solar amplifier (dual-channel sunload sensor), supplies information to the DATC module
indicating LH side and RH side sunload. The sunload senor is capable of sensing the intensity and
direction of the solar rediation entering the cabin of the car through the windshield for comfort of the
driver and front passenger. The smart junction box processes this information to control the air
conditioning system. For information on the location and service of the sunload sensor. See:
Locations Diagrams By Number, Diagram set 55-004 Auto Climate Control System.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6877
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel.
2. Disconnect the connector.
3. Remove the A/C sunload sensor from the instrument panel upper finish panel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Service Gauge Port Valves
The high-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the receiver/drier inlet line.
The low-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the evaporator outlet line.
NOTE: Different valve cores are used for different engine applications. Use only the valve core
listed in the Ford Master Parts Catalog for the vehicle and fitting being serviced.
The fitting is an integral part of the refrigerant line or component.
- Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side service gauge ports.
- A very small amount of leakage will always be detectable around the Schrader-type valve with the
service gauge port valve cap removed, and is considered normal. A new Schrader-type valve core
can be installed if the seal leaks excessively.
- The service gauge port valve caps are used as primary seals in the refrigerant system to prevent
leakage through the Schrader-type valves from reaching the atmosphere. Always install and tighten
the A/C service gauge port valve caps to the correct torque after they are removed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Solar Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6886
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6887
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6888
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6889
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6890
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6891
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6892
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6893
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6894
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6895
Solar Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6896
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6897
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6898
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6899
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6900
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6901
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6902
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6903
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6904
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 6905
Solar Sensor: Description and Operation
SOLAR AMPLIFIER (SUNLOAD SENSOR)
The solar amplifier (dual-channel sunload sensor), supplies information to the DATC module
indicating LH side and RH side sunload. The sunload senor is capable of sensing the intensity and
direction of the solar rediation entering the cabin of the car through the windshield for comfort of the
driver and front passenger. The smart junction box processes this information to control the air
conditioning system. For information on the location and service of the sunload sensor. See:
Locations Diagrams By Number, Diagram set 55-004 Auto Climate Control System.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 6906
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel.
2. Disconnect the connector.
3. Remove the A/C sunload sensor from the instrument panel upper finish panel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After
A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools
are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and
possibly violate vehicle safety standards.
NOTE: After diagnosing or repairing a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the restraint system
diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
NOTE: Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in
various combinations depending on the impact event.
NOTE: Always refer to the appropriate diagnostic/repair information procedures prior to carrying
out vehicle repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being
installed.
When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the
vehicle SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new deployable
devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and installation of a
new RCM. DTCs must be cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried out.
Vehicles with Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
2. NOTE: After installation of new Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components,
carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
System Reset procedure as instructed in the diagnostic/repair information. Refer to the appropriate
diagnostic/repair information for OCS system removal and installation procedure.
When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the Occupant Classification System Module
(OCSM) has DTC B1231/B1193:00 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include
the following procedures for the specified system: For rail-type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as
necessary. Install new OCS system rails. Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be
cleared.
- For weight sensor bolt-type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and
repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be
cleared from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231/B1193:00 cannot be cleared.
- NOTE: Most bladder-type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after deployment. The
DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM.
For bladder-type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an
OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed.
All vehicles
3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred,
repair or install new mounting points and mounting
hardware as needed.
4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed.
5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height
adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is
involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt
pretensioners. For additional information, refer to Seat Belt Systems.
6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components:
- Steering column (deployable column if equipped)
- Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points
- Instrument panel braces and brackets
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 6912
- Instrument panel and mounting points
- Seats and seat mounting points
- Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors. For additional information, refer to Seat
Belt Systems
- SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors
7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new
components as needed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 6913
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After
A Collision
Safety Belt Procedure After a Collision
1. WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware
must be inspected by an authorized
dealer to verify correct function: Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not
become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been
subjected to severe stress. Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching
areas must be inspected for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and
distorted, the sheet metal must be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity.
Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Carry out the Functional Test. See:
Seat Belt Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6919
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6920
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6921
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6922
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6923
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6924
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6925
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6926
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module > Page 6931
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module > Page 6932
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module > Page 6933
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6936
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6937
Air Bag: Diagrams Passenger Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6938
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6939
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger
Air Bag: Service and Repair Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger
Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger
Removal
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Do not use any sharp tools to separate the passenger air bag module trim cover from
the passenger air bag module canister. Sharp tools may damage the passenger air bag module.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly
and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not unpack or unroll the passenger air bag module soft pack. If the soft pack
becomes unpacked or unrolled, install a new passenger air bag module assembly. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not manipulate or compromise the passenger air bag module hooks during the
removal or installation procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the passenger air
bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a
crash.
1. Remove the passenger air bag module. For additional information, refer to Passenger Air Bag
Module See: Passenger Air Bag Module.
2. Place a mark on top of the passenger air bag module canister for correct installation.
3. Carefully lift the passenger air bag module cover from the bottom of the air bag module canister,
separating the windows from the canister hooks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6942
4. NOTE: Place an X mark on the old air bag cover to avoid reinstalling.
Remove the passenger air bag cover from the canister, separating the top windows from the
canister hooks.
Installation
1. Place the passenger air bag cover on a clean work surface once it is removed from the shipping
package.
2. WARNING: Carefully inspect the passenger air bag trim cover, canister and soft pack before
assembly. If any foreign objects are found,
remove them before attaching the passenger air bag trim cover to the canister. If the canister or
soft pack is damaged, install a new passenger air bag module assembly. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Match the number of cover windows to the number of canister hooks before attaching the
passenger air bag cover to the canister.
3. Match the top of the passenger air bag cover with the canister mark from the removal procedure.
4. Position the canister onto the passenger air bag cover and engage the bottom hooks into the air
bag cover windows.
5. Push the top of the passenger air bag cover to engage the top canister hooks.
6. Inspect the passenger air bag cover windows-to-canister hooks to verify that every window has a
hook installed and the sides are not tucked or
folded against the air bag canister.
7. Install the passenger air bag module. For additional information, refer to Passenger Air Bag
Module See: Passenger Air Bag Module.
8. NOTE: The video procedure utilizes a Fusion/Milan passenger air bag module assembly. It also
applies to vehicles with similar passenger air bag
module designs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6943
Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module
Driver Air Bag Module
Removal
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
3. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and/or the steering wheel.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6944
4. Disconnect the horn and 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air
bag module.
Installation
1. Connect the driver air bag module and horn electrical connectors.
2. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed away from the driver air bag module hooks during
installation.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and seat the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated, gently pull outward at the corners of the
driver air bag module to make sure all 3 hooks are fully seated. Check the driver air bag module
and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
3. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6945
Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Module
Passenger Air Bag Module
Removal
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTICE: Do not install a new passenger air bag module assembly due to a damaged or discolored
passenger air bag cover. The passenger air bag cover can be serviced separately from the
passenger air bag module assembly. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Trim Cover Passenger See: Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the passenger
air bag cover. Failure to follow these
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6946
instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the passenger air bag cover
clips are fully seated into the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module passenger air bag
cover clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
4. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
5. NOTICE: During installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip
is attached to the passenger air bag
module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6947
Air Bag: Service and Repair Safety Canopy Module
Safety Canopy Module
NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar.
Removal
WARNING: Always carry or place a live Safety Canopy(R), or side air curtain module, with the
module and tear seam pointed away from your body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Anytime the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module has deployed, a new
headliner and new A-, B- and C-pillar upper trim panels and attaching hardware must be installed.
Remove any other damaged components and hardware and install new components and hardware
as needed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air
curtain module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a
crash.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6948
NOTE: There are different safety canopy modules for vehicles equipped with a moon roof and
vehicles without a moon roof. The safety canopy modules are NOT interchangeable. If installing a
new safety canopy module, the correct safety canopy module MUST be installed for the vehicle
application.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the headliner.
3. Detach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer from the A-pillar.
4. Remove the A-pillar tether bolt.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, note the
roof opening panel drain hose and/or rear window washer solvent hose position and routing for
installation purposes.
5. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars.
6. Disconnect the safety canopy module electrical connector and detach the connector from the
D-pillar.
7. Detach the safety canopy module wiring clip from the roof panel brace.
8. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the ignitor (between the C- and D-pillars).
9. If equipped with a roof opening panel, disconnect the drain hose.
10. If equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, detach the hose clip and position the hose
aside.
11. Remove the remaining 2 safety canopy module bolts (1 near the top of the C-pillar and 1
between the B- and C-pillars).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6949
12. Lift to unhook the safety canopy module from the C-pillar.
13. Move the safety canopy module forward and release the rear hook.
Installation
WARNING: Before installing a Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module, inspect the roofline for
any damage. If necessary, the sheet metal must be reworked to its original condition and structural
integrity. Install new fasteners if damaged and remove foreign material. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain deploying incorrectly, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the Safety Canopy(R) or
side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side
air curtain module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in
a crash.
WARNING: Never put any type of fastener or tie strap around any part of a Safety Canopy(R)
module, side air curtain module or interior trim panel. This will prevent the Safety Canopy(R) or
side air curtain module from deploying correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the Safety Canopy(R) in
the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) module deploying incorrectly
and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: When installing a new headliner on a vehicle equipped with Safety Canopy(R) or side
air curtain modules, make sure the headliner has the word AIRBAG on the headliner where it
meets each B-pillar trim panel. Otherwise, you have the wrong headliner. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module not deploying or deploying
incorrectly, increasing the risk of personal injury or death in a crash.
1. WARNING: Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the Safety Canopy(R)
in the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is
mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in the Safety Canopy(R) module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install new safety canopy module J-nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6950
2. NOTE: If equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, make sure of
correct roof opening panel drain hose and/or rear
window solvent hose routing.
Position the safety canopy module and insert the rear hook into the sheet metal cavity.
3. Hook the safety canopy module into the C-pillar.
4. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Attach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer to the A-pillar.
6. NOTE: If equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, do not pinch
the front roof opening panel drain hose and/or
rear window washer solvent hose.
Install the A-pillar tether bolt.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
7. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the top of the C-pillar and between the B- and
C-pillars.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. If equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, position the hose and attach the hose clip.
9. If equipped with a roof opening panel, connect the roof opening panel rear drain hose.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6951
10. Connect the safety canopy module electrical connector and attach the connector to the D-pillar.
11. Install the safety canopy module wiring clip to the roof panel brace.
12. Install the remaining 2 rear safety canopy module bolts near the ignitor (between the C- and
D-pillars).
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
13. Install the headliner.
14. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6952
Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Air Bag Module
Side Air Bag Module
NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags
cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover, side air bag
module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat and depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6953
Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
1. Remove the rear screw.
- For driver seat, remove the front and rear screws.
2. Push the side shield forward to release.
3. NOTICE: Note the position of the wiring harness, to aid installation. An incorrectly routed wiring
harness could become damaged when
the seat is moved.
Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track. Detach
the 3 wiring harness routing retainers.
Seats with manual lumbar adjust
4. Turn the manual lumbar knob clockwise until it stops, releasing all tension on the manual lumbar
support cable.
5. Pull and remove the manual lumbar knob.
All seats
6. Release the seat backrest trim cover J-clip.
7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip.
The hook-and-loop strip can be torn from
the seat backrest foam pad. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
Place a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and the seat backrest foam pad and carefully
separate the hook-and-loop strips.
8. Carefully roll up the seat back trim cover in an inside out fashion to the side air bag module.
9. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6954
10. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips out through the side air bag module
seat backrest foam opening.
11. Continue to roll the seat backrest trim cover up to access the side air bag module.
12. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers from the seat backrest frame.
13. Through the back of the seat backrest, position out the seat backrest foam pad. Remove the 2
side air bag module nuts and remove the side air bag
module.
Installation
WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign
material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new
components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly:
- Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material.
- Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat
backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad.
- Install new parts if damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage and may cause system failure.
All seats
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6955
1. Install the side air bag module and nuts onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket.
- Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
2. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame.
3. Roll down the seat trim cover to the side air bag module.
4. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute
must not be repaired. If there is any
damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be
installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips back through the side air bag module
seat backrest foam opening.
5. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and
closed, the seat side air bag module may not
deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips around the side air bag module and
seat backrest frame.
6. Roll the seat backrest trim cover down in position and attach the hook-and-loop strips.
7. Feed the seat backrest trim cover rear J-clip through seat between the seat backrest and seat
cushion.
8. Attach the seat backrest trim cover J-clips.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6956
Seats with manual lumbar adjust
9. Install the manual lumbar control knob.
All seats
10. Attach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Connect the side air bag module electrical
connector and attach it to the seat track.
11. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield and screw.
12. Install the front seat and repower the SRS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6960
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6961
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6962
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6963
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6964
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Removal
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: When installing a new Restraints Control Module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out
Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option
that is disabled. The RCM and Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) must be configured
correctly to fully support 911 assist functionality.
1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6965
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts.
4. Remove the RCM access cover.
- Remove the scrivet.
- Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover.
5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM.
Installation
1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the connector.
3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM
on an angle can cause bad electrical
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6966
connections and damage components.
Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM.
- NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light
pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure.
With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle
audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt.
4. Connect the RCM electrical connector.
- Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the
RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in.
6. Install the RCM access cover.
- Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace.
- Install the scrivet.
7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6967
8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module
Installation (PMI).
10. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: The Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) indicator is part of the upper instrument panel
center finish panel.
1. NOTE: The ignition must be in the OFF position before disconnecting the PAD indicator
electrical connector. Otherwise, a DTC will be set in the
Restraints Control Module (RCM) memory and must be cleared before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
Turn the ignition OFF and wait at least one minute.
2. NOTE: The passenger air bag module is not shown for clarity.
Open and lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the PAD indicator electrical
connector.
- Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector.
3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the instrument panel upper center finish panel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6974
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6978
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair
Clockspring
Removal
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag
Module.
3. Tilt the steering wheel in the downward position and lock the tilt handle.
4. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the clockspring make sure the road wheels are in the
straight-ahead position.
Remove the steering wheel.
5. NOTE: The upper steering column shroud is a 2-piece design and must be removed as an
assembly.
Release the tabs and remove the 2-piece upper steering column shroud as an assembly.
6. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. Then release the tilt column locking lever
and remove the lower steering column shroud.
7. Disconnect the clockspring electrical connector.
8. Remove the 2 screws and clockspring.
Installation
1. NOTICE: If installing a new clockspring, do not remove the clockspring anti-rotation key until the
steering wheel is installed. If the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6979
anti-rotation key has been removed before installing the steering wheel, the clockspring must be
centered. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Install the clockspring and 2 screws.
2. Connect the clockspring electrical connector.
3. Install the lower steering column shroud and 3 screws.
4. Attach the upper steering column shroud to the lower steering column shroud.
5. WARNING: If the clockspring is not correctly centralized, it may fail prematurely. If in doubt,
repeat the centralizing procedure. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: Do not over-rotate the clockspring inner rotor. The internal ribbon wire is connected to the
clockspring rotor. The internal ribbon wire acts as a stop and can be broken from its internal
connection. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system
failure.
If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has not been removed proceed to Step
7.
If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has been removed before the steering
wheel is installed or the same clockspring is being installed, rotate the clockspring inner rotor
counterclockwise and carefully feel for the ribbon wire to run out of length with slight resistance.
Stop rotating the clockspring inner rotor at this point.
6. Starting with the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector in the 12 o'clock position, rotate
the inner rotor clockwise through 4 revolutions to
center the clockspring.
Verify that the clockspring is correctly centered by observing that after 4 revolutions: the clockspring rotor window is in the 4 o'clock position and the yellow indicator shows in the
window.
- the 2 arrows located on the inner and outer rotor of the clockspring line up in the 6 o'clock
position.
- the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector are in the 12 o'clock position.
7. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the clockspring, make sure the road wheels are in the 12 o'clock
position to install the steering wheel.
Install the steering wheel.
8. If a new clockspring was installed, remove the anti-rotation key.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6980
9. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag
Module.
10. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6985
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6986
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6987
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6988
Impact Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6989
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6990
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6991
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6992
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6993
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 6994
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Front Impact Sensor
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Front Impact Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Front Impact Sensor > Page 6997
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Front Impact Sensor > Page 6998
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Front Impact Sensor > Page 6999
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
Front Impact Severity Sensor
Removal and Installation
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are
clean and free of foreign material.
Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7002
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
NOTE: RH shown, LH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free
of foreign material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7003
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign
material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7007
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7011
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7014
Removal
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an
assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system,
OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit
(seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an
assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM
electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to
the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the
wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat
cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7015
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad.
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as
an assembly with the bladder.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7016
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan.
4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
- To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest.
10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7017
12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset.
14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
16. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7018
sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS
fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7019
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7020
Removal
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components (seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are
serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new
OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system
service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and Occupant Classification
System Module (OCSM)) must be installed as an assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit,
inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the
OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM electrical
connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat
wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left
unplugged and secured by a tie strap.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused.
Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the
seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7021
6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan.
8. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7022
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical
connector is not used.
NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan.
1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
3. Install the rivets.
4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7023
- To aid in installation, recline the seat.
6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside.
8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
12. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7024
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS.
The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete
inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder,
OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part
OCS only).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7028
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7029
Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Seat Position Sensor
NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the driver seat.
2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip.
Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat
position sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7034
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7035
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7036
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7037
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7038
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Removal
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: When installing a new Restraints Control Module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out
Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option
that is disabled. The RCM and Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) must be configured
correctly to fully support 911 assist functionality.
1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7039
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts.
4. Remove the RCM access cover.
- Remove the scrivet.
- Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover.
5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM.
Installation
1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7040
3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM
on an angle can cause bad electrical
connections and damage components.
Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM.
- NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light
pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure.
With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle
audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt.
4. Connect the RCM electrical connector.
- Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the
RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in.
6. Install the RCM access cover.
- Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace.
- Install the scrivet.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7041
7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws.
8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General
Procedures.
9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module
Installation (PMI).
10. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7045
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7051
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7052
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7053
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7054
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7055
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7056
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7057
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7058
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair
Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover by releasing the top anchor end of the cover
first and rocking the cover off of the anchor bolt end.
2. Remove the bolt and child safety seat tether anchor.
- To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
3. WARNING: Always tighten the child safety seat tether anchor/bolt to specification. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in the
child's safety seat being incorrectly secured, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death to the child in a sudden stop or crash.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7063
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog.
Safety Belt Buckles
Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
The safety belt buckle and pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from
the safety belt when deployed. When the pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward,
removing excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts.
If the vehicle is involved in a crash that results in pretensioner deployment, a new safety belt buckle
and pretensioner must be installed.
For safety belt buckle and pretensioner diagnosis and disposal information, refer to Air Bag
Systems.
Second row safety belt buckles
The second row safety belt buckles can be serviced separately. After any crash, new safety belt
systems components (including retractors and buckles) must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 7067
Seat Belt Buckle: Testing and Inspection
Safety Belt System
Component Test
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification.
Functional Test - Safety Belt Buckle and Tongue
The safety belt buckle and tongue assembly must operate freely during the latching and unlatching
function. Fasten the safety belt by inserting the tongue (male portion) into the buckle (female
portion).
1. Verify the following during the latching sequence:
- Tongue insertion is not hindered by excessive effort.
- A click is heard when the safety belt buckle latches the tongue.
2. Verify the system integrity by forcefully pulling on the safety belt webbing.
3. Unlatch the safety belt by fully depressing the safety belt buckle release button and allowing the
safety belt to release and retract.
4. Verify the following during the unlatching process:
- Push-button depression does not require excessive effort.
- The tongue can be removed easily from the buckle.
5. Repeat the above steps 3 times.
6. If the functional test reveals a concern(s), install a new safety belt buckle or safety belt retractor
as required.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Power Seat (Driver Only)
Manual Seat
NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7070
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental
deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the seat.
2. Remove the screws and inboard seat cushion side shield.
3. Disconnect the 2 safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical connectors.
4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for correct installation.
Detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer from the safety belt buckle and
pretensioner.
5. For the driver seat, remove the seat position sensor wiring harness tie strap from the safety belt
buckle and pretensioner.
6. Detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat
track and detach the wiring harness pin-type
retainer.
7. Remove the bolt and safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7071
9. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7072
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Rear
Safety Belt Buckle - Rear
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. NOTE: To access the center and passenger side rear safety belt buckles, pivot the rear seat
cushion forward and the rear seat backrest rearward.
Remove the bolt and rear center and RH safety belt buckle assembly.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
2. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts
and buckles are accessible to the occupants.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
3. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 7077
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 7080
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair
Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster
NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed,
install new D-ring cover and bolt.
Remove the D-ring cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the
bottom.
2. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 7084
3. Lower the height adjuster and remove the upper bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. Raise the height adjuster and remove the lower bolt and height adjuster.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Service and Repair
Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating
Preparation
1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R).
2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual
transaxle).
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
4. Close all the vehicle doors.
5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts.
Deactivating/Activating
NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently.
When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute).
3. NOTE: Steps 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns
off.
For seating position being disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3
times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
- After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds.
4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
- This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
- This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by
another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating
Preparation
1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R).
2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual
transaxle).
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
4. Close all the vehicle doors.
5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts.
Deactivating/Activating
NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently.
When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute).
3. NOTE: Steps 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns
off.
For seating position being disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3
times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
- After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds.
4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
- This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
- This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by
another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog.
Safety Belt Retractors
- Safety belt retractors with pretensioners (front only)
- Dual locking mode Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
- Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) (all except driver seat)
- BTS (front passenger only)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ALR mode is used when locking a child seat in an outboard seating position. The ALR mode is
automatically activated when the safety belt webbing is fully extracted from the retractor and then
allowed to retract. As the safety belt webbing is retracted back onto the spool, an audible clicking
sound is made indicating the safety belt retractor is in ALR mode and the safety belt webbing will
not pull back out of the safety belt retractor. To disengage the ALR mode, allow the safety belt
webbing to fully retract back onto the spool. For testing, refer to the appropriate Functional Test
procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics.
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The ELR is a vehicle-sensitive feature designed to activate and lock the safety belt webbing during
braking hard, cornering hard or in an impact of approximately 24 km/h (15 mph). The ELR feature
helps to reduce the forward movement of the driver and passengers. For testing, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt System
Component Test
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification.
Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor
The safety belt retractor must be freely operational for extraction and retraction of the safety belt
webbing between full extension and in-vehicle stowed positions.
1. Extract and retract the safety belt between the full extension and stowed positions.
2. Verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding.
3. Install a new safety belt retractor if any concern is found or the complaint has been verified.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7096
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode
Safety Belt System
Component Test
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification.
Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode
1. Position the seat backrest fully upright (if adjustable).
2. Position the safety belt shoulder height adjuster (if equipped) in the full down or up position.
3. Fasten the safety belt.
4. Pull out the safety belt webbing until the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature is activated.
5. Allow the safety belt webbing to retract until it stops.
6. Pull on the safety belt webbing to check that the safety belt retractor has remained in the ALR
mode. If the safety belt retractor is not locked,
install a new safety belt retractor.
7. Unfasten the safety belt and allow the safety belt webbing to retract to its stowed position.
8. Pull out and retract the safety belt webbing to verify the safety belt retractor has converted
automatically out of ALR mode. If the safety belt
retractor remains locked in the ALR mode, install a new safety belt retractor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7097
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Road Test
Inspection
Safety Belt System
Component Test
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification.
Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Road Test Inspection
WARNING: The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the
safety belt retractor does not lock. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal
injury.
NOTE: Make sure there is no excessive slack in the safety belt webbing across the torso during
testing.
NOTE: Do not jerk on the safety belt webbing when carrying out this test.
1. Test the safety belts in the following sequence:
1. Fasten the safety belts and proceed to a safe area.
2. Attain a speed of 24 km/h (15 mph).
3. WARNING: Apply maximum brake force only on dry concrete or equivalent hard surface,
NEVER on wet pavement or gravel.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
Grasp the shoulder harness, lean forward and apply the brakes, making a maximum braking
application without a skid.
4. The safety belts should lock up with minimum webbing extension.
5. If there is a lockup of all safety belt retractors being tested, the safety belt retractors are
functioning correctly. If any safety belt retractor fails
to lock up, install a new safety belt retractor(s).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt Retractor
NOTE: Passenger side shown, driver similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7100
belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in
a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental
deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures portion of Air Bag Systems.
2. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed,
install a new D-ring cover and bolt.
Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the
cover out at the bottom.
3. Remove the bolt and D-ring.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
5. For passenger retractor, disconnect the Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) electrical connector.
6. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
7. Remove the bolt and safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
8. Disconnect the pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Unhook and remove the safety belt retractor.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
11. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures portion of Air Bag Systems.
12. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7101
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center
Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7102
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. Remove the 60 percent seat backrest.
2. Remove the head restraints.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the latch cover.
4. Remove the 2 seat latch release lever screws.
5. Remove the seat latch release lever.
1. Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release lever.
- To aid installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before connecting the latch rod.
2. Remove the seat latch release lever.
6. Remove the 2 screws and safety belt shield.
7. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip.
8. Unzip the backrest trim cover zipper.
9. NOTE: The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable.
NOTE: The head restraint guides incorporate an alignment tab that must be aligned correctly when
installed.
Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint guide and pull the 4 guides out of the frame tube.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7103
10. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the
hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the
seat backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop fasteners and remove the seat backrest trim cover.
11. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame.
12. Release the seat latch cable from the retractor.
13. Remove the 2 nuts and safety belt guide.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
14. Remove the nut and safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
15. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts
and buckles are accessible to the occupants.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
16. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7104
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear
Safety Belt Retractor - Rear
NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the cover and D-ring bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. Remove the bolt and rear safety belt retractor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 7105
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog.
Belt Tension Sensor (BTS)
The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front
passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 7113
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 7114
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 7115
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 7116
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7117
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog.
Safety Belt Retractors
- Safety belt retractors with pretensioners (front only)
- Dual locking mode Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
- Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) (all except driver seat)
- BTS (front passenger only)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ALR mode is used when locking a child seat in an outboard seating position. The ALR mode is
automatically activated when the safety belt webbing is fully extracted from the retractor and then
allowed to retract. As the safety belt webbing is retracted back onto the spool, an audible clicking
sound is made indicating the safety belt retractor is in ALR mode and the safety belt webbing will
not pull back out of the safety belt retractor. To disengage the ALR mode, allow the safety belt
webbing to fully retract back onto the spool. For testing, refer to the appropriate Functional Test
procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics.
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The ELR is a vehicle-sensitive feature designed to activate and lock the safety belt webbing during
braking hard, cornering hard or in an impact of approximately 24 km/h (15 mph). The ELR feature
helps to reduce the forward movement of the driver and passengers. For testing, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7122
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7127
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7128
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7129
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7130
Impact Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7131
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7132
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7133
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7134
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7135
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 7136
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Front Impact Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7139
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7140
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7141
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
Front Impact Severity Sensor
Removal and Installation
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are
clean and free of foreign material.
Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7144
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
NOTE: RH shown, LH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free
of foreign material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7145
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign
material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 7150
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 7153
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog.
Belt Tension Sensor (BTS)
The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front
passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7160
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7163
Removal
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an
assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system,
OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit
(seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an
assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM
electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to
the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the
wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat
cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7164
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad.
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as
an assembly with the bladder.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7165
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan.
4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
- To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest.
10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7166
12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset.
14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
16. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7167
sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS
fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7168
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7169
Removal
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components (seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are
serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new
OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system
service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and Occupant Classification
System Module (OCSM)) must be installed as an assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit,
inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the
OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM electrical
connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat
wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left
unplugged and secured by a tie strap.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused.
Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the
seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7170
6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan.
8. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7171
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical
connector is not used.
NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan.
1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
3. Install the rivets.
4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7172
- To aid in installation, recline the seat.
6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside.
8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
12. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 7173
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS.
The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete
inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder,
OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part
OCS only).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7177
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7178
Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Seat Position Sensor
NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the driver seat.
2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip.
Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat
position sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Control Display > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Accessory Control Display: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
Accessory Control Display: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Control Display > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accessory Control Display: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 >
Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
Accessory Control Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice
In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7197
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7198
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - AM/FM
Antenna Cable - AM/FM
NOTE: View shown from behind instrument panel for clarity.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Audio Control
Module (ACM) See: Cellular
Phone/Communications Control Module/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Audio
Control Module (ACM).
2. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna cable from the AM/FM antenna.
3. NOTE: Lower the glove compartment completely to access the pin-type retainers.
Release the AM/FM antenna cable pin-type retainers.
4. Remove the AM/FM antenna cable.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM > Page 7205
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio
Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio
Removal and Installation
NOTE: This procedure applies to the vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, a
new satellite radio antenna must be laid over the harness and secured.
1. Remove the RH A-pillar trim panel.
2. Remove the RH sun visor.
3. Lower the front of the headliner enough to gain access to the satellite radio antenna electrical
connector.
4. Disconnect the satellite radio antenna electrical connector.
5. Remove the satellite radio antenna.
- Disconnect the satellite radio antenna cable-to-Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS)
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM > Page 7206
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter
> Component Information > Service and Repair
Alarm System Transmitter: Service and Repair
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Transceiver
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening cover.
2. Remove the 3 screws and the lower steering column shroud.
3. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. NOTE: Replacement of the PATS transceiver does not require the PATS keys to be
programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) again.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Page 7214
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 7219
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 7220
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection
Keyless Entry Keypad Code Programming
Programming a Personal Code
NOTE: Up to 3 personal codes can be programmed. Once there are 3 personal programmed
codes, any attempt to program additional codes will be unsuccessful.
1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad.
3. Enter the new 5-digit personal keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within
5 seconds of each other.
4. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm the new code is programmed.
Erasing the Personal Codes
1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release.
3. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button on the keypad for 2 seconds.
4. All personal codes are now erased and only the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code
will work.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 7221
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Keypad
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH front door trim panel.
2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the keypad retaining clip.
4. Remove the keypad from the door.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming
NOTE: This procedure is for programming conventional keyfobs only. The Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) is programmed automatically during
the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming. For additional information, refer to Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Key Programming
Using Diagnostic Equipment in Antitheft and Alarm Systems to program the IKT. See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See:
Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key
Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: All RKE transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
NOTE: Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and
the transmitters will not be programmed.
1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10
seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN.
If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors.
3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the
programming sequence ends (the doors lock and
unlock to confirm that programming is complete).
Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock
and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each
RKE transmitter.
4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs:
- The key transitions to the OFF position
- 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was
programmed
- The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed
5. Check the operation of the RKE transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed
RKE transmitter(s), wait several seconds and
press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection. (Make sure that no
more than the maximum number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be programmed.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming > Page 7226
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming
Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming
Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the
enable/disable mode.
8. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle
the autolock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp
once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the
autolock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad.
4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While
holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button.
5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock
is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp
followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled.
Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming > Page 7227
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the
enable/disable mode.
8. Press the door lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle
the auto-unlock feature ON/OFF. The horn will
chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long
chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad.
4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While
holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button
2 times.
5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn
chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the
auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP
control for the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or OFF.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming > Page 7228
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming
Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming
Programming the Perimeter Lighting Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: The following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the procedure will need to be
repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait 30 seconds between programming sessions.
1. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position.
2. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
3. Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the OFF position.
4. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The horn chirps one time to indicate that
programming mode is entered.
6. NOTE: The unlock button must be pressed twice within 5 seconds.
Within 30 seconds of entering the programming mode, press the unlock button on the door lock
control switch twice to enable/disable the perimeter lighting feature. The horn chirps once if the
perimeter lighting is disabled or a chirp followed by a honk if the perimeter lighting is enabled.
7. Programming ends when the ignition switch state changes or times out after 2 minutes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming > Page 7229
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming
Stepped Unlock Programming
1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
simultaneously for 4 seconds. The turn signals flash twice to indicate the mode change.
2. Repeat Step 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-25-12 Date: 101223
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
TSB 10-25-12
12/23/10
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2011 Focus 2008-2010 Edge, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer 2009-2010 F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex 2009-2011 Escape, Expedition
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009-2011 MKS 2008-2010 MKX 2009-2011 Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable 2008-2010 Mountaineer 2009-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-8-4 to update the vehicle model years, Service Procedure and the
Part List. The new SYNC service Microphone kit now includes a voltage filter incorporated into the
jumper harness.
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2011 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT102512 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7239
The following procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH HEADLINER
MICROPHONE OR DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Go to Step 2 if the vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 3.0 Traffic and Directions or has already
been upgraded to latest available consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE
without E911/VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later versions. To determine the current
APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in
OASIS, click the GO button and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-1 4D544-AE without E9 11 /VHR,
9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later version. For
additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files
may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional. The jumper harness is equipped with a voltage filter. The filter will need to be wrapped
in soft foam 164-R4901 or flock tape 164-R4903 from the Rotunda squeak and rattle kit 164-R4900
to prevent interior squeak/rattle noise.
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place the microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize
visible wire.
Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7240
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C210. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Escape / Mariner
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7241
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD182 from C214. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD1 82. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Navigator / Expedition
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07, RMNO7 and DMN07 (shield) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17C712 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C298. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7242
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO7, RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield) from C248 (Sport Trac uses C260). Cut
the three circuits on the female side of the
connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then
splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness
wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the
connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer
used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO5 and GD143 from C248. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO5 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD143. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-150
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124 for links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14358 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 from C315 and GD133 from C314. This is power and ground for both the
new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in
the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133.
Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within
the rear view mirror and in the roof.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7243
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-Super Duty
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C264. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Flex
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7244
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Focus
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 10) Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the interior lamp trim.
2. Lower the interior lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7245
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install interior lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the interior lamp trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CPL6O and GD161 from C934. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CPL6O and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD161. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Fusion / Milan / MKZ
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO2 and GD139 from C913. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO2 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD139. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7246
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMN02 and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMN02 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMN02 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7247
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMNO2 and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness
sleeve and cut the three circuits near C911 or if
equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut
circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM Section 417-01 for additional information. These are the
microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to
VMNO2 and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMNO2 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice
into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends
heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C911. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
Final Test / Service Steps
1. After splicing/soldering is complete, apply power to the vehicle and confirm the voltage at the
jumper inline connector before connecting the
microphone.
^ Jumper blue wire equal 12V positive.
^ Jumper black wire equal ground reference.
^ Jumper yellow wire equal microphone return signal circuit less than IV.
2. Turn off ignition and attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. Make
sure that the connector tabs have locked together after
connecting. Reversing this connector would cause a failure of the microphone.
3. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor
Cell Phone Sound Quality
Cellular Phone Microphone: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor
Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7252
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor
Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7253
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor
Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7254
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor
Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7255
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor
Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7256
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor
Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7257
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor
Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7258
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor
Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7259
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor
Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7260
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor
Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7261
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor
Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7262
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 7268
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell
Phone Audio Quality
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-25-12 Date: 101223
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
TSB 10-25-12
12/23/10
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2011 Focus 2008-2010 Edge, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer 2009-2010 F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex 2009-2011 Escape, Expedition
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009-2011 MKS 2008-2010 MKX 2009-2011 Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable 2008-2010 Mountaineer 2009-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-8-4 to update the vehicle model years, Service Procedure and the
Part List. The new SYNC service Microphone kit now includes a voltage filter incorporated into the
jumper harness.
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2011 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT102512 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell
Phone Audio Quality > Page 7278
The following procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH HEADLINER
MICROPHONE OR DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Go to Step 2 if the vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 3.0 Traffic and Directions or has already
been upgraded to latest available consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE
without E911/VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later versions. To determine the current
APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in
OASIS, click the GO button and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-1 4D544-AE without E9 11 /VHR,
9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later version. For
additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files
may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional. The jumper harness is equipped with a voltage filter. The filter will need to be wrapped
in soft foam 164-R4901 or flock tape 164-R4903 from the Rotunda squeak and rattle kit 164-R4900
to prevent interior squeak/rattle noise.
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place the microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize
visible wire.
Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell
Phone Audio Quality > Page 7279
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C210. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Escape / Mariner
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell
Phone Audio Quality > Page 7280
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD182 from C214. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD1 82. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Navigator / Expedition
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07, RMNO7 and DMN07 (shield) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17C712 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C298. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell
Phone Audio Quality > Page 7281
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO7, RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield) from C248 (Sport Trac uses C260). Cut
the three circuits on the female side of the
connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then
splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness
wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the
connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer
used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO5 and GD143 from C248. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO5 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD143. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-150
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124 for links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14358 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 from C315 and GD133 from C314. This is power and ground for both the
new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in
the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133.
Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within
the rear view mirror and in the roof.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell
Phone Audio Quality > Page 7282
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-Super Duty
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C264. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Flex
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell
Phone Audio Quality > Page 7283
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Focus
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 10) Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the interior lamp trim.
2. Lower the interior lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell
Phone Audio Quality > Page 7284
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install interior lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the interior lamp trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CPL6O and GD161 from C934. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CPL6O and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD161. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Fusion / Milan / MKZ
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO2 and GD139 from C913. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO2 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD139. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell
Phone Audio Quality > Page 7285
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMN02 and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMN02 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMN02 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell
Phone Audio Quality > Page 7286
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMNO2 and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness
sleeve and cut the three circuits near C911 or if
equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut
circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM Section 417-01 for additional information. These are the
microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to
VMNO2 and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMNO2 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice
into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends
heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C911. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
Final Test / Service Steps
1. After splicing/soldering is complete, apply power to the vehicle and confirm the voltage at the
jumper inline connector before connecting the
microphone.
^ Jumper blue wire equal 12V positive.
^ Jumper black wire equal ground reference.
^ Jumper yellow wire equal microphone return signal circuit less than IV.
2. Turn off ignition and attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. Make
sure that the connector tabs have locked together after
connecting. Reversing this connector would cause a failure of the microphone.
3. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality
Cellular Phone Microphone: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7291
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7292
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7293
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7294
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7295
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7296
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7297
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7298
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7299
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7300
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-13-2
> Jul > 10 > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7301
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10
> SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-25-12 Date: 101223
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
TSB 10-25-12
12/23/10
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2011 Focus 2008-2010 Edge, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer 2009-2010 F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex 2009-2011 Escape, Expedition
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009-2011 MKS 2008-2010 MKX 2009-2011 Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable 2008-2010 Mountaineer 2009-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-8-4 to update the vehicle model years, Service Procedure and the
Part List. The new SYNC service Microphone kit now includes a voltage filter incorporated into the
jumper harness.
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2011 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT102512 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10
> SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7307
The following procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH HEADLINER
MICROPHONE OR DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Go to Step 2 if the vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 3.0 Traffic and Directions or has already
been upgraded to latest available consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE
without E911/VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later versions. To determine the current
APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in
OASIS, click the GO button and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-1 4D544-AE without E9 11 /VHR,
9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later version. For
additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files
may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional. The jumper harness is equipped with a voltage filter. The filter will need to be wrapped
in soft foam 164-R4901 or flock tape 164-R4903 from the Rotunda squeak and rattle kit 164-R4900
to prevent interior squeak/rattle noise.
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place the microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize
visible wire.
Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10
> SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7308
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C210. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Escape / Mariner
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10
> SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7309
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD182 from C214. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD1 82. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Navigator / Expedition
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07, RMNO7 and DMN07 (shield) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17C712 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C298. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10
> SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7310
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO7, RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield) from C248 (Sport Trac uses C260). Cut
the three circuits on the female side of the
connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then
splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness
wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the
connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer
used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO5 and GD143 from C248. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO5 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD143. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-150
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124 for links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14358 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 from C315 and GD133 from C314. This is power and ground for both the
new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in
the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133.
Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within
the rear view mirror and in the roof.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10
> SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7311
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-Super Duty
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C264. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Flex
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10
> SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7312
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Focus
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 10) Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the interior lamp trim.
2. Lower the interior lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10
> SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7313
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install interior lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the interior lamp trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CPL6O and GD161 from C934. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CPL6O and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD161. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Fusion / Milan / MKZ
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO2 and GD139 from C913. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO2 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD139. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10
> SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7314
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMN02 and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMN02 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMN02 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10
> SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 7315
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMNO2 and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness
sleeve and cut the three circuits near C911 or if
equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut
circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM Section 417-01 for additional information. These are the
microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to
VMNO2 and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMNO2 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice
into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends
heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C911. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
Final Test / Service Steps
1. After splicing/soldering is complete, apply power to the vehicle and confirm the voltage at the
jumper inline connector before connecting the
microphone.
^ Jumper blue wire equal 12V positive.
^ Jumper black wire equal ground reference.
^ Jumper yellow wire equal microphone return signal circuit less than IV.
2. Turn off ignition and attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. Make
sure that the connector tabs have locked together after
connecting. Reversing this connector would cause a failure of the microphone.
3. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns >
Page 7324
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7337
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7338
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7343
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7344
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To
'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7354
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7355
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R)
System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R)
System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7360
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R)
System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7361
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: >
09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: >
09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 7367
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: >
09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 7373
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7374
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7377
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7378
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM)
C240A Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7379
C240A Part 2
C240B
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7380
C240C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Communications Control Module: Procedures
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Programming
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information
System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually
entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level.
- The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor
(CIP) software levels.
8. The scan tool displays the following information:
- Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM
- Installed date: date the APIM was installed
- Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle
- HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number
- Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled
- S/N: APIM serial number
- Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7383
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected
- Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision
- VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection
- CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software
level, if desired.
10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB
port, or exit the OASIS screen.
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Systems Without Navigation
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after step
3 by turning the ACM off.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7384
5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off.
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval
- Vehicles Without Navigation
1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode.
2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously.
- The Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
displays on the screen.
3. Record the SDARS module ESN.
4. Turn the audio system off.
Navigation Audio System
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this
step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to
complete on its own.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7385
5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu:
6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL
DIAGNOSTICS" menu.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7386
Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Audio Control Module (ACM)
All Except Navigation
Navigation
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7387
Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool.
2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel.
3. Remove the 4 ACM screws.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation).
- To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation).
Navigation
4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors.
All except navigation
5. If equipped, remove the 4 screws and the ACM side support brackets.
6. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM.
Remove the 2 ACM brackets.
All vehicles
7. Remove the ACM.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the ACM.
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software and hardware level when a new APIM is being
installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being
replaced.
Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer
to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory
Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7388
2. Remove the floor console.
3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical
connector.
4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM.
- Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Floor Console Trim Panels
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port and Cable
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7389
NOTE: The original equipment Universal Serial Bus (USB) port and cable is part of the wiring
harness. It can only be serviced by overlaying a new USB port and cable.
1. Remove the transmission selector level bezel by pulling straight up.
2. NOTE: Open the floor console storage bin door.
Remove the floor console finish panel by pulling straight up.
- Disconnect the electrical connector, if necessary.
3. Remove the center instrument panel lower panel by pulling straight back.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Remove the USB cable and port.
- Disconnect the cable from the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM).
- Cut the USB port and cable ends and secure them to prevent NVH concerns.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Secure the new USB port and cable, as necessary, to prevent NVH concerns.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7394
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7395
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being
installed.
Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Disengage the clips.
- Remove the parking aid speaker.
4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Remove the 2 screws.
- Remove the PAM.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the PAM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7400
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7401
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7402
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7405
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7406
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 7407
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7408
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid
sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require
rear bumper cover removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper cover.
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s).
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7412
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7413
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7420
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Reset Procedure
Oil Life Reset
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180
days.
NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number
in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%.
3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%.
Oil Life Start Value
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Start Value
NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of
approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by
10% increments down to 10%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %.
3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence
over again beginning at 100%.
Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center
displays the newly desired percent.
4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure > Page 7423
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement
Message Center Switch
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel.
Hybrid vehicles
2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside.
All vehicles
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's
Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
> Page 7432
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
> Page 7433
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 7438
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 7439
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 7440
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 7441
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 7442
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 7443
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 7444
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 7445
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 7446
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 7447
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 7448
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7454
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7455
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7460
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7461
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7462
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7463
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7464
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7465
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7466
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7467
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7468
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7469
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 7470
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade
TSB 09-11-8
06/15/09
SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE
SOFTWARE
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911
assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a
warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS)
website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates:
^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009
^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009
^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008
^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008
^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ
Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health
Report features and do not require updating.
To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC
911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by
pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box
indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded.
The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface
module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM).
The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles
operated within the US and Canada.
Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as
bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure
the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the
device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure
proper functionality before continuing.
Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer
must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the
latest software version.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade > Page 7475
For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states
related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional
Technician Society (PTS) website.
1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator
vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and
reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before
updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete.
2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
4. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session.
6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher.
7. Close the IDS tool.
8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the go button.
9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab.
10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM.
NOTE
TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM
THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING
TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON
THE SYNC MENU.
12. Set ignition to off.
13. Open and close driver side door.
14. Set ignition to on.
15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu.
16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows.
17. Clear all DTC's on all modules.
18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac,
Expedition, or Navigator vehicles.
Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu.
2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display.
3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display.
4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display.
5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display.
Non Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on steering wheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade > Page 7476
2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed.
Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if
that application is desired.
NOTE
IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911
ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE
V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7482
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7483
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7489
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7490
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack,
Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack,
Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7495
Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Service and Repair
Audio Input Jack
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Pull straight back to disengage the clips.
Remove the instrument panel lower panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
2. Release the tabs and remove the audio input jack.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Entertainment System Control
Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice
In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Entertainment System
Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time
Displays Twice In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) is
being installed.
Upload the FDIM configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel by pulling straight back.
3. Remove the 4 FDIM screws.
4. Remove the FDIM.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the FDIM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) > Page 7513
Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM)
Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If the Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) is being replaced, it must be replaced as an
assembly with the middle center instrument panel center finish panel. However, the middle center
instrument panel center finish panel can be replaced individually if the FCIM does not need to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Audio Control
Module (ACM) See: Cellular
Phone/Communications Control Module/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Audio
Control Module (ACM).
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module:
> 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module:
> 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7523
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module:
> 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7524
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning
System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning
System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7530
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning
System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7531
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update
For Various Concerns
Navigation Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update
For Various Concerns > Page 7541
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update
For Various Concerns > Page 7542
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7548
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7549
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-18-4 > Sep > 09 > M/T Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only)
Clutch Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Premature Clutch Wear (Mexico Only)
TSB 09-18-4
MANUAL TRANSMISSION CLUTCH WEAR - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2009 Escape
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may exhibit excessive
clutch wear within the first 14,913 miles (24,000 Km) due to unique customer driving conditions
within Mexico. An updated clutch is now available to reduce this specific type of wear.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace clutch with latest level service part. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091804A 2009 Escape Replace 4.0 Hrs.
clutch (Do Not Use With 7003A And 7003A3)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7B546 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Locations > Audio Amplifier
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Locations > Audio Amplifier > Page 7565
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7568
Amplifier: Diagrams Audio Amplifier
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7569
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Subwoofer Amplifier
Amplifier: Service and Repair Subwoofer Amplifier
Subwoofer Amplifier
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
3. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector.
4. Remove the 4 screws and the subwoofer amplifier.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7572
Amplifier: Service and Repair Audio Amplifier
Audio Amplifier
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the audio amplifier electrical connectors.
2. NOTE: Move the passenger seat all the way back to access.
Remove the 2 nuts, the bolt, and the audio amplifier.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7576
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7577
Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module
Removal and Installation
NOTE: This procedure applies to vehicles without navigation only. For vehicle with navigation, the
satellite radio receiver is built-in to the Audio Control Module (ACM).
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System
(SDARS) module is being installed.
Upload the SDARS module configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Disconnect the SDARS module antenna cable and electrical connectors.
3. NOTE: Move the passenger seat all the way back to access.
Remove the 2 nuts, the bolt, and the SDARS module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the SDARS module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control,
Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair
Remote Control: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel Controls
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the driver air bag module during this procedure.
Using a suitable tool, pry the steering wheel controls out of the steering wheel.
2. NOTE: Do not allow the electrical connector to fall back into the steering wheel.
Remove the steering wheel controls.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7585
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7586
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7587
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker
Speaker: Service and Repair Door Speaker
Door Speaker
NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the door trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 screws and the door speaker.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker > Page 7590
Speaker: Service and Repair Subwoofer Speaker
Subwoofer Speaker
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The subwoofer speaker, amplifier, and enclosure and only replaced as a complete
assembly.
1. Remove the RH quarter trim panel.
2. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector.
3. Remove the 3 bolts and the subwoofer speaker.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7596
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7597
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest:
> 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest:
> 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest:
> 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7610
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest:
> 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7611
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest:
> 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest:
> 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7616
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest:
> 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7617
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To
'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7627
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7628
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7633
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7634
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's
Set
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 09-19-5
10/05/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION, DTC- P0770, P0772, P0773, P0774 - BUILT 9/8/2008 TO 9/26/2008 - MIL
LAMP ON - ERRATIC SHIFT AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENTS
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-6-9 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 transmission and built
between 9/8/2008 and 9/26/2008 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0770, P0772,
P0773, P0774, The DTC's indicate open, short to ground or short to power in shift solenoid E
(SSE) circuit. The failure modes that may be associated with the DTC's are erratic shifts, harsh
engagements, 5th gear drive away, no torque converter clutch (TCC) apply, malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) on. This may be caused by a shorted circuit in the powertrain control module (PCM).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow pinpoint test A - Transaxle Control Solenoids as described in Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 307-01, through test step AS - Check The
Resistance Of The Solenoid Field Circuit. If Result/Action is:
a. Yes - Replace the powertrain control module (PCM), refer to WSM 303-14.
b. No - This procedure does not apply and continue with diagnostic steps.
2. Use the IDS Programmable Module Installation (PMI) function to insure the new PCM has the
transmission solenoid body strategy downloaded.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091905A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The PCM, Includes Time To Perform Pin Point Tests And Perform PMI (Do Not Use With
12650D, 12650D6, 12650D45)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts > Page 7648
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
12A650 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-18-3 > Sep > 09 > Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh Upshifts/Downshifts
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Harsh
Upshifts/Downshifts
TSB 09-18-3
09/21/09
6F35 - HARSH 3-1 OR 2-1 ROLLING STOP DOWNSHIFT - HESITATION DURING LOW SPEED
MANEUVERS - 2-3 OR 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE COLD STARTS - NO DTCS
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-7 to update the IDS version of software and vehicle built date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles built on or before 8/2/2009
and equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 3-1 or 2-1 rolling stop downshift or
downshift hesitation during throttle tip-in/tip-out 3-4-2 downshift maneuver at vehicle speeds
between 20-40 MPH (32-64 Km/h). Also may have 2-3 or 3-4 upshift flare during cold starts (engine
off for 2 or more hours). There is a new calibration that will improve the transmission downshift
maneuver under these conditions and also improve 2-3, 3-4 upshift flare when vehicle is cold.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS
release 62.11 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration
files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091803A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.3 Hr.
2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-19-5 > Oct > 09 > A/T - DTC's Set/MIL ON/Harsh Erratic
Engagement/Shifts > Page 7666
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
12A650 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7671
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM)
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7674
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7675
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM)
C240A Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7676
C240A Part 2
C240B
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7677
C240C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Communications Control Module: Procedures
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Programming
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information
System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually
entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level.
- The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor
(CIP) software levels.
8. The scan tool displays the following information:
- Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM
- Installed date: date the APIM was installed
- Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle
- HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number
- Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled
- S/N: APIM serial number
- Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7680
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected
- Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision
- VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection
- CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software
level, if desired.
10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB
port, or exit the OASIS screen.
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Systems Without Navigation
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after step
3 by turning the ACM off.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7681
5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off.
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval
- Vehicles Without Navigation
1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode.
2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously.
- The Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
displays on the screen.
3. Record the SDARS module ESN.
4. Turn the audio system off.
Navigation Audio System
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this
step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to
complete on its own.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7682
5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu:
6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL
DIAGNOSTICS" menu.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7683
Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Audio Control Module (ACM)
All Except Navigation
Navigation
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7684
Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool.
2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel.
3. Remove the 4 ACM screws.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation).
- To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation).
Navigation
4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors.
All except navigation
5. If equipped, remove the 4 screws and the ACM side support brackets.
6. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM.
Remove the 2 ACM brackets.
All vehicles
7. Remove the ACM.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the ACM.
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software and hardware level when a new APIM is being
installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being
replaced.
Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer
to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory
Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7685
2. Remove the floor console.
3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical
connector.
4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM.
- Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Floor Console Trim Panels
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port and Cable
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7686
NOTE: The original equipment Universal Serial Bus (USB) port and cable is part of the wiring
harness. It can only be serviced by overlaying a new USB port and cable.
1. Remove the transmission selector level bezel by pulling straight up.
2. NOTE: Open the floor console storage bin door.
Remove the floor console finish panel by pulling straight up.
- Disconnect the electrical connector, if necessary.
3. Remove the center instrument panel lower panel by pulling straight back.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Remove the USB cable and port.
- Disconnect the cable from the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM).
- Cut the USB port and cable ends and secure them to prevent NVH concerns.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Secure the new USB port and cable, as necessary, to prevent NVH concerns.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's
Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7695
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 7696
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7701
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7702
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7703
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7704
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7705
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7706
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7707
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7708
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7709
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7710
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 7711
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set >
Page 7717
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set >
Page 7718
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
7723
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
7724
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
7725
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
7726
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
7727
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
7728
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
7729
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
7730
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
7731
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
7732
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
7733
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade
TSB 09-11-8
06/15/09
SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE
SOFTWARE
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911
assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a
warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS)
website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates:
^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009
^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009
^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008
^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008
^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ
Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health
Report features and do not require updating.
To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC
911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by
pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box
indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded.
The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface
module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM).
The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles
operated within the US and Canada.
Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as
bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure
the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the
device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure
proper functionality before continuing.
Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer
must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the
latest software version.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade >
Page 7738
For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states
related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional
Technician Society (PTS) website.
1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator
vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and
reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before
updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete.
2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
4. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session.
6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher.
7. Close the IDS tool.
8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the go button.
9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab.
10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM.
NOTE
TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM
THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING
TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON
THE SYNC MENU.
12. Set ignition to off.
13. Open and close driver side door.
14. Set ignition to on.
15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu.
16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows.
17. Clear all DTC's on all modules.
18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac,
Expedition, or Navigator vehicles.
Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu.
2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display.
3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display.
4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display.
5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display.
Non Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on steering wheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade >
Page 7739
2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed.
Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if
that application is desired.
NOTE
IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911
ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE
V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade
TSB 09-11-8
06/15/09
SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE
SOFTWARE
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911
assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a
warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS)
website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates:
^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009
^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009
^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008
^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008
^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ
Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health
Report features and do not require updating.
To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC
911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by
pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box
indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded.
The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface
module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM).
The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles
operated within the US and Canada.
Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as
bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure
the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the
device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure
proper functionality before continuing.
Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer
must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the
latest software version.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade >
Page 7745
For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states
related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional
Technician Society (PTS) website.
1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator
vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and
reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before
updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete.
2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
4. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session.
6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher.
7. Close the IDS tool.
8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the go button.
9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab.
10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM.
NOTE
TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM
THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING
TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON
THE SYNC MENU.
12. Set ignition to off.
13. Open and close driver side door.
14. Set ignition to on.
15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu.
16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows.
17. Clear all DTC's on all modules.
18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac,
Expedition, or Navigator vehicles.
Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu.
2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display.
3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display.
4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display.
5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display.
Non Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on steering wheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade >
Page 7746
2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed.
Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if
that application is desired.
NOTE
IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911
ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE
V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD
Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice
In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice
In CD Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time
Displays Twice In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various
Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various
Concerns > Page 7768
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various
Concerns > Page 7769
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns > Page 7775
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns > Page 7776
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 >
Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Navigation Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 >
Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7785
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 >
Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7786
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7792
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 7793
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft Coupler: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On
Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 7799
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 7805
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7809
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7810
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being
installed.
Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Disengage the clips.
- Remove the parking aid speaker.
4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Remove the 2 screws.
- Remove the PAM.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the PAM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 7816
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 7817
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 7818
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 7821
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 7822
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 7823
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7824
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid
sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require
rear bumper cover removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper cover.
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s).
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7828
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7829
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10L06 Date: 100419
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED
Yes, OASIS will only be activated on stock vehicles for this service action.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website for stock vehicles only on April 19, 2010.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
Dealer action is not required. Owner Guide Supplement booklets are being mailed to owners
beginning April 30, 2010.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 7839
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Stock Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets for stock vehicles are being mailed to
dealerships the week of April 19, 2010. The package will be sent to the attention of the service
manager.
Sold Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets and installation instructions are being mailed
directly to customers of the affected vehicles.
A small quantity of booklets have been set aside in case an Owner Guide Supplement booklet is
misplaced. To order an additional Owner Guide Supplement booklet, contact the Special Service
Support Center. A VIN number will be required for each replacement booklet ordered.
DEALER PRICE
Dealers will not be charged for Owner Guide Supplement booklets ordered for this program.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 7840
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 7841
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 7842
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 7843
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 7844
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 7845
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 7846
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual
Supplement > Page 7847
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners
Manual Supplement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10L06 Date: 100419
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED
Yes, OASIS will only be activated on stock vehicles for this service action.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website for stock vehicles only on April 19, 2010.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
Dealer action is not required. Owner Guide Supplement booklets are being mailed to owners
beginning April 30, 2010.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners
Manual Supplement > Page 7853
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Stock Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets for stock vehicles are being mailed to
dealerships the week of April 19, 2010. The package will be sent to the attention of the service
manager.
Sold Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets and installation instructions are being mailed
directly to customers of the affected vehicles.
A small quantity of booklets have been set aside in case an Owner Guide Supplement booklet is
misplaced. To order an additional Owner Guide Supplement booklet, contact the Special Service
Support Center. A VIN number will be required for each replacement booklet ordered.
DEALER PRICE
Dealers will not be charged for Owner Guide Supplement booklets ordered for this program.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners
Manual Supplement > Page 7854
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners
Manual Supplement > Page 7855
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners
Manual Supplement > Page 7856
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners
Manual Supplement > Page 7857
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners
Manual Supplement > Page 7858
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners
Manual Supplement > Page 7859
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners
Manual Supplement > Page 7860
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners
Manual Supplement > Page 7861
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 >
Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10L06 Date: 100419
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED
Yes, OASIS will only be activated on stock vehicles for this service action.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website for stock vehicles only on April 19, 2010.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
Dealer action is not required. Owner Guide Supplement booklets are being mailed to owners
beginning April 30, 2010.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 >
Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7867
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Stock Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets for stock vehicles are being mailed to
dealerships the week of April 19, 2010. The package will be sent to the attention of the service
manager.
Sold Vehicles: Owner Guide Supplement booklets and installation instructions are being mailed
directly to customers of the affected vehicles.
A small quantity of booklets have been set aside in case an Owner Guide Supplement booklet is
misplaced. To order an additional Owner Guide Supplement booklet, contact the Special Service
Support Center. A VIN number will be required for each replacement booklet ordered.
DEALER PRICE
Dealers will not be charged for Owner Guide Supplement booklets ordered for this program.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 >
Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7868
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 >
Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7869
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 >
Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7870
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 >
Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7871
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 >
Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7872
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 >
Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7873
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 >
Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7874
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 10L06 > Apr > 10 >
Campaign - Vehicle Flat Towing Owners Manual Supplement > Page 7875
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 >
A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 >
A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 7880
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 7886
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Towing Information: > 09-20-13 > Oct > 09 > A/T Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 7892
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7897
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7898
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7899
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7900
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7901
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7902
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7903
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7904
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7905
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7906
Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7907
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7908
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7909
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7910
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7911
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7912
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7913
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7914
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7915
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7916
Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7917
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7922
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7923
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7924
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7925
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7926
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7927
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7928
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7929
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7930
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7931
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7932
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7933
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7934
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7935
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7936
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7937
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7938
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7939
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7940
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7941
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Trailer Lamps
Principles of Operation
Trailer Lamps
Principles of Operation
The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn
relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. They are energized to correspond with the exterior
lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the
trailer lamps.
Inspection and Verification
Trailer Lamps
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the
appropriate pinpoint test.
3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7944
Trailer Lamps: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Trailer Lamps
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7945
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Y: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Y: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The trailer tow connector receives ground through circuits RAT08 (WH) and GD149 (BK/GY) for all
of the trailer lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Y: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- Y1 CHECK CIRCUITS RAT08 (WH) AND GD149 (BK/GY)
FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow C439-4, circuit RAT08 (WH), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
REPAIR circuit RAT08 (WH) or circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal
operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Z: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Z: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow
stop/turn relays. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7946
grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the
vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE).
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the
vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow stop/turn relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Z: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER STOP/TURN
LAMP
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- Z1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT06 (YE) OR CIRCUIT CAT09 (GN)
FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
GO to Z2.
------------------------------------------------- Z2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY
- Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relay.
- Substitute a know good relay.
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7947
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow stop/turn relay. TEST the system for
normal operation.
No
REMOVE the known good relay. GO to Z3.
------------------------------------------------- Z3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS18 (GY/BN) OR CIRCUIT CLS19
(VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay
pin 2, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn
relay pin 2, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to Z4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- Z4 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB14 (BN/RD) FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB
face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to Z5.
No
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7948
VERIFY the BJB fuse 14 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB14 (BN/RD) for an open. TEST
the system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short.
------------------------------------------------- Z5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB
face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB
face side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH trailer stop/turn) or circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH trailer stop/turn) for an
open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the
vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through
circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer
tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow parking lamp relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- AA1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT11 (BN) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7949
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
GO to AA2.
------------------------------------------------- AA2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay.
- Substitute a known good relay.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow parking lamp relay. TEST the system
for normal operation.
No
REMOVE the known good relay. GO to AA3.
------------------------------------------------- AA3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 2, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to AA4.
No
REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7950
------------------------------------------------- AA4 CHECK THE SBB08 (VT/RD) FOR AN OPEN
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB
face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to AA5.
No
VERIFY the BJB fuse 8 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) for an open. TEST the
system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short.
------------------------------------------------- AA5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT11 (BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Turn/Stoplamp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7951
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the
vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE).
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the
vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN).
Trailer Tow Parking
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the
vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage
is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
------------------------------------------------- AB1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE TRAILER TOW
CONNECTOR
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows:
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
GO to AB2.
No
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
------------------------------------------------- AB2 CHECK THE SUSPECT RELAY
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Relay.
- Carry out the component test for the suspect trailer tow relay.
- Is the trailer tow relay OK?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH turn), circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH turn), or circuit CAT11 (BN) (parking
lamps) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7952
INSTALL a new turn trailer tow relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7957
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7958
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7961
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7962
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7963
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7964
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7965
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7970
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7971
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7972
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7973
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7974
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7975
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7976
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7977
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7978
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7979
Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7980
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7981
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7982
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7983
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7984
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7985
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7986
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7987
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7988
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7989
Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7990
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Description and Operation
Body Control Systems: Description and Operation
Module Controlled Functions
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
NOTE: The time out for the battery saver relay and the accessory delay relay (both are controlled
by the SJB) is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80 km (50 miles). Once the vehicle passes the
approximate mileage threshold of 80 km (50 miles), the time out for both relays will be the normal
10 minute time out, as described by the Owner's Literature. For the accessory delay relay, refer to
Windows.
The SJB is the only multifunction electronic module on this vehicle. The SJB is a combination of a
multifunction electronic module and a Central Junction Box (CJB). The following systems are
controlled by the SJB:
- Auto locks
- Exterior lamps
- Illuminated entry and interior lamps
- Keyless entry keypad
- Power door locks
- Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The SJB is located under the front (passenger side floor) console.
Post Crash Alert
The post crash alert function is controlled by the SJB. If the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
determines an impact of severity enough to deploy the air bags has occurred (the air bags may or
may not be deployed by the RCM), the RCM sends a message to the Instrument Cluster (IC) over
the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN), which sends a message to the SJB over the
Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) and the SJB activates the post crash alert
function by sounding the horn 3 times, then off for 4 seconds, then on 3 times, etc., until the battery
dies or the function is turned off. The hazard lamps also flash with the horn sounding, however, the
hazard lamps keep flashing during the horn off cycle.
The post crash alert function can be turned off by:
- pressing the hazard switch (may need to be pressed more than once).
- pressing the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key UNLOCK button.
- pressing the PANIC button.
This feature acts similar to the perimeter alarm, but the horn cycle is different. Turning the ignition
to the ON position will not deactivate this function, but will deactivate an activated perimeter alarm.
The post crash alert function cannot be configured off.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Body Control Systems: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Inspection And Verification
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) prove-out confirms power and ground from
the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
7. Carry out the network test:
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart. See:
Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Principles Of Operation
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Principles of Operation
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
NOTE: The time out for the battery saver relay and the accessory delay relay (both are controlled
by the SJB) is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7997
km (50 miles). Once the vehicle passes the approximate mileage threshold of 80 km (50 miles), the
time out for both relays will be the normal 10 minute time out, as described by the Owner's
Literature. For the accessory delay relay, refer to Windows.
The SJB is a multifunction electronic module that controls many of the vehicle systems. Several
SJB functions utilize hardwired inputs and/or outputs. The SJB controls the following hardwired
functions, using the corresponding inputs and outputs:
In addition, the SJB is involved in other vehicle systems through communication over the Controller
Area Network (CAN). For a detailed list of the SJB network inputs and outputs, refer to Information
Bus.
Some SJB parameters are programmable. Two types of programmable parameters are available:
vehicle configuration and customer preference. Refer to Information Bus for programmable
parameters.
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
The SJB utilizes a Field-Effect Transistor (FET) protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs
(for example, the headlamp output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive
current (typically shorted circuits) and are shut down (turn off the voltage or ground provided by the
module) when a fault is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at the time for the fault.
The circuit resets after a customer demand (ignition cycle) of the function (which switches the
component on, causing the 30-minute battery saver timer to be energized). When an excessive
circuit load (from a shorted circuit) occurs several times, the module shuts down the output until a
repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that was stored by the first
failure does not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs.
The SJB does not allow the DTC to be cleared or the normal circuit function restored until a
successful self-test (retrieving on-demand DTCs) proves that the fault has been repaired. After the
self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs present), the continuous DTC clear and
the normal circuit function returns.
The SJB has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established. When the first or second
level is reached, the continuous DTC associated with the short circuit sets along with DTC B106E.
These DTCs (B106E and the DTC associated with the shorted circuit) may be cleared using the
Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the fault itself has been corrected. Each and every
time the scan tool retrieves DTCs from the module and a circuit is shorted, a level of short circuit
tolerance is used up.
If any of the circuits are shorted past the third level (if DTCs have been retrieved 3 successive
times with the short circuit not having been repaired), then DTCs B106F and B1342 are set along
with the associated continuous DTC. These DTCs (B106F and B1342) cannot be cleared and the
module must be replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7998
The initial short circuit must be successfully repaired and its associated DTC is cleared before the
SJB is replaced or the new SJB may experience one or more of the short circuit tolerance levels
being used up, causing a repeat replacement of the module.
The SJB FET protected output circuits for the handles, locks, latches and entry systems are the
liftgate lock actuator circuit CPL10 (GN/WH) and the keypad illumination circuit CPK28 (WH/GN).
DTC B106E sets when the SJB has disabled a circuit due to a repetitive fault causing a circuit
overload. A corresponding DTC for the circuit in question will also be set as follows:
- DTC B1034 - Radio Start Signal Circuit Failure
- DTC B1218 - Horn Relay Coil Circuit Short to Vbatt
- DTC B1304 - Accessory Delay Relay Coil Circuit Short To Battery
- DTC B1316 - Battery Saver Relay Coil Circuit Short To Ground
- DTC B1349 - Heated Backlite Relay Short To Battery
- DTC B1474 - Battery Saver Power Relay Circuit Short To Battery
- DTC B1502 - Lamp Turn Signal Left Circuit Short To Ground
- DTC B1506 - Lamp Turn Signal Right Circuit Short To Ground
- DTC B1626 - Lamp Keypad Output Short Circuit To Ground
- DTC B2070 - Trailer Tow Relay Coil(s) Circuit Failure
- DTC B2501 - LF Lamp Low Beam Circuit Failure
- DTC B2503 - RF Lamp Low Beam Circuit Failure
- DTC B2505 - LF Lamp High Beam Circuit Failure
- DTC B2507 - RF Lamp High Beam Circuit Failure
- DTC B2512 - Front Fog Lamp Relay Ckt Short to Battery
- DTC C1788 - Stoplamp Relay Output Circuit Short to Ground
- DTC C1961 - Park Lamp Relay Coil Circuit Failure
- DTC P0930 - Gear Shift Lock Solenoid Circuit Low
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7999
Body Control Systems: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
NOTE: Most powertrain (P-code) DTCs are diagnosed in Computers and Control Systems
Information. If the P-code retrieved is not listed below, refer to Computers and Control Systems
Information to continue diagnostics.
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
NOTE: Some of these modules utilize a 5-character DTC followed by a 2-character failure-type
code. The failure-type code provides information about specific fault conditions such as opens, or
shorts to ground. Continuous memory DTCs have an additional 2-character DTC status code suffix
to assist in determining DTC history.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8000
B0001:1A-B0011:13
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8001
B0011:2B-B0029:13
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8002
B0029:2B-B0092:11
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8003
B00A0:4A-B0097:96
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8004
B00B5:11-B1155
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8005
B11BA:1C-B1214:12
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8006
B12A0-B1299
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8007
B12AB-B1318
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8008
B1318-B1520
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8009
B1A01:01-B2032
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8010
B2044-B2427
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8011
B273A-B2870
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8012
B2A20-B2965
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8013
B2A2A-B2A4D / C0001:49-C0018:49
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8014
C001C:49-C0034:29
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8015
C003A:01-C0063:64
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8016
C0064:28-C1018:62
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8017
C101A:62-C1133:64
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8018
C1134:28-C1699
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8019
C1B00:28-C2780 / P0512-P0563
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8020
P0A0A-P0727
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8021
P0AA6-P2613
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8022
PXXXX-P2806 / U0001-U0131
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8023
U0131:87-U0155:00
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8024
U0155:00-U0256:00
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8025
U0256:00-U2014:41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8026
U201A:51-U2100:56
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8027
U261A-U3003:17
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8028
U3003:17
Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
DTC Charts
B106E-B1342 / P062F / U0155-U2473
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8029
Body Control Systems: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8030
Body Control Systems: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: DTCs B106E/B106F
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: DTCs B106E/B106F
Normal Operation
When a repetitive fault causing a circuit overload is detected on certain output circuits, the Smart
Junction Box (SJB) disables the circuit by removing voltage, or ground, to the affected circuit. The
circuit remains disabled until the fault is corrected and an on-demand self-test is run. When the
on-demand self-test has been run after all faults have been corrected, any DTCs related to the fault
are cleared.
- DTC B106E (Solid State Driver Disabled Due to Short Circuit) - sets when the SJB has disabled a
circuit due to a repetitive fault causing a circuit overload. For a complete list of corresponding
DTCs, refer to the Principles of Operation. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Principles Of Operation
- DTC B106F (Module Disabled Due to External Fault) - sets when one or more output functions
are permanently disabled due to a repetitive circuit overload fault. When DTC B106F is present
(DTC B1342 may also be present), the SJB must be replaced after the fault condition has been
corrected.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Output circuit short to ground or voltage
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST A: DTCs B106E/B106F
NOTICE: If DTC B106F is present and the Smart Junction Box (SJB) is to be replaced, the fault
condition must be corrected first. Failure to correct the fault condition first may cause damage to
the new SJB, resulting in a repeat repair.
NOTICE: If DTC B106F is present, DTC B1342 may also be present. At this time, ignore these
DTCs and follow the necessary diagnostics to resolve DTC B106E and any other DTCs that are
present. DTC B106E will be present only when there is another DTC due to a software issue or a
circuitry issue that must be resolved before another self-test is run. Each time a self-test is run, one
of the 3 thresholds is used. Once the 3 thresholds are used, DTCs B106F and B1342 will be
present and the SJB must be replaced. All other DTCs MUST be resolved first, or else the new
SJB will begin to have its 3 thresholds used with each self-test that is run.
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK FOR DTC B106E
- Review the DTCs from the SJB self-test.
- Is DTC B106E present?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.
------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK FOR OTHER DTCs
- Review the DTCs from the SJB self-test.
Are any SJB DTCs present other than DTC B106E?
Yes
CORRECT any other DTCs. REFER to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart. REPEAT the self-test
(on-demand DTCs).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8031
No
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK FOR DTC B106F
- Review the DTCs from the SJB self-test.
- Is DTC B106F present?
Yes
CORRECT any other DTCs. REFER to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart. INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to
Smart Junction Box (SJB) See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service
and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern was caused by a fault in one of the
output circuits.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: DTC B1317
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: DTC B1317
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 13 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power
Distribution/SJB for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) monitors the voltage from the battery to determine if it goes above
or below specific thresholds and sets DTC B1317 in continuous memory and on-demand if the SJB
detects high battery voltage above 15.5 volts on circuit SBB02 (YE/RD).
- DTC B1317 (Battery Voltage High) - a continuous memory or on-demand DTC that sets when the
SJB detects battery voltage above 15.5 volts on circuit SBB02 (YE/RD).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Charging system concern
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST B: DTC B1317
NOTE: DTC B1317 may be stored in the module memory due to previous battery charging or
vehicle jump starting events.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK FOR DTC B1317, B1676 OR P0563 SET IN
OTHER MODULES
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: (All CMDTCs) Self-Test.
- Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs from all modules.
Is DTC B1317, B1676 or P0563 (PCM) set in more than one module?
Yes
REFER to Charging System to diagnose an overcharging condition.
No
GO to B2.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8032
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE
- Turn off all interior/exterior lights and accessories.
- Start and run the engine at approximately 2,000 rpm for 3 minutes while monitoring the battery
voltage.
- Does the battery voltage rise to 15.5 volts or higher?
Yes
REFER to Charging System to diagnose an overcharging condition.
No
GO to B3.
------------------------------------------------- B3 RECHECK FOR DTC B1317
- Turn the engine off.
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Self-Test.
- Clear the continuous memory DTCs.
- Carry out the SJB self-test.
- Is DTC B1317 present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Smart Junction Box (SJB) See: Power and Ground
Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set previously during
battery charging or while jump starting the vehicle.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: DTC B1318
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test C: DTC B1318
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 13 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power
Distribution/SJB for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) monitors the voltage from the battery to determine if it goes above
or below specific thresholds and sets DTC B1318 in continuous memory and on-demand if the SJB
detects low battery voltage below 10 volts on circuit SBB02 (YE/RD).
- DTC B1318 (Battery Voltage Low) - a continuous memory or on-demand DTC that sets when the
SJB detects battery voltage below 10 volts on circuit SBB02 (YE/RD).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- High circuit resistance
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST C: DTC B1318
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8033
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- C1 RECHECK THE SJB DTCs
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Self-Test.
- Clear the DTCs. Repeat the SJB self-test.
- Is DTC B1318 still present?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set previously during
battery charging or while jump starting the vehicle.
------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCs IN THE PCM
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: PCM Self-Test.
- Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs from the PCM.
- Is DTC P0620, P0625, P0626 or P065B set in the PCM?
Yes
REFER to Charging System.
No
GO to C3.
------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK THE BATTERY CONDITION AND STATE OF
CHARGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Check the battery condition and verify the battery is fully charged. Refer to Battery, Battery
Condition Test. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests
- Is the battery OK and fully charged?
Yes
GO to C4.
No
REFER to Charging System.
------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE SJB VOLTAGE SUPPLY
- Measure and record the voltage at the battery.
- Disconnect: SJB C2280G.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the SJB C2280G-1, circuit SBB02 (YE/RD), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8034
- Is the voltage within 0.2 volt of the recorded battery voltage?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
REPAIR the circuit for high resistance. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- C5 CHECK THE SJB GROUND CIRCUIT
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Disconnect: SJB C2280D.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280D-7, 24, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
REPAIR the circuit for high resistance. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Connect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Disconnect the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Smart Junction Box (SJB) See: Power and Ground
Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8035
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test D: DTC U0155
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Pinpoint Test D: DTC U0155
Normal Operation
- DTC U0155 (Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster (IC) Control Module) - set by the
Smart Junction Box (SJB) if data messages received from the Instrument Cluster (IC) over the
Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) are missing for 5 minutes.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Module communication
- IC
PINPOINT TEST D: DTC U0155
------------------------------------------------- D1 VERIFY CUSTOMER CONCERN
- Ignition ON.
- Verify that there is an observable symptom present.
- Is an observable symptom present?
Yes
GO to D2.
No
The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network
traffic or intermittent fault condition.
------------------------------------------------- D2 CHECK THE COMMUNICATION NETWORK
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Carry out the network test.
- Does the IC pass the network test?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
REFER to Information Bus.
------------------------------------------------- D3 RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE
SELF-TEST
- Check for recorded SJB DTCs from the self-test.
- Is DTC B1317 or B1318 recorded?
Yes
For DTC B1317, Go To Pinpoint Test b. See: Pinpoint Test B: DTC B1317
For DTC B1318, Go To Pinpoint Test c. See: Pinpoint Test C: DTC B1318
No
GO to D4.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8036
------------------------------------------------- D4 RECHECK THE SJB DTCs
NOTE: If new modules were installed prior to the DTC being set, the module configuration may be
incorrectly set during Programmable Module Installation (PMI) or the PMI may not have been
carried out.
- Clear the DTCs. Repeat the SJB self-test.
- Is DTC U0155 still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IC. TEST the system for normal operation. REPEAT the SJB self-test.
If DTC U0155 is still present, INSTALL a new SJB.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network
traffic or intermittent fault condition.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair
Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair
Running Board
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Release the running board trim bezel push clips and remove the running board trim bezel.
3. Remove the 4 running board bolts and remove the running board.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove the body-to-running board bracket screw.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures
Tab Repair - Bumper
1. NOTE: Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of
quality of appearance, fit and durability. Will labor
and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a new replacement bumper cover? If the
bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the following steps.
NOTE: The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives
or patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly.
Remove the affected bumper.
2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover.
3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with
compressed air.
4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area.
5. Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the
tab, then slope back in a wedge shape approximately
51 mm (2 in) from original tab.
6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected
area.
- Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape.
7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme
care to not sand through the exterior surface.
8. NOTICE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) in a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) can be
affected and damaged by excessively
high temperatures. The temperature in some body shop paint booths can exceed 60°C (140°F).
Therefore, during refinishing operations, the paint booth temperature must be set at or below 60°C
(140°F) with a bake time of 45 minutes or less. Temperatures in excess of 60°C (140°F) or bake
durations longer than 45 minutes will require the HVTB be removed from the vehicle prior to
placing in the paint booth. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint
systems.
9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8046
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement
Bumper Cover - Front
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Prior to removal of the front bumper cover, place tape at the corners of the bumper cover
and below the headlamps to prevent damage to the paint.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 6 pushpins from inside the front splash shield (3 each side).
3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield-to-air deflector bolts (2 each side).
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Remove the 3 air deflector bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the 2 front bumper cover center pushpins from the front bumper cover.
6. If equipped, disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors.
7. If equipped, disconnect the front parking aid sensor harness.
8. Remove the 2 bolts that attach the grille to the radiator support bracket.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Position the front bumper cover.
- Push inward on the sides of the bumper cover near the bottom corner of the headlamp until the
bumper cover snap onto the bumper slides.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures
Tab Repair - Bumper
1. NOTE: Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of
quality of appearance, fit and durability. Will labor
and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a new replacement bumper cover? If the
bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the following steps.
NOTE: The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives
or patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly.
Remove the affected bumper.
2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover.
3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with
compressed air.
4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area.
5. Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the
tab, then slope back in a wedge shape approximately
51 mm (2 in) from original tab.
6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected
area.
- Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape.
7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme
care to not sand through the exterior surface.
8. NOTICE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) in a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) can be
affected and damaged by excessively
high temperatures. The temperature in some body shop paint booths can exceed 60°C (140°F).
Therefore, during refinishing operations, the paint booth temperature must be set at or below 60°C
(140°F) with a bake time of 45 minutes or less. Temperatures in excess of 60°C (140°F) or bake
durations longer than 45 minutes will require the HVTB be removed from the vehicle prior to
placing in the paint booth. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint
systems.
9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8052
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement
Bumper Cover - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 4 rear bumper cover center screws.
2. Remove the 2 rear splash shields.
- Remove the 4 splash shield pin-type retainers (2 each side).
- Remove the 4 splash shield screws (2 each side).
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 rear bumper cover upper screws (1 each side).
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Remove the 2 liftgate alignment bumper bolts and the 2 liftgate alignment bumpers.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. If equipped, disconnect the parking aid system or trailer tow electrical connector.
6. Remove the rear bumper cover.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- When installing, position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides.
- Transfer all necessary components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
Cowl Panel Grille
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms.
3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers.
4. Remove the cowl end caps.
5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Exterior
Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Front Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not
Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Exterior
Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 8069
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Front Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0
Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 8075
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 8076
Front Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 8077
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 8078
2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 8079
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 8080
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 8081
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front
Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove the exterior front door handle. For additional information, refer to Exterior Front Door
Handle See: Exterior Front Door Handle.
2. Disconnect the door latch carrier.
1. Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside.
2. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement screw.
3. Disconnect the actuating rods.
- If necessary, disconnect the lock cylinder actuating rod from the exterior front door handle
reinforcement.
- Disconnect the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the front door latch.
4. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement with the exterior front door handle
reinforcement actuating rod.
5. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page
8084
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page
8085
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Exterior Front Door Handle
Exterior Front Door Handle
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the exterior front door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement.
4. Remove the exterior front door handle bezel.
1. Pull the exterior front door handle open.
2. Pivot the rear of the exterior front door handle bezel and remove.
5. Remove the exterior front door handle.
- Open and pull the exterior front door handle rearward to release and remove.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page
8086
6. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle seals.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page
8087
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches Exploded View
Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded
View
Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
> Page 8092
Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Interior Door Handle - Front
Interior Door Handle - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Release the interior front door handle retaining tabs and remove the interior front door handle.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments
Front Door Hinge: Adjustments
Door Alignment - Front
All alignments
NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side similar.
1. Remove the door latch striker plate.
Front door in and out, up and down alignment
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the front door hinge-to-front door fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
Front door fore, aft and tilt alignment
3. Remove the front fender.
4. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper front door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
5. Remove the front door scuff plate.
6. Partially remove the front door weatherstrip.
7. Remove the lower cowl trim panel.
- Remove the pin-type retainer.
- Remove the lower cowl trim panel.
8. Remove the front door hinge-to-body bolts inside at the inside A-pillar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 8096
9. Position the weather shield aside and loosen, but do not remove, the front door lower hinge nut.
10. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower front door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
All alignments
11. Adjust the door.
12. Tighten the door fasteners.
- Tighten the front door hinge-to-front door fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Tighten the front door hinge-to-body fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
13. Install and adjust the door striker as necessary.
- Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Service and Repair > Door Hinge - Upper, Front
Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Door Hinge - Upper, Front
Door Hinge - Upper, Front
1. Remove the front door. For additional information, refer to Door See: Service and Repair.
2. Remove the instrument panel.
3. Remove the hinge-to-body bolts and remove the hinge.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Service and Repair > Door Hinge - Upper, Front > Page 8099
Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Door Hinge - Lower, Front
Door Hinge - Lower, Front
1. Remove the front door. For additional information, refer to Door See: Service and Repair.
2. Remove the scuff plate trim panel pin-type retainers.
3. Remove the scuff plate trim panel.
4. Pull outward to release the cowl trim panel clips and remove the cowl trim panel.
5. Remove the hinge-to-body bolts and remove the hinge.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Front Door Latch: Procedures
Latch Lubrication
1. Open the door.
2. Using a screwdriver, fully close the latch (two clicks).
3. Spray the multi-purpose grease into the opening on the door latch for approximately 5 seconds.
4. Open the latch using either the interior or exterior door handle.
5. Open and close the door several times to circulate the lubricant inside the latch.
6. Wipe off any excess grease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8104
Front Door Latch: Removal and Replacement
Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8105
Front Door Latch
Front Door Latch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Position the water shield aside.
3. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door
Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front See: Front
Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior,
Front.
4. Remove and discard the 3 front door latch bolts.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the front door latch electrical connector.
6. Remove the front door latch.
- Slide the front door latch towards the front of the vehicle.
- Remove the front door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating
cable.
7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the front door latch to striker surfaces after installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair
Door Trim Panel - Front
NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar.
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. Remove the door sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the power mirror electrical connector.
2. Open and remove the door handle finish panel.
- Pull the door handle outward to fully access the door handle finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8109
3. Remove the door handle screw.
4. Remove the door pull cup screw cover.
5. Remove the door pull cup screw.
6. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws.
7. Remove the door trim panel.
- Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
8. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 8119
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 8120
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
> Page 8125
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched > Page 8131
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched > Page 8132
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window
Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8137
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door > Page 8140
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front
Door Glass Top Run - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front
Door See: Service and Repair/Window Glass Front Door.
2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts.
- To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Remove the front door glass top run.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door >
Page 8148
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Front Door
Window Regulator - Front Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket.
3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly.
4. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as
re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive
is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield
to the inner door.
Position the watershield aside.
5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front
door window glass screws.
7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
8. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
9. Support the front door window glass in the full UP position with tape.
10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector.
11. Remove the front door window regulator and motor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door >
Page 8149
12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body
- Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not
Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body
- Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 8160
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Rear Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0
Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 8166
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT
Solenoid DTC's Set
TSB 10-19-1
10/11/10
3.0L ENGINE MIL ON - DTC P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 AND/OR P034X - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/1/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion
2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-13-8 to update the model years covered, Issue Statement, Part List
and production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escapes, Mariners, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 3.0L
engine and built on or before 6/1/2010 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 and/or P034X.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify vehicle build date was on or before 6/1/2010.
a. If the vehicle was built after 6/1/2010 do not continue with this procedure, refer to the Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) for
normal diagnostics.
b. If the vehicle was built on or before 6/1/2010 proceed to Step 2.
2. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-14B and replace both bank 1 and bank 2 variable
camshaft timing (VCT) solenoids.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS LESS THAN 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), THEN THE INTAKE GASKET
AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS CAN BE REUSED. INSPECT AND REPLACE ONLY IF
DAMAGE IS VISIBLE. IF THE VEHICLE HAS OVER 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM), REPLACE
INTAKE GASKET AND SPARK PLUG WELL GASKETS AS DIRECTED IN WSM. IN ALL CASES
THE VALVE COVER PERIMETER GASKETS MUST BE REPLACED.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101901A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L: 2.8 Hrs.
Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > 10-19-1 > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/VCT Solenoid DTC's Set > Page 8172
101901A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.1 Hrs.
Mariner 3.0L: Replace Both VCT Solenoids Includes Time To Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 8173
Rear Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 8174
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 8175
2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 8176
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 8177
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 8178
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear
Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove the exterior rear door handle. For additional information, refer to Exterior Rear Door
Handle See: Exterior Rear Door Handle.
2. Disconnect the door latch carrier.
1. Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside.
2. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement screw.
3. Disconnect the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the rear door latch.
4. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement with the exterior rear door handle
reinforcement actuating rod.
5. If necessary, remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page
8181
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Exterior Rear Door Handle
Exterior Rear Door Handle
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the rear window channel bolt and position the window channel aside.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Remove the exterior rear door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement.
5. Remove the exterior rear door handle bezel.
1. Pull the exterior rear door handle open.
2. Pivot the rear of the exterior rear door handle bezel and remove.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page
8182
6. Remove the exterior rear door handle.
- Open and pull the exterior rear door handle rearward to release and remove.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page
8183
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded
View
Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
Interior Door Handle - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the rear interior door handle retaining tabs and remove the rear interior door handle
from the door trim panel.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments
Rear Door Hinge: Adjustments
Door Alignment - Rear
NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side similar.
All alignments
1. Remove the door latch striker plate.
Rear door in and out, up and down alignment
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the rear door hinge-to-rear door fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
Front door fore, aft and tilt alignment
3. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper rear door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
4. Remove the front door scuff plate.
5. Remove the rear door scuff plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 8190
6. Position aside the lower B-pillar trim panel.
7. Loosen the rear door hinge-to-body bolts inside at the inside B-pillar.
8. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower rear door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
All alignments
9. Adjust the door.
10. Tighten the door fasteners.
- Tighten the rear door hinge-to-rear door fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Tighten the rear door hinge-to-body fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Install and adjust the door striker as necessary.
- Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft).
- To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Rear Door Latch: Procedures
Latch Lubrication
1. Open the door.
2. Using a screwdriver, fully close the latch (two clicks).
3. Spray the multi-purpose grease into the opening on the door latch for approximately 5 seconds.
4. Open the latch using either the interior or exterior door handle.
5. Open and close the door several times to circulate the lubricant inside the latch.
6. Wipe off any excess grease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8195
Rear Door Latch: Removal and Replacement
Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Rear Door Latch
Rear Door Latch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8196
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The rear door window glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove rear door trim panel.
2. Position the water shield aside.
3. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door
Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear See: Rear
Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior,
Rear.
4. Remove and discard the 3 rear door latch bolts.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the rear door latch electrical connector.
6. Remove the rear door latch.
- Slide the rear door latch toward the front of the vehicle.
- Remove the rear door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating
cable.
7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the rear door latch to striker surfaces after installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair
Door Trim Panel - Rear
NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar.
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. Open and remove the door handle finish panel.
2. Remove the door handle screw.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8200
3. Remove the door pull cup screw cover.
4. Remove the door pull cup screw.
5. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws.
6. Remove the door trim panel.
- Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page
8210
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page
8211
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched > Page 8217
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched > Page 8218
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Rear Door Window
Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator - Rear Door.
2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel.
4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip.
6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward.
8. Remove the rear door glass top run.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear >
Page 8221
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 8229
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Rear Door
Window Regulator - Rear Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket.
3. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as
re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive
is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield
to the inner door.
Position the watershield aside.
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
5. Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear
door window glass screws.
6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
8. Support the rear door window glass in the full UP position with tape.
9. Disconnect the rear door window motor electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 8230
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Hood Latch
Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch
Hood Latch
Removal
1. NOTE: Do not remove the nut.
Loosen the hood latch nut.
2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the hood latch bolts.
Remove the 2 hood latch bolts.
3. Disconnect the hood latch release cable.
1. Release the cable conduit.
2. Disconnect the cable.
4. Remove the hood latch.
5. If necessary, remove the hood latch release lever.
Installation
1. Connect the hood latch release cable to the hood latch.
1. Connect the cable.
2. Engage the cable conduit.
2. Slide the hood latch down onto the mounting bracket.
3. NOTE: When the hood latch is installed, the latch adjustment must be checked to make sure the
latch is installed and aligned correctly.
Position the hood latch with the alignment marks and install the 2 hood latch bolts.
- Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 8236
4. Tighten the hood latch nut to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 8237
Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View > Page 8242
Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Handle
Hood Latch Release Handle
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the hood latch. For additional information, refer to Hood Latch See: Hood Latch/Service
and Repair/Hood Latch.
2. Disconnect the 3 hood latch release handle cable guides.
- Note the routing of the hood latch release cable.
3. Remove the hood latch release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. NOTE: Breaking the tab does not require handle assembly replacement.
Using a suitable tool, push up on the tab to snap it off and then slide the handle off the instrument
panel.
5. NOTE: The hood latch release handle and cable assembly must be pulled through the cowl
panel into the passenger compartment.
Remove the hood latch release handle and cable assembly.
- Pull the hood latch release cable through the cowl panel.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
Window Glass - Liftgate
Removal and Installation
1. Open the liftgate window glass.
2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers.
3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders.
1. Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2. Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8250
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch
Liftgate Release Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 8256
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8260
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair
Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair
Liftgate Trim Panel
Removal and Installation
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim panel screws.
3. Release the 8 liftgate trim panel retaining clips.
4. NOTE: If equipped with a rear wiper, the rear glass must be open.
Remove the liftgate trim panel.
5. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the liftgate trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body
and attach the to the liftgate trim panel
before installing.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 8271
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch
Liftgate Latch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate latch electrical connectors.
3. Remove and discard the 3 liftgate latch bolts.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Remove the liftgate latch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the liftgate latch to striker surfaces after installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 8272
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Window Latch
Liftgate Window Latch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Make sure the liftgate window glass is in the raised position.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Mark the position of the liftgate window latch prior to removing the liftgate window latch
bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts and the liftgate window latch.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. NOTE: The liftgate window latch must be checked to make sure the latch is installed and aligned
correctly.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System
Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Service and Repair
Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 >
Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN
PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 >
Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 8284
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 >
Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN
PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 >
Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 8290
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8291
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8292
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information >
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
Cowl Panel Grille
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms.
3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers.
4. Remove the cowl end caps.
5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Bracket > Component Information >
Service and Repair
License Plate Bracket: Service and Repair
License Plate Housing
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the license plate housing electrical connector.
3. Remove the license plate housing retaining nuts (4 required).
4. Release the license plate housing from the push clips and remove the license plate housing from
the liftgate.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service
and Repair > Fender Splash Shield
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Fender Splash Shield
Fender Splash Shield
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 3 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
2. Remove the 7 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
3. Remove the 6 fender splash shield screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Remove the fender splash shield.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service
and Repair > Fender Splash Shield > Page 8306
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Front End Body Panels - Exploded View
Front End Body Panels - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Description and Operation
Subframe and Mounting Systems
Front Subframe
The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
- aid in structural support.
- provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms.
- provide a mounting point for the engine isolators.
- provide the mounting surface for the steering gear.
- provide the mounting surface for the sway bar.
Rear Subframe
The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
- aid in structural support.
- provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms.
- provide mounting surfaces for the rear differential All-Wheel Drive (AWD).
Welding Precautions
The correct equipment and settings must be used when welding mild or high strength steel. Metal
Inert Gas (MIG) and resistance spot welding are the preferred methods. Surfaces must be clean
and free of foreign materials.
- Do not weld on the subframe.
- The correct protective clothing should always be worn.
- Adequate ventilation must be provided to avoid accumulation of poisonous gases.
- A test weld should always be carried out on a test sample.
- Follow equipment manufacturer's prescribed procedures and equipment settings for the type of
weld being used.
- Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery.
- On Hybrid vehicles, depower the high voltage traction battery system. Refer to Hybrid Drive
Systems.
- Disconnect on-vehicle modules and protect them from possible heat damage and electrical
currents when welding.
- Corrosion protection needs to be restored whenever it is necessary to sand or grind through
painted surfaces or E-coat, or when bare metal repairs are carried out. Refer to Restoring
Corrosion Protection Following Repair.
Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the
suspension parts and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening
concerns, and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by incorrectly tightened bolts and
body misalignment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 8320
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 8321
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8327
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8328
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8329
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8330
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8331
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8332
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8333
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8334
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8335
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - FRONT
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8336
Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Shown, All Other Vehicles Similar
NOTE: Escape and Mariner only.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8337
Escape And Mariner Only
NOTE: Escape Hybrid only.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8338
Escape Hybrid Only
All vehicles
NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the
same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement
part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during
reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8339
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead
position and remove the key.
Hybrid vehicles 3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to
Hybrid Drive Systems. 4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer.
All vehicles 5. Remove the front tires.
6. NOTICE:
- Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
- Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. To install, tighten to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
- Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard
the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). 9. Remove the 6
bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield.
10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8340
11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Hybrid vehicles only 12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer
bracket.
All vehicles 13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
All vehicles except hybrid 14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8341
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
All vehicles 15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt.
- To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft).
16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and
installing the stabilizer link nut.
Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts. To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and
the bolts.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe.
21. NOTE:
- Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
- When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are
fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification.
Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts. To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
- To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the front subframe.
24. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer the components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8350
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8351
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8357
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8358
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8359
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8360
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8361
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8362
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8363
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8364
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 8373
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 8374
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8380
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8381
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8382
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8383
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8384
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8385
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8386
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8387
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8388
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - REAR
Subframe - Rear
Removal
All vehicles
1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance
of vital parts and systems and their failure can
result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if
installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute
design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct
retention of these parts.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 2. Remove the rear axle assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8389
All vehicles 3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and position
the 4 rear control arms aside.
5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts.
- To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
- To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe.
3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. Loosely install the bolts.
4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Vehicles with AWD 5. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles 6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8390
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8399
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8400
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8406
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8407
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8408
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8409
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8410
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8411
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8412
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8413
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling
Grille: Customer Interest Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling
TSB 09-26-12
01/04/10
FRONT GRILLE - CHROME PEEL
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit chrome peel appearance
at the base of the front grille stanchion.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If vehicle exhibits front grille chrome peel at the base of the stanchions, as specified in photo, with
no evidence of impact damage, then replace the affected front grille(s). (Figure 1)
Replace Only The Radiator Grille:
1. Remove the two (2) upper grille bolts. (Figure 2-A)
2. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower inside grille bolts. (Figure 2-B)
3. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille
to the front bumper cover. (Figure 2-C)
4. Release the three (3) lower grille retainers from the upper bumper cover. (Figure 2-D)
5. Remove the radiator grille.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 8422
6. Install the new radiator grille and attach the three (3) lower grille retainers to the upper bumper
cover by pushing the grille into the upper bumper
cover. Make sure that all three (3) grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the
upper bumper cover.
7. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug.
8. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug.
9. Tighten the two (2) upper grille bolts to 71 lb-in (8 N.m).
Replace Both Grilles Or Bumper Grille Only:
1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-19 to remove the bumper cover.
2. Refer to WSM, Section 501-08 to remove radiator grille from bumper cover.
3. Place the bumper cover assembly on a clean work bench on top of a fender cover to prevent
scratching of the paint.
4. Push out the six top retainer snap tabs. (Figure 3-A)
5. Remove the passenger side push pin using a flat screwdriver. (Figure 3-B)
6. Position aside the wiring harness.
7. Push out the three (3) lower valance panel retainer tabs. (Figure 3-C)
8. Using end cutting pliers or equivalent, cut off the four (4) retainer snap tabs while being careful
not to damage the outer bumper cover. (Figures 3-D
and 4)
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY BUMPER SLOTS OPEN TO RELEASE THE TABS AS THIS WILL
RESULT IN VISIBLE DAMAGE TO THE OUTER BUMPER COVER.
9. Remove and discard old bumper grille from bumper cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 8423
10. Position the new bumper grille on the bumper cover slots and push in to engage the snap tabs.
11. Install the lower push pin.
12. Re-position wiring harness.
13. Install radiator grille to bumper cover, refer to WSM, Section 501-08.
14. Install the bumper cover assembly, refer to WSM section 501-19.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092612A 2008-2009 Escape: 0.3 Hr.
Replace The Radiator Grille Following The Service Procedure (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
092612B 2008-2009 Escape: 0.8 Hr.
Replace The Bumper Grille And The Radiator Grille If Necessary Following The Service Procedure
Includes Time To Remove And Install The Bumper Cover (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
8150 34
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling
Grille: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling
TSB 09-26-12
01/04/10
FRONT GRILLE - CHROME PEEL
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit chrome peel appearance
at the base of the front grille stanchion.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If vehicle exhibits front grille chrome peel at the base of the stanchions, as specified in photo, with
no evidence of impact damage, then replace the affected front grille(s). (Figure 1)
Replace Only The Radiator Grille:
1. Remove the two (2) upper grille bolts. (Figure 2-A)
2. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower inside grille bolts. (Figure 2-B)
3. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille
to the front bumper cover. (Figure 2-C)
4. Release the three (3) lower grille retainers from the upper bumper cover. (Figure 2-D)
5. Remove the radiator grille.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 8429
6. Install the new radiator grille and attach the three (3) lower grille retainers to the upper bumper
cover by pushing the grille into the upper bumper
cover. Make sure that all three (3) grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the
upper bumper cover.
7. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug.
8. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug.
9. Tighten the two (2) upper grille bolts to 71 lb-in (8 N.m).
Replace Both Grilles Or Bumper Grille Only:
1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-19 to remove the bumper cover.
2. Refer to WSM, Section 501-08 to remove radiator grille from bumper cover.
3. Place the bumper cover assembly on a clean work bench on top of a fender cover to prevent
scratching of the paint.
4. Push out the six top retainer snap tabs. (Figure 3-A)
5. Remove the passenger side push pin using a flat screwdriver. (Figure 3-B)
6. Position aside the wiring harness.
7. Push out the three (3) lower valance panel retainer tabs. (Figure 3-C)
8. Using end cutting pliers or equivalent, cut off the four (4) retainer snap tabs while being careful
not to damage the outer bumper cover. (Figures 3-D
and 4)
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY BUMPER SLOTS OPEN TO RELEASE THE TABS AS THIS WILL
RESULT IN VISIBLE DAMAGE TO THE OUTER BUMPER COVER.
9. Remove and discard old bumper grille from bumper cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 8430
10. Position the new bumper grille on the bumper cover slots and push in to engage the snap tabs.
11. Install the lower push pin.
12. Re-position wiring harness.
13. Install radiator grille to bumper cover, refer to WSM, Section 501-08.
14. Install the bumper cover assembly, refer to WSM section 501-19.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092612A 2008-2009 Escape: 0.3 Hr.
Replace The Radiator Grille Following The Service Procedure (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
092612B 2008-2009 Escape: 0.8 Hr.
Replace The Bumper Grille And The Radiator Grille If Necessary Following The Service Procedure
Includes Time To Remove And Install The Bumper Cover (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
8150 34
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other
Service Bulletins for Grille: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's
Canister Purge Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Driveability Issues
With/Without/MIL/DTC's
TSB 11-3-22
03/16/11
DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC
P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a
2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge
valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction
indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13.
2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel
exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in
the evaporative emission canister?
a. No - Proceed to Step 3.
b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to
step 3.
3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment,
Refer to WSM, Section 303-13.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr.
Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other
Service Bulletins for Grille: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 8436
110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs.
Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other
Service Bulletins for Grille: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 8442
110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs.
Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8443
Grille: Service and Repair
Radiator Grille
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
Escape only
2. Remove the 2 radiator grille-to-fascia screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8444
3. Remove the 2 radiator grille pinch nuts.
4. Release the 3 radiator grille retaining clips and remove the radiator grille from the fascia.
Mariner only
5. Push outward on the 12 radiator grille clips to release the radiator grille from the bumper cover
and remove the radiator grille.
All vehicles
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 8455
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 8456
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 8457
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 8458
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 8459
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 8460
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 8461
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 8462
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Headliner: Service and Repair
Headliner
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to A-Pillar Trim
Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and
Repair/A-Pillar Trim Panel.
2. Remove the LH and RH B-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to B-Pillar Trim
Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/B-Pillar
Trim Panel.
3. Remove the LH and RH C-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to C-Pillar Trim
Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/C-Pillar
Trim Panel.
4. Remove the LH and RH D-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to D-Pillar Trim
Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and
Repair/D-Pillar Trim Panel.
5. Open the overhead console door.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 8466
6. Remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Remove the LH and RH sun visors.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
8. NOTE: Do not fully remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips.
Remove the LH and RH sun visor clips.
- Partially remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips.
- Pull downward on the sun visor clips to remove them from the headliner.
9. Using a small flat screwdriver, release and remove the interior lamp lens.
10. Remove the interior lamp.
- Early build, remove the 2 screws.
- Late build, remove the 2 pushpins.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
11. Remove the cargo lamp.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
12. Remove the 3 child seat tether anchor covers.
13. Remove the 3 bolts and the child seat tether anchors.
- To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
14. If equipped, remove the screw and the garment hook.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 8467
- Open the garment hook screw cover.
- Remove the garment hook screw. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
15. NOTE: When installing the headliner trim ring, it should meet at the rear of the roof opening and
have no gaps or overlaps.
If equipped, remove the headliner trim ring.
16. Remove the 5 headliner pin-type retainers.
17. Remove the headliner.
18. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer parts as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Interior Trim - Exploded View
Interior Trim - Exploded View
Early Build
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8472
Late Build
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8473
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8474
Trim Panel: Service and Repair A-Pillar Trim Panel
A-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal
All trim panels
1. Position the LH or RH front door weatherstrips aside.
Passenger side only
2. Remove the A-pillar assist handle screw covers.
3. Remove the A-pillar assist handle screws and remove the assist handle.
All trim panels
4. Pull inward on the upper A-pillar trim panel to release the A-pillar trim panel retaining clips.
Driver side only
5. NOTE: Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel. Do not remove the A-pillar
tether clip from the A-pillar unless a new tether is
being installed.
Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel.
- Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the base of the A-pillar tether clip.
- Apply downward pressure on the screwdriver, sliding the A-pillar tether clip base downwards.
All trim panels
6. Remove the A-pillar trim panel.
Installation
All trim panels
1. Install the lower A-pillar trim panel into the instrument panel.
Driver side only
2. WARNING: A new A-pillar trim panel tether must be installed if the tether is damaged or does
not fasten correctly. During a side air
curtain deployment the A-pillar trim panel tether helps prevent the trim from striking the occupant.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
Install the A-pillar tether clip base onto the A-pillar trim panel. Position the A-pillar tether clip base into the A-pillar tether holder located on the A-pillar trim panel.
- Slide the A-pillar tether clip base upwards into the A-pillar tether holder until the tether is fully
seated.
3. NOTICE: The A-pillar trim panel tether must be aligned correctly or damage to the tether will
occur.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the A-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and
attach them to the A-pillar trim panel before installing.
NOTE: The A-pillar trim panel tether clip, located on the A-pillar, installs into the A-pillar trim panel
tether base, located on the A-pillar trim panel.
Install the A-pillar trim panel onto the A-pillar.
Passenger side only
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8475
4. Install the A-pillar assist handle and install the screws.
5. Install the A-pillar assist handle screw covers.
All trim panels
6. Install the LH or RH front door opening weatherstrips.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8476
Trim Panel: Service and Repair B-Pillar Trim Panel
B-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal and Installation
Upper
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt guide cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover
out at the bottom.
2. Remove the safety belt bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Position the front and rear door opening weatherstrips aside.
4. NOTE: Lower the adjustable safety belt to access the B-pillar trim panel bolt.
Remove the cover, bolt and the upper B-pillar trim panel.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
Lower
5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and the front door scuff plate trim panel.
6. Remove the 2 pin-type retainer and the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
All vehicles
8. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the B-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body
and attach them to the B-pillar trim
panel before installing.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8477
Trim Panel: Service and Repair C-Pillar Trim Panel
C-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal and Installation
Early and late build
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt cover.
2. Remove the safety belt bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel .
4. Position the rear door weatherstrip aside.
Early build
5. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the C-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body
and attach them to the C-pillar trim
panel before installing.
Remove the cover, the bolt and the C-pillar trim panel.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
Late build
6. Release the C-pillar coat hook by inserting a small flat screwdriver in the slot at the base of the
coat hook.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8478
7. Remove the coat hook.
- LH coat hook, twist clockwise.
- RH coat hook, twist counterclockwise.
8. Remove the C-pillar trim panel bolt.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
Early and late build
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 8479
Trim Panel: Service and Repair D-Pillar Trim Panel
D-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel .
2. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the D-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body
and attach them to the D-pillar trim
panel before installing.
Remove the D-pillar trim panel by pulling straight outward to release the retaining clips.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Utility Storage Compartment: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel - Exploded View
Instrument Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8483
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Individual door lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative door lock cylinder
and building a new door lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair
package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new door lock cylinder to the current key
code of the vehicle.
1. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door
Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front See:
Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service
and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front.
2. Remove the door lock cylinder.
1. Release the clips.
2. Remove the door lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
Key: Testing and Inspection Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using
Diagnostic Equipment
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and
does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a
programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase
key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory.
NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the
vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the
vehicle.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle starts.
NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the
correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be
the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If
the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the
customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In
this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool menu select: IGNITION KEY CODE ERASE. Follow all Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) screen instructions until the key
erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the
process.
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be
removed at this time).
5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are
programmed into the IC, then the RKE data
transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into
the SJB, the RKE functions does not operate.
NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take
place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second
time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3
second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT
should function.
9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the
IC), refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8493
Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to
be programmed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8494
Key: Testing and Inspection Key Programming Switch State Control
Key Programming Switch State Control
NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability
to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's
Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument
Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This
programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet
purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle
driver.
NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID.
NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC
using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLED,
the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This switch is
set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys procedure.
1. Insert a programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key (or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the
key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLED, when viewing the IC
SPAREKEY PID.
From the scan tool menu select: CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE - spare key programming procedure is
accessible.
- CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING DISABLE - spare key programming procedure is not
accessible.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8495
Key: Testing and Inspection Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
NOTE: This procedure works only if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key
Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and
Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment.
NOTE: The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not
enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID.
The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built.
NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the
anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not
successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at
least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the
failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the
appropriate pinpoint tests.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle will starts.
NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions.
Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or
are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on
programming the remaining keys. In this case, the PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends.
NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS
encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can
be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the
IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the
message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function,
but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative.
1. Insert a programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to
the ON position.
2. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the first key.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed ignition
key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into
the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
5. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the second key.
7. Within 20 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed ignition key
(new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON
position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data
transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key).
8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there
are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the
vehicle.
Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8496
9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8497
Key: Testing and Inspection Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Enabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for
their vehicle.
NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys
are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT
keys are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC)
will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of
them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition
lock cylinder.
NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder
security key code and programming this key code into all of the vehicle keys so they contain the
same key code.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how
many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed).
1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be
programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles
need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F.
2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be
turned off before viewing the stored code. At this
time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the
procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below.
Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should
not be the same key code.
3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen
instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security
Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen
instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the
customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
8. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
9. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
10. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
11. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Disabling Unlimited Key Mode
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8498
NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the
vehicle.
1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
5. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
6. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
8. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into
the IC using the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
procedure. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each
additional key that needs to be programmed. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8499
Key: Testing and Inspection
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and
does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a
programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase
key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory.
NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the
vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the
vehicle.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle starts.
NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the
correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be
the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If
the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the
customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In
this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool menu select: IGNITION KEY CODE ERASE. Follow all Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) screen instructions until the key
erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the
process.
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be
removed at this time).
5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are
programmed into the IC, then the RKE data
transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into
the SJB, the RKE functions does not operate.
NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take
place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second
time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3
second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT
should function.
9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the
IC), refer to Key Programming Using Two
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8500
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for
each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Key Programming Switch State Control
Key Programming Switch State Control
NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability
to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's
Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument
Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This
programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet
purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle
driver.
NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID.
NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC
using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLED,
the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This switch is
set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys procedure.
1. Insert a programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key (or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the
key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLED, when viewing the IC
SPAREKEY PID.
From the scan tool menu select: CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE - spare key programming procedure is
accessible.
- CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING DISABLE - spare key programming procedure is not
accessible.
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
NOTE: This procedure works only if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key
Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and
Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment.
NOTE: The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not
enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID.
The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built.
NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the
anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not
successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at
least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the
failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the
appropriate pinpoint tests.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle will starts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8501
NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions.
Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or
are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on
programming the remaining keys. In this case, the PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends.
NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS
encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can
be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the
IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the
message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function,
but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative.
1. Insert a programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to
the ON position.
2. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the first key.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed ignition
key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into
the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
5. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the second key.
7. Within 20 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed ignition key
(new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON
position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data
transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key).
8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there
are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the
vehicle.
Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions.
9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7.
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Enabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for
their vehicle.
NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys
are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT
keys
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8502
are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC) will
set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of them
will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition
lock cylinder.
NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder
security key code and programming this key code into all of the vehicle keys so they contain the
same key code.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how
many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed).
1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be
programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles
need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F.
2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be
turned off before viewing the stored code. At this
time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the
procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below.
Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should
not be the same key code.
3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen
instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security
Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen
instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the
customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
8. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
9. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
10. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
11. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Disabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the
vehicle.
1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
5. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
6. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
8. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into
the IC using the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
procedure. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8503
If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each
additional key that needs to be programmed. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment
Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs to have an additional key programmed into
the vehicle without erasing stored key codes, but does not have 2 programmed keys available. This
procedure is also useful when attempting to determine if an ignition key is defective, as a new key
can be installed without erasing keys or without having 2 programmed keys available.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock
cylinder.
NOTE: If 8 keys are already programmed, this procedure does not allow any more ignition keys to
be programmed. The number of keys that are programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) can be determined by viewing the N_KEYCODE PID.
1. Turn the new key to be programmed from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: Make sure the selection made is "Program additional ignition key". If the "Ignition Key
Code Erase" selection is made, all of the keys will
be erased from the system.
From the scan tool menu select: "Program additional ignition key".
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool.
5. Start the vehicle with the new PATS key. The vehicle will now start with the new PATS key and
also with the original PATS keys. If it is an IKT
key, verify the RKE functions (if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed).
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
NOTE: When using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS), the Instrument Cluster (IC) and the
PCM parameters are reset at the same time.
NOTE: Once security access has been granted, multiple security access commands should be
executed (if necessary) prior to exiting the command menu. This avoids an additional security
access procedure and the associated 10 minute time delay.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 8504
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool, select: Parameter Reset and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
4. NOTE: If the IC was replaced, follow Steps 4-9. If the IC and the PCM were replaced, follow
Steps 4-9. If only the PCM was replaced, cycle the
key off, then back on, to complete the procedure.
NOTE: If steps 4-9 are followed, 2 keys must be present.
From the scan tool, select: Ignition Key Code Erase and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
5. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool.
6. NOTE: Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys require a 6-second programming time frame
for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) data
transfer to take place, while standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys only require a
minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (if it is an IKT key).
7. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove it from the ignition lock cylinder.
8. Insert the second key and turn it to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (if it is an IKT
key).
9. Both keys will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions of the vehicle (if they
are IKT keys).
10. NOTE: The RKE data transfer will take place between the key and the IC first. After both keys
are programmed into the IC, the RKE data will
transfer from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into
the SJB, the RKE functions will not operate.
If more keys are required to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8509
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8510
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection
Keyless Entry Keypad Code Programming
Programming a Personal Code
NOTE: Up to 3 personal codes can be programmed. Once there are 3 personal programmed
codes, any attempt to program additional codes will be unsuccessful.
1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad.
3. Enter the new 5-digit personal keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within
5 seconds of each other.
4. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm the new code is programmed.
Erasing the Personal Codes
1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release.
3. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button on the keypad for 2 seconds.
4. All personal codes are now erased and only the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code
will work.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8511
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Keypad
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH front door trim panel.
2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the keypad retaining clip.
4. Remove the keypad from the door.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming
NOTE: This procedure is for programming conventional keyfobs only. The Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) is programmed automatically during
the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming. For additional information, refer to Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Key Programming
Using Diagnostic Equipment in Antitheft and Alarm Systems to program the IKT. See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: All RKE transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
NOTE: Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and
the transmitters will not be programmed.
1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10
seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN.
If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors.
3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the
programming sequence ends (the doors lock and
unlock to confirm that programming is complete).
Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock
and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each
RKE transmitter.
4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs:
- The key transitions to the OFF position
- 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was
programmed
- The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed
5. Check the operation of the RKE transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed
RKE transmitter(s), wait several seconds and
press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems See: Power Locks/Testing and Inspection. (Make sure that no more than the maximum
number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be programmed.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 8516
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming
Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming
Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the
enable/disable mode.
8. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle
the autolock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp
once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the
autolock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad.
4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While
holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button.
5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock
is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp
followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled.
Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 8517
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the
enable/disable mode.
8. Press the door lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle
the auto-unlock feature ON/OFF. The horn will
chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long
chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad.
4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While
holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button
2 times.
5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn
chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the
auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP
control for the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or OFF.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 8518
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming
Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming
Programming the Perimeter Lighting Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: The following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the procedure will need to be
repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait 30 seconds between programming sessions.
1. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position.
2. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
3. Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the OFF position.
4. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The horn chirps one time to indicate that
programming mode is entered.
6. NOTE: The unlock button must be pressed twice within 5 seconds.
Within 30 seconds of entering the programming mode, press the unlock button on the door lock
control switch twice to enable/disable the perimeter lighting feature. The horn chirps once if the
perimeter lighting is disabled or a chirp followed by a honk if the perimeter lighting is enabled.
7. Programming ends when the ignition switch state changes or times out after 2 minutes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 8519
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming
Stepped Unlock Programming
1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
simultaneously for 4 seconds. The turn signals flash twice to indicate the mode change.
2. Repeat Step 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear > Page 8525
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Unit
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 8528
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 8529
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Actuator
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 8530
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8535
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 8538
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 8539
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 8540
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 8541
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior Door Handle Front.
2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Service and Repair
Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking
Heated Element: Customer Interest Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking
TSB 10-5-3
03/29/10
EXTERIOR HEATED REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS CRACK WHEN MIRROR DEFROST IS
POWERED ON-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 03/31/2009
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 03/31/2009 and equipped
with heated exterior rear view mirrors may exhibit a glass thermal stress crack when mirror defrost
is powered on.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace the exterior mirror glass only if there's no evidence of impact damage. (Figure 1) Refer to
Workshop Manual, Section 501-09 for removal and installation.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100503A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On One Side (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100503B 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On Both Sides (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking >
Page 8554
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K707 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass
Cracking
Heated Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass
Cracking
TSB 10-5-3
03/29/10
EXTERIOR HEATED REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS CRACK WHEN MIRROR DEFROST IS
POWERED ON-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 03/31/2009
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 03/31/2009 and equipped
with heated exterior rear view mirrors may exhibit a glass thermal stress crack when mirror defrost
is powered on.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace the exterior mirror glass only if there's no evidence of impact damage. (Figure 1) Refer to
Workshop Manual, Section 501-09 for removal and installation.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100503A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On One Side (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100503B 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On Both Sides (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass
Cracking > Page 8560
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K707 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heated Element: > 09-20-3 > Oct > 09 > Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates
Pedal Vibration
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Self-Test Creates
Pedal Vibration
TSB 09-20-3
10/19/09
ABS MODULE SELF-TEST CREATING A SLIGHT VIBRATION IN ACCEL/BRAKE PEDAL AT 12
MPH (20 KM/H) AND/OR 42 MPH (68 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-15-5 to update the IDS version.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid) may exhibit a slight vibration in
the accelerator/brake pedal at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and/or 42 MPH (68 km/h) while the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) module performs a self-test. The ABS module will initiate a one time self test
at 12 MPH (20 km/h) and at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h) for every key on cycle. A one time
self test may also occur at 42 MPH (68 km/h) after an ABS event. This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect brake function. An updated ABS software reprogramming is now
available to reduce this slight vibration affect at approximately 42 MPH (68 km/h). It will not change
the effect at 12 MPH (20 km/h).
ACTION Reprogram the ABS module to the latest calibration using IDS release 62.10 and higher.
This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained
at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092003A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The ABS Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2C219 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair
Exterior Mirror Motor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the exterior mirror glass. For additional information, refer to Exterior Mirror Glass See:
Service and Repair/Exterior Mirror Glass.
2. Remove the exterior mirror motor screw.
3. With a flat-blade tool, release the 3 exterior mirror motor tabs.
4. Remove the exterior mirror motor.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
8577
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
8578
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
8579
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
8580
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
8581
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Exterior Mirror Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH sail panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Locations
Radiator Support: Locations
Front Structure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8589
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8590
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Seat Relay, Passenger > Page 8595
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8598
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8601
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8602
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8603
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8607
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 8614
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Motor
Roof Opening Panel Motor
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Disconnect the roof opening panel motor electrical connector.
3. Remove the 3 roof opening panel motor screws and the roof opening panel motor.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8618
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8619
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8620
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 8625
Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Trough Assembly
Trough Assembly
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Remove the roof opening panel glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and
Repair/Roof Opening Panel Glass.
2. Remove the 2 roof opening panel drain channel screws and the drain channel.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 8633
Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Frame
Roof Opening Panel Frame
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Disconnect the 4 roof opening panel drain hoses.
3. Release the wire harness locators.
4. Remove the 8 roof opening panel frame bolts and remove the roof opening panel frame.
- To install tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify that the roof opening panel glass is centered and aligned correctly. For additional
information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8637
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 8642
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Glass
Roof Opening Panel Glass
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Position the roof opening panel to the CLOSED position.
2. Remove the 4 roof opening panel glass screws and the roof opening panel glass.
- To install tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 8643
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Shield
Roof Opening Panel Shield
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Remove the roof opening panel drain trough. For additional information, refer to Trough
Assembly See: Sunroof / Moonroof Track/Service and
Repair/Trough Assembly.
2. Slide the roof opening panel shield forward halfway.
3. Disengage the roof opening panel shield guide feet.
- Lift the front portion of the roof opening panel shield upward at center until able to disengage one
of the front guide feet.
4. With one of the guide feet released, carefully rotate the roof opening panel shield in a clockwise
manner to disengage the remaining guide feet.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
8648
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
8649
Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
8650
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
8651
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
8655
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
8656
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
8657
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
8658
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
8659
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
8660
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement
Seat Back: Removal and Replacement
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8665
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8666
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Seat Backrest - Front
Seat Backrest - Front
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8667
NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag
module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary.
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front
Seats/Seat - Front.
2. Remove the recliner handle.
3. Remove the outboard side shield.
- For passenger seat, remove the screw and slide the outboard side shield forward. Release the rear clip and push forward to release the front clip.
- For driver seat, remove the 3 screws. If equipped, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the inboard side shield.
- For driver seat, remove the 2 inboard side shield screws.
- For passenger seat, remove the screw and slide the side shield forward to release the front hook.
5. Remove the wiring harness tie strap and detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer
from the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
6. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track.
- Detach the pin-type retainers and wiring harness from the seat cushion.
7. Remove the bolt and position aside the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector.
- Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest cover.
9. NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket.
Damage to the wire harness may occur.
Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector.
- Route the side air bag wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
10. Remove the 4 backrest-to-seat track bolts (power seat) or 3 remaining backrest-to-seat track
bolts (manual seat) and backrest.
- To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Rear Seat Backrest
Seat Backrest - Rear
Removal
NOTE: The RH rear seat backrest (40 percent) must be removed prior to the LH rear seat backrest
(60 percent).
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Rear See:
Service and Repair/Rear Seat - Exploded View.
Both rear seat backrests
1. Position both rear seat cushions forward.
2. Route the safety belt buckles from the elastic straps.
3. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
LH rear seat backrest
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8668
4. Remove the center safety belt anchor bolt.
5. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
Both rear seat backrests
6. Release and position both rear backrests downward.
7. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and position the carpet aside.
8. Remove the bolt cover.
9. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut, inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard
backrest-to-floor bolt.
10. Lift and remove the RH rear seat backrest.
LH rear seat backrest
11. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut.
12. Lift and remove the LH rear seat backrest.
Installation
NOTE: The LH rear seat backrest (60 percent) must be installed prior to the RH rear seat backrest
(40 percent).
NOTE: The seat-to-floor fasteners must be tightened in the sequence described in this procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are
accessible to the occupants.
LH rear seat backrest
1. Position the LH rear seat backrest in the vehicle.
2. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. Do not tighten at this time.
RH rear seat backrest
3. Position the RH rear seat backrest in the vehicle.
4. Install the inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Install the bolt cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8669
6. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Both rear seat backrests
7. Tighten the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. Position the carpet and install the 2 pin-type retainers.
9. Position upward and latch both rear backrests.
10. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
11. Install the center safety belt anchor bolt.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
RH rear seat backrest
12. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
13. Route the safety belt buckles through the elastic straps.
14. Position both rear seat cushions in place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8670
Seat Back: Overhaul
Seat Backrest - Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger similar.
Disassembly
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
1. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See:
Removal and Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest -
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8671
Front.
2. Remove the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front
See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Front
Seats/Seat Backrest Cover - Front.
3. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers.
4. Remove the 2 side air bag module nuts and side air bag module.
5. Remove the backrest foam pad.
6. If equipped, remove the lumbar assembly.
- Remove the 2 screws and position aside the lumbar adjuster.
- Release the lumbar assembly from the backrest frame wires and remove.
Assembly
WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly:
- Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material.
- Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat
backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad.
- Install new parts if damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign
material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new
components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket. Damage to the wire harness may occur.
1. If equipped, install the lumbar assembly.
- Install the lumbar assembly to the backrest frame wires.
- Install the lumbar adjuster and 2 screws.
2. Install the side air bag module and 2 nuts to the backrest frame mounting bracket.
- Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame.
4. Install the backrest foam pad to the backrest frame.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8672
5. Install the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front
See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Front
Seats/Seat Backrest Cover - Front.
6. Install the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Removal
and Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest Front.
Seat Backrest - Rear
Seat Backrest - Rear
NOTE: LH (60 percent) shown, RH (40 percent) similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8673
Disassembly and Assembly
Both rear seat backrests
1. Remove the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Rear
See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Seat
Backrest Cover.
2. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame.
Sixty percent seat backrest
3. Release the seat latch cable from the center safety belt retractor.
- For installation, make sure the rear safety belt retractor is not in the Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode after installation. For additional information, refer to Seat Belt Systems.
4. Remove the 2 nuts and safety belt guide.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Remove the nut and center safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Both rear seat backrests
6. Remove the 2 bolts and backrest latch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8674
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. Remove the bolt and inboard pivot bracket.
- To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
8. Remove the bolt and outboard pivot bracket.
- To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
9. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are
accessible to the occupants.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers
Seat Cover: Customer Interest Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers
TSB 09-23-3
11/30/09
CLOTH SEAT STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/14/2009 (EXCLUDES XLS)
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles (excludes Mariner) equipped with
Cloth seats (excludes XLS) and built on or before 5/14/2009, may exhibit stains with a white ring
outline around them. An updated seat cover is now available to reduce this specific type of staining.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Inspect the seat cover stain for a white ring outline. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 8683
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 8684
2. If the white ring stain is present, then replace the seat cover with latest level part. (Figures 2-3)
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-10
Seating Disassembly and Assembly.
NOTE
ONLY APPLIES TO STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE. REFER TO WARRANTY AND
POLICY MANUAL FOR ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVER STAINS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 8685
092303A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be
Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303 2008-2009 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Front Seat Cushion Cover Includes Time To Reset The
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H,
J, Or K)
092303C 2008-2009 Escape, 1.6 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Cushion Covers Includes Time To Reset The Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303D 2008-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace One Front Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303E 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303F 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace One Rear Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With D, E, H, J, Or K)
092303G 2008-2009 Escape, 0.4 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Cushion Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With D, E, H, J, Or K)
092303H 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Rear Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 8686
With A, B, C, E, F, G)
092303J 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With A, B, C, D, E, F, And G)
092303K 2008-2009 Escape, 1.2 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, D, F, And G)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7862901 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers
Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers
TSB 09-23-3
11/30/09
CLOTH SEAT STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/14/2009 (EXCLUDES XLS)
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles (excludes Mariner) equipped with
Cloth seats (excludes XLS) and built on or before 5/14/2009, may exhibit stains with a white ring
outline around them. An updated seat cover is now available to reduce this specific type of staining.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Inspect the seat cover stain for a white ring outline. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page
8692
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page
8693
2. If the white ring stain is present, then replace the seat cover with latest level part. (Figures 2-3)
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-10
Seating Disassembly and Assembly.
NOTE
ONLY APPLIES TO STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE. REFER TO WARRANTY AND
POLICY MANUAL FOR ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVER STAINS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page
8694
092303A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be
Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303 2008-2009 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Front Seat Cushion Cover Includes Time To Reset The
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H,
J, Or K)
092303C 2008-2009 Escape, 1.6 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Cushion Covers Includes Time To Reset The Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303D 2008-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace One Front Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303E 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303F 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace One Rear Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With D, E, H, J, Or K)
092303G 2008-2009 Escape, 0.4 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Cushion Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With D, E, H, J, Or K)
092303H 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Rear Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page
8695
With A, B, C, E, F, G)
092303J 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With A, B, C, D, E, F, And G)
092303K 2008-2009 Escape, 1.2 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, D, F, And G)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7862901 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats
Seat Cover: Service and Repair Front Seats
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 8698
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 8699
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Seat Backrest Cover - Front
Seat Backrest Cover - Front
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 8700
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags
cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag
module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering in the General
Procedures portion of Air Bag Systems.
2. Press the buttons and remove the head restraint.
3. NOTE: The head restraint guides are not interchangeable.
Pull and remove the 2 head restraint guides.
4. If equipped, remove the lumbar adjust knob.
5. Release the J-clip at the bottom of the front seat backrest cover.
6. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector and route through the
elastic loop in the backrest trim cover.
7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat backrest foam.
Partially invert the backrest cover up to the side air bag.
- Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
8. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 8701
9. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute
must not be repaired. If there is any
damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be
installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Pull the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips through the opening in the backrest
foam pad. Note positioning of the deployment chute for correct installation.
10. Invert and remove the backrest trim cover.
11. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and
closed, the seat side air bag module may not
deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
12. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering in the General
Procedures portion of Air Bag Systems.
Seat Cushion Cover - Front
Seat Cushion Cover - Front
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable
separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to Air
Bag Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and
Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front.
2. Remove the front seat cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Front See:
Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Seat Cushion.
3. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 8702
Release the J-clips and remove the cushion trim cover.
- Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
- If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for correct installation.
4. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
6. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset.
7. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
8. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in
Air Bag Systems.
9. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 8703
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 8704
Seat Cover: Service and Repair Rear Seat Backrest Cover
Seat Backrest Cover - Rear
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Rear See:
Service and Repair/Rear Seat - Exploded View.
1. Remove the rear seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Rear See:
Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear Seat Backrest.
2. Remove the head restraint(s).
3. Remove the 2 screws and latch cover.
4. Remove the 2 seat latch release handle screws.
5. Remove the seat latch release handle.
1. Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release handle.
- To aid installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before connecting the latch rod.
2. Remove the seat latch release handle.
6. Release the backrest cover J-clip.
7. Unzip the backrest trim cover zipper.
8. NOTE: The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable.
Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint guide and remove from the backrest frame.
- Note the alignment tab position for correct installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 8705
9. If 60 percent backrest, remove the 2 screws and safety belt shield.
10. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip
or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop strips and remove the seat backrest trim cover.
11. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are
accessible to the occupants.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement
Seat Cushion: Removal and Replacement
Front Seat Cushion
Seat Cushion - Front
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and
Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
2. NOTE: To identify between a production Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and a
service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the Occupant
Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service
kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or
altered.
NOTE: If removing a production OCS system or an OCS system service kit, refer to the appropriate
procedure in Air Bag Systems.
Disconnect the OCS wiring harness. For an original equipment OCS system, disconnect the OCSM and pressure sensor electrical
connectors.
- For an OCS system service kit, disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from
the service part OCS electrical connector.
Heated seat
3. Disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector.
- Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest cover.
4. Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector.
5. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion
frame.
All seats
6. Detach all wiring harness pin-type retainers from the seat cushion frame.
- Note wiring harness routing for correct installation.
7. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
8. Remove the seat cushion.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8710
additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
11. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
12. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
13. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in
Air Bag Systems.
14. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS
fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning
indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and OCSM using a scan tool.
Rear Seat Cushion Cover
Seat Cushion Cover - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear seat cushion.
- Position the seat cushion forward.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8711
- Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward.
2. Unzip the cushion cover zipper.
3. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Invert and remove the cushion cover.
4. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are
accessible to the occupants.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8712
Seat Cushion: Overhaul
Seat Cushion - Driver
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual similar.
Disassembly
1. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat
Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Front.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8713
2. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors
from the seat track.
- Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
- Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
- Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness.
- If equipped, disconnect the power seat track electrical connector and detach the wiring harness.
- Detach the seat harness electrical connector from the seat track.
4. Remove the 4 bolts and seat track.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. If equipped, disconnect the cushion heater mat electrical connector.
6. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Release the all the retainers and remove the cushion cover.
7. Remove the cushion foam pad.
- If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for correct installation.
8. If equipped, release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the
cushion frame.
- Disconnect the relay electrical connector.
9. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Side
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Side
NOTE: Seat equipped with a production Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system shown. For
OCS system service components, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit procedure
in Air Bag Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8714
Disassembly
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable
separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8715
Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to Air
Bag Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure.
NOTE: OCS system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and
Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM), are calibrated to each other and are serviced as
an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS
system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system
service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as
an assembly.
All seats
1. Remove the seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front
Seats/Seat - Front.
2. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat
Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Front.
3. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors
from the seat track.
- Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
- Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
4. NOTE: Note wiring harness routing for installation.
Detach the seat harness electrical connector and wiring harness from the seat track.
5. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
6. If equipped, disconnect the heated seat system components.
- Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector.
- Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame.
- Disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector.
Seat with original equipment Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
7. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the
kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM
electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to
the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
Disconnect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
- Detach the wiring harness retainers and wiring harness from the cushion frame.
8. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Release all cushion cover retainers and remove the cushion cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8716
9. Remove the cushion foam pad.
10. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure off the bracket.
11. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
12. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame.
13. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion frame opening and remove
as an assembly with the bladder.
Seat with OCS system service kit
14. Disconnect the electrical connector and wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCSM electrical connector from the service part OCS
electrical connector.
2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion frame.
15. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips
or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Release all cushion cover retainers and remove the cushion cover.
16. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure off the bracket.
17. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion frame.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8717
18. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion frame opening.
Assembly
All seats
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
Seat with original equipment OCS system
2. NOTICE: Failure to route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through
the correct seat cushion support opening
can cause component failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be
careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Feed the OCS system components (pressure sensor and hose) through the opening in the seat
cushion frame.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion frame.
4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion frame bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket and install the rivets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8718
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the
Restraints Control Module (RCM).
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion frame.
8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the cushion cover and attach the retainers to the cushion frame.
9. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS),
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion assembly to the seat track and install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame
bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
10. Install the wiring harness.
1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
- Attach the wiring harness to the cushion frame.
Seat with OCS system service kit
11. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion frame and
support assembly for any foreign objects,
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion frame. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Failure to route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the
correct seat cushion support opening can cause component failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be
careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Route the OCS system service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the opening in the seat cushion frame.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8719
12. NOTE: When installing a service part OCS, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical
connector is not used.
NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS system components to the seat cushion frame.
1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion frame bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
3. Install the rivets.
13. Install the cushion cover and attach the retainers to the seat cushion frame.
14. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS),
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion assembly to the seat track and install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame
bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
15. NOTE: Do not tie strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
- Connect the seat wire harness OCS system electrical connector to the service part OCS system
electrical connector.
- Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion frame.
- Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8720
- Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safety aside.
All seats
16. If equipped, connect the heated seat components.
- Install the heated seat relay to the bracket on the cushion frame.
- Connect the heated seat relay electrical connector.
- Connect the cushion heater mat electrical connector and attach to the cushion frame.
17. Attach the seat electrical connector and wiring harness to the seat track.
18. Connect the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors.
- Route the wiring harness between the seat track and cushion frame.
- Attach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
19. Install the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat
Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Front.
20. Install the seat. Do not prove out the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front See:
Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front.
21. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
22. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
23. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in
Air Bag Systems.
24. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8721
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and OCSM using a scan tool.
Rear Seat Cushion
Seat Cushion - Rear
NOTE: RH (40 percent) shown, LH (60 percent) similar.
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the rear seat cushion.
- Position the seat cushion forward.
- Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8722
2. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Unzip the cushion cover zipper.
3. Invert and remove the cushion cover.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and cushion pivot upper link.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Remove the 2 cushion hinge floor bracket bolts and cushion support-to-floor bracket.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
6. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8727
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8728
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8729
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8730
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8731
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8732
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8733
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8734
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8735
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8736
Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8737
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8738
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8739
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8740
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8741
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8742
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8743
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8744
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8745
Seat Heater: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8746
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8747
Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
119-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8748
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8749
Seat Heater: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8750
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8751
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 8755
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 8756
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated
Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated
Seat Relay, Passenger > Page 8761
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated
Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated
Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8764
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8767
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8768
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8769
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8774
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8775
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8776
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch
Seat Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the recliner handle cover.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
3. Remove the outboard side shield.
- Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the knob and seat control switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Track
Seat Track: Service and Repair Seat Track
Seat Track
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the front seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See:
Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Front.
2. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors
from the seat track.
- Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
- Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, detach the wiring harness from the seat track.
- If driver seat, disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
- If equipped, disconnect the power seat motor electrical connector.
- Detach the seat harness electrical connector from the seat track. Note wiring harness routing for correct installation.
4. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Track > Page 8781
Seat Track: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Track > Page 8782
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Track > Page 8783
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Console Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8792
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 8795
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8796
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8797
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8798
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior Door Handle Front.
2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8802
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8803
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8804
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8805
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8806
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Exterior Mirror Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH sail panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8810
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8811
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8812
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8813
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8814
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8815
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch
Liftgate Release Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 8821
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8826
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8827
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8828
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch
Seat Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the recliner handle cover.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
3. Remove the outboard side shield.
- Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the knob and seat control switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8832
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8833
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8834
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8838
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded
Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN
PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded
Liftgate Opening > Page 8847
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN
PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 8853
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 09-5-8 >
Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
TSB 09-5-8
03/23/09
ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT
BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009
and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the
chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF
THE POWERTRAIN.
1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type
maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h).
2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for
noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting
noise.
3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 204-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire
Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1,
1015D)
090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 09-5-8 >
Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 8859
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 09-5-8 >
Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 8865
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8866
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8867
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Insulation
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation Insulation
Insulation
Insulation is used as a sound-deadener to reduce exterior road and powertrain noises from the
interior of the vehicle. Mastic insulators are also used as insulation. For information on the location
of the mastic insulators, refer to Sound Deadeners and Insulators. See: Sound Deadeners and
Insulators Insulation is installed:
- under the roof.
- above and below the instrument panel.
- at the cowl side panels.
- over the front and rear floor pans.
- inside the A-, B-, D-pillar sections.
- behind the rear quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Insulation > Page 8872
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation Sound Deadeners and Insulators
SOUND DEADENERS AND INSULATORS
WARNING: Always refer to Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) when handling chemicals and wear
protective equipment as directed. Examples may include but are not limited to respirators and
chemically resistant gloves. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
NOTICE:
- Mastic is made of a combustible material and should be removed prior to carrying out welding
procedures to the area. Heat zones from welding near the mastic can cause the mastic material to
burn.
- Corrosion protection must be restored to the area AFTER the mastic material is applied.
Corrosion protection products may be wax based and loss of adhesion may occur.
NOTE:
- To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and insulators
should be installed with the correct service replacement component.
- The following illustrations serve as a reference to indicate mastic patch (butyl pad) locations.
Additional insulators and sound deadeners are used beyond those indicated in the illustration.
Sound Deadeners and Insulators
Floor Pan Sound Deadeners
NOTE: To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and
insulators should be installed with the correct service replacement component. Sound deadeners in
this illustration all use base part number 99P30A3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Insulation > Page 8873
Floor Pan Sound Deadeners
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and
Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
Cowl Panel Grille
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms.
3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers.
4. Remove the cowl end caps.
5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8888
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8889
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec
> 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec
> 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8894
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8900
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8901
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window
Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8906
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 8909
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front
Door Glass Top Run - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front
Door See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair/Window Glass - Front Door.
2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts.
- To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Remove the front door glass top run.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8918
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8919
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8925
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8926
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator Rear Door.
2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel.
4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip.
6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward.
8. Remove the rear door glass top run.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear > Page 8929
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page
8934
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 8937
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake
Deactivator Switch
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch
The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A
normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is
not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is
removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used
for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be
disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not
changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed
Control Switch
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch
Speed Control Switch
Escape and Mariner shown, Hybrid similar
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed
Control Switch > Page 8945
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn.
3. Remove the speed control deactivator switch.
4. NOTE: When installing the speed control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to
the correct position. Do not pull up or push down
on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the speed control deactivator switch allows for
one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8950
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 8953
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake
Deactivator Switch
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch
The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A
normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is
not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is
removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used
for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be
disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not
changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch
Speed Control Switch
Escape and Mariner shown, Hybrid similar
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch > Page 8961
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn.
3. Remove the speed control deactivator switch.
4. NOTE: When installing the speed control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to
the correct position. Do not pull up or push down
on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the speed control deactivator switch allows for
one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: The Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) indicator is part of the upper instrument panel
center finish panel.
1. NOTE: The ignition must be in the OFF position before disconnecting the PAD indicator
electrical connector. Otherwise, a DTC will be set in the
Restraints Control Module (RCM) memory and must be cleared before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
Turn the ignition OFF and wait at least one minute.
2. NOTE: The passenger air bag module is not shown for clarity.
Open and lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the PAD indicator electrical
connector.
- Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector.
3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the instrument panel upper center finish panel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8970
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8971
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8972
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8973
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8974
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8975
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8976
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8977
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8978
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8979
Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8980
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8981
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8982
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8983
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8984
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8985
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8986
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8987
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8988
Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
44-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8989
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Compass: Description and Operation
Electronic Compass
The compass display is incorporated into the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) for vehicles
without navigation.
For vehicles with navigation, the compass display is incorporated into the Audio Control Module
(ACM). Refer to Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc.
Vehicles With Navigation
The compass signal originates from the Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna. No calibration
or zone adjustment is available, as the compass heading is based on the GPS signal. Refer to
Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc.
The vehicle heading is displayed as a 1 or 2 character display located in the ACM and indicates the
current direction of the vehicle (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW).
Vehicles Without Navigation
The compass signal originates from the compass module, which is integrated into the interior rear
view mirror. Refer to Mirrors.
The vehicle heading is displayed as a 1 or 2 character display located in the lower LH side of the
FDIM and indicates the current direction of the vehicle (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW). The
compass continuously re-calibrates due to changes in the magnetic field and remains accurate
during most driving conditions.
All Vehicles
The MODE button that allows the driver to operate the calibration and zone setting procedures is
located on the center bottom of the interior rear view mirror. The compass display is on with the key
in the ON or START positions. When the key is first turned to the ON or START position, there is a
momentary delay of approximately 6 seconds before the compass display illuminates. If the battery
saver has been activated and the key is turned to ON or START, the momentary delay before the
compass display illuminates is approximately 3 seconds. The compass display will turn off as soon
as the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position.
Compass Accuracy (without Navigation)
Driving near power lines, or driving in the area of large iron or steel structures can temporarily
change the compass heading. If the compass remains inaccurate after driving near such objects,
calibrate the compass. Refer to Compass Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the
northerly direction on maps. This variation is 4 degrees between the adjacent zones and becomes
noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting eliminates the error. Refer
to Compass Zone Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment.
Compass Accuracy (with Navigation)
Driving near power lines, or driving in the area of large iron or steel structures have no effect on the
compass heading.
Compass calibration and compass zone setting procedures are not required if the vehicle is
equipped with navigation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Compass: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Electronic Compass
Inspection And Verification
Electronic Compass
Inspection and Verification
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) prove-out confirms power and ground from
the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8995
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the FDIM and the
Instrument Cluster (IC).
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in
Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions See: Body and Frame/Body
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Chart
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8996
Compass: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
Electronic Compass
DTC Charts
B2097 / U2013
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8997
Compass: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Electronic Compass
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8998
Compass: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Compass Is Inoperative
Electronic Compass
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Compass Is Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio
System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
NOTE: This pinpoint test is for vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, refer to
Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc.
Normal Operation
The compass display (located in the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)) receives battery
voltage from the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) through circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground
for the FDIM is supplied through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The compass module provides vehicle
directional inputs to the Instrument Cluster (IC), which sends the compass information to the FDIM
over the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). The FDIM will display the compass
direction according to the information that has been provided by the compass module to the IC.
- DTC B2097 (Compass Module Failure) - sets when the IC attempts a self-test of the compass
module and its associated circuits and a failure results.
- DTC U2013 (Compass Module is Not Responding) - sets when the IC does not receive any
communications from the compass module.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Compass module
- FDIM (compass display)
- IC
PINPOINT TEST A: THE COMPASS IS INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK THE COMPASS DISPLAY
- Ignition ON.
- Check the compass display.
- Does the compass display illuminate?
Yes
If the compass display illuminates with only 2 bars, GO to A3.
If the compass display turns on, but it does not display all directions, or indicates CAL, Go To
Pinpoint Test b. See: Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate
No
GO to A2.
------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK THE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION
- Verify the vehicle is equipped with the compass feature.
- Is the vehicle equipped with the compass feature?
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8999
Yes
REFER to Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc to diagnose the FDIM display.
No
RETURN the vehicle to the customer and ADVISE them the vehicle is not equipped with a
compass display feature.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP41 (BU) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the interior rear view mirror C9012-1, circuit CBP41 (BU), harness
side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
VERIFY the SJB fuse 41 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror C9012-3, circuit GD182 (BK/GY),
harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A5 CHECK CIRCUIT VMC31 (YE/GN) FOR AN OPEN OR A
SHORT TO GROUND
- Disconnect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9000
- Disconnect: IC C220.
- Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror C9012-6, circuit VMC31 (YE/GN),
harness side and the IC C220-16, circuit VMC31 (YE/GN), harness side; and between the interior
rear view mirror C9012-6, circuit VMC31 (YE/GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and the IC, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and ground?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- A6 CHECK CIRCUIT VMC30 (BU/GY) FOR AN OPEN OR A
SHORT TO GROUND
- Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror C9012-7, circuit VMC30 (BU/GY),
harness side and the IC C220-17, circuit VMC30 (BU/GY), harness side; and between the interior
rear view mirror C9012-7, circuit VMC30 (BU/GY), harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and the IC, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and ground?
Yes
GO to A7.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test.
------------------------------------------------- A7 CHECK FOR DTC U2013
- Connect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Connect: IC C220.
- Connect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012.
- Ignition ON.
- Clear the DTCs.
- Ignition OFF.
- Ignition ON.
- Wait 10 seconds.
- Retrieve the IC DTCs.
- Is DTC U2013 present?
Yes
INSTALL a new interior rear view mirror. ADJUST the zone setting. REFER to Compass Zone
Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9001
Adjustment. CALIBRATE the compass. REFER to Compass Calibration See:
Adjustments/Compass Calibration. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to A8.
------------------------------------------------- A8 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION
- Disconnect the IC connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IC. RESET the parameters in both the IC and the PCM. REFER to Antitheft and
Alarm Systems. PROGRAM the PATS keys into the new IC. REFER to Antitheft and Alarm
Systems. CYCLE the ignition. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. CYCLE the ignition. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the
system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate
Electronic Compass
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate
NOTE: This pinpoint test is for vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, refer to
Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc.
Normal Operation
The compass display (located in the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)) receives battery
voltage from the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) through circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground
for the compass display is supplied through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The compass module (integral
to the interior rear view mirror) provides vehicle directional inputs to the Instrument Cluster (IC),
which sends the compass information to the FDIM over the Medium Speed Controller Area
Network (MS-CAN). The FDIM will display the compass direction according to the information that
has been provided by the compass module to the IC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Magnetized vehicle
- Compass zone setting
- Compass calibration
- Compass module
PINPOINT TEST B: THE COMPASS IS INACCURATE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- B1 DEMAGNETIZE THE VEHICLE
- Demagnetize the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Demagnetizing See: Adjustments/Vehicle
Demagnetizing.
- Does the compass operate correctly?
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9002
Yes
The compass is OK. The concern may have been caused by an incorrect zone setting, a
magnetized vehicle, or the compass was out of calibration.
No
GO to B2.
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE COMPASS ACCURACY
- Position the vehicle and observe the compass display as follows:
- Does the compass display as indicated?
Yes
The compass is OK. The concern may have been caused by an incorrect zone setting, a
magnetized vehicle, or the compass was out of calibration.
No
INSTALL a new compass module. SET the zone. REFER to Compass Zone Adjustment See:
Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment. CALIBRATE the compass. REFER to Compass
Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment
Compass: Adjustments Compass Zone Adjustment
Compass Zone Adjustment
1. Refer to the compass calibration zone map to select the correct compass zone setting for the
geographic location of the vehicle.
2. With the ignition in the ON position, press and hold the MODE button (for approximately 5
seconds) until the display shows the current zone
setting. Release the MODE button.
3. NOTE: After approximately 5 seconds, the compass display will exit the zone setting mode after
the button has been released.
Before the zone setting mode turns off (within 5 seconds), momentarily press and release the
MODE button to increase the zone increment by one. Set the zone display number to match the
vehicle geographical location on the compass calibration zone map.
4. Release the switch for 5 seconds to exit the zone setting mode.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 9005
Compass: Adjustments Vehicle Demagnetizing
Vehicle Demagnetizing
NOTICE: During demagnetizing, the demagnetizer coil pulls toward the vehicle. Place a cloth over
the vehicle roof to protect the vehicle surface if contact occurs. Make sure the cloth covers the front
third and the entire width of the roof.
NOTE: The demagnetizing process requires the use of a demagnetizing coil commonly used by
television repair technicians to demagnetize television tubes.
NOTE: To demagnetize, use a constant circular motion over the vehicle roof. Do not turn off the
demagnetizer while sweeping the vehicle roof to prevent remagnetizing ferrous materials contained
in the vehicle.
NOTE: During the demagnetizing process, make sure the phenolic surface of the tool (the side
opposite the handle) is closest to the vehicle surface.
1. Demagnetize the front third of the vehicle roof.
1. Turn on the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from the vehicle.
2. Holding the demagnetizer no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) from the vehicle roof and starting on the
passenger side, demagnetize the front third of
the vehicle roof closest to the windshield using a constant circular motion. Keep the circle radius
within 30 cm (12 in) while sweeping across the entire surface of the vehicle roof closest to the
windshield. Continue the circular motion 4 times.
3. After the fourth pass and without stopping, move the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from
the vehicle.
4. Turn the demagnetizer off.
2. Carry out the compass zone adjustment procedure. For additional information, refer to Compass
Zone Adjustment See: Compass Zone
Adjustment.
3. Carry out the compass calibration adjustment procedure. For additional information, refer to
Compass Calibration See: Compass Calibration.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 9006
Compass: Adjustments Compass Calibration
Compass Calibration
NOTE: This procedure is applicable only to vehicles not equipped with navigation.
1. NOTE: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away from large metallic objects
or structures. Switch off all non-essential
electrical accessories (heated rear window, heater fan, A/C, map lamps, and wipers) and make
sure all doors are closed.
Start the vehicle.
2. NOTE: It is not possible to exit the CAL mode unless the vehicle is driven in circles.
NOTE: While holding the MODE button down, the compass display will first enter the ZONE setting
mode (after 5 seconds) and then after another 5 seconds (10 seconds total), the compass display
will enter the CAL mode.
Press and hold (for approximately 10 seconds) the MODE button until CAL appears in the display,
then release the MODE button.
3. NOTE: If the CAL indicator does not turn off after the vehicle is driven in a circle at least 5 times,
repeat the procedure.
Drive the vehicle slowly at less than 5 km/h (3 mph) in a continuous circle until CAL disappears
from the display and the compass heading is shown.
4. If the CAL message does not turn off within 5 circles (and the procedure has been repeated at
least once), install a new compass module (integral
to the interior rear view mirror).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9012
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9013
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9014
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9015
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9016
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9017
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9018
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9019
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC) finish panel.
2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from
behind.
Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 9026
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9030
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Reset Procedure
Oil Life Reset
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180
days.
NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number
in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%.
3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%.
Oil Life Start Value
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Start Value
NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of
approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by
10% increments down to 10%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %.
3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence
over again beginning at 100%.
Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center
displays the newly desired percent.
4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure > Page 9033
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement
Message Center Switch
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel.
Hybrid vehicles
2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside.
All vehicles
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Check Fuel Cap Indicator
The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM
sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines there is a concern in the
EVAP system due to the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe not being sealed correctly.
This is detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank after a fueling event.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Engine Control Components
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is
located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the
engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a
check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 9041
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
Engine Control Components
Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check
valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting
concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low
tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 9044
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 9045
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 9046
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 9047
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9053
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9054
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9055
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9056
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9057
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9058
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9059
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 9060
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From
Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles
From Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board
diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets.
- The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol.
- The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately four seconds.
- The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if:
- an emission-related concern and DTC exists.
- the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL
controlled through the communication link).
- the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster
concern is present.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern.
- For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/No Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) Present Symptom Chart Index.
- If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist.
- If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low.
- The MIL flashes after a period of time with the ignition in the RUN position (engine not running) if
DTC P1000 is set.
CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON, or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Oil Life
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change ( approximately 7,500 miles (
12,000 km ) or 12 months ) perform the following:
1. Press and release the SETUP control to display "OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW".
2. Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds and release. Oil life is set to 100% and "OIL
LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed. 3. While "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed, if a lower oil life
is start value is desired , press and release the RESET control to reduce the start
value. Each press of the RESET control reduces the value by 10 percent.
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles ( 12,000 km ) or 12 months. For example,
setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life start value to 4,500 miles ( 7,200 km ) and 108
days.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9083
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9084
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing.
Remove the engine oil filter.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees.
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
- To install, tighten to 14 Nm (124 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Outside Temperature Display: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 >
Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Outside Temperature Display: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit
To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Outside Temperature Display: > 08-23-12 >
Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Outside Temperature Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles From
Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9104
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9105
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument
Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From
Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles
From Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Service and Repair
Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating
Preparation
1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R).
2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual
transaxle).
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
4. Close all the vehicle doors.
5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts.
Deactivating/Activating
NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently.
When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute).
3. NOTE: Steps 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns
off.
For seating position being disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3
times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
- After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds.
4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
- This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
- This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by
another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating
Preparation
1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R).
2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual
transaxle).
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
4. Close all the vehicle doors.
5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts.
Deactivating/Activating
NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently.
When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute).
3. NOTE: Steps 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns
off.
For seating position being disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3
times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
- After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds.
4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
- This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
- This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by
another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC) finish panel.
2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from
behind.
Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9133
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Engine Control Components
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is
located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the
engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a
check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 9138
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
Engine Control Components
Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check
valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting
concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low
tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page
9141
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page
9142
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page
9143
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page
9144
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9148
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9149
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 9155
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 9156
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp
Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp
Sensor > Page 9165
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp
Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp
Sensor > Page 9168
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9169
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Light Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9174
Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9175
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 9179
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 9180
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Reversing Lamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector.
2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9185
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9186
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9187
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9188
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9189
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9190
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9191
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9192
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9193
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9194
Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9195
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9196
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9197
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9198
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9199
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9200
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9201
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9202
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9203
Brake Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9204
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9205
Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
90-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9206
90-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Stoplamps
Principles Of Operation
Stoplamps
Principles of Operation
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) monitors the input from the stoplamp switch. When the brake pedal
is applied, voltage is routed to the SJB and the high mounted stoplamp. The SJB then supplies
voltage to the stoplamps.
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) is a type of transistor that when used with module software can be
used to monitor and control current flow on module outputs. The FET protection strategy is used to
prevent module damage in the event of excessive current flow.
The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, a headlamp
output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short
circuits) and are shut down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault
event is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at the fault event and a cumulative counter is
started.
When the demand for the output is no longer present, the module resets the FET circuit protection
to allow the circuit to function. The next time the driver requests a circuit to activate that has been
shut down by a previous short (FET protection) and the circuit remains shorted, the FET protection
shuts off the circuit again and the cumulative counter advances.
When the excessive circuit load occurs often enough, the module shuts down the output until a
repair procedure is carried out. Each FET protected circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit
tolerance based on the harmful effect of each circuit fault on the FET and the ability of the FET to
withstand it. A module lifetime level of fault events is established based upon the durability of the
FET. If the total tolerance level is determined to be 600 fault events, the 3 predefined levels would
be 200, 400 and 600 fault events.
When each tolerance level is reached, the continuous DTC that was stored on the first failure
cannot be cleared by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module does not allow this
code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal operation until a successful self-test proves that
the fault has been repaired. After the self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs
present), DTC B106E and the associated continuous DTC (the DTC related to the shorted circuit)
automatically clears and the circuit function returns.
When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC (associated with the short circuit)
sets along with DTC B106E. These DTCs can be
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9209
cleared using the module on-demand self-test, then the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool (if
the on-demand test shows the fault corrected). The module never resets the fault event counter to
zero and continues to advance the fault event counter as short circuit fault events occur.
If the number of short circuit fault events reach the third level, then DTCs B106F and B1342 set
along with the associated continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and the module must be
replaced.
The SJB FET protected output circuits for the stoplamp system are the LH rear stop/turn lamp and
the RH rear stop/turn lamp output circuits.
Inspection And Verification
Stoplamps
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
See: Testing and Inspection. For all other DTCs,
refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9210
Brake Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Stoplamps
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9211
Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test I: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Stoplamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test I: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn
Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The stoplamp switch is supplied voltage through circuit SBP02 (YE/RD) from the Smart Junction
Box (SJB). When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage back to the SJB
and the high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). The SJB provides voltage to the
rear lamps when it receives input from the stoplamp switch indicating that the brake pedal is
applied.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Stoplamp switch
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST I: ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- I1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C278.
- Measure the voltage between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side
and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to I2.
No
VERIFY the SJB fuse 2 (15A) is OK. If OK, GO to I3. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to
identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
------------------------------------------------- I2 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH
- Connect a fused jumper wire between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD),
harness side and the stoplamp switch C278-4, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9212
- Are the stoplamps illuminated?
Yes
INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to Stoplamp Switch See: Brake Light Switch/Service and
Repair. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- I3 CHECK CIRCUIT SBP02 (YE/RD) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Measure the resistance between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness
side and the SJB C2280d-13, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to I4.
No
REPAIR SBP02 (YE/RD) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- I4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test J: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9213
Stoplamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test J: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn
Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the Smart Junction Box
(SJB) and the high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). When the SJB detects the
brake pedal is applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps through circuits
CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. Ground for the LH and RH rear stoplamps is
provided through circuit GD149 (BK/GY). Ground for the high mounted stoplamp is provided
through circuit GD183 (BK/WH).
NOTE: SJB fuse 6 (20A) supplies voltage for both combination rear stop/turn lamps and both front
turn lamps.
B106E-B2047
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- High mounted stoplamp
- Bulb holder
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST J: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- J1 DETERMINE THE INOPERATIVE STOPLAMP
- Ignition OFF.
- Apply the brake pedal and observe the stoplamps.
- Are all the stoplamps inoperative?
Yes
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9214
Go To Pinpoint Test H. See: Headlamp/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Autolamps/Pinpoint
Test H: The Autolamps Are On Continuously
No
For the high mounted stoplamp, GO to J2.
If only one side (the LH or RH rear stoplamp) is inoperative, GO to J6.
If both sides (LH and RH rear stoplamps) are inoperative, VERIFY the SJB fuse 6 (20A) is OK. If
OK, GO to J4. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the
circuit short. After the repair:
If no DTCs are present, TEST the system for normal operation.
If DTC B106E is present, CLEAR the DTCs and REPEAT the self-test (required to enable the
stoplamp output driver if DTC B106E is present). TEST the system for normal operation.
If DTC B106F is present, INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J2 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HIGH MOUNTED
STOPLAMP
- Disconnect: High Mounted Stoplamp C475.
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the high mounted stoplamp
C475-1, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to J3.
No
REPAIR CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HIGH MOUNTED
STOPLAMP USING THE CONNECTOR GROUND
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the high mounted stoplamp
C475-1, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side and the high mounted stoplamp C475-2, circuit
GD183 (BK/WH), harness side.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
INSTALL a new high mounted stoplamp. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9215
REPAIR circuit GD183 (BK/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LH STOPLAMP
- Disconnect: LH Rear Lamp C4035.
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to J5.
------------------------------------------------- J5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SJB
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b.
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the SJB C2280b-40, circuit CCB08
(VT/WH), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to J11.
No
REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J6 USE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB
SELF-TEST
- Clear the DTCs and repeat the on-demand self-test.
- Is DTC B2045 or DTC B2047 present?
Yes
GO to J7.
No
GO to J10.
------------------------------------------------- J7 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE BULB HOLDER
- Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Lamp.
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19
(VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9216
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to J8.
No
GO to J9.
------------------------------------------------- J8 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE INOPERATIVE
STOPLAMP USING THE CONNECTOR GROUND
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and the LH rear lamp C4035-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness
side; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and the RH rear
lamp C4032-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
INSTALL a new bulb holder. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- J9 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS18 (GY/BN) OR CIRCUIT CLS19
(VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Measure the resistance between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side
and the SJB C2280d-25, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side; or between the RH rear lamp
C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and the SJB C2280d-26, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG),
harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to J12.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- J10 CHECK THE BULB HOLDER FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9217
- Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Lamp.
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Self-Test.
- Clear the DTCs and repeat the self-test (required to enable the turn lamp output driver if DTC
B106E is present).
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19
(VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
INSTALL a new bulb holder. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to J11.
------------------------------------------------- J11 CHECK THE SJB STOPLAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR
A SHORT TO GROUND
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Disconnect: LH and RH Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relays.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280d-25, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and
ground; or between the SJB C2280d-26, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to J12.
No
REPAIR circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) (LH rear stoplamp) or circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) (RH rear stoplamp)
for a short to ground. After the repair:
If no DTCs are present, TEST the system for normal operation.
If DTC B106E is present, CLEAR the DTCs and REPEAT the self-test (required to enable the turn
lamp output driver if DTC B106E is present). TEST the system for normal operation.
If DTC B106F is present, INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J12 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9218
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test K: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously
Stoplamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test K: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn
Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), the high mounted stoplamp, the PCM and the speed control actuator through circuit CCB08
(VT/WH). When the SJB detects the brake pedal is applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and
RH rear stoplamps through circuits CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. If equipped
with trailer tow, voltage is also supplied to the respective trailer tow stop/turn relay.
- DTC B1485 (Brake Pedal Input Short to Battery) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage from the stoplamp switch input circuit.
- DTC B2045 (Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage from the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
- DTC B2047 (Right Rear Stoplamp Circuit Open) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage from the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Stoplamp switch
- PCM
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST K: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
------------------------------------------------- K1 DETERMINE IF ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE
ILLUMINATED
- Ignition OFF.
- Observe the stoplamps with the brake pedal released.
- Are all of the stoplamps illuminated?
Yes
GO to K3.
No
GO to K2.
------------------------------------------------- K2 CHECK THE STOPLAMPS VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate?
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9219
Yes
If the LH rear lamp continues to illuminate, REPAIR circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) for a short to voltage.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
If the RH rear lamp continues to illuminate, REPAIR circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) for a short to voltage.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to K7.
------------------------------------------------- K3 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH
- Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C278.
- Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate?
Yes
GO to K4 .
No
INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to Stoplamp Switch See: Brake Light Switch/Service and
Repair. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- K4 CHECK THE PCM
- Disconnect: PCM C175b.
- Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate?
Yes
GO to K5.
No
GO to K6.
------------------------------------------------- K5 CHECK CIRCUIT CCB08 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b.
Does the high mounted stoplamp continue to illuminate?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) for a short to voltage. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to K7.
------------------------------------------------- K6 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9220
INSTALL a new PCM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- K7 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC
C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC
C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 9234
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 9235
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 9236
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 9237
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
Stoplamp Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch
otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur.
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp
switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Cargo Lamp: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 9251
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Daytime Running Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9256
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9257
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9258
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9259
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9260
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9261
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9262
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9263
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9264
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9265
Daytime Running Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9266
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9267
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9268
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9269
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9270
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9271
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9272
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9273
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9274
Daytime Running Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
97-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9275
97-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Daytime Running Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Principles Of Operation
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Principles of Operation
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
NOTE: When installing a new SJB, it must be configured for this feature, if originally equipped.
Refer to Information Bus.
The SJB controls the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) by using various inputs to determine whether
or not the DRL should be illuminated. These inputs include:
- Ignition switch position
- Headlamp switch position
- Headlamps on or off
- Transmission gear selection (automatic transmission)
- Parking brake applied or released (manual transmission)
When the DRL is active, the SJB provides a pulse-width modulated voltage to the low beam
headlamps. This illuminates the headlamps at a reduced intensity.
The SJB can be configured to turn the DRL on for this vehicle. Refer to Information Bus for
additional information on this programmable parameter.
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Inspection And Verification
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
3. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
4. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9278
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
6. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
7. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM, the Smart
Junction Box (SJB), and the Instrument Cluster (IC).
8. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Computers and Control Systems
Information or Body Control Systems.
9. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9279
Daytime Running Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9280
Daytime Running Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AC: The Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Are Inoperative
Normal Operation
When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the headlamps are not on (from the autolamp
system or manual control from the headlamp switch), the transaxle is not in PARK (P) (automatic
transaxle) or the parking brake is not applied (manual transaxle), the Smart Junction Box (SJB)
provides a pulse-width modulated voltage to the low beam headlamps. This illuminates the
headlamps at a reduced intensity.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Exterior lighting system input/output
- Ignition switch input
- Transaxle gear input (automatic transaxle)
- Parking brake switch input (manual transaxle)
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST AC: THE DRL ARE INOPERATIVE
------------------------------------------------- AC1 VERIFY THE DRL OPERATION
- Ignition ON.
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- If equipped with an automatic transaxle, place the gear selector lever in any gear other than
PARK (P).
- If equipped with a manual transaxle, release the parking brake.
Do the DRL illuminate?
Yes
The system is operating correctly. INFORM the customer of the conditions required for the DRL to
operate correctly.
No
GO to AC2.
------------------------------------------------- AC2 CHECK FOR RECORDED SJB DTCs
- Review the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
- Are any DTCs present?
Yes
REFER to Body Control Systems.
No
GO to AC3.
------------------------------------------------- AC3 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE HEADLAMPS
- Place the headlamp switch in each of its positions (including autolamps if equipped) and observe
the headlamps.
- Do the headlamps and autolamps (if equipped) operate correctly?
Yes
GO to AC4.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9281
No
REFER to Headlamps See: Headlamp/Testing and Inspection or Autolamps See:
Headlamp/Testing and Inspection.
------------------------------------------------- AC4 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH INPUT
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger.
- Monitor the SJB ignition switch PID (IGN_A_ECU, IGN_O_ECU, IGN_R_ECU) while cycling the
ignition switch through all positions (states).
- Does the PID agree with the ignition switch positions?
Yes
For vehicles with an automatic transaxle, GO to AC5.
For vehicles with a manual transaxle, GO to AC6.
No
REFER to Steering Column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Testing and
Inspection
------------------------------------------------- AC5 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE GEAR INPUT
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger.
- Monitor the PCM transmission gear status PID (TR) while placing the gear selector lever through
all its positions.
- Does the PID agree with the gear selection?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Refer to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection
------------------------------------------------- AC6 CHECK THE BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR
OPERATION
- Ignition ON.
- Apply and release the parking brake while observing the brake warning indicator.
- Does the brake warning indicator operate correctly?
Yes
GO to AC7
No
REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators.
------------------------------------------------- AC7 CHECK THE SJB FOR DRL CONFIGURATION
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Module Programming.
- Check the SJB configuration and make sure the DRL feature is enabled.
- Is the SJB DRL configuration enabled?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9282
ENABLE the DRL configuration. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Page 9283
Daytime Running Lamp: Adjustments
Autolamps Time Delay Adjustment
NOTE: The time delay can be programmed through the instrument cluster message center using
the message center buttons (if equipped) or using the following steps.
NOTE: Steps 2 through 5 must be carried out within a 10-second period.
1. Start with the ignition switch off and the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position.
2. Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position.
4. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
5. Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position. The exterior lamps turn on at this
point.
6. Wait the desired amount of time and place the headlamp switch in the OFF position (maximum
of 3 minutes). The exterior lamps turn off and the
autolamp time delay is now set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC) finish panel.
2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from
behind.
Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair
Dome Lamp: Service and Repair
Interior Lamp
Removal and Installation
1. Open the overhead console storage door to access the screws.
- Remove the 2 screws.
2. Pull the overhead console down and remove the console from the headliner retainer.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9293
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Fog Lamp Bulb
Mariner
Escape
Removal and Installation
WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is
scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass
envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTICE: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb
is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector.
Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 9298
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Escape
2. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
- Position the fender splash shield aside.
4. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connector.
5. Squeeze both tabs on the fog lamp bulb simultaneously and remove it from the fog lamp.
Mariner
6. Rotate the fog lamp bulb approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
All vehicles
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Hazard Warning Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9303
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9304
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9305
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9306
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9307
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9308
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9309
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9310
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9311
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9312
Hazard Warning Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9313
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9314
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9315
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9316
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9317
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9318
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9319
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9320
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9321
Hazard Warning Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
90-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9322
90-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Headlamp Bulb
Removal and Installation
WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is
scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass
envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTICE: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new
bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and
reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
1. Disconnect the headlamp bulb electrical connector.
2. Rotate the headlamp bulb one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove the headlamp bulb.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 9330
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Multifunction Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 9333
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 9334
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 9335
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 9336
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9340
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9341
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9342
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9343
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
Headlamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel.
2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page
9351
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page
9352
Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the center console finish panel.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9357
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9358
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9359
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9360
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9361
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9362
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9363
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9364
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9365
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9366
License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9367
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9368
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9369
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9370
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9371
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9372
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9373
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9374
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9375
License Plate Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9376
License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9377
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Marker Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9382
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9383
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9384
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9385
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9386
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9387
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9388
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9389
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9390
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9391
Marker Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9392
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9393
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9394
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9395
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9396
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9397
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9398
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9399
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9400
Marker Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9401
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9402
Marker Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9403
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9404
Marker Lamp: Service and Repair
Side Lamp/Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
Side Lamp (Escape)
Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9405
Removal and Installation
Front turn signal lamp
1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector.
2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and
remove from the headlamp assembly.
- Separate the bulb from the bulb holder.
Side lamp
3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
6. Remove the screw and position the fender splash shield aside.
7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove
from the headlamp assembly.
8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder.
Front turn signal lamp or side lamp
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Parking Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9410
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9411
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9412
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9413
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9414
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9415
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9416
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9417
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9418
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9419
Parking Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9420
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9421
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9422
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9423
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9424
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9425
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9426
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9427
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9428
Parking Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9429
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9430
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9431
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9432
Parking Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9433
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Parking Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Principles Of Operation
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Principles of Operation
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
The SJB monitors the headlamp switch position by sending voltage reference signals on multiple
circuits to the headlamp switch. There is one circuit for each headlamp switch position. At any
given time, one of the signal circuits is routed to ground.
If the SJB does not detect any of the inputs to the headlamp switch is active (routed to ground) for
5 seconds, the SJB turns on the exterior lights and keeps them on for 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned off (or 10 minutes from the time the SJB does not detect any headlamp switch
input if the ignition switch was already off). Additionally, if the SJB detects multiple circuits short to
ground, the SJB implements a planned strategy depending on the multiple inputs received. Based
on the multiple inputs received, the autolamps, the headlamps and/or parking lamps are turned on.
If either of these situations occur, the SJB cannot be ruled immediately as being at fault. This is
normal behavior of the SJB design as it has detected a fault with the inputs from the headlamp
switch.
When the SJB receives an input from the headlamp switch indicating a request for the parking
lamps, the SJB energizes the parking lamp relay, which supplies voltage to the exterior lamps.
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Inspection And Verification
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9436
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
See: Testing and Inspection. For all other DTCs,
refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9437
Parking Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9438
Parking Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Q: The Parking, Rear Or License Plate Lamps Are On Continuously
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Q: The Parking, Rear Or License Plate Lamps Are On Continuously
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 92 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Parking, Rear
and License Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) monitors the parking lamp request input from the headlamp switch
through circuit CLS05 (BU/GY). The SJB provides a ground for the parking lamp relay coil (integral
to the SJB) when a request for the parking lamps is received. When the parking lamp relay is
energized, voltage is routed through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) to the rear and front parking lamps.
- DTC B1578 (Lamp Park Input Circuit Short to Ground) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the
SJB detects a short to ground from the parking lamps on input circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Headlamp switch
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST Q: THE PARKING, REAR OR LICENSE PLATE LAMPS ARE ON
CONTINUOUSLY
------------------------------------------------- Q1 USE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB
SELF-TEST
- Check the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
- Was DTC B1578 recorded?
Yes
GO to Q2.
No
GO to Q4.
------------------------------------------------- Q2 CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Headlamp Switch C205.
- Carry out the headlamp switch component test.
- Is the headlamp switch OK?
Yes
GO to Q3.
No
INSTALL a new headlamp switch. REFER to Headlamp Switch See: Headlamp/Headlamp
Switch/Service and Repair. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- Q3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS05 (BU/GY) FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9439
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b.
- Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch C205-5, circuit CLS05 (BU/GY), harness
side and ground.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to Q6.
No
REPAIR circuit CLS05 (BU/GY) for a short to ground. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- Q4 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE (TO REAR LAMPS)
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Ignition ON.
- Do the rear parking lamps continue to illuminate?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to Q5.
------------------------------------------------- Q5 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE (TO FRONT LAMPS)
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: SJB C2280e.
- Ignition ON.
- Do the front parking lamps continue to illuminate?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to Q6.
------------------------------------------------- Q6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9440
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test P: One Or More Parking, Rear Or License Plate Lamps Are Inoperative
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test P: One Or More Parking, Rear or License Plate Lamps Are Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 92 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Parking, Rear
and License Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
When the headlamp switch is placed in the PARKING LAMPS ON position, the Smart Junction Box
(SJB) energizes the parking lamp relay (integrated into the SJB). When the parking lamp relay is
energized, voltage is routed through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) to the rear and front parking lamps.
Ground is provided to the rear parking and license plate lamps through circuit GD149 (BK/GY).
Ground is provided to the front parking and side marker lamps through circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Bulb holder
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST P: ONE OR MORE PARKING, REAR OR LICENSE PLATE LAMPS ARE
INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- P1 DETERMINE IF ALL THE PARKING LAMPS ARE
INOPERATIVE
- Ignition OFF.
- Place the headlamp switch to the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Are all the parking lamps inoperative?
Yes
PLACE the headlamp switch in the OFF position. VERIFY the SJB fuse 22 (15A) is OK. If OK, GO
to P6. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
No
If all the front parking lamps are inoperative, GO to P2.
If all the rear parking and license plate lamps are inoperative, GO to P3.
For all others, GO to P4.
------------------------------------------------- P2 CHECK THE SJB FRONT PARKING LAMPS OUTPUT
CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN (REAR LAMPS)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9441
- Disconnect: SJB C2280e.
- Connect a fused jumper wire between the SJB C2280e-1, circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side
and the SJB C2280e-6, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), harness side.
- Ignition ON.
- Do the front parking lamps illuminate?
Yes
REMOVE the jumper wire. GO to P6.
No
REMOVE the jumper wire. REPAIR circuit CLS32 (BN/YE) for an open. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- P3 CHECK THE SJB REAR PARKING LAMPS OUTPUT
CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN (REAR LAMPS)
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Connect a fused jumper wire between the positive battery terminal and the SJB C2280d-20,
circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), harness side
Do the rear parking lamps illuminate?
Yes
REMOVE the jumper wire. GO to P6.
No
REMOVE the jumper wire. REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- P4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE INOPERATIVE
PARKING LAMP
- Disconnect: Inoperative Lamp.
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the inoperative lamp, harness side and ground as follows:
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9442
Yes
For the license plate lamps, REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK) for an open. TEST the system for normal
operation.
For all others, GO to P5.
No
REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) or (RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- P5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE INOPERATIVE
PARKING LAMP USING THE CONNECTOR GROUND
- Measure the voltage between the inoperative lamp pins, harness side as follows:
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
INSTALL a new bulb holder. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR the ground circuit in question for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- P6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: -
corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9447
Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9448
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9452
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9453
Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the center console finish panel.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9458
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9459
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9462
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9463
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9464
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9465
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9466
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 9472
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 9475
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9476
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Light Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9480
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9481
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Reversing Lamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector.
2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 >
ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 >
Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC
C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9495
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9496
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9497
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
Engine Control Components
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9498
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
Stoplamp Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch
otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur.
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp
switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Console Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9505
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9509
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 9512
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9513
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9514
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9515
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9519
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9520
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9521
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9522
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
Headlamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel.
2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9529
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9533
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9534
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9535
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9540
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9541
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9542
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9543
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9544
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9545
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9546
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9547
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9548
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9549
Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9550
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9551
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9552
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9553
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9554
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9555
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9556
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9557
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9558
Tail Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9559
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9560
Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9561
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9566
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9567
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9568
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9569
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9570
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9571
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9572
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9573
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9574
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9575
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9576
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9577
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9578
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9579
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9580
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9581
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9582
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9583
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9584
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9585
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Trailer Lamps
Principles of Operation
Trailer Lamps
Principles of Operation
The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn
relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. They are energized to correspond with the exterior
lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the
trailer lamps.
Inspection and Verification
Trailer Lamps
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the
appropriate pinpoint test.
3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9588
Trailer Lamps: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Trailer Lamps
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9589
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Y: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Y: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The trailer tow connector receives ground through circuits RAT08 (WH) and GD149 (BK/GY) for all
of the trailer lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Y: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- Y1 CHECK CIRCUITS RAT08 (WH) AND GD149 (BK/GY)
FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow C439-4, circuit RAT08 (WH), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
REPAIR circuit RAT08 (WH) or circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal
operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Z: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Z: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow
stop/turn relays. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9590
grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the
vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE).
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the
vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow stop/turn relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Z: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER STOP/TURN
LAMP
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- Z1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT06 (YE) OR CIRCUIT CAT09 (GN)
FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
GO to Z2.
------------------------------------------------- Z2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY
- Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relay.
- Substitute a know good relay.
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9591
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow stop/turn relay. TEST the system for
normal operation.
No
REMOVE the known good relay. GO to Z3.
------------------------------------------------- Z3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS18 (GY/BN) OR CIRCUIT CLS19
(VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay
pin 2, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn
relay pin 2, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to Z4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- Z4 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB14 (BN/RD) FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB
face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to Z5.
No
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9592
VERIFY the BJB fuse 14 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB14 (BN/RD) for an open. TEST
the system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short.
------------------------------------------------- Z5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB
face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB
face side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH trailer stop/turn) or circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH trailer stop/turn) for an
open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the
vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through
circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer
tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow parking lamp relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- AA1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT11 (BN) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9593
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
GO to AA2.
------------------------------------------------- AA2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay.
- Substitute a known good relay.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow parking lamp relay. TEST the system
for normal operation.
No
REMOVE the known good relay. GO to AA3.
------------------------------------------------- AA3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 2, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to AA4.
No
REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9594
------------------------------------------------- AA4 CHECK THE SBB08 (VT/RD) FOR AN OPEN
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB
face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to AA5.
No
VERIFY the BJB fuse 8 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) for an open. TEST the
system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short.
------------------------------------------------- AA5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT11 (BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Turn/Stoplamp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9595
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the
vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE).
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the
vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN).
Trailer Tow Parking
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the
vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage
is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
------------------------------------------------- AB1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE TRAILER TOW
CONNECTOR
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows:
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
GO to AB2.
No
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
------------------------------------------------- AB2 CHECK THE SUSPECT RELAY
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Relay.
- Carry out the component test for the suspect trailer tow relay.
- Is the trailer tow relay OK?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH turn), circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH turn), or circuit CAT11 (BN) (parking
lamps) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9596
INSTALL a new turn trailer tow relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow
Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow
Right Turn Relay > Page 9601
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow
Right Turn Relay > Page 9602
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9605
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9606
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9607
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9608
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 9609
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair
Side Lamp/Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
Side Lamp (Escape)
Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 9615
Removal and Installation
Front turn signal lamp
1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector.
2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and
remove from the headlamp assembly.
- Separate the bulb from the bulb holder.
Side lamp
3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
6. Remove the screw and position the fender splash shield aside.
7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove
from the headlamp assembly.
8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder.
Front turn signal lamp or side lamp
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9619
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9620
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9621
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp,
Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp,
Left > Page 9626
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9632
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9633
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 9638
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 9639
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9645
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9646
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9647
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 9650
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 9651
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Window Control Switch > Page 9652
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9655
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9656
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9657
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9658
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9659
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9660
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
Window Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar.
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 9673
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 9674
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 9675
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Window Control Switch > Page 9678
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Window Control Switch > Page 9679
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Window Control Switch > Page 9680
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9683
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9684
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9685
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9686
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9687
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 9688
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
Window Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar.
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9699
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9700
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page
9705
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 9711
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 9712
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window
Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
> Page 9717
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Front Door
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Front Door > Page 9720
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front
Door Glass Top Run - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front
Door See: Service and Repair/Window Glass Front Door.
2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts.
- To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Remove the front door glass top run.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
Window Glass - Liftgate
Removal and Installation
1. Open the liftgate window glass.
2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers.
3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders.
1. Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2. Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair
Window Glass - Rear Quarter
Removal
LH rear quarter window glass
1. If equipped, remove the auxiliary climate control housing.
2. If equipped, remove the bolt and the auxiliary climate control upper housing bracket.
All rear quarter window glass
3. Remove the headliner.
4. Before cutting the urethane adhesive, remove dirt and other foreign material from the pinch weld
area.
- Use a clean shop towel or oil-free, compressed air.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 9727
5. Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool when
cutting.
6. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp
edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: To avoid rust formation, use extreme care not to scratch the paint or primer or otherwise
damage the pinch weld during glass removal.
NOTE: Locating pins need to be cut through in order to remove the rear quarter window glass. The
new quarter window glass will be equipped with new locating pins.
Using the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the quarter window
glass starting at the top center and working toward the bottom corners and remove the rear quarter
window glass.
7. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
Installation
All rear quarter window glass
1. Dry fit the rear quarter window glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease
pencil.
2. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural
component of the vehicle. Corrosion left
unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. Repair all minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch
weld following manufacturer's instructions. Use the same brand pinch weld primer, glass primer
and urethane adhesive.
Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm to 2 mm (0.04 in to 0.08 in)
base of original equipment urethane adhesive on the pinchweld.
3. Using a clean shop towel, brush or oil-free compressed air, clean the pinch weld area around the
existing urethane adhesive. Remove any foreign
material or water that may have entered during glass removal.
4. If installing the original rear quarter window glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive.
5. Clean the inside of the rear quarter window glass with glass cleaner.
6. NOTICE: If installing a LH rear quarter window on the Escape Hybrid, do not apply urethane
glass prep to the polycarbonate vent of
the window assembly.
NOTE: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the urethane adhesive and glass
primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane adhesive and glass primer. For additional
information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure.
If installing a new rear window glass, apply glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions.
Allow at least 6 minutes to dry.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 9728
7. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
8. NOTE: The rear quarter glass must be positioned within 10 minutes of applying the urethane
adhesive.
NOTE: Use caution when applying urethane adhesive. Apply to the outside edges of locating pins
on the glass surface.
NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane
adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead.
Apply a bead of urethane adhesive starting at the bottom and work around to the sides of the rear
quarter window glass to specification, making sure there are no gaps in the bead.
9. WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane adhesive seal has cured. Follow urethane
adhesive manufacturer's curing directions.
Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane adhesive seal will adversely affect glass retention.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTICE: Before positioning the rear quarter window glass, open vehicle windows to prevent the air
pressure of closing doors from affecting the urethane adhesive bond.
Install the rear quarter window glass, aligning it to the marks previously made.
10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or
water leaks.
After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where
needed.
11. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the quarter window
glass.
12. Install the headliner.
LH quarter window glass
13. If equipped, install the auxiliary climate control upper housing bracket and the bolt.
14. If equipped, install the auxiliary climate control housing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9738
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9739
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 9745
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 9746
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Window Regulator/Rear Door
Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator - Rear Door.
2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel.
4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip.
6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward.
8. Remove the rear door glass top run.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear > Page 9749
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 9755
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Front Door
Window Regulator - Front Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket.
3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly.
4. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as
re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive
is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield
to the inner door.
Position the watershield aside.
5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front
door window glass screws.
7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
8. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
9. Support the front door window glass in the full UP position with tape.
10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector.
11. Remove the front door window regulator and motor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 9756
12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 9761
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Rear Door
Window Regulator - Rear Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket.
3. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as
re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive
is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield
to the inner door.
Position the watershield aside.
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
5. Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear
door window glass screws.
6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
8. Support the rear door window glass in the full UP position with tape.
9. Disconnect the rear door window motor electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 9762
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield
Glass
Windshield: Service and Repair Windshield Glass
Windshield Glass
Removal
1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield
Glass > Page 9767
3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the interior rear view mirror.
5. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
6. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material.
7. Remove the cowl panel grille.
8. Before cutting the urethane adhesive, remove dirt and other foreign material from the windshield
pinch weld area.
- Use a clean shop towel or oil-free, compressed air.
9. Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool when
cutting.
10. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp
edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: To avoid rust formation, use extreme care not to scratch the paint or primer or otherwise
damage the pinch weld during glass removal.
NOTE: Insert the blade into the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool so that the flat side is against the
glass. This will leave the entire urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld and allow a dry fit of the
replacement windshield glass.
Insert the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool at the upper center of the windshield glass and work
toward the bottom corners.
11. Using The Pumper, distance the windshield glass from the body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield
Glass > Page 9768
12. Using the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove
the windshield glass.
13. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
Installation
1. Dry-fit the new windshield glass on the existing urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld.
- Position the windshield glass on the pinch weld.
- Center the windshield glass in the opening.
- Adjust the windshield glass stop blocks (if equipped) as needed for best fit.
- Make alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil (preferably at the windshield glass
stop blocks if equipped) on the windshield glass and the body.
2. After the dry-fit alignment, remove the glass from the windshield opening and place on a stable
work surface with the interior side of the glass
facing up.
3. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural
component of the vehicle. Corrosion left
unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. Repair all minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch
weld following manufacturer's instructions. Use the same brand pinch weld, glass primer and
urethane adhesive.
Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm to 2 mm (0.04 in to 0.08 in)
base of original equipment urethane adhesive on the pinchweld.
4. Using a clean shop towel, brush or oil-free, compressed air, clean the pinch weld area around
the existing urethane adhesive. Remove any foreign
material or water that may have entered during windshield removal.
5. If reinstalling the same windshield glass, remove the windshield moulding and remaining
urethane adhesive from the glass leaving a thin layer to
bond with the new urethane adhesive bead.
6. Clean the inside of the new windshield glass with glass cleaner.
7. NOTE: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the urethane adhesive and
glass primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane
adhesive and glass primer. For additional information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure.
If installing a new windshield glass, apply glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions.
Allow at least 6 minutes to dry.
8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield
Glass > Page 9769
9. NOTE: The windshield glass must be positioned within 10 minutes of applying the urethane
adhesive.
NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane
adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead.
Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld,
starting and ending at the bottom of the windshield near the center, make sure there are no gaps in
the bead.
10. WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane adhesive seal has cured. Follow urethane
adhesive manufacturer's curing directions.
Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane adhesive seal will adversely affect glass retention.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTICE: Before positioning the windshield glass, open vehicle windows to prevent the air pressure
of closing doors from affecting the urethane adhesive bond.
Install the windshield glass, aligning it to the marks previously made.
11. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air and
water leaks.
After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where
needed.
12. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the windshield
glass.
13. Install the cowl panel grille.
14. Reposition the front portion of the headliner.
15. Install the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connectors.
16. Install the interior rear view mirror.
17. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
18. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
19. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield
Glass > Page 9770
Windshield: Service and Repair Glass Reseal - Windshield
Glass Reseal - Windshield
1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
5. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material.
6. Remove the cowl panel grille.
7. Clean the interior and exterior of the windshield glass surface with glass cleaner.
8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
9. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane
adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead.
NOTE: Make sure there are no gaps in the urethane adhesive bead.
Apply urethane adhesive over the top of the existing urethane adhesive.
- Apply the urethane adhesive to the top and sides of the windshield from the interior of the vehicle.
- Apply the urethane adhesive to the bottom of the windshield from the exterior of the vehicle.
10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or
water leaks.
After the urethane adhesive has cured, check the windshield seal for air or water leaks through the
urethane adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary.
11. Install the cowl panel grille.
12. Position the front portion of the headliner.
13. Install the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connectors.
14. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield
Glass > Page 9771
- If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
15. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
16. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid
Onto Hood
Check Valve: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer
Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto
Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9790
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9791
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9792
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9793
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9794
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Wiper Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9798
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9799
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9800
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9801
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9802
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair
Washer Hose Repair
NOTE: This procedure may be carried out on rubber hoses only. If a plastic washer hose is leaking,
a new washer hose must be installed.
1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose.
2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose.
3. Install a windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose.
4. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required.
Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) ID black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose and
clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9809
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Washer Pump
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump
Washer Pump
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield.
3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector.
4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical
advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if
available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the washer
pump hose.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
washer pump removal.
Disconnect the washer pump hoses. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees.
- The hose should slide easily out of the connection.
- To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place.
5. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and
may prevent it from correctly locking in
place when reassembled, resulting in a leak.
Rotate the lock ring back to the original location.
6. NOTICE: When installing a new washer pump, be careful not to damage the rubber grommet.
Remove the washer pump.
7. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure
to follow these instructions may
result in premature pump failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 9814
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir
Washer Pump and Reservoir
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield.
3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector.
4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical
advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if
available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the washer
pump hose.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
Disconnect the washer pump hoses. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees.
- The hose should slide easily out of the connection.
- To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place.
5. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and
may prevent it from correctly locking in
place when reassembled, resulting in a leak.
Rotate the lock ring back to the original location.
6. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure
to follow these instructions may
result in premature pump failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair
Washer Pump and Reservoir
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield.
3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector.
4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical
advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if
available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the washer
pump hose.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
Disconnect the washer pump hoses. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees.
- The hose should slide easily out of the connection.
- To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place.
5. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and
may prevent it from correctly locking in
place when reassembled, resulting in a leak.
Rotate the lock ring back to the original location.
6. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure
to follow these instructions may
result in premature pump failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 >
Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer
Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 >
Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak
Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9834
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9835
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9836
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9837
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9838
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper
Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers.
2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position.
3. NOTE: Make sure there is no mechanical binding in the linkage preventing the wiper arms from
returning to the fully parked position.
If not within specification, remove the nuts and the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition them
to the correct locations.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper
Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield > Page 9843
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper.
2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position.
3. If not within specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition it to the correct
location. For additional information, refer to
Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear See: Service and Repair/Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Remove the 2 wiper pivot arm nuts.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm
Adjustment - Windshield See: Adjustments/Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 9846
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft
Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the cowl panel grille.
2. Remove the 3 windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly bolts and the windshield
wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor electrical connector.
4. Remove the wiper motor assembly. For additional information, refer to Wiper Motor - Windshield
See: Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Wiper
Motor - Windshield.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 9847
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear
Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Open the wiper pivot arm cover.
2. Remove the pivot arm nut.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3. Remove the wiper pivot arm.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm
Adjustment - Rear See: Adjustments/Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair
Wiper Blade: Service and Repair
Wiper Blade - Rear
Removal
NOTICE: Lifting the wiper arm beyond its maximum angle may result in damage to the wiper arm
or the wiper arm heel.
NOTICE: Allowing the wiper arm to contact the glass may result in damage to the glass.
1. Hold the wiper arm with one hand close to the wiper arm and wiper blade pivot joint and lift the
arm to its maximum angle.
2. Hold the primary structure of the wiper blade with the other hand close to the wiper arm and
wiper blade pivot joint.
3. Tightly grip and push on the wiper arm and wiper blade joint from beneath and separate the
blade from the arm.
Installation
1. Attach the new wiper blade on the wiper arm and press it into place until a snap is heard.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield
Wiper Motor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield
Wiper Motor > Page 9855
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield
Wiper Motor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield
Wiper Motor > Page 9858
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Motor - Windshield
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Windshield
Wiper Motor - Windshield
Removal and Installation
NOTE: A new wiper motor assembly comes with the linkage arm installed.
1. Remove the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. For additional information, refer to
Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft See:
Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft.
2. NOTICE: Do not remove the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper motor assembly. If the arm
is removed, the wiper arms may not
park in the correct location.
Separate the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
- Use a suitable tool at the location shown to separate the wiper linkage arm from the wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
3. Remove the 3 bolts and the wiper motor.
- To install, tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Motor - Windshield > Page 9861
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Rear Window
Wiper Motor - Rear Window
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear pivot arm. For additional information, refer to Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear See:
Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Pivot Arm Rear.
2. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover.
3. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut.
- To install, manually finger-tighten the nut, then tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Open the liftgate window.
5. Remove the rear wiper motor cover trim panel.
6. Remove the rear wiper motor.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 rear window wiper motor nuts.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
3. Remove the rear window wiper motor.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations
Wiper Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9865
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9866
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9867
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9868